(GE) Magne Blast Swgr
: (Ge)-Magne-Blast Swgr (GE)-Magne-Blast_Swgr QP_ing manuals pub
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 271
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
GE-MB-SW.XLS
G.E. - MAGNE-BLAST SWITCHGEAR
iSii
V.
%'
.V
TAB#
CAT SECTION
DESCRIPTION
CONTENTS
s
Instructions
Type MI-6 &MI-9 Metal-Clad Switchgear
GEH-1802W
Instructions
Type M26 & M36 Metal-Clad Switchgear
GEH-1802V
Instructions & Recommended Pts
GEH-1802R
Instructions & Renewal Parts
for Magne-Blast Air Circuit Breaker
Type AM-4.16&AM-13.8
GEH-1802K
Instructions
GEH-1802H
Instructions & Renewal Parts
GEF-4351B
Renewal Parts
Types M-26 & M-36 Metal-Clad Switchgear
GEI-88775A
Instructions
MC-4.76 Switchgear
0156C9403
Instructions
Replacement of TUF-LOC Bushings
GEI-25390C
3A
Below for GEH-1802R M26 & M36 Swgr
GEH-230Z
Instructions
Instrument Transformers
GEH-908M
Instructions
Control & Instrument Switches
198 45SSK10-006
Installation
Type AB-30 Ammeters & Voltmeters
GEH-1788D
Instructions
Time Overcurrent Relays
GEH-2901
Instructions
Lightning Arresters
GEI-10951L
Instructions
Current Limiting Fuse Units
GEI-88760A
Instructions
Capacitor Trip Device
Page 1
•'WW
.!T'W
'I
:l
:is.-
f
Pi
L—-'
•^V;«
y
,'
'• ...is
,
•','
,.,.,!':' . :
.
\
CONTENTS
..
GENER.AL INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
• • •
it •
•
�
•
Page
3 ·.
.
.
....
.
.
.
..... •.•.•
.. .. ........
........................'. ,•
.. •·...........................
. . .. .........
....... .. ............
... . ...·•......
... .·-..· ....
·-
•
•
•,
3
•
8
. SHIPPING-UNPACKING-STORAGE
· Shipping and Unpackin g
: Storage · ••••••••••
...
�
8
9
'
�
.,;
·- .--·,,:i\;,�l>,ij:d
.i''.. :..,,,./,
'., .. ·::. ·:·�.; :...-.�...1�t1 ':�,�t
e • e e e t e • e. • • e I'. e � e t • t t, e I 41 e I .. e .e 9, .• e ·� t, .. •· ..• .• •.
·Location
"'
1
• ••••, • •• •• 9
Preparation of Floor·Anchoring
•••• • • ••
·9
Putting Units in Place • • • •••••• •••
••••
••• 10
.Installation of Bus Ba.rs • • • • •
••• • • •
Connection of Primary Cables ••••
•••
••••• •
10
••
• • • 16
Installation of Potheads ••• •• •••
19
Connection or Control Cables
•• • ••
Installation of; Ground Bus
•••••••••••.• ·.19
Installation of Ex.l1aust Pipi.'1.g ••••••••••••••••••••,•••, .•••_ 20 .
Installation of Circuit Breaker Removable Element •••••• ,• .• • • .. • 20:
Installation of Inspection Rack and Testing Cabinet •.• ·� �-� • • !�- -' ·:;::- .•:: •· ·;• '.2_3 \:- - Addition of Units.to Existing Equipment .•••••••• -•.••• • • . . .. . _ . . . _ . 2_ 4 . .,
;-, .
.
,.
•,·,··-
�' .·-..
'
.
T�G & INSP$CTION. • .• • •
OPERATION
'
• •'.• ...... • • .• • • -. • • .• ·• ......, ·, • • e· •· •· • • i'
• '. ."... r'•.
,'t
....
24·'. . ·. .
FUSE DISCONNECTING DEVICE
·.,/·'
. . '$i��,r
- . ' {{
Ji,.!t
..
; !�,f
-
'·
..
�
·,·
- . � n-.w
#a -nl Bk<- -Yi
'
\.
:�\�·.:
,.......
"
/
�.·;
-:
>
·.·
·.�·;:�-·�
;>,::R/)'tifrift.
�
or'•-· tM ..,w
�
-� <.'.·�-/�:/\�:>
::"' ... :. . ''!'.;,.f..
:
GROUNDING AND TEST DEVICES -•••
d< -
.� . Pt/\
.···•· .. ":�.:.�.·._').�·�:
. .· .::,·· : . .
31
�
·.•.
'(':'ff'\:
:: . J: ...•
'
'DUMMY REMOVABLE ELEMENT .••••
,'.'
�
�.; '
2'1
................. ................ ·-.
......................
........... ·-......
............. ......•....... 31
.............. •..•• 32
•
'.
'
KEY INTERLOCKS & INTERLOCKING
<�'
r·�, ..
-�.
-
SPECIAL FEATURES
:.: -�·.r -�:
:.: . :,." ':' .:: ' ·r:·,',:::'.•{
: 1, \"1
. ... . . ·-............•.. . .-.·.......... . ....... 29
-•.•· ••••• - •• ··-•• '• .••••• ·:-�-: ••••.• ! .•••• .......
.-. ,/'/ �· ·� ·� -�·
-
MAINTENANCE
·. 'i·Y,':fr/'ijt1:,
. ,:: 'x'.' --··t _.,_ '.,ti.,, ...
• ••••••.•. 9 .· ;�
. •• • •. •
.••• , .••••..• • , •
:·:; -
'.'·;
·-··
.. �
........ .
·,: .. �· .;·.: :·, ·_.
..,
)'.}]\�',��\
-j I'i/1 4Oi's 0
t E\-t'
type M1:6 and TYPE MI-9
00
FOR
OIL AND AIR CIRCUr: BREAKERS
•.J
general
ClRC.nT
TTPB
iNTeaRU{>r«
cAPAcirr •
BaSAIURS
The switchgear consists of one or more units
which are mounted side by side and corjiected me
chanically and electrically together to forma com
plete switching equipment. Typical equiuments are
shown in figures 1-2-3-4.
KVA
PK-l'l.
Ol
"AM-J -30
Maqm
cmcin'
^
5000 :
000*1200
M.COO
9000
000*1100
metal compartments.
X'^The^
equipment
is available
in theratings iWed
in
the following
tables.
For outdoorinstallation
the
^me basic equipment Is built into a weatherproof
;so
250,000
500,000
15030
100,boo
5000
uojm
5000
fiOOO
Ukst
AMrlS'SftO
'
VOLTAOS
90OQ
15000
150,000
£S0
max. akn.
100.000
200.000
cu
mast
JOC
housing as in Fig. 4 and 9.
rvTtjmupT.
KVA
IJO
coo
t
1 7
Mmt. CLAD KomMl,
wa
350
.
COSRSNT • Fioass
u.ooo
CApAcrrv
FK-iS'>-100
MAX.8Xn.
VOLTACS
U.COO
OUAt
FK-KJ
•nfps wd
The circuit breakers are easily removable to
provide maximum accessibUity for maintenai cewith mmimum interruption of service. The switchgear is designed to provide maximum safety to the
operator. All equipment is enclosed in grounded
'-'i.f'--'
nrpi; km tJCnr pott urrAt. ci.*nKemsmjij
'• aadprctect
^ M^al Clad
Switchgear
is equipmentto
control
various
types of electrical
apparatus
and
power circuits.
. •
information
• •
"
looioo ,
ooo.
cuiuiairr
ncoaa
690*1200
000*1200
a
600*1200*2000
•
000*1200*2000
<2 . v'
<'
T'
SStl{9M«,
i
1200*2000
t'
t t>- J
-
UOStSM '
y
DESCRIPTfON
Each unit is madeup of a secondary enclosure
and a primary enclosure, as shown in Figures 5-6.
tr^fer truck, the Magne-Blast Breakers are
Secondary Enclngirra
The circuit breaker unit cannot be lowered from •
its connected position nor raised from its discon-'
_ The secondary enclosure is usually located at
the front or breaker withdrawal side ofthe unit. It
exists of a compartment with a hinged door upon
wiucn axemounted the necessary Instruments, con
trol Md prrtective devices. The terminal blocks,
^ide theMclosure onthe side sheets and a trough
is provided atthe top tocarry wiringbetweenunits.
fuse olTCks, and sonae control devices are mounted
When a^genumber of devices are required a sec-'
WJd enclosureis sometimes providedat the rear.
Primary Enclosnre
':<0:
The primly enclosure containsthe highvoltage
equipnient mid Connections arranged in compartmems to cmifine the 'effects
#" ts-.'"'-
i'
FIG. 2
.. TYPE Hl-6 METAL CUO SWITCKfiEAR (98' ENCLOSURES)
. (26' tflDE)
'-.ift. .'< :y-
'
''V.''
MetaJ Clad SwUclj^ap GEl-asSftOC
1
ff
t;
I'fsrtaiw 1-:
h:i'..'>r,
l.: >'!; • i;.
g^'^S}?.'.-g
.••'•'••t'-yi-mf-W '
'
.V :..•/». . . .
•
,:s.-
'
V:A:;'
-.sUi V>dS
Fie. 3
TVPE MI-6 metal CLAD SWITCHGEAR (32(82* EKC.)
EKC.
(38* WIDE)
. - i.
• -••
f'
• . jg,'-- • ."-•-i-»«~Ti. •• ; .>"-
a;v
v'g^'V-; .:-.-r..;i '
Vv '
.JJ"'*'' '1 '.
y:..--"-'Ui\i
-
i
. .<';
•
iK •"
• V l\
• ••• •>:^\.,..-. •
. "• . •. ^-. -'• ,'>V«?;. .•^:-.V,
•
• rt'. iVi.
JHITSUBSTATIOK
'>5
••,•••
,.
•-f-'-.i.L.ii'.i,; .,,.i.,
'•;
.1 • ' C ¥ - ' ^ • . ' W " 5 . » « 2 ' .
,
:gfl|gpgili§gi;-
GE1-2&380C Metal Clad Switchgear
CROSS
CROSS TROUGH
TROUGH FOR
FOS
SSCONOftRY BUSES ft
MAIN BUSES
INTERCONNECTIONS I
m-UT;:r
1 •:
^
PRlM&fJT
DISC.
C.T.
SINGLE CCNOUCTOH
POTHEAOS-
DEVICE i
"n
-• .
•-'1
; \
1 A •
^
jF/i
4 pf—:..J
-j
y' .cr-
ELEVATING
jjJj
MECHANISM
k
'
'
U»"lriS%lBSpA
K.pfcW'ftrT-'p: i
(4=smu
MECHANICAL
TRIP
AND
-
interlock
LIFTING
BRACKET
lb--. ,. „—g
Oi "?•••• ' i'. -• j'
I-
2a
•• I ••
J--1 INTKMEOIATB
PLOOR guide RAILS
BARRIER
SHtfipiNO CHANNEL
FIfl. 5
•'
'/I.
TYPE
A.-'
METAL CLAO SWlTCrlQEAR (SIDE VJEWj
•Pk'
iV- r''.
•-.
Ji,'
iy, ' i
I: • "•
Ky: W^ l_ .r^Pli
"
pA ^ ,
if::'-'
Ji%«. '
Lb •. f
V'
'• '.-• '.Sa "•'.
%''L -i
y- i 1^'^
fe
,
V'S tL.::/:- ;
FIG. 6
TYPE MI-8 METAL CUD SWITCHGEAR (SIDE VIEW)
^
:
,./T^62C2995)
.^X'jvStf
--y
T» W.**« WViU-x^
^»' At««w
'VV'''_S-
'(
r_9lin^
^v-Qlec.vr.'i.c-.ilei
>,
IB
Wc.
Wc-.U.-ij
ES3»rtC
m
C-i^fa
»:»•- •.•• -•
»'/; 18
fAI'fr!-A(«
«THOO OF LIFnNG
LIFTING MEMK^? CHANNELS
OR EQUIVALENT TO BE
SUPPLIED BY PURCHASER
y^N2I£j^y
ASHiepING MCMBEftS TORtK'A N aCOlMPMrNT UNTIl fnUlPMFNl is
3
<
ConduiCiXr
Y
*
Secondery
6re«ker "erntv*!
Side
_
Truck. Guide p
Sradi__E-'U!srCl.L
une
t
BOLTED TO fOUNOATiON-ThEN RlMUVEOF-AU. FLOOR 5TCELT0 BE FURNISHED
BV PURCHASER
FirdsKed Floor Line
ChAnriele, Should be set level with eachwhcr
•••lUlc.? .-.-Y -->
.
and Should be level overtheir full length.
—
ftECOMMtNOtO M&THOO
ShirnA
FlniiKed Floor tine
.,. Rough floor ihickneos ShdremfbrciriQ depends
-bedssignedih accordance with recommended practice.
,,;. on,loadtrw and other norm&i Factors, and should
Si'^i^R.ough hocr
ALTERNATE. ME.THOD
*^orE»liJj>.1mp.«"« '•«. JDirt
fl«>rSi*«L 6«.£-«i>
With Finiohjd n«>fir
Ai>4.Tha5.,Bc3in ^
LU«i
FI6. 7
INDOOR METAL QUO SWITCHGEAR INSTALLATiOH DETAILS
• -.•••A....'|'.,.
'.. ·: � ',\'r' -.,
i :-i;r Jar
(.{:�-=��521�CC 1-!��cl Cl:..ti S·, .d.tc ·
s:-ilPPING - UNPACKING - STORAGE
(.:'i?C'J.; .. 3;..-s:-�;� ..:!· El1:v:ltL,;:; !,1L·cb�nisf!!
I
Shippin_g_and 'Q.npacki..rur.
'I 11 e elevann; mechanisr,.1 for e!eva.ti?g or low. . .
�.J..
. •·: . \ · erµag the remo'1ablc cl•;mer.t to or ..rorn its connecEvery ca.s� �r crate.leaving the factory is plain··>?>:·\\{\�
tcd positior. su�ports the rem�':'able element in ei>
. .� . ther
. ly marked at convenient places with case_!!ymber,. ·· ·.··'· · .
the operatin g or test positions. This mechan·, ,
·.r.
r
.
.!'.!.9.!!isi!_ion number,customer's or� front o !'ill1...,._ .
.
. : .· ism consists of heavy-cluty steel jack screws on
to SUPP.Ort the elevating car
an,nvfie:1 Ior size anaother reasons1t is necess,arY
.: · \:· · ·.:: .!,;,;�
.
1. ><: :\�:which are carri�d nu�s
· · to dividH the equipment for shipment, with t�e� .. · ;J.\f;:c :
'' · ·:·.":{'.·:�::ringe. The carr1age1S so designed that the remov
A��;
··: .·:<. :;'_able element can be readily inserted or withdrawn
number of the portion of equipment enclosed m � .·,
. :: after the carriage has been lowered to the discon
.
,
shipping
case.
.
.:. :.:�.."�i'.JS!'.:f'
.··
· · nected pos1tlon without necessitatingthe removal of
.. �·,/:<,� ;.r:})t/;.
c,hipment
•: .any bolts, nuts or screws. The .mechanism causes.
the
of
�.: :f.{.
Tho contents of each packago
.
·. ·: ... � . :· the brea.kor to trip 11a soon as the ralamg or lower·
, , .... , ,:',
for
is
Ust
.....
are listEd in the Packing Details. Thi.$
..
11:ration
b_egins.and
bolds
the
tripping
mecha:·:
intf
' · · ·:/· ·
c�es(
.
the
op
of
·
one
in
pacl,{ed
shipment,
\'lith
the
warded
. · · ·;. : �-:(.·
.
·.;.,._.:·:::, tsrn:bl·. this posiUon·until·the .break.er reaches ei- · .
an
c.
number
its
and
marked
is
especially
The case
-:\f': '((.
·r the connected.or test positions.
:I ·.•:·..,(1<·i.:··:.;-.
) ;' •\•,: ,,·/ the
..· also be obtained from the Memorandum of Shipment� . . · &;:;�'. :;.
: '. ·-.· '.
·. _ ,. ·
When unpacking to avoid the loss·of sniall part&, the. ; .·;.: ·: ·:/;·
::·:. :'(<::' · :.Guide·.r.u1sare built into.the elevating mechacontents of ea.ch case should be carefully checked :.:,.· ,i/;:";'" c:.
. .; . . · isin frame to guide the transfer truck and (or) reagainst the Packing Details befor� discarding the ·:',: \)t{)'.
:'.':�., .
moval breaker element into correct position before
material. Notify the nearest General Elec�. ·':i _1::,:p[/'<
packing
: the breaker is raised into the operating position by
tric company representative at once.ii anyshortage· \:· I:t;i�\;·
mearts of the . elevating mechanism.
··. :· ·-'.· .··: ;. · ·of material 1s discover�d.
: .
The elevating mechanism i s operated by a hand
;. · · crank. · On eqµipments using the large breakers (36"
All e l e in e n t s before leaving the factory are·
· \}\::·
wide) the mechanism is motor operated to increase
carefully inspected and packed byworkm�n experi· '
. the speed of .operation. ·
. enced in the proper handling and packing:of electri�.: /. :,,...;.
cal equipment. Upon receipt of anyapparatus an un• . \..:. ;:::p;:.//!
. ·,;. , , Primary Disconnecting Oev1ce (Fig. 34)
,: ,. mediate inspection should be.made for any darn�:J:"::··�_;{!;::, �\'·:·:
.
·
·
_
.,,::} , ·:; : . ' · , The primary disconnecting devices utilize. sil•
·. _ sustained while enroute. If injury is evident
or an··,··,,}s-:·;')',:':<,
. -::
/).· · \\ .ver to silver contacts toinsure againstreduction of
a ,claim for. ,:::":\/f;t('!:
visible.
is
handling
rough
of
indication
.
·
: 'i{C:.. •. 'Cutr,ent car-rying capacity due to oxidation of the condamage should be filed at once With thetransporta..;:. ,£:·'.t::)\f{>
. , .-tact' ·surfaces. These contacts are
. . tion company and the General Electric.Company no�. . ·:: ·;-,,· ···\;-.° · ·
of the high pres·
f
· ·
sure line contact tube and socke design, the tube be- · · .tified promptly. Information·as to damaged. pail&;: : · · .::.:/ ·: S::.
ing backed up by. heavy garter springs to insure con: · part number, case number requisition number, etc., , : ··., /t,'!'lf.:·(�.:i
: tact pressure.
· .·
should accompany.the claim.
:
,. · ..,;· .\
1.:.
.
·
,::Ji.U{;..:.9omi2a�fil
Set screws are placed in all door latches (F.J.g.·:� :,:;:'.·:.,· .·::\ ·'.
· ·.
8) to prevent doors fromaccidentallyopeningdw·mg"'' ,· ·
The main buses are enclosed in a metal com
shipment and installation. These should be remove� · ·..
.· partment with removable front and top covers to
and discarded when the •equipment iS per�,'' · .-.
.
provide accessibility. The covers have louvers for
·,
.. located.
•
ventilating the compartment.
•
·;
: ; ,
. ' '
1'he bus is supponed by an insulating material
.
.
__,,__ SET SCREW ·.
• . . . ..
, ,t,,�,),
whieh is practically impervious to moisture,· and a
·
excellent diel�ric.
-r,·
·,'
<. :.,_ . ._>=". . ·
>>:
\'�}\?
1: •
1
':>�i .' .,_ :: .
: _·:;,:.\·\\l.,:
y,·
·:>
�:: ;1·-:t·/
\.''..:-·:::
'
}:;f:t;;
..
The bus insulation is molded on the bars ex. : . ·-Cept at the joints where the insulation is completed· ·
·., by means o! compound filled boxes.
, · ·current· Transformer and Cable Compartment
. .
The current transformers are m oun t e d in a
·compartment isolated fr o m ·t h e other equipment•.
. .- . . · . Pro�sion is made in this compartment for connec- .
: .,,: {:.., '. ,tmg the purchaser's. primary cable by means of pct·
. heads r lampt
.
'
·.'.'"'',,;
•
'
} } / ·: : o' c · ; • '.' ype .1 terminals
:·.{ :· '.'- ·.: • _
,
.
•• ,
,'
.· : ; :., .. Pot�ial T�..w-.me.!"� CoJnP.�1!1�1)! •
Potential transformers are located in a com·
·" • .> ·partment above. the current transformers or in a
.separate unit adjacent to the breaker units.
r�{.. '. . .
The transformers are :nounted on a movable
support equipped with primary :1,,c'. secondary dls
connecti.'1:; devices. When the potential transform
ers r\re cilsccv-mected they.are at a safe striking dis·
ta.nceJrom alllive parts o!the switchgear. In addi •
. ·��::?& .tion a grounding_ device is provided which contacts..
· � the fuses when t:ie potential transformers are dis·
connected,effectively discharging the transformers.
. :
1
/in this position the transformer fuses may be safely
removed and replaced.
·
8·
. .•. . ·• , t ::-. : ifJf5 v:: · , ., . ·. · ;.}:}�tfK;�
•
, ,
.-.1j•....-,..J1�·· . 'J',:i:,,·:·�· ·,,-;, •'•,Y. ·. ··,';•':
. .f'.\:•{�i·
n .__..
1:•'.1;;�·
��..,..:':"/·},� (";l· l�l-· t�·\'-�: .�J{!· · . ;··,· ·,::• '�.•;\.,. : • ,,,,.
.,.:
•,A
, :�·�:�1;
: .
, �,,;�
,•,1,J.t 'I;. '.rt��
'.\· ;·.i��f/{{:2;?\;; :.:'}. \.'.\? ?\frttr-i,
_(?/�i· . ·::':?�
-1',,J)� ��
..,,...:.. (,<,·. ·.:.:, ..'.'·?'.,';,, :·< .. · :: �- .· ·, :J,;:: ::.;•-..!: ,:· · �:··
. '.:i yr. . ·. : >\':': <';":tf. ·• · . c'.{t;u:. �_ .�-_'·:'..�,_:·•.�,_'.•·.' : _
.
· ·, · •
•
'•
, ,:. ,' ···�
... -,.•·
•• �4
1
}
· :: ···r-'··'
· ....... ,:'. · ·� ·· '-�
•
.,
i,;.
4 ·� � ·�· .
..
\i .•.
· '�,··, ·· ·.
,.. ;/'. .18
!·a1·:,�
· '., ..
,. i.,{·1 \itt
;&
;..o
). ... ·..,
. . ;:,,- . ·. : . \;,i. ' t.�{, -�;}:t
�·�
·a
i
. FIG.
.
.
OOOR, LATCH LOCK I mt SeaElf
.
. :;�.
,
•
.. :
I� :.,_.:-� • •
Metal Clad Switchgear
"HannUnT trndoor SaiUDinant)
GEI-25S90C
a:idon iomc equipments to draw out potential trans-
fornie;-a.
Bti'ore vmcrating, ilu: eqmpaier.£ may be moved
by
crane with slings under the skids. li crane
Preparation of Floor
facilities axe not available rollers under the skids
Anchoring (Indoor
Equipment)
may be used.
After tmcrating, the equipment should be han
dled as shown in Fig. 7. The longitudinal channels
tie me group of units together to prevent distortion
of the structure during shipment and handling, and
vent
structi
impact stress;,cht^^
therefore should not be removed until the units are
permanentlybolted to the station floor. The lateral
or lifting channels are shipped separately and must
be bolted to the longitudinal channels before at
tempting to lift a group of units. The door niust be
hold open by the door stops in those units where the
lifting channels are assembled. If crane facilities
are not available, jacks may be applied under the
lifting channels to raise or lower^ and rollers used
to move the equipment.
Handling (Outdoor EcuiomentV
Methods of handling outdoor equipment are
shown in Fig. 9. After the equipment is in place,
the lifting plates should be removed and reassem
bled, "turned in", so that passageway at the ends of
( the equipment will not be obstructed.
•Storage
Suitable means must be provided by tho lnir" '
chaser for anchoring the equipment to the floor*;:
is essential that the floor be level to avoiadhstdr- ^
tion of the switchgear strticture, and the equlpment;-;K^
be completely aligned prior to final anchoru^. tile" ^
recommendedfloor coimtiructlon isshown to Blgure,',i;-'(i'J5.
7. The floor channels niust be level and stralght:;c?A^V-^^^^^^^
with respect to each other. Steel shims should o© ' -'
used for final leveling of the switchgear if necesr •; v '
sary. Care should be taken to provide a smooth,
(
hard and level floor under and in front of the units "-v ^
•
to facilitate installation and removal of thebreaker^
The rear, or swivel wheels of the breaker and ths transfer truck will roll on the floor rather than the ,
unit giiide rails. If the floor is not level and fliish
with th<5 floor channels, it will be difficult tp handle
the breaker because it will not be levelwith
to the stationary element.
length of time, the following precautions should be :
The anchor bolts must be located aecordUng-te
the floor plan drawing furnished for the partioilar
taken to prev^ corrosion:-
requisition.
1. Uncrate the equipment.
^ Anothermethod ofanchoringoftenused
ing. A tack weld Is substituted for an aachpir bolt
If it isnecessary to store the equipment for any
• a-
2. Cover Important parts such as jack screws,
gears and chain of lifting mechanism, linkage
and movingmachlne finished parts with a heavy
oil or grease.
3. Store in a clean, dry place with a moderate tern- ;
perature ai^ cover with a suitable canvas to pre
vent deposit of dirt or other foreign substances
upon movable parts and electrlcalcontact sur
faces.
Provision should be made in the floor for
ing and elemen^ry diagrams and a summary of the
equipm^.
\y:'
shown on the floor plan drawing furnished for the i
particular requisition. If-deSfred,
be installed before the switchgear. Con^iiitjiiT^ttqn-•
Should begiven toconduits which might bereaoired .
for futxire connections.
Equipment^
• _
•
The recommended aisle, space required at the
front and at the rear of the equipment is shown on
the floor plan drawing fimnished for the particular
r^uisltion. Tte space at the front must be suffi- •
cient to permit the insertion and withdrawal of the
circuit brealcers, and their transfer to other units.
The space at the rear must be sufficient for in
stallation of cables, for inspection and maintenance
fOofdoor •
———
•
Recommendations for the foundations for out
dooreqviipment aregiven in Figure 9. Primaryand
secondary conduits should be installed in accord
ance with the requisition drawings, before. thQe^ \
their pha.«:e relationship with the switchgear con
nections. This is necessary to insure that the con
nections are made so that motors will rotate in the"
.A'. '
proper direction, and that the phase rotatioh ls the;; v ./
^
;.
same when typmg two different sources
:;:together.-. ,
,There are two common methods of
mary.cable connections:
"x-aaiigpri.
(a) Potheads, see Fig. 12, are used when It Is de/
sired to hermetically seal the end of the cable
to make a moisture proof connection between
the cable and the switchgear copper. A pothead
u:/-:
mso prevents seeping ofoil flrom the end of Oil
impregnated varnish cambric or paperinsulated
cable.
.
(b) Clamp typeterminalsandwiping sleeve or cable
clamp.
In all cases carefully follow the cable manu^
facturar's recommendations for in^taUation of the
type of cable being used,as weU as thainateu^iotis^' '
contained'herein. -
A
' .
^ .10
y_.
...
^
. ...-^
:>-s^(TT-628a837);
.:-:FI6v9, / ,v--,
OUTDOOR METAL CLAD SKITCH6EAR IHSTALLATIOH DETAILS
.:r.-V V •- •''••••-,>-;i-.rtz
'
apply DUX5EAL Ar?GU«D 'BO'A JOiMTA"
To MAKE LEhK P/?OOF
0:'
While pilunc w th comrouno.
INSULATION
NliuXJEflL To JffP ffet^OVSP.
BOX
BUS BAR
^VERDCAl. RIStR
BUS BAR
iNSuurio^
rK'
INSULAriOW
ff-n mn,
PLATE
bUSBA
SECTION "NX*
BUS BAR^
CORD BINDER
VERTICAL
CONNECTING
RISER
-YARNtSHEP.
CAMBRIC
COTTON
TAPE
FILLER BETWEEN
BUS BARS
"T? SPLICE
tS
PLATE.
plate
5-7
r~^
y-"* p'ii Ryp<
1"
•' I
!r
) '
•
Hf
3. S
'•••
BUS BAr
pLAN VrESV.'BB"
SECTION AA
2 VERTICAL RISERS
END CONNECTION
F16.
10
METHOD OF MAKIH6 BUS BAR CONNECTIOHS
•12
\
ti-
*v
•
;• •
•
>L--
: ;."5
•\ >-
'a f
-f«.v
•="«- i.-
-5^
K-i-i*?. 3•»'•=%
^r ^
Vij,
>•"'; 'cX'i'^:cV^r.'•>•!]
-•' \f-:U)-v;.i'' /V.li
.||||:||| te|y fiir lllU^KETS^' 1
^GASKETS:
t'-, •
•-"&•
GROUMO . L E A D S . : ; ' •
"Lgrouwd
GECONOARY;GOi4NECT10NSv-V;-;i;-^;-- ',:T| "
•>. SKWA'i*l>«o«,iri •,.2^
'«
••'.•
•-
:--r -
FI6. II "
UHIT SUSSTATiOH TRAKSlTIOM COMPARTISMT
V*-
wV*''
' ;•:
^t--'
. ^
'''' '^'V,' "^ **''
l-'Sl
h
G.
12
ETAL CUD SWITCHGEAR
Metal Clad Swttchgear
GEI-253B0C
"WTiRsr--,
•J-
..•;^.ja-^-ii"' >
.
fv.'J5aLZj&£Z.!5 ^'>
1
Wf'i'/fti.R'-
:^•"VjT.'sy •; rps
•*••
r TrTT"*w I
< > j,.. •
•-•: :i!. K.;
--.- . / '-yi:
' ••; .;•) .wu-,
« r
; i •'
-i-- --iv' i'.;:.
.' •
1- ,» •;
-.
I •r*'T^/
; ^ir
, • ' IC-
Uv;;>:J,;?^^'-v:3
f .•
jtW-g—• v.'.V'••
'M
iv'*; ♦
M,
'j
•. :f!•'?'••-• "-
i
m^Mh
, • yni ^'i'
'• . • '{' ••••.
--' ---, ---'••.'.;;
./''*•• 1
^.. t
*.4^1?^
-^.•rrrrT'f;^^
r.'-i •.•'.:-r'f%-
i
:., - - -•••iO'm.
FiG. IS
FIG« HI
S\
•es.-j>v-4
>-rv(?.. •»v
•-8Fi.-»irB»i •»--.'S'>!fe>w
I'lH
|UtJi,.i»>».-'T-. .,
y :•••.,
^
.: ..KiWv" . Aij
. n.m r
.
»*.
•
[•> /I i f •:'
't'^ .'
fe '-.i.-y . •^' • •••'^M-.-:'
';vq-
V
'I '''
-L^ i^- ir:--y^-o:v-W.''-yi:
' - *.
•
. •
•
I
V
.
t'
,
FiG. IS
CP
r
Pi
Fi6. 16
»
s
v>^
••<•••;
GEr-.25390C Metal Clad Swltcbgear
:• i;.'-' v''"
Insti..-)3tM)n cf Pof-heada
Potheacia are mounted on an adapter plate ex
tending across the width of the metal clad unii as
shora ia fig. 13. The adapter plate is split in two
parts to facilitate the installation of the pothesdis.
-
*
% :
'Wa'
18
(d) Remove the lead sheath from the cable to the
pointmarked in operation "b', as shown in Flgr •
ures isandlG. Proceed as follows: First, mase
a cut aroundthe cable halfttvoughthesheath at'
the reference point. Second, split the sheath-
f '
lengthwise between the cut and the cable and.
holding the cutting tool at an angle to the cable'
radius to avoid damaging the Insulatiai. Third,
reniovethesheathbycatchingthe split edge with
plicTS and pulling directly away from the cable
axi;>.
Clean and tin the outside of the lead sheath for
about 3 inches and bell out the end of the lead
sheath.
(e) Renove the belt andinterphase Insulation down
towithinl 1/2 inchesoftbeleadsheathasshown FIG. 17
0)) Trainthe cable in front ofthe pothead allowing
it to extend about twoiaches above the top of the
porcelain bushings. When training the cable
handle with care and avoid sharp bending which
might damage the Lnsulation. Mark a point ont he
lead sheath c: the cable about 1-1/2 Iziches above
the bottom of the wiping sleeve.
(c) Remove the pothead from the unit, and slip the
wiping sleeve and its gasket over the cable as
shown In Figure 14,
h-. l'»
In Figure 17. Thelastfewlayersshouldbe tmm
off to avoid damaging the individual conductor ' •'
insulation. Toreiriorceandprotectthecc^uc-. :
tor insulation, wrap two layers of half lapped variilshedcambrictapeoverthe factory Insua- tion.
,(f) Place pothead body over cable and then fan out ^
the conductors, into approximately thefinal po
sition, as shown in Figure 18. The middle con
duct or should bebcwed slightly for final adfuirtment of length. Avoid sharp bends and damage
to tlie insulation, particularly at the crotch.
For system voltage above 7500 volts it is recom
mended that stress relief cones be built up when
Metid Clad Switchg^r GEX-25300C
sir.iiJe conciuctcr or
cii.-ciu.t.ur •i.'-deldcd
cable is liHOd,...Construct stroia rcliui cones
I." icccrdance with therecomincr.diLtions oi the
cable nunufacturer. On lower voltage cables,
belling out the end of the lead sheath, ordinarily
m
provides sufficient stress relief.
(h) Bolt pothead body to metal clad adapter plate.
Shaoe conductors into finalpositlonthen cut off
• : each conductor, distance "JC',Fig. 12, above the
pothead body,
(i) Remove?'oflnsulationfromtheendofeach con
ductor andassemble pothead terminals as shown
, in Figures 12 and 21. Potheads are furnished
. ;.with standard rou,id cable solderless lugs If
sector cables are used the terminals should be
•••,;,
;
>' V
' .•' • ' 1^'' '.•
•?l
changed to the solder tyoe.
•>•..•;
,
iir.::. r
-TV
i.l'-
-r-rv
Aii'^ fir.,;
''^
Fifl. 20
.V. £B5
-"v;i. . Ky,
•l-H
in
•
"""Pi'xa
•
I,
1:V^
' iHfrtffhi
^ operation.
• UseasultablefluxtofacT' 'r ,V >
illtate the wiping
V>' .
^n/flh
.'...-.A
kV
r
®®We,assh^
.
fUlingplugin
the studs.
potheadInsert
body
P>P®Pl"?s
inthetop of the
firw 1
" the filling hole, of suf-
Heat #J 27 compound to the pouring temoerature (les Degree C). Do not ovefheaf
FIQc
'
higher temperatures may Injure cable
'
^si^Uon and also result in exceLive sh?Swarmpothead body toprevStsSfiercWU- '
is
^eof tnecompound while cooling Before fin-
•
• "•
Cement all gasSs
paSiaituS!^^®
K?^', <^®"»Press
gaskets by a
-r
successively until the
• fowl
?""®
terminal studs are
.. tact nut in place. See Figures 20 and 21.
result
«onofcompound
of air vol^.which
The may
potoead
may be warSJtd • • UkbS^a°JL^fh nodirect heat reaches
potheadthepo^
body
piuc,. until the
pot head studs.
a^d on thi°Ffi
on theair
pothead
and
tne filling^blowtorch
pipe to prevent
voidsbody
and •
.• ,A • *
17>:• f •'
-bS.
"• ^-i.:-v.-''r
GE2-c53S'&C
'^stal Glad SCTiJcigear
•v-f ••
•r.^i'
V •;• li2\--» »'«. • •.. • ^•. •--:. * "V* •• •-' :,-M f','-' i" ;>. •Vi-i
:
-u.
18^8115'^^
0Mi
•
'''Q- 22
•
•''''''liisli;
\ \\ ' ' V.
"
' /
\' >
ir-•i®^"•:
:-:v
•
" .' .V5
.
•
'%ibik-='^i}:'l
:
vr^-;
Fia» 23
r.->rr»v< - ••
-• --• ••*--••' ••'•> 1 ,'\i-ii,"- 'if.'ti'r'r I
• •- • " -"•: "••
FIG.
Q. 'aJi-;•>
•
.
.-
••,; •• • ;• :•;
•i'
- ,
•••:;. ,--5^
u
••/"v
•-'.
-
-•
'i-.
^, ' '•'
• •:• £;••• :':-';KSv^.:'- #^'V:?
Si' •
•:i2l
feitJihgear
GE;-2539CC
clogging. When iaii insert pipe piags u -cop of
scuds to trap compound in the porceiam insula
tors. Continue pouring compound while the pot-
r
head is cooling to fill air voids which might form
•while the compound is cooling.
Whenthe pothead has cooled, remove filling pipe
and insert plug. Clean offcompoundwhich might
' tv-.j. %!
have overflowed on the outside of porcelal^.
Retightenall bolts to be sure thatall Joints are
tight.
iiiiSlililii®
t", '
(xa) Assemble pothead connection bars, see Figure
;2S,and;i2^^
(1) Fill all cavities around bolts and nuts with
"Duxseai" compoundtoform smooth surface
for taping, thus preventing air voids. This
compound is not an insulating medium and
should not be used for that purpose.
(2) Wrap with varnished cambric tape, G.£.
U992, as shown In Fig. 2S, the number of
layers depending on the voltage rating of
the equipment. Where there are sharp an
gles apply additional layers to obtain the
r-
equivalent of the insulation of the flat sur
faces.
(3) Over the varnished cambric tape apply one
• /
layer ofwhitecc^on t^e, half lay, as a binder.' • ,
(4) Overthe white cotton tapebrush a good coat
of G.E, #462 black varnish for 5KV. equip
FIG. 25
ments, or G.E. #1201 red Glyptalfor 15KV.
equipments.
-'Cable Entrances other than Wiping sippw
Stufflngb03Ccableentrancefittings,Flg. 26, are
used for non-lead covered cable, and are installed
asfoUpws. Assemble stuffing boxonpothead. Wrap
p-aphite cordpacklngaround thecableandcompress
by screwing toe gland nut into the stuffing box.
A combination clamping ring and stuffing box,
Figure 27, is sometimesfurnishedinstead of a wip
ing sleeve for lead covered cables. This fitting is
installed as follows. Wrap graphite cord packing
around cable and compress by screwing glandnut
. into stuffing bcHc. Bell over lead sheath and notch the
expose screw holes. (Note the openings in
the fitting below the notches, which permit com
pound to reach, the sheath and seal any splits which
mightoccur whilebellingover andnotching). Clamp
lead
ringofand
off sheath smoothly^
Leavesheath
aboutwith
1-1/2'
belttrim
insulation
above the
clamping ring.
Single Conductor Potheads
The procedure for installation of single conductor potheads is in general the same and describeci for three conductor potheads.
Connection of Control Cables
When controlconduits enterthe unit .from below
conduit should not extend more than 4 inches
above the floor. The control cables may be pulled
through the conduits before or after, the switchgear-
is installed whichever,is more convenient. .
Connecttoe cables to the terminal blocks in ac
cordance with toe wiring diagrams furnished for the
requisition.
'.'t
If the control conduits enter from above, drill
the top andbottomcovers of the front enclosure wirIng trough to suit toe conduits. Fasten the conduits
With locknv.ts to the l^bttotn covor*
The cablesfrom the controlpowersource to the
svdtcligear shouldbe large enoughto avoid excessive-
volt^e dropwhen thecircuit brewers are operated.
See testing instructions.
• > ,
Check over all screws and nuts connectinff the "
controlwlringtomakesurethathonehavebeenl^-'
ened in shipment. -
«
Installation-of nrmind Bub
The ground bus is shipped separate from the ~
equipment. Thebars shouldbe boltedin place In the
rear of the equipment after the shipping channels
have been removed, using the same holes in the
frame which are used for fastening the shippinc'
channels,
"
,
Theswltchge^ groundbus mustbe connected to
the station ground bus bya conductor havii^ acur-
IS
• ;">4.j3.k:c
Clad Switch^ear
n"
.,. -O'
o
,
.•
w
.
R.'r'
FiQ, 26
FIG. 27
STUFFING BOX
CLAMPING RING AND STUFFING BOX
rent carrying capacity equal to that of the switcngear
Place the breaker on the transfer truck, except
where breaker is provided with wheels, (see
veryimportant
that theeqiiip^nt
be ad^uately grounded,
to protect
the operator
irom injury when short circuits or other abnormal
bottom of the breaker fits into the guides pro
vided on the truck platform for centering. Rub
a sciall amountof Sovarex, LI (Socony Vacuum)
on the silvered portion of the breaker studs to'
•occurrences take place^and to insure that allparts
ofUie^uipment, other thanliveparts,are at ground
pocontiu*
. Installation of Exhaust Pinfafr
4.
for oil'circuit breakers is
completely assembled at the factory except where
the^uipment IS splitfor shipment. To completethe
-
^
•ww*** M* A
Installation of Circuit Breaker Remtwahio Element
• 1*
'
Hcfore
/sv*
xi..
interlockdevice is given inparagraph 7 below.
^re^ers must be fUled with oU in
^r°®"?2nce with directions in the breaker in-
• loosened orbecome
to make
sure thatduring
no parts
have
disengaged
transit.
IrA
^ accurately leveled
adfusti^f^- n f
should need no
er n- mfSl* ^°°®^."^staIlorremovethe breakis <^e^ ^ adjustments unless the breaker
•m
form a thin coating for contacting purposes.''
Lower the elevating mechanism lifting brackets,
bymeansof the crank,untU the liftingbracked
are down against the lower stop bolts dntlw^
frame. The breaker shouldthen enter thehousmg freely. Thelower stcpb^ts canbeadjusted
u necessary to allow the breaker to enter the?
.
v.; 1
Figures 30 31 32, 33) adjusting it so-tliit the
hou.sing. Push thebreaker Into thehousinguntil
it rests against the stt^ at the rear of the ele^vatlngmechanism frame. This top has been ad^;
justed at the factory so that the breaker will be '
in the correct position relative to the lifting
brackets. Raise the lifting brackets until the
•1^!"
r
'
"•f:-
lifted clear of the transfer truck.',
on the lifting brackets.
. 5. Carefully raise the breaker to the connected
. position - where the breaker plate or support
soUdly meets the upper stop bolts on the frame
and then lower and remove it from the unit.
When elevating, note that breaker studs center
..
:
with respect to the stationary disconnecting de
vice or injury to the contacts may result/
6 (a) ^pMitne contact surfaces ofbotnthe:
breakerstuds and the stationary disconnec
ting devices.
;
SO
'
P-.
•' • *•
V'
Metal Ciad Switchgear
GEI-25390C
K>2-5oXr\l-C0\leG.
WlTW SIMGLE COAT
OF CCTTTOt^l TAPE
0F^4<32 black
• varnish
rorroA/tape
HMD OF V.CTAPE
AdUWD
FOE ISOOOV-O
WITH SINGLE CO«T
0F*J20l BED GLYPTAL
v.c.instape
'i/
COXTOKi
ppVE/e taps
s-iSsSRi!?INSULATION
LEVEL
5000 V.
15000 V.
INSULATION UYERS
V.C."
COTTON
TAPE
4
1
7
1
; " !>
" r "'
't*
,
V.C. IS BUCK VARNISHED CLOTH (CAM8RIC) TAPE i©92 WIDTH li"
THICKNESS 0.012 COTTON TAPE IS WHITE G.E. 650-116 TODTH 11/2"
"ONE UYER (WOUND 2/3 UP)' REQU!RES 3 TURNS AROUND BAR IN ONE.
WIDTH OF TAPE. THE THICKNESS OF ONE UYER IS 3 TIMES THE
. ,
iilH
THICKNE^ OF THE TAPE.
v
•;
'K'r^yKtl-
y(•••,
j'.
FIG. 28
: •: ^I
IKSULATIOH OF COHNECTIOM BARS
• ' ' * I.--' 1 . . ' t
-Kr.hv,
'u
OPEN ELBOW
h
U
INTERMEDIATE UNIT
NOT THREADED
EXHAUST ADAPTER
+
m
':\'H.-y'''-
P- •
''••-''•"-•'a'"".
' •'
METAL CLAO EXHAUST PIPE
FIG. 29
• iC
'
. .-•-i;-'
LEFT HAND UNIT
li
VIEW LOOKING FROM SIDE OPPOSITE BREAKER MECHANISM
RIGHT HAND UNIT
^2£?0^3?W;
stK-c-.
W!f-:
.V'"
'
" '-tv- --'V
tft' .
H"'.
•. 2-
liliB-^n^
i>«rr--.CX%S=^.. - T--->-C
t
' >'r
• ; -s '^S
•• '*.. *-
eEl-25S90C Metal Clad SwJtchi^&ar
1^1 /^!
•T- :" f
f-v V
-tpptp:.;.
J:;' vr--;:4fi^y
l
'y. y-
1.-
:••-••• -rv,-.- • i-^
FIG. 32
^
91L CIRCUIT BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMEHT
0)) Each s^mentol the stationary disconnect
ing device should make a heavy impression
in the Sovarex LI on the brcaicer studs.
(c) The wipe of the breaker stud inside the sta
tionary disconnecting device, as indicated by
the Sovarex H, should be 7/8" (3/4" for the
tube. This Indicates that the breaker studs
contacted at the full pressure center of the
silver band on the stationary disconnecting
device. The maximum permissable varia
tion in tite wipe is 3/32".
(d) Should Uie inspection of the contacts show
that the breaker is not being raised to the
properpositionreadjusttheupperstop bolts
to raiseor lower the breaker to the proper
• location. Lock thestop bolts in the new po
sition.
(e) Ifproper contacting cannot heattained bythe
above methods, i: is necessary to adjust the
stationary disconnecting device tube. DO
NOT MADE .ANY ADJUSTMENT. COM
MUNICATE WITH THE NEAREST GEN
ERAL ELECTRIC CO. OFFICE FOR ADDI
TIONAL INFORMATION.
The trip andinterlock see Fig. 5, 6, 7, should be
checkedto seethat the breaker cannot be raised
tc or lowered from the connected position unless
the breaker is open. The opftrating crank cannot
be inserted until the trip shield is moved to a
vertical position, which operates the roller arm
to trip the breaker. As the breaker starts to
raise, tlie roller arm en the breaker is operated
bythecam on thestatlonarystructuretotripthe
breaker. The cam holds the breaker in the trip
ped position (circuit breaker mechanism latch
in the trip free positicn) until the breaker is in
MAGNE BUST REMOVABLE ELEMENT
%^
the operating position. When lowering, the oper- .
ating crank cannot be inserted until the trip, '
shield is moved to a vertical position, which
"'v-iy'?;'
•
operates the roller arm to trip the breaker.
Thus the breaker cannot be moved out- of con-
tactuntil the breakeristrlpped. Thecam holds'
the breaker in the tripped position until the
breaker is lowered to the test position. When-V ',
the mechanism is motor operated, the breaker' ,• • • .
is tripped electrically before the breaker canbe ' /
raised or lowered.
'
; ,
,
Installation of Insge^oh Rack
Tfof'OirCIrcuirfereiKrit
Aninspecticnrackis furnished (See Fig. S0,-35'
to provide a convenient means of inspecting, testing
-
andmaintainingthecircuit breaker without interfer
ing with the normal operatioi ctf the switchgear.
The inspection rackis a replica of the umtframe
.
andelevatingmechunismexceptthatit has agreater^,
travel in order to inspect the breaker contacts. ' • •
The inspection rack shouldbe installed at a lo- . .
cation where the breaker can be approached from .-
all sides, providing the maximum accessibility for ' '
maintenance. Allow the same aisle space m frotit
trotit
for manipulating the transfer truck as provided in .
frcnt of the metal clad units. '
.
The floor should be level and the rack fastened
to the floor with anchor bolts. Conduit for control
power cables must be installed. For electrically.
operated breakers, insull conduits to carry'^16S
to supply control power for testing.
'
Metal Ciad iSwitchgear GEI-25390C
TO BUS BAR
TAPE INSULATION
INSULATION COMPOUND
'
•:r-
FILLER METAL
i
-ym.
REMOVABLE STUD
>•#',•
sV
^
•
— PORCELAIN BUSHING
• •
•
•
• ." .
'
•••i-
•'
.lV
i;'
- • •*;
.-••••;•
••
•
• -.'
..'[I
'
- '.>,•-v.'
. •
sr. \
'
>»'
^ ,•
frnr4=j:
' (\
POWER CIRCUIT
breaker
:
- >'>•
V
•'
/
,(
m-:..
••' -f.'
::
•h: a-.v
\
POWER CIRCUIT
\
\
BREAKER
TEST POSITION
- \/,. ;,.
FIQ. 31
ME^UREHEWT OF AOJUSTWENt OF PRIMARY OlSCOHHECTIHfi DEVICES
.1
f ,v-
25
..A. •
C-i,'-^E.330C Metal Clad S^itchgear
Insta'-^ition qi Testing; Cabinet
(For Ma--T. Bias'- BroaRe'rs)
The testing cabinet, Fig. 44, should be installed
on the wall at a location where maintenance and test
ing of the breaker can be conveniently done. Conduits
must be installed to carry cables to supply control
power for testing.
AdcUtion of Units to Existing Equipment
Figures 36 and 37 indicate the special proced
ures involved to add now motalelad units to an ex-
iistieg equipment. Otherwise the' installation pro
cedure is tiie same as described above.
TESTING AND INSPECTION
^After the equipment has been installed and all
connections made it should be tested and inspected
before putting in service. Although the equipment
and devices have been completely tested at the fac
tory, a final field test should be made to be sure that
the equipment has been properly installed and that all
-
connections are correct and have not become loose in
• transportation. The primary equipment should be
.. completely de-energized while the tests are in pro-
relays on ihe system and therefore these- relays
must beset by the purchaser. General instructions
on setting the relays are given in the relay instruc
tion books. Special instruction books are furnished ,
I.
for complicated automatic equipments, describing >
the sequence of operation of the devices required to l'
perform thedesiredfunction. The extentcV the tests
on the equipment as a whole will depend on the^pe'-'
and function of the equipment.
When transformers are furnished to supply the.i
control power, the primary taps should be selected.! '
80 that the control voltage indioatod on-the wiring
;
'
diagram is obtained (m the s^ccmdary o£thetrans-.^r^•i; a
former.
'
'
When a battery is used to supply the control pow;:
er the cables from the battery to the switchgear -
v
should be large enough to avoid excessive voltage'liaa-.'
drop. The voltage at the terminals of the breaker ' y;
closing coils, when the br eaker is being closed . •
should notbe less than 112.5 volts for 125 volt coils
and 225 volts for 250 coils.
The operation of the breaker with its associated ,
devices may betestedlntheunit whilethe equipment;
is energized by use of the test couplers which
;
furnished. Lower the breaker to the test position. !.
This is the position at which the trip' mechanism,''
gress.
Directions for testing devices such as relays,
instruments and meters are given in the instruction
'' 'book furnish^ for each device. The settings of the
preventive reUys must be'coordinated i^h me ot^r:
roller arm diseng^es the cam onth'e Structure! At- •
tachthe test couplers to connect the breaker second'-:
ary disconnecting devicesto those on the airxicfx^Q,
;r
Highpotentlal tests tocheck toe mtegrity"of tfio V|4'^^ !;'.c^
insulation are not necessary if the instaUaUoh in-
structiohs in thisbook are carefuUy followed. the
^
purchaser wishes to make hi^ potential tests the, /
voltage should not exceed 75% of the AIEE facto.i^ ,,' ^
test voltages. Potential tran^ormers must be dis- ;
connected during high voltage testing.
\
Jim
•..•operation'-'"
i
^
The operation of metal clad switchgear is simi
lar tothat ofother types exceptthat it proviaes.max"vijv^5.y'f
imum safety to the'operator and thd feature of easy;v^
removal and replacement of the circuit breaker.'' :f'.
Lov/ering the breaker to the test position pro
vides a means of positively isolating the cables and '
remote .'ipparatus from the bus. Toinsurethe safetyof personnel working on the isolated circuit, the ti'ip
shield may be padlocked in a position to preventin- i
sertion of the operating crank.
All circuit breaker removable elements of the ^^Vl
same type and rating which have duplicate vdrl^may be mterchang^
To tnstaU the breaker in the unit proceiMl-;as,' '
-ffcy:
foUoro:
,
^
FIGo 35
Ml-9 METAL CLAO SWITCHQEAR IHSPECTIOM RACK
(a) Cleaacontacts and covdr witoVery-tbihcoating of Sovarex LI.
: \-t
(b) Placefile breakeronthetransfer tnick,
•.
where required, adjusting itso that the :${;-
bottom of the breaker fits into the guides
provided on the truckplalform for cen
tering..
!
.-•>
26
•fr-v'i'i-'-Av----'-'.---V
Metal Clad Switcbse^
GEI-25J»0C
•
•
vs;:*;
i
i -St:
t- •
(i-5n36056}
"x;';;;.:;
*•»
ADDITIOH OF liMITS TO OUTDOOR i^TAL CLAD SWITCH6EAR
:s.•:.'. 7::5:t: sv.-/: p•?•' 37-;
mp
Mttxau • • • •
IfiU i«0>
1
•
• mVi
|:Ti.xin I
,.-yt't.v-'t'ty C
e«.*j nn '
$vi j»..i:«
(wn* •Hue Kt'tt •cr^ciN
\)
q
^5
ri
r«-
t—
c.
r:
o
fii
^•5
.S
&9
*c'
Metai Gl^id Swiichgcar
(c) Ir.sert tlie cperaiin;/ (:r.V;k and raise or
lower ihe liltinijbrackets to the proper
pcsitior. for raising the breaker.
(d) Push the breaker into the unit until it
rests against the stop.
' (e) Operate crank to raise breaker imtU the
breaker contacts the stops on® the sta
tionary element. The breaker is now in
the operating position.
To remove the breaker from the unit proceed
as follows:
(a) Roll the transfertruck if required into
^ theunit until it rests against the stops.
(b) Operate the manual trip button, opening
:; :
iv
til® breaker.
(fi) Insert operating crank and lower the
breaker. Continue lowering until lift
ing brackets are against lower stop
bolts and free of the breaker.
(d) Roll the breaker out of the unit. Trans
port to another unit or to maintenance
location.
; ; M
for indoor equipments when it is knownthat abncS-xaiOklW: atmospheric conditions exist at tha
;•
MAINTENANCE
A regular maintenance schedule should be
-
from the switchgear. Plant, operating and localconr
: fi:'
ditions will dictate the frequency of inspection rer .' ' 'quired.
••
For specific information regarding the main--
^
tenance of devices, such as circuit breakers, r^ .i3
lays, meters, etc., refer to the separate instruction
? •
r
book fipnished for eachdevice. The Inspectiotftack
'v
or cabinet, which is furnished, provides a cipnYehif^''i)"% h
ent means for maintaining the circuit breakers. Xfti-
der normal conditions the protective relays do not;-
operate, therefore it Is important to checkthe bpeirr^
::atiQn of these-devices regularly,
The switchgear structure and connections
should be given thefoUowingoveri^'maintenance at-^iiS'S^'l"^^ '
•least anmially.
-
1 De-energixe the equipment and thoroughlyclean
removing all dust and other accumulations. Wipe '
buses and supports clean with carbon tetrachloride. .
Inspect the buses and connections carefully for evir
dence oi overheating or weakening ofthe insulation/
•MeasJre the resistance to ground and between •
phases tjf the insulation of buses and connections.'^'
Sincedefinite limits cannotbe given for satisfactory
insulation resistance values, a record must be kept "'
of the readings. Weakening of the insulation frmn
tablished to obtain the best service and
- '
3. Inspectprimary disconnectingdevice contacts for
0
r^.
29
V:'
•
;y-. :;r
• .•
•
• ." • •- V '•.
;
..'.•-.•-I.:'.',
f. ••
39
TOR CRANK
• • ••?•' ? ••••=»•
•
."'v'•" •
•
• -r.a
Metal Ciad Switchgc..l·
GEI-253£JOC
.sucn as s;;. a,,... , so'· •·ric CO.i' " i tion::. c::i.us(; dt:p;;isicS
dCI??sits c. .n
!•the
ssa;:nece
If
.
3::ts
p�;ict�i the cc;;itpoash. B !
vcr
sil
of
e
grad
b� removed with a good
rmc
of
!ore replacing breaker, apply a thin coat Sova
��-
·. -• - ,,.,
bolts in t!,e
�\:h ck to see that all anchor bolts and
fure arc tight. Check tightness and continu1 :y
struc
·
,: ., . . . . of all control coMections and wiring.
·
A e�manent record of all ,maintenance wo: ·k
shOuld ';;e kept, the degree of detail dep�nding on tl .e
operating conditions. In any e,·.?n_t it will be a v�l'. ,
.d
able.reference for subsequent mamtc:.ar.r.o work?�l,e
recommenc_led that
·· tor station oporation. It istests
• .·
made, tne conditwn
record include reports of
{.(f(;,'°' ._ _; . ·oI ·the eqUipment and ··repairs and adJustments th.i.t
:"Vere .made_.
: . . � '&.'.
. ..,
. :SPECJAL FEATURES
1.'
··Key Interlocks � Interlo_c�l_!l_g
:< .-' :, ·
, ·
·r· .
"
Key interlocks are applied !O metal clad switc�
.
. gear equipments to protect against incorrect oper.. :
tion of the equipment. Key interlocks are commori- .
ly used for the following purposes:
. fi ·,·,: -.,·_'-_,-:.;;:: \ •...
'·
· ··· · (a) To prevent . the operation under load of associ - .
· , · • .. ated disconnecting switches or dummy met;,,,l ,_
.
·· · ·.. ·_. · clad removable elements which ba.ve
· · limited
· or· .•
no interrupting·ability.·· · ·
I,
'
,·
(d) To prevent the withdrawal of fuse 11Rollout11 de
vices unless the load has been removed.
Figure40shows a typical application. of key in-:_
terlocks to a metal clad removable element and a
·disconnecting switch, The purpose of the interlock
ing is to prevent operating the: switch with the break
er closed. Key interlocks A and B are the type ir.
which the key cannot be removed Wlless the bolt of
the interlock is extended. Under normal operating
conditions, the bolt of interlock "K' is withdrawn. and
.
.. ·:;;;� the key held in this lock. The bolt of interlock"B"
..•.: <'_{ · is extended locking the disconnecting switch in· the
,. ··.. ····.. ·.open position. It is important that only one key for
;.i., · ,:·'. ·''·the pair of locks be availableto the operator other'. · wi.�e the nurpose of the inter locking will be d�ted.
, : .•.-() · · :
To operatethe disconnc:ctingswitcn tne.proce
>"·\.J/..,, , dure ,is as ·follows: Move . the trip shield to the ver2;;·.-.,y, · tic.al position, which operates the roller arm to t�ip
<., ,.· , .., the breaker. Turn key in interlock "A1' extending ·
··:· : :.,,�- ·, :, • ·the bolt. · The extended bolt holds the trip shield in
·., ·'·;:: :_ thcverticalpositionand the breaker in lhetrip-frec
·
. · position. The key may now be moved from interlock
''A!' and used to operate interlock t B' to withdraw it.s
bolt and release the operating mechanism of the dis
connecting switch. An attachment on the shaft ot th�·
cp�rating mechanism prevents the bolt ot interloct
"B" fror..1 being extended except when the switch iL
:fully open or fully closed. Consequently the key is
held· in i.'lterlock "B' and the breaker cannot be rc[).
leased
from the trip p os iti.on until the switch is
i
,{
. .locked open or loc�ed close�
.-_.�
..
.·
L
•. ·.:' · .. .. ·· . .
'
FIG.,,i«>
,.
·. .,
: "'��-. ;
; ';}ittliilt1[
·1
'•1,
••
-._·
·,
l
:··
�-y,.rw.
'
�··_ • j
. KEY' IHT£RLOCKIH·G:
(c) To prevent interconnecting systems in such a·
manner as to exceed the interrupting capacity .
of the circuit breakers. ·
·)
:'·.,·!
•..:•'
L.....o�--�--:----,,w·�
·. (b) To p�event the paralleling of non·synchron� ·.·
sources.
:· c1··
.
'·:{
1
.
·:>
1
,,,. -.. ,
·:,::
Dummy Removable Element
,, •.. > "
. '.-' �(·.- > :.
Dum:ny removable elements, Fig. 41 are used
as a. me.ins of isolating circuits or bus sections,.
. .. 1 .·.,
where oporation is infrequent and a circuit breaker
.:
cannot be economically justified. The device con··: , -'.
. sists of a frame work to simulate the circuit break• ; .{i::./'.s;.;c,\;/ :::
� removable element with a set ot six studs. simi'" ·.",_.:/-1�,t\-y:,'../·
lar to those on th� metal clad breakers. The lo:,vet·.:.; \:��)?�') ·
end of the studs are connected, front to back,'b��;;;\:·i;:;:�;\{<
. copper bars which are fully insulated and metal··en·.. ::::!,�\<:'.\:'::- ;.
closed. The stationary structure is the same.as.for:;: ::,::./r/,'?
· a cf.rcuit breaker•. When the device is elevated �to. ·.i�·.:.:t}.ff{:it
position it connects the fron,t set or metal clad .dis'"'. ·: .'·::'/i;,:::;:'.:·;:
cann'ecting devices to the rear set. ·
· , · · : :·· -·,,.. 1: 1 ·• t-�·: ..
.. :. -:�··; ' � .
Under no cooditions must· the dummy element. · ·:•: z::(/:::_:. ::
· be elevatl:d or lowered when the bus or the unit�is ' .. ·; ··i ';\, ,:;/!!5-:<•,
energized. Key.interlocks ar_e applied to:fn.sure µtat..>:::{; t: ':,.- )L
all sourc,is of power are disconn.ected before-the'.:·,::·.'•· .. )\\'..:·
· · · · · ":- : \.;.. . /\( '.� · .\: .'.
dummy element can be operated.
·
,.J}.:\
·\,.t:t�.
0--
'
:
r
O
Curront limiting fuses. with hig]j iriterruptingi
rating are some times used in metal clad switch·gear to protect small transformers or c i·r cu it_ s
where cir,�uit br.eakers cannot be economically or
'
functi.onaL.y justified.
.
.•/
•'.'
:,
•
'
;
..
,1..
·. :·.�::\ · ,
-: , _01, : ; ··i · ·
·. ;:;.);\i/\ti�:(iiiii�����
Clad SKTiicis^f^a?
1he •'at.es arj inoantcu or, a aicvable suo ;Dri
•-.•.luippcd Witn discon;iect ing devices. When the K' ses
u-otvY
to .safeguard personnel -.vho may be
i- .
The device^ • •'h
tit?
for applying
for highinsula
poten- ;
al teats or for fault
location,power
to measure
a.-e uisconnecied, theyare at a safe striking distanee
from all live parts of the switchgear. In Iddition"
tion resistance (megger); or for phasing out: Sbles,' V
' it
three
studs
the device
are ^imtVar
those,t of the
metal
cladofcircuit
breakers.
The'^ds ^-
"^•
are ni ounted mi a removable plate which can h e ^
interrupt load current. For lar •
|^SSSSa%
er secondarybreakermustbelockedin
markec:"Line'andassembly are
to .hi
Grounding and Test riPvi/>a'
houskS
the metal cl^^ ' /
breaker, and raised ' t: .;^:i
of the ctrcutt
v: ¥ ' w
'
y-5
''' -•
-'.•
•'•* *'i i.'
i: 3:^i^!S i.
a-; hi
• •< A.) ••
•-i 'rl'¥ '-;¥ •
f-
-•s>>
m
',•'• i'j!"tb b;''
X'?
Fre. lij
dummy removable ELEHEUt
32
Metal Clad SwUchgear
••3
GEI-2533pC
,
y . ' . V / ; - ' ' . v .v>
^,r -.rr'""v
•'•;•••?'' ! • •>
•'/•', k
'•>
T. .TT!
•
r
t—A-^il ».••
flQ. 42
?USE ROLLOUT DEVICE
ir
,r7~J'••"•ij'
iirv ..:: l r r ' :
Avir-y
.
v.-
ii'* ''<.3-*"^''
"''• .
FID. 43
OROUND AND TEST DEVICE
. ''\t^
i'--'
•-:r. •
li?>,
K/i
o
w
»
t:>
CT
co
{!£•£:---^V£$1
K
%
i±
.-V.l
o
PUSH
BUnON
CO
CONTROL
Sj
REUY
.1
COUPLER
60 AMP.
FUSE BLOCK
\
%
'pical Indoor .Vtetal-clad Switcheear Equipment
T;.-picai Outdoor .Metal-clad owitcheear Equipment - Front View
T:.-pical Outdoor Metal-clad Swttchgear Equipment With Protected Aisle - side View
4
4
4
Fie. 4
Fig. 3
Fie. 6
.Magne Blast Breaker
-Magne Blast Breaker
.Maene Blast Breaker
5
5
5
Fie. 7
Fig. 8
Fig. 9
Installation Details (or Indoor Metal-clad Switchgear
Installation Details for Outdoor .\Ietal-clad Switchgear..
Installation Details (or Outdoor Metal-ciad Switchgear With Protected Aisle
6
8
10
Fig. 10
Metal-clad Switchgear....
12
Fig. 11
.Measurement of Adjustment of Primary Disconnecting Devices
12
Fig. 12
Fig. 13
Fig. 14
Potential Transformer Rollout Shown m Withdrawn Position
Dummy Removable Element
Ground and Test Device
13
13
14
Fie. 15
Padlocking Arrangement, Key Interlocking and Bus Boot Assembly
15
Fie. 16
Fig. 17
Control Power Transformer RolloutShown in Open Position
Outdoor .Metal-clad Switchgear - Addition of Units to Line-up
16
17
Fig. 18
Fie. 19
Fig. 20
Outdoor Metal-clad Switchgear With Protected Aisle
Outdoor Transition Compartment
Outdoor Transition Compartment
18
19
19
Fig. 22
Fig. 23
Inspection Box for 13.8 KV Metal-clad Switchgear
Bolt Torque Values
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Bus Duct Gaskets
.Method of Making Bus Bar Connections
13.8 KV Taped Joints
4.16 13.8 Bus Insulating Boot
21
21
23
24
24
24
23A
24
25
25A
Fig. 258 Taping Roof Entrance Bushing
26
Fig. 26
Insulation of Connection Bars
26
27
Fig. 28
Fig. 29
Fig. 29A
Fig. 29B
Fig. 29C
Fig. 29D
Rear View of Unit Showing Ground Sensor Transformers
Termination Without Pothead Single-Conductor
Termination Without Pothead .Multi-Conductor
Positive Interlock Adjustments
Positive Interlock Assemblv for iOOO M.V.A
Positive Interlock Assemblv for STD AM-2.4 and 4.6
Positive Interlock Assemblv for .M-36
27
27
28
34
35
36
37
Renewal Parts
Fig. 30A View Showing Elevating Mechanism .Motor and Control Unit
Fig. 30 Elevaung .Mechamsm for .M-26 Equipments Rated 250 .M.V.A.
38
and M-36 Equipments Rated 1200A 500 .M.VjV
39
Fig. 31
Elevating Mechanism for .M-36H Equipments Rated 750 M.V.A.
M-26H Equipments Rated 350 M.V.A.
.M-36
Equipments Rated 200
39
Fig. 31A
Fig. 32
Fig. 33
Fig. 34
Fig. 35
Fig. 36
Fig. 37
Fig. 36
Fig. 39
Elevating Mechanism for M-36HH Equipments Rated 1000 M.V.A
Angle Bracket and Chain Drive
Shutter Mechanism Assembly M-26
Shutter Mechanism Assembly M-36
Bus Support
Molded Bus Support
Bus Connection Boot 14.16 and 13.8KV)
Door Handles and Locks..
Wiring Devices and Miscellaneous Parts
40
41
41
41
42
42
42
43
43
Fig. 40
Fig. 41
Fig. 42
Fig. 43
Fuse Rollout Unit.....
Potential Transformer Rollout Unit
Control Power Transformer Rollout Unit
Single and Triple-Conductor Potheads
43
44
44
44
.VOTE.2
THIS ZHSTmCTZal BOOK HAS HAD A MAJOB RBVZSZOH.
PISASB CHECK YOUR PHEVZOVS SDZTZOS TO COMPARE MATERIAL.
. -,
Metal-clad Switcheear GEH-1802
CONTENTS
RECEI'\f'ffi'G, HANDLING & STORAGE ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• .
RECEIVING••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
HANDL�G.................................................................................................................. ..
STORAGE••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
11
11
11
11
DESCRIPTIO� ...........................................................•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••·••••••••••
SECONDARY ENCLOSURE••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
PRIMARY E�CLOSURE••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••.•••••••••••••••••••••••••
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT .•••••••.•••••••••••.•••••••••••.•••••••••••••••••••••••••••.•••••••••••••••.••••
BREAKER ELEVATING MECHANISM...............................................................................
11
11
ll
ELEVATING l\ilOTOR •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
PRI1'lA.RY DISCONNECT DEVICE •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
BUS COMPARTMENT························································· ····••••••••••••••••••••···················
CURRENT TRANSFORMER AND CABLE COMPARTMENT...................................................
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER CO�tPART:\tENT ..................................................................
DUMMY EEMOVABLE ELEMENT....................................................................................
R')LLOUT FUSE-::iWITCH UNITS .....................................................................................
FUS.£ CISCONNECTI�G DEVICE ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
GROU�"DL'lCi ANO TEST CEVICE •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
L'JS TALLATION................................................................................................................••• •
LOCATION•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
PREPARATION OF FLOOR-ANCHORING ..........................................................................
TRANSITION COMPARTMENTS.......................................................................................
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEltENT.................................................................................
TESTING CABU"lET•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
ADDITION OF U:S[TS TO EXISTING EQU[PMENT .............................................................. .
!\itA.IN BUS A!SSE l\1BL Y•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••,.
TORQUE VALUES•.•••.•.•••••••••••••.•••••.•••••••••••••••••••.•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••.•.•.•••••••••••.•••.•••••••
TAPED JOINTS............................................................................................................
BU::i DUCT••••••••••••••••··························••••••••••···········••••••••••••••················•••••••·······••••••••
CLEANING BUS l!':�ULATION.........................................................................................
PRll\lARY CABLES ••••.•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ,.......................
11
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
l:?
13
1-.
lt
1€
19
20
20
20
21
21
22
2:?
22
2:?
POTIIEADS..................................................................................................................
2::?
DOOR ALIGNMENT.......................................................................................................
2�
2�
2!
2'
2'.
TESTING AND INSPECTION••.•.••••••••••••••••••••••••••.••••••.•••.•••••••.•••••• , ....................................... ,
2f
OPEMTION •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••····················••••••••••••••••••·············••••••••••••••••••••
.BREAKER POSITIONING................................................................................................
2!.
2r
POSlTIVE INTERLOCK GENERAL...................................................................................
POSITIVE INTERLOCK ASSEMBLY FOR SOLENOID OPERATED BREAKERS.........................
POSITIVE INTERLOCK ASSEl\mLY FOR STORED E:SERGY BREAKERS................................
:)TATIONARY AUXILIARY SWITCH..................................................................................
30
3G
31
31
KEY LOCJc.:;.................................................................................................................
BREA KER INTERFERENCE STOP&•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
32
TER?t.fINATION WITHOUT POTHEAD SI�GLE·CONDUCTOR................................................
TERMINAT[ON WITHOUT POTHEAD :\IUL TI-CONDUCTOR.................................................
GROUND FAULT CURRENT TR ANSFORMERS !THROUGH TYPE}.........................................
CONTROL CABLES .................................................................................................... ,..
GROUND BUSt...............................................................................................................
LIGHTNING PROTECTION.............................................................................................
ROOF £::-.TRANCE BUSHING TAP[NG...............................................................................
SPfi.L�G DISCHARGE CAM..............................................................................................
TRAN:sFER TRUCl»Mr4f
••
NUClCM CLASS
c
»tlLT
_<: *•
ecowiBC A«i Ao»T>oii4i. «koe«
tfC r»e«T ¥•(• ¥0* *.x*ric«
*K^ fkoea s»c4«
s*oive M a«u 3*i«
»«V4 ^iRSfw
* «e« MCt
UASS •< COwtR*
dC USICMOI** *CCS«M«iCt
f T»«*L
IRCAdC*
vCRf 0»k»i^
ncAi
* *MCM0««0 sr
AjdiLiART
•ueMo.RUfO
VCiCMO «N MCNOR
^kir
"OLCS itmOualtO
•• AoetfiM to
**c« <*rk»M9
I *«CHoe«e
SOltdiO.
ft
T««
••SMfRt Ml
•COl^CO IW«CR
SCltKAOS
CL
s^aL*
''
—I
•OM* nooR
RECOUMENOEO METHOD
—t
FLOOR ANCHORING METHODS
-
c
MS r>.cCR
^:;a* .kS
mwm* fieoi latc
.rl^
XR STCCL
scenoM T.ff
ROTf: IT If (ttRCMSnrt THAT
'LOe* SVCCi M KVCR
VITR CNlftMCS #100R
iCcriOH
t-t
•CCOimtMtO AWCwORWO >T 4PCkO*w«_
ALteRNATE METHOD
~ ^ TMft wOiRap.
MO THAt MTN K LfVU
9 NOlt IM ARAUC rOHCta
S eiA. AStH OMW S MCNOR lOlT
.SHOkC H
t
, - */•
TKK •ASMIR
scetioii r.T
SICTIOM S<«
(
SCCTKMI><
AMCMORtRO ir SOLTINS
FIG. 7 {TT-6482630) INSTALLATION DETAILS FOR INDOOR METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR
Metal-clad Swltcbgear GEH-1802
:l «» K •tCMS**'' 'O "'"5**
POThCAO '*• CA#tC
MCMtCH
c
300R
OPCN
; I
C
B
ifr
inr
^ r
:u-c
C0NDlltT9'
METHOD
OF LIFTING
-TO ec FURNISMCD BT PURCHASER
MCMBEKS A-BC
Raising NCNBtR * CHANNtt or wooo beam
B-J-CmannEU FURNISHEO with gear
c- liptihg jacks
,
.
,
0- COVER TO BE REMeveO ANO reassemble
after units are in place
NOTE. WHEN lifting M-26 SWITCMGEAH
locate beam a above lifting
CHANNELS *B'
notes top lifting steel available
WHEN REQUIRED AT CUSTOMER'S REQUEST
«3«»
\
1
i!
li
9*1
A
0^
T"1
^
OOOR
f,
^
OPCN-
ALTERNATE
METHOD OF LIFTING
MEMBERS ABE TO BE FURNISHEO BT PURCHASER
B - J* CHANNEL FURNISHED
WITH GEAR
D - COVER TO BE REMOVED AHO REASSEMBLED
AFTER UNITS ARE 'H
£
-
PlACE
SPREADER
FIG. 7 (TT-6482630) CONTINUED
»0«
GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear
/
CAti.f
(]
1
-n-
g
7
COM«tCTlO«
7
9
7
\
M
•000 OfAli
METHODS OF LIFTING
•.dTfdtn
^fC •"CW A
SAr/r
'^Sfcer
..^0*
".c^T^
.','ir'''W£wy
I
Hoof
,_L.
cnP
i-i4 11^ tri
hsicet
•-. i' 1 801.'
:: J«
/
•
two
:l
r
9
H 1 •II
••M
n'
.1
1
>n
w«A4
1
'
> r
ANCMdff soir
1'
«dCRTiONs srr riAAff
AN ORAWINC,
• ulcNiSMrD Wm •MOISlTloif
imiltMTt
r»
CMOuiri
l5
View 'x'
SMORIAO AlfCMOOlltO Of UNIft
•ITN CNAWMCL MM
-SCffCCNS TO 9C OAIICO OM
CACW CNO AT iNSTRLlAriAN
Au&T se «err cifAN r«A
•eilOVAttC ALATCS TO 6C CUT
TO SUIT COttOUlTS IT AUACHAOIA
• A«rill*«*AW
FOUNDATION
witlicut j^oor CncloS(*rA
AAO OCPTN or SOIL
DATA
OCAIIIIlO SUOfACCS Of UCM
roURMTIOil MUST se AWTCRCO TO SUIT SOIL COROlTlOilS.
OOTTOM SUAFACCS OF FQUNOATIORS SHQULO OC 9CL0«
rnoST action on OACRritLCO RITN MNVIOUS HAlCNtAL
AHO AOCOUATCLT
ONAIMCa
SUNF
TO INSUNC
CAST HAMOLIftO OF
NCMOVAOLC
CLCMCNTS.
CONCNCTC MO SHOULD SC NCINrONOtO IN ACCONOANCI
WITH STANDAND PNACXtCC.
'3
>*ri«»AT *r *tucc
.:s3fu H.' '» *rjJ4T ;.evrN*s' to
»'«€ OCSIAfD -e SAT and .)CA 8T
3
*
NUr 'A .
'ffsf
AOjuSTASlt "tATFONM VlfwV
fO
nf.
AH
'«CM .NO AT
viML.ATlfiN.
••vsr Kt tfOT CtCAN fOA
•(M0¥A0LC PLATCS TO ftC CUT
TO SUIT COMOUITS ST OUNCHASCN
with Rtar Cneloiur*
FIG. 8 {118RD728 & TT-6482615) CONTINUED
•GEH-1802 Metai-clad Switchgear
3HlP9tN<&
»rs«
••c*rn
•fCM
.COVCR^
we itMC
y*'
ANOTO
•y'»rcrtt
1*RIMAKy
View ' y
CAUJC
iatmtm Mutmmm tr ONiri
COMCW\RTMCM-\
virv CMMi i m
'"mTtcTto
unrAi
GQMDUITI I
~
OGVtcc CWMBI.
* >*
^US£CQNCyvaY
BE BOLTtO OmX^
CONDUITS
.*N £N& AT -
0» I
Sju!
Js:
a: !?
t
<• -^SuJ
~
?S
/
SV-
>-'a
a-
-.Nji
S:z^
^ i
FIG. 15 PADLOCKING ARRANGEMENT, KEY INTERLOCKING AND BUS BOOT ASSEMBLY
15
GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear
\i^
FIG. 16 (8918619B) CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER ROLLOUT SHOWN IN OPEN POSITION
INSTALLATION
Before any installation work is done, consultand
The space
study all drawings furnished by the General Electric
Company for the particular requisition. These
drawings include arrangement and floor plan draw
ings, elementary, connection and interconnection
diagrams and a device summary.
Occasionally additional shipping members are
installed in the pnmarv area to 'protect against
shipping damage.
SHIPPING BRACES MUST BE
REMOVED PRIOR TO ENERGIZING. SHIPPING
BRACES ARE PAINTED YELLOW AND MAY BE
FOUND IN ANY UNIT WITH A RED "CAUTION"
LABEL ON THE FRONT OF THE SHUTTER. THE
BRACES ARE INDICATED ON THE ARRANGEMENT
DRAWINGS. AN ADDITIONAL "CAUTION" LABEL
WILL BE FOUND ATTACHED TO ONE OF THE
BRACES.
After the shipping braces have been removed all
joints must be properly tightened and insulated before
energizing the bus.
at
the
rear
must be sufficient for
installation of cables, for inspection and maintenance,
and on some equipments to draw out potential
transformers.
PREPARATION OF FLOOR - ANCHORING
Indoor Equipment
The station floor must be strong enough to
prevent sagging due to weight of the switchgear
structure and to withstand the impact stress caused
by the opening of the circuit breakers under short
circuit conditions.
The impact loading is approx
imately 1-1,2 times the static load.
Suitable means must be provided bv the pur
chaser for anchoring the equipment to the floor. It
is essential that the floor be level to avoid distortion
of the switchgear structure and the equipment be
completely aligned prior to final anchoring. The
recommended floor construction is shown in Figure 7.
The floor channels must be level and straight with
respect to each other. Steel shims should be used for
•Mats, screens, railings, etc. which are external
to the switchgear, but which mav be required to meet
any local codes, must be furnistied by the purchaser.
final leveling of the switchgear if necessary. Care
should be taken to provide a smooth, hard, and level
floor under and in front of the units to facilitate
installation and removal of the breaker. If the floor
is not level and flush with the floor channels, it will
LOCATION
The recommended aisle space required at the
,^
^.'
FNCLCSuP e:
rzT
—1
*
110 • **
•o^wrmtmt
"£ -'W * '
• S£T vt» «..'•>.•
» 4J5a"i*0A»' ^
"««
' *4S|l*0lT C
ir« wcrtM'T-r'
aj w** '*>
^
,-jfOHMP I 1
/ •u}
y
H
-•"*»» «»
'ac(Vi«ca
li
11
®'
\
p'ii«s«tr I)
y}""
1^ «f e«Mcp 1 1
•Bi snitc 1,^
''Cftvec
1
-
i
w,«
SKrwM**
'''i
•?'•*•*
"auiftfc rf«
.MS7AV^f*9M ^aoA
"CHD MtflN
astC^BLT
eatriaa « •>«*'«
C
fae* ca^i trMwco
'#ifTNrc)
7/iTHOVT
I
/»cw "0"
(c*f0 view M («
ENCLOSURE
I"
FIG. 17 (545D856) OUTDOOR METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR - ADDITION OF UNITS TO LINE
UP.
'A' I new tr.
-wa
GEH-1802 Metai-clad Switchgear
-n
n
n
fV"1
1T1
It
3
ti
M
ll
'
II
ii
ll
II
ll'
•
'
ll
!; !
yplKIVIfVC
hC-
1
1
•
•
II
|i
1
ij
I
1!
ll
II
I ^
H
ii
Sr
II
jlJ
.JL.
VMlfS
—
FBOWT
View
nBT
!«» fC»l
•IB AMPfCI Citf
tm9 cm
0*-
* n«r cm
B»»r
l~
\
c
C
^
^imfU I en« A
Mfir
AISIX
nifm Cktip
tw»»
««•••»
1
"1
cawtCftM
0
0
ro •(••<•£ (IISTI»« (W SM(T (icrij
«. mHm rne FaiiawtM I'ltS
nul ucntM
I iiwr »»TT»ii
t («B >iiir etr
«««IV n
.40*rrii M44C A
j
mm® •
s. riwir e«n« f—t '• "«>»
i SCICIMS HI
>tKCm «tM»«
a.
sfcriow
Hoof C*B1
« tup srcTiBM ctas'iriNc m
Fwri
«
«r«e»t «»' e»B.f»o icbiin, o mis
csMNrcTisN spB csB sierisB
"fist eiss sICHsb
i*sr*i.i piw "f»i et»o uwitifuffi
• jtT »iw nmTiii i» 'i««e ••• ••I' r»««n• •
3 asscumt MfH 'MB C*BS
• iMCitii ctMMS ms SBtice srrairtM (nsnaa
<440
•HP alW CIMWO pas
S PSMHIlt PBS PPPS PRO WSPlPrt PtP
lalTPOCTIPM BSSP
la mirpiL Mw mrrerip pisk umrsFiiPn
t losTPis «iK «Mo« pppiws p«o ptppp man
nt Sam pppiS
t PcnPCi PtaaP ipppp popif pr "Pa WB «»»inp"
I osTPu If/ PiBPP n»m
t iPtCT afw capac* csianN(p«u)
i PBB «(« pisit 'Pass PUSH ppo Ptni esaa
•OPPTCP CUP TP ttissmp IBB pppp fpass
^MiMt M«iC «
•U
''"A
f4mB miC I
SCCTIQN
t_'
PPBP supr ciiPS
•«K*rr A
wrr«nt»i4ra
>iM« nart vir o«Mi «*AU lA
- I al
afw
yiMliAMe •*tt
MMT
t ptiairpii r*p itfps pippppb in p-p
psff • use "Pw ppipprs pop PSSa lasfPtt
ppiriaas (pb ppppp cpvp* ph >pppp
OP arw |«B aair
VTfMiie
ragar Cmt
UPWWT J
StCTION
SUPPPBI*
i> ipsraii. actf c«B piSiC ipuss s«p-pssphbsp
cpaSitTiNa OP POPP reats paplf. pppp supt.
couiPM Clip. PcrpL eiPB pbppppp ciipaaa
e*ftt
I'
i IWSPPIL PIPIPP PPB tipPT'PS PPPPPIO
B-B
•laar
(nb pbbitibiss
FIG. 18 (718D393) OUTDOOR METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR WITH PROTECTED AISLE.
Metai-clad Switchgear GEH-18C
-I
i.,
t"
•
I—!••
cj
'•£05
in
L=:
^
VS^.
FIG. 20 (453A738)
FIG. 19 (261C416)
OUTDOOR TRANSITION COMPARTMENT
Provision should be made in the floor for conduits
for primary and secondary cables, located as shown
on the floor plan drawing furnished for the particular
requisition. If desired, the conduits may be installed
before the switchgear. Consideration should be given
to conduits which might be required for future connec
tions.
Outdoor equipments are furnished both with and
rear
from inclement weather until the installation of •
aisle enclosure is completed.
(3) Apply Sterling U-310 or U-311 varnish
both sides of the gaskets furnished for the jc
between the ends of the switchgear and the ai.
enclosure and to the surfaces against which
Outdoor Equipment
without
(2) Remove the shippingcovers from the cont.
panels. Since the relay and instrument cases are :
weather-proof, the control panels should be protec
enclosures.
Recommendations for
foundations for both types are given in Fig. 8.
Primary and secondary conduits should be installed in
accordance with the requisition drawings, before the
gasket presses and hang the gaskets on the p:
jecting studs at the ends of the switchgear line'
See Fig. 9, section A-A.
(4) Move the aisle enclosure into position guid
equipment is put into place.
the holes in the end sheets over the studs on
aince outdoor equipments are provided with a
6" base, a transfer truck is required to place the
breaker in the housing. The level adjustment on the
truck is shown in Fig. 8.
the support clips.
When outdoor equipments are shipped in more
switchgear lineup and guiding the roof sills betw*
the support clips bolted to the upper front of
switchgear units above the control panels. T
operation may be simplified bytemporarily loosen
The floor of the aisle enclosure must fit under
hinged breaker cover of the metal-clad, so the a;
than one section, the joint between sections must be
weatherproofed. Assemble the gasket between the
doors, using cement provided. Refer to Fig. 8,
Section B-B. .Assemble the gasket between the roof
sections, bolt together and install the roof caps.
Refer to Fig. 8, Section C-C.
(5) Bolt the aisle enclosure in place at both en
and bolt the roof sills to the support clips, tighten
Outdoor Equipment with Protected Aisle
removed.
When specified by the purchaser, outdoor equip
ment is furnished with an enclosed, weatherproof
operating aisle. See Fig. 3. The aisle enclosure
is shipped separately from the switchgear.
The following
procedure outlines
the steps
necessary to install outdoor equipment with a
protected aisle:
(1) Install the switchgear in accordance with the
procedure given above for outdoor equipment.
enclosure must be moved into position on a le
with the switchgear units.
any support clips loosened in the previous operati
Replace any breaker compartment doors previou
(6) If the aisle enclosure was shipped in m
than one section, bolt the sections together
assemble the roof caps in the manner descri
above for roof joints in outdoor switchgear.
(7)
Anchor the outside floor sill of the ai
enclosure with anchor bolts placed in accordance v
the requisition drawing.
(8)
See Fig. 9, view
Assemble the dome over the roof open
•1802 Metal-ciad Swuchgear
eTthe sv,ltchgear and the aisle enclosure.
gasket
P""".^" ^Jide', toMM™
"3
transformer tank. ^
j^/2" from
to tank.
'it. 9 view X.
9)
Remove
until the
' These braces fhoiUd be
n^aintain
enclosure is assem-iled m oru
.ment oi the enclosure.
and complete all )°ibts. -
SdSt''lo'"?o'?e.S5. and assenible secondary
under the
'ifueff'wilh®m?wSh8
rSs iurmshed tor the edulpment.
iince the
sition compartment.
^r»%witL^™tecteda«
The above
:ec.ed
aisle cncio^^^
le aisle onl% . d the
transition.
- ,3akv class tranConnect heaters located m13.8 kv
"quired for
asseSbUd%o?e'Ser°with"^^^^
switchgear units.
Jide
„ „o Ime-
. _
breaker removable element
require slight
Before
,S'iirn"''S ?h\SSs' mrnish'ed a-ith the SSnfr^s'tSS and inspection.
mf thP elevating mechanism,
ui-ltim
for outdoor unit sub- POSl- i f « »"f
;^ition°ir speciiic instructions.
Transition compartnwnt
20).
.tions
may
be
one
o
normally
shipped
assembse"compartments
nor^"y ^p^g^'Yg)
cannot
Sr.l'ir.rbt are
comrrtmS
iFlS can^"
re;ie«e5Cfore''£s«Uing removabie element.
TESTmOCABmET^^uidUeinstaUed
The testing
where maintenance and
on the wall at » g ^ n be convienUy done,
testing
thebe ins iiort tn carrv cables tosprings
supply
Conduitsofmust
assembled.
310 varnish to both ''^des
rfaces
insition
itchgear. Before
gasket 2A, and to the
|
presses. Bolt
to throat on metal-clad
i,iiie the power transformer
aterling U 310 varnish
$;;fctr&ediately.
ADDmON OF
Before dddmg units t^dX'St^^^^e^ „i,h the
«£rs?eU«r-v
r^cated orspecial assem-
;oboth
its sides
final oflocation,
.^J^^tothe surfaces
against
gasket l^-ana
gasket over
furnished with new
e mounting studs <^n the ^ansi
bly work. Also, checK m
parts are on hand.
lich the gasket P«^„^®®Ljfrailfor^^
ide transformer in place, gu
^^^j^sjormer
.'..unting studs through the mounti^g^^
enter rubber
in ffl.
^ b®{J 24" between transformer
ghtening nuts, n^^antaining dS**
^
k wall and
®e^find.3^^
Ln^uir?fo to ^ S "d'biW'
varnish
:ion.
,n its foundation prior to th
^^e
irocedure ot P^^ufJJJ^er transformer after assem-
tS^uio'n SmpLtment to the switchgear.
-nd#9.adapter#1» dome
tollows; kemove ^^""'s^erlinB U310 varnish to both
=7, braces ?4. ^PPfy„^i?othe surfaces against which
sides of gasket =2A,andto toe^^^^ce^ ag
the gasket presses, befor
be furmshed covering
necessary
before A^^pn^SrHICH permit A^^^
PRfmR^'cmCmTS'^T l/f^.^NERGIZED AOT
gggSii^°||f™w^
POSITION AND TAjGED.
IF WOHK IS WEFKit'tH^BbS^
(b) Should the
-./itchgear are m pla ,
existing
yaraish to both sides
FS! JS » me surfaces against which the
SS?^lSoTO>||f«S°«S"E
POSITION
RE ISOLATED FROM AI^
sowcls CONNECTED TO IT.
Figure 17 indicates me
required to .^J^,"®^_oScSd aisle, and Figure 18
Sams'm'JfoJl pme^-n ^e^p'^ln^wS
pecm^itm' Fo""mdoor eguipment. it isusuaUy
Metai-clad Switchgear GEH-1802
necessary only to remove the end cover sheets and
to re-assemble them on the new units after these are
located and bolted to the existing units. Otherwise,
the installation procedure is the same as described
-v^ vei
•His
above.
F
When the units are in place and mechanical
assembly is completed, assemble the main bus and
£€cr/A'£je\
other primary connections per the instructions below,
(Remc'/al of existing compound-filled connection
-MM
boxes can be easily accomplished by packing the box
in dry ice for 2 -'3 hours". Remove the dry ice and
the cord tying the box in place, and strike the box
with a hammer. The hardened box and compound will
crack away from the joint.)
-
1-
nr
Secondary wiring and control bus connections
should be
made
in
accordance with the wiring
diagrams furnished with the equipment.
T
CONNECTIONS
The main bus bars and other connection bars
will be either copper or aluminum. In either case,
the
contact surfaces will be silver surfaced or
equivalent. Do not use unplated copper or aluminum
bars.
FIG. 22 {899B745) INSPECTION BOX FOR 13.8 KV METAL-
All field assembled joints in primary con
CLAD SWITCHGEAR
ductors, regardless of material or method of insula
tion, should be made as described below:
(1) Wipe silver clean. Do not use steel wool,
sandpaper or any abrasive on the silvered
surface. Avoid handling of cleaned surface
as much as possible.
(2) After cleaning apply D50H109 contact com
pound to the sUvered surfaces in sufficient
quantity so that the
contact area will
MAIN BUS ASSEMBLY
For 4.16 kv, 7.2 kv and 13.8 kv equipment.
(a) Remove compartment covers.
(b) Bolt splice plates and bus bars together, follow
ing assembly instructions as given under CON
NECTIONS.
Fig. 23.
be thoroughly sealed with excess grease
squeezed out of the joint when tightened.
The bolts should be tightened to the torque
values, shown in Table A, Fig. 23. After
the bolts have been securely tightened, the
joints are insulated using the molded poly-
TIGHTENING TORQUE IN FOOT POUNDS
Bolt
Size
vinyl-chloride boots which are furnished.
Bolted connection
Bolted connection
using standard wash, using standard wash,
prevailing torque
LK wash, nut with
lock nut with D50H109
D50H109
These boots are placed over the bolted joints
and the boot flaps are secured with nylon
(3)
Also see Fig. 24 and Table A,
rivets.
3/8-16
20-30
15-20
In some cases external connections are
made to metal-clad bus by bars.
The
metal-clad bars are normally silver plated.
1/2-13
45-55
30-35
5/8-11
60-70
45-55
Unplated bars, either copper or aluminum,
should not be used to connect to silver
plated bars.
FIG. 23
(4) All field assembled Primary joints and
terminations
must
be
insulated for the
(c) There are two means of insulating bus joints for
operating voltage. There are two methods
of insulating joints, boots where applicable
and taped joints for all others. A detailed
procedure for joint insulation is described
both 4.16 kv and 13.8 kv equipment.
under "M.\IN BUS ASSEMBLY".
2- PVC(POLYVINYLCHLORIDE)bootsFig.25A.
1- Taped joints Fig. 26.
21
GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear
.
^
I-TAPED JOINTS for 13.8 KV EQUIPMENT
(1)
(2)
Prepare all joints as outlined under "CONNEC-
tions on the bus barrier.
TIONS".
IV-TAPED JOINTS for 4.16 KV EQUIPMENT
Fill all cavities around bolts and nuts with
(1)
A50H119 compound to form a smooth surface
for taping, thus preventing air voids. This
for the 13.8 equipment exceptuse 1/2 the amount
of insulating tape and use the U-311 (black
varnish). Refer to Table in Fig. 26.
compound is not an insulating medium and
should not be used for that purpose.
(3)
"T" Joint - Place 4" wide double thick Irrathene
tape over the A50H119 compound as shown in
Fig. 25. (This is not required for 4.16 joints).
(4) Wrap with insulating tape provided maintaining
tension on the tape while wrapping, as shown in
Fig. 26. Where there are sharp angles apply
additional layers to obtain equivalent of the
Insulation on the flat surfaces.
(5) Over the insulating tape, apply one layer of
glass tape, half lap as a protective covering as
shown in Fig. 26.
t6)
Over the glass tape, brush a heavy coat of U310
(brown) varnish. Varnish may "be thinned, if
necessary with XYLENE D5B9.'
(7) Replace all covers previously removed.
U-PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) BOOT
INSULATION for 13.8 KV EQUIPMENT
The instructions for the bolted joint and applica
tion of the tape insulation is the same as outlined
(2)
In unit substations, the connection bars should
be assembled in the transition compartment
(Figure 19 and 20) and the connections at the
transformer
terminals taped and painted as
indicated above.
The conduit for secondary
circuits should also be assembled in or below
the transition compartment.
CLEANING BUS INSULATION
Main bus bars are insulated with a high tem
perature thermoplastic material having excellent
dialectric and mechanical properties. When cleaning
is necessary only denatured alcohol or iso propyl
alcohol should be used to remove any foreign
materials from the insulation surface.
Paint on Porcelain; Use methylene chloride
based paint remover. Wipe off with distilled water.
Extreme care should be taken not to get any on
Noryl, compound or tape.
BUS DUCT
(1) PVC boots for 13.8 equipment can only be
applied to those assemblies furnished with the
molded bus barrier, Figure 36. This barrier
is distinguished by the raised surface around
each bus bar.
Those assemblies not furnished
with this barrier will have to be taped. See
above.
P VC boots can be applied to 13.8kv- 1000 .MVA
(2)
Bus ducts connecting between groups of metal-
clad switchgear, or between metal-clad switchgear
and other apparatus, should be installed as shown on
the arrangement drawings furnished with the ducts.
Supports should be provided as indicated on the
drawings.
All joints in the bus, including adjustable joints,
bus compartment or any elevated bus compart
ment us'ing flat, non' molded bus supports.
should be assembled and insulated as described
above for m.iin buses.
Prepare all joints as outlined under "CONNEC
vided in long runs of bus duct to allow for variations
in building construction, etc. These joints should be
TIONS".
(3) Place the PVC boot over the joint as shown
Adjustable joints are pro
loosened before installation of the duct, then tight
ened after being set in the position required by the
fixed points at the ends of the duct.
in Fig. 25A.
(4) aecure the PVC boot with self-locking fasteners
furnished. Joint insulation is now complete.
(5) Replace all covers previously removed.
(6) Boots will be furnished for standard config
urations, however special conditions must be
taped.
Outdoor bus ducts must be gasketed at the
joints between shipping sections. Coat both sides
of the flat gasket and the flanges of both duct sections
with Sterling U310 or U31I varnish before assembly.
Bolt the two duct sections together. Remove the
top cover from one duct section and place 3/8"
elastic compound bead along top of joint slightlv
overlapping the sides.
Bolt top cover in place and
fasten roof cap in place overthe joint. See Fig. 23A.
When top covers are removed after installation for
III-PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) BOOT
inspection the 3/8" elastic compound bead must
be replaced to insure a tight seal.
INSULATION for 4.16 KV EQUIPMENT
Removable front and rear covers of vertical
The instructions for the.bolted joint and applica
22
sections of bus duct must also be gasketed. Coat
tion of the PCV boot is the same as outlined for
both sides of the gasket, the flange of the duct, and
the 13.8 equipment except there are no restric
the edges of the inside surface of the cover with
Metal-clad Swichgear GEH-1802
Sterling U310 or U311 varnish before assembly. Do
not bolt these covers in place until all interior
assembly work on the duct is completed and access
will no longer be required.
Outdoor bus ducts of the
13.8 kv
class are
provided with heaters. Connect these heaters in
accordance with the wiring diagrams furnished with
the equipment before energizing the bus duct.
INSULATING PRIMARY CABLE
TERMINATIONS
Al' field assembled joints for primary cabb
terminations should be prepared as outlined unde:
"CONNECTIONS". Upon completion of the cabh
termination, care must be exercised when tapint
the exposed termination.
(1)
glass tape furnished by the factory. (2"fo:
T
5KV, 3" for 15KV).
t
•
I
I
« :
conductor insulating support to obtain prop
er insulation joint overlap. Replace suppor
I
-J
upon completion of joint. Refer to Fig. 26
I
eiST.i
It may be necessar-
to remove the current transformer primar
^ 1'
-Ac-J
'
Check to see that a sufficient area c
insulating tape extends beyond the paintC'
—•
(2) All terminations should be insulated a
outlined in table Fig. 26 for correct layer
of insulating and glass tape.
FIG. 23A
BUS DUCT GASKETS
(3)
The instructions for application of the tap
insulation
is
the
same
as outlined fo
"Taped Joints" items 1, 2, 4, 3, 6 and T
PRIMARY CABLES
The primary cable connections in indoor switchgear are reached by removing the rear bolted covers.
POTHEADS
In outdoor switchge'ar with rear enclosures the hinged
instrument panel, if present, must be swing open
and the bolted covers behind it removed.
Before any primary cable connections are made,
the cables should be identified to indicate their
phase relationship with the swltchgear connections.
This is necessary to insure that motors will rotate
in the proper direction and that the phase rotation is
the same when interconnecting two different sources
of power.
Potheads are mounted on an adapter plat
extending across the width of the metal-clad uni
as shown in Fig. 27. Where necessary the adapte
plate is split into two parts to facilitate the instal
lation of the potheads.
Three-Conductor Potheads
Installation procedures for a three-conducto
a wiping sleeve cabl
entrance fitting on the pothead is outlined in GET
28838H.
This is the type most generally usec
The factory does not furnish insulating materials fo
comi
ASO"
*
*
11-4. '
/e
ftet
^'4
> • S4»»S)
FIG. 25 (104A2714) 13.8 KV TAPED JOINTS
^£2e8ElAlI'5 MCrfi>T|6
13
2
3
4
For ungrotmded neutral use 1.33 times the di
mensions in selecting distance A. See Fig. 28 and 29.
I set .
rAAt
5
9
•
coat
8.
Build stress cone. Clean cable surface and
with G.E. No. A50P63 adhesive cement or
equivalent. When solvent evaporates, build up cone
with splicing tape GE8380 or equivalent, for length
B plus B. Between points M and P, tape is applied so
that wrapped thickness at N is equal to 75% of the
original insulation thickness - and so that the cone
tapers to zero thickness at points M and P. Apply
one layer No. 33 Scotch tape or equivalent, half
lapped. Obtain a smooth wrapping but do not stretch
tape more than necessary.
'.y
9. Pass a turn of tightly drawn braid around
e:q)Osed portion of shielding tape at point M and solder
i%^l
. ,^WA«T
•
•
•••euiA'fcC
a,*;
S90A aus** £304k TArf^frCPC
in place. Then apply shielding braid in tightly drawn
I/O inch lap wrappings to point N and spot solder.
Terminate the braid by cutting 1/2 inch beyond
soldering point. Turn down and solder loose ends
to preceding turns. Wrap four to sixtums of No. 19
<»+-• -i
AWG tinned copper wire around shielding braid and
solder. Solder ^ turns ofbraid together along three
lengthwise lines
equally spaced around braided
surface.
:
*4
10.
It
led* ttws
FIG. 25A (208A8953) 4.16 KV AND 13.8 KV BUS
INSUWTING BOOT
24
Solder ground strip over shielding tape
near cable covering.
dw^'«2£CA
Cover stress cone with one
layer No. 33 Scotch tape, half lapped. Obtain a smooth
wrapping but do not stretch tape more than necessary.
Add two layers of splicing tape.
Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-1802
11. Pencil jacket for 1/2 incii .13 .shown. Clean
surface. Take particular care in cleaning outside
jacket surface in order to entirely remove black
'
'
wax finish.
Coat with G.E. No. .\50P63 adhesive
cement or equivalent. When solvent evaporates, apply
splicing tape GE8380 or equivalent and make sheath
seal as shown on drawing. Apply one layer No. 33
Scotch tape or equivalent, half lapped. Obtain a
smooth wrapping tiut do not stretch tape more than
necessary.
12.
Over entire termination, apply two layers
When lead or other conducting sheath cable, or
cable with shielding tape or braid is used, it is
recommended that the sheath or shield be grounded
solidlv to the switchgear ground bus. The ground
lead should be bonded to the sheath or shield on the
side of the current transformer away from the
primary terminals. Incases wheretheground cannot
be applied before the cable passes through the trans
former, bond the lead to the sheath or shield between
the transformer and the primary terminals.
The
ground conductor must then be passed backalongthe
cable path through the current transformer before
of No. 33 Scotch tape or equivalent, half lapped, in
manner to shed water. Obtain a smooth wrapping but
being connected to the ground bus.
do not stretch tape more than necessary.
ground fault current transformers, the potheac
Where potheads are used in units provided with
mountings must be insulated from ground.
TERMINATION WITHOUT POTHEAD
CONTROL CABLES
MULTI-CONDUCTOR
The factory does not furnish insulating materials
for completing the primary cable terminations at the
ciamp terminal or for the stress cones. Refer to
Fig. *29 for reference.
Make termination as indicated for single-con
ductor except - substitute the following for para
graphs 10, 11 and 12;
Pencil jacket 1/2 inch. Clean surface over which
sheath
moisture seal is
to be applied.
Take
particular care in cleaning outside jacket surface
in order to entirely remove black wax finish. Coat
with G.E. No. A50P63 adhesive cement or equivalent.
Allow to dry.
Apply splicing tape GE8380 or
equivalent to make moisture seal as shown. This
is done by starting wrapping tape near end of jacket
and wrapping over ground wires for 1-1/2 inches.
Bend ground wires out and back over taping just
applied and continue applying lapped layers of tape
to completion of moisture seal including a complete
tape seal in crotch formed between the three
When control conduits enter the unit from below
the conduit should not extend more than 4 inches abovt
the floor. The control cables may be pulled througt
the conduits before or after the switchgear i.
installed, whichever is more convenient.
Connect the cables to the terminal blocks ii
accordance with the wiring diagrams furnished fo:
the requisition.
If the control conduits enter from above, dril
the top and bottom covers of the front enclosure
wiring troughto suit the conduits. Fasten the conduiti
to the bottom cover with locknuts.
The cables from the control power source to thi
switchgear should be large enoughto avoid excessivi
voltage drop when the circuit breakers are operated
See testing instructio.is.
Where units have been split for shipment, ancontrol or other secondarv leads which must connec
Bond and ground the ground wires.
across the split will be arranged with terminal block
in the cross trough or convenient side sheet so tha
For a multi-conductor cable not having ground
to length and formed before being folded back so tha
conductors.
wires,
the individual terminations should have
grounding strips applied as for a single-conductor
termination. These grounding strips are to be
joined together to a common ground. This common
ground must then be grounded.
GROUND FAULT CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
(THROUGH-TYPE)
Thr jugh-type current transformers (See Fig. 27)
are furnished where specified for sensitive protection
against ground faults. These transformers are nor
mally installed in a horizontal position directly above
or below the primary cable terminals, so that the
primary cable or cables can pass through them. One
transformer is required for each three-phase circuit.
Where armored cable is used, the armor must
be terminated and grounded before the cable passes
through the transformer. Armor clamps are fur
nished for this purpose when specified.
the wires can be reconnected. The wires will be cu
a minimum of time will be required for reconnectin
them.
GROUND BUS
The ground bus is bolted to the rear of the fram
near the bottom. It is arranged so that connection
to the station ground can be made in any unit. Wher
the equipment is shipped in more than one group, th
sections of ground bus must be connected by usin
the splice plates furnished with the equipment
Assemble the ground bus joints as outlined 'onde
"CONNECTIONS"' (Page 19). Ground bus connection
are made in the lo-«'/er portion of the cable entranc
comnartment. The switchgear ground bus must b
connected to the station ground bus by a conducto
having a current carrying capacity equal to that c
the switchgear ground bus. It is very important ths
•the equipment be adequately grounded to protect th
operator from injury when short circuits or othe
abnormal occurrences take place and to insure the
all parts of the equipment, other than live parts
are at ground potential.
25
GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
^
It will be the responsibility of the purchaser to
provide suitable lightning arresters to protect the
switchgear from damage due to lightning. The
General Electric Company's recommendations as to
the types of circuits requiring lightning protection,
and a list of recommended lightning arresters, are
contained in Bulletin GER-141 copies of which are
available upon request.
When lightning arresters are furnished the
,ROOF
primary cable terminal will be insulated at the
factory unless it must be disconnected for shipment.
When this connection is completed in the field it will
be necessary to insulate the primary connection
before the switchgear is energized.
TAPE OVER F/Rsr
RlWe Oh/LY
ROOF ENTRANCE BUSHING
When assembling the connection bar end of roof
entrance bushings inside of the switchgear and other
terminations where porcelain insulators are used,
insulation should be applied as follows:
(1)
Prepare the connection bars as outlined
IRMTHfNE AND
(JIASS TAPE
_2'- SHV.
ASOHin
3'-ISM
COMPOU/VO
under "CONNECTIONS".
(2)
Fill all cavities around the contact nuts and
connection bars with A50H119 compound.
Form a smooth surface for taping*, thus
preventing air voids. The compound is not
an insulating medium and should not be used
for that purpose.
FIG. 25B TAPING OF ROOF ENTRANCE TERMINATION
(3) Wrap joint with insulating tape provided,
maintaining tension on the tape while wrap
ping as shown in Fig. 26 where there are
sharp angles apply additional layers to
obtain equivalent of the insulation on the flat
END
OP C1A2S TAPE
eto at
-LASS
4„»iC
"•
!3Z -'•oe
surfaces.
i4) Over the insulating tape, apply one layer of
glass tape, half lap as a protective covering
as shown in Fig. 26.
(5) Over the glass tape, brush a heavy coat of
U-310 brown (for 15kv) or U-311 black
(for 5kv), varnish. See Fig. 253.
INSULATZOH UYEHSISCTE *.)
INSDUITZON
ISVEL
I'202
vcn 2
CLASS
KOTE ?
STSHLZKO
0
FOOOV
T-111
*
I
I5.C00V
•
34..500V
pAiirr
APPLT ONE
COAT LaEnALLY
1
'
WAflt
'
STERLIKO
0*310 6R0UN
!
MOTE I:
*•202 Te.ce
• cne Upvr. wound 2/3 l«p reouirea 3 tumt around Oar
In one wiatn of tape. Cna layer tnicKneaa te 3 Stsaa tape thtetmasa.
• Cne layer, wound X/Z lap reoutree 2 tuma around bar in
ana width of tape.
One layer thtekneaa la 2 tlsea tape thleknaaa.
KOTE 2:
Irrathene *202. width 1 1/2" thiekneaa 0.010*.
Keep tenalon on
tape at all ttmea while appiyins.
von 3:
slaaa '.2L12B
26
idth 1 1.'2" thtekneaa O.OCV".
1
GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear
^CABLE LUQ
SPLlClMCa TAPE
Cb.E.8BBO OR EaUIV.
EWD SEAL
CABLE
IWSULATIOW
N9 BB SCOTCH
TAPE OR
EQUIV.
SHIELDIMG
BRWD (HAMD
APPUED)
CABLE SHIELDING
TAPE
,j^.^Nja33 SCOTCH
TAPE OR EQUW.
^AOISTURE SEAL
SPLICING TAPE
&.E.a380 CR EQUIV.
GROUND WIRES
CROUWD AT
ADJACENT
FRANCE
MEMBER
CABLE JACKET^
FIG. 29 (B232004C) TERMINATION WITHOUT POTHEAD MULTI-CONDUCTOR
28
Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-1802
DOOR ALIGNMENT
If for anv reason it is necessary to realign the
'^oors of metal-clad switchgear daring installation
the procedure given in the following paragraphs
should be followed.
After checking that the switchgear is level and
plumb as described above, start at either end of
the switchgear lineup and realign each door individ
ually as required.
must be set by the purchaser. General instructions
on setting the relavs are given in the relay instruc
tion books. Special instruction books are furnished
for complicated automatic equipments, describ.'.ng
the sequence of operation of the devices required to
perform the desired function.
When transformers are furnished to supply the
control power, the primary taps should be selected
so tlut the control voltage indicated on the wiring
diagram is obtained on the secondary of the trans
former. Wh-en a battery is used to supply the contro.
The top of each door should be level with the
power, the cables from the battery to theswitchgear
surface of each door flush with the adjacent doors;
drop. The voltage at the terminals of the breaker
clos-in" coils, when the breaker is being closed,
adjacent doors; the sides of each door plumb; the
and the space between adjacent doors equalized to
permit their free swing and present a neat appear
ance. The door stops should be adjusted to permit
a door swing of approximately 105®.
Doors may be raised or lowered vertically, or
moved forward or backward horizontally, by loos
ening the hinee mounting nuts on the left side sheet
and shifting the hinae and door assembly as allowed
by the slotted holes in itie hinge.
Doors may be shifted to the right or left by
adding or removing washers or shims from between
the hinge and side sheet.
Doors may be plumbed by slightly banding the
appropriate hinges. To do this, open the door and
should be large enough to avoid excessive voltage
should"not be less than 112.5 volts for 125 volt coils
and 225 volts for 250 volt coils.
The operation of the breaker with its associated
devices' may be tested in the unit w.hile the e^aipment is energized by use of the test coupler which is
furnished.
SOLENOID OPERATED BREAKER
Lower the breaker to the test or down position.
Attach the test coupler to connect the breaker second
ary disconnecting device to that on the structure.
STORED ENERGY OPERATED BREAKER
insert a drift pin in either of the two holes in the
Lower the breaker to the down position and with
draw the breaker 2 1/4" until a notch in the spring
door to the right, and pushing back will move the
the test coupler to connect the breaker secondary
hinge. Pulling forward on the drift pinwill move the
door to the left. .Adjust each hinge individually as
required to plumb the door.
When properlv aligned, the doors of outdoor
switchgear should be tightly seated on the gasket all
around.
After aligning such doors, close and latch
the door and check the seal by running a 3 x 5'
card, shipping tag, IBM card, or some similar card
around the edge of the door.
If the card will pass
between the door and the gasket, the door is
imnroperly adjusted, and should be readjusted until
the* card will no longer pass through.
TESTING AND
INSPECTION
After the equipment has been installed and all
connections mt.de, it should be tested and inspected
before putting in service. Although the equipme-it
and devices have been completely tested at the
factory, a final field test should be made to be sure
that the equipment has been properly installed and
tha' all connections are correct and have not become
loose in transportation. The primary equipment
should be comjiletely de-energized while the tests
are in progress, dee installation.
Directions for testing devices such as relays,
instruments and meters are given in the instruction
book furnished for each device. The settings of the
protective relays must be coordinated with the other
relavs on the system and therefore these relays
discharge cam releases thebreaker interlock. Attach
disconnecting device to that on the structure.
High potential tests to check the integrity of the
insulation are not necessary if the insulation instructio.is in this book are carefully followed. Should the
purchaser desire to make high potevntial tests, the
test voltage should not exceed 14kv A. C. for 4.16kv
and 27kv A. C. for 13.8 equipments. These voltages
are 75% offactory test voltages and are in accordance
with A.NSI standards.
Potential transformers and control power trans
formers must be disconnected during high voltage
testing.
OPERATION
The operation of metal-clad switchgear is
similar to that of other types except that it provides
m'^ximum safetv to the operator and the feature of
easy removal and replacementof the circuit breaker.
All circuit bre.aker removable elements of the
same type and rating whichhave duplicate wiring may
be interchanged.
BREAKER POSITIONING
To place the breaker in the operating position,
proceed as given below.
The elevating mechanism is accurately leveled
29
GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear
a:id checked at the factory and should need no adjust
breaker must be open before the crank can be inserted
ment. Do not install or remove the breaker or make
and held in the clutch coupling.
adjustments unless the breaker is open.
Rub a small amount of contact lubricant D50H47
on the silvered portion of the breaker studs to form
a thin coating of contact purposes.
breaker studs and the stationary disconnecting
devices.
Lower the elevating mechanism lifting brackets
until the lifting brackets are in the fully lowered
position. The breaker should then enter the housing
(a) Each segment of the stationary disconnect
ing device should make a heavy impression in the
freely. .After first assuring that the breaker is in the
Contact wipe should start not less than 1; 8" from top
open position, push the breaker into the unit until it
rests against the rear of the front lifting saddle of
the elevating mechanism.
The clearance between the interference block on
the breaker and the interference block on the inter
lock lock mechanism '.view X-X Figure 29)shouldbe
from 1/16" to 1/8". At this point the breaker positive
contact
lubricant
D30H47 on the breaker studs.
of the contact ball although each contact need not
start at the same location. See Fig. II.
(b)
The penetration of the breaker stud inside
the stationary disconnecting device, as* indicated by
the contact lubricant D50H47, should be 3/4" to
7/8". See Fig. 11. This indicates that the breaker
stads contacted at the full pressure center of the
interlock roller should be centered in the bottom
silver band on the stationary disconnecting device.
To elevate the breaker, operate the elevating
that the breaker is not being raised to the proper
"VEE" of the interlock cam plate.
control selector switch on the elevating motor to
"RAIhE". .A clutch handle just above the elevating
motor (Clutch handle is under the elevating motor
in the 1003 M\'A Unit) is then pulled forward until
a motor limit switch closes and the motor clutch
engages to raise the breaker in the unit. Carefully
raise the breaker and while elevating note that the
shutter slides open and the breaker studs center
with respect to the openings in the stationary
disconnecting devices or injury to the contacts may
'
After the breaker is lowered and withdrawn from
the unit inspect the contact surfaces of both the
^ result.
The clutch handle is held in the forward position
until a limit switch on the structure opens to stop
the motor at the end of the upward travel of the
breaker. The springs will charge.
The motor selector switch must not be used to
energize or interrupt the motor circuit at any time.
When the breaker is fully elevated the clearance
between the breaker lifting rail and the upper stop
bolts should not be more than 1/8" and not less than
3/32".
The positive interlock roller should be centered
in the upper "VEE" and the interlock roller should
have 1/16" clearance to the stationary interference
plate directly under it.
To lower the breaker, proceed the same as for
raising except
operate the selector switch to
"LOWER". The clutch must be held in the engaged
position; otherwise, a spring will return it to its
normal position, opening the electrical circuit to the
motor.
The breaker may be raised or lowered by an
(c) Should the inspection of the contacts show
position, readjust the upper stop bolts and limit
switches to raise or lower the breaker to the proper
location.
Lock the stop bolts in the new position.
(d) If proper contacting cannot be attained by the
above methods, additional adjustments will be nec
essary.
DO .\0T MAKE ANY AD-JUSTMENT. COMMUNI
CATE WITH THE NEAREST GENERAL ELECTRIC
CO OFFICE
FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
POSITIVE INTERLOCK
GENERAL
The positive interlock functions to prevent
raising or lowering a breaker except when the
primary contacts are open. It also prevents closing
primary contacts when the breaker is being raised
or lowered by blocking the operating mechanism
mechanically and electrically.
POSITIVE INTERLOCK ASSEMBLY FOR
SOLENOID OPERATE BREAKERS
To place the breaker in the operating position,
proceed as given below. The elevating mechanism is
accurately leveled and checked at the factory and
should require no adjustment. Do not install or
remove the breaker or make adjustments unless the
breaker primary contacts are open.
Lower the elevating mechanism lifting brackets
until the lifting brackets are in the fully lowered
position. The breaker should then enter the housing
freely. After first assuring that the breaker primary
contacts are in the open position, insert the breaker
emergency hand crank which can be inserted after
into the unit until it rests against the rear of the
front lifting saddle of the elevating mechanism.
the motor, pull the clutch forward and insert the
The interlock should be checked to see that the
removable element is obstructedfrom being raised to
or lowered from the operating oosition when the
removing the motor. The motor is removed by unlatching the motor assembly from its support and
disconnecting the motor lead plug. After removing
manual crank into the end of the clutch coupling. The
30
primary contacts are closed.
Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-1802
before proceeding with this check it b
NECESSARY THAT THE PRIMARY CIRCUITS BE
de-energized.
Using the maintenance closing device, close
the breaker and snap the selector switch to "RAISE"
position and pull the clutch handle forward. Move
ment must be stopped bv the breaker interlock
Elevate the breaker to the raised position ana
electrically close the breaker. The positive inter
lock should be checked to see that the removable
element is obstructed from being lowered from the
operating position.
Snap the selector switch to "LOWER" position
and pull the clutch handle forward. A definite stop
close and before the sliding clutch and motor
should be encountered preventing the motor circuit
limit switch from energizing the motor circuit anc
positive interlock is blocked by the breaker inter
the sliding clutch and the motor connector when the
roller before the contacts of the motor limit switch
connector engage. A minimum of 1/16" should be
maintained between the two clutch parts when the
lock roller, see Fig. 15 for dimension.
Trip the breaker manually and elevate to_ the
operating position. AGAINITISEMPHASIZEDTHjVT
THE PRIM.-1RY CIRCUITS MUST BE DE-ENER
GIZED BEFORE M^^KING THIS CHECK OF THE
POSITIVE INTERLOCK.
lowering the breaker.
A minimum of 1/16" mustbe maintained between
positive interlock is blocked by the breaker inter
lock roller. See Fig. 15 for dimension. Trip toe
breaker manually and lower the breaker to toe fully
lowered position. During the last 1/4" of travel the
spring discharge cam will discharge the storec
energy springs and maintain the breaker trip free
as long as the breaker remains in the unit. If the
Electrically close the breaker. Snap the selector
interlock does not function as indicated above
switch to "LOWER" position andpuU the clutch handle
forward, .\eain, a definite stop should be encountered
DO NOT MAKE ANY ADJUSTMENT. COMMUNI
CATE WITH THE NEAREST GENERAL ELECTRIC
CO. OFFICE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
preventing "the motor circuit limit switch from
energizing the motor circuit and lowering the
breaker.
If the interlock does not fimction as indicated
above DO NOT MAKE ANY AD.IUSTMIINT. COM
MUNICATE WITH THE NEAREST GENERAL ELEC
TRIC CO. OFFICE FOR ADDITIONAL INSTRUC
TIONS.
STATIONARY AUXILIARY SWITCH
On units equipped with stationary auxiliai"
switches (Fig. 30A) toe clearance between the endo:
the switch mechanism operating rod and the operating
plunger on toe circuit breaker should be 0 to 1/8'
POSITIVE INTERLOCK ASSEMBLY FOR
STORED ENERGY
To place the breaker in the operating position,
proceed as given below. The elevating mechanism is
accurately leveled and checked at the factory and
should require no adjustment. Do not install or
remove the breaker or make adjustments unless the
breaker primary contacts and or closing springs
are discharged.
with the circuit breaker in the raised and opei
position.
Any adjustment in this dimension must be midt
on the auxiliary switch setting. Care should be take:
to prevent destroying interchangeability of the circui
breaker by excessive adjustment.
A stationary auxiliary switch test position lin:
is furnished as an accessory for use when the circui
breaker is in the test position.
Lower the elevating mechanism lifting brackets
until toe lifting brackets are in the fully lowered
position. The breaker should then enter the housing
freely. After first assuring that the breaker primary
contacts are in the open position, insert the breaker
into the unit until it rests against the rear of the
front lifting saddle of toe elevating mechanism.
SPRING DISCHARGE CAM
The spring discharge cam is mounted on the lei
hand side of toe unit and operates in conjunction wit;
a spring discharge interlock on the breaker.
BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THIS CHECK IT IS
NECESSARY THAT THE PRIMARY CIRCUITS BE
When entering a breaker into a unit, to elevate
to the operating position, the spring discharge can
DE-ENERGIZED.
will hold the breaker interlock trip free and to
When entering a breaker into a unit for eleva
ting the spring discharge cam (on toe left hand
side of toe unit) will hold toe breaker interlock
trip free and the closing springs discharged imtil
toe breaker is 1/4" off the breaker floor rail.
(See detailed description of Spring Discharge Cam
under separate heading).
off the floor rails. At this point toe positive interloc;
AGAIN IT IS EMPHASIZED THAT THE PRIMARY
CIRCUITS MUST BE DE-ENERGIZED BEFORE
MAKING THIS CHECK OF THE POSITIVE INTER
LOCK.
closing springs discharged until the breaker is 1/4
is blocking toe spring cliarging and closing circui
open.
When lowering the breaker from toe operatin
position the breaker must be open before toe elevatin.
mechanism can be operated. While the breake
is being lowered the springs are still charged bu
toe positive interlock blocks the breaker fror.
closing. When the breaker is about 1/4" from th
floor rails the spring discharge interlock hold,
the breaker trip free, discharges the closing spring:
GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear
and holds them discharged so long as the breaker
tion on the breaker frame will interfere with the unit
stop plate when an attempt is made to insert an
remains in its unit.
incorrect breaker into the unit.
To operate the breaker in the test position it is
pulled forward, (out of the unit) about 2 1/4" until
a notch in the spring discharge cam releases the
breaker interlock and the breaker can be operated
manually, or, by assembling the test coupler,
electrically.
In the test position a mechanical
block prevents operating the elevating mechanism.
The breaker rating should be checked against the
unit rating and under no circumstances should the
interference stop be removed to allow the breaker to
be inserted.
TRANSFER TRUCKS
If after test operations the breaker is left closed
and/or its closing springs charged, it will be auto
Circuit breaker transfer trucks are furnished
matically tripped and held trip free while the springs
are discharged when it is reinserted in; or while
with
being withdrawn from its unit.
maintenance areas. The platform at the front end of
the transfer truck is adjustable in height. See Fig. 8,
view A, for instructions for adjustment. The truck
is equipped with two latches, one to hold the breaker
KEY LOCKS
Key locks for breaker units can be furnished
when requested.
The purpose of this device is to prevent a
breaker from being closed in the connected position
when the lock key is removed from the lock. The
key lock consists of a metal support and key lock
moimted on the top plate flange and adjacent to the
elevating motor clutch.
outdoor
on the truck and one to hold the truck to the metal-
clad switchgear unit.
Both latches engage auto
matically, and both are released by a single T-shaped
foot pedal on the rear of the truck. Depressing the
left side of the pedal unlatches the truck from the
switchgear unit, and depressing the right side of the
pedal unlatches the breaker from the truck. Trucks
can be stored in breaker unit when breaker is in
operating position.
To operate the key lock if the breaker is in the
disconnected or test position the clutch handle is
pulled forward allowing the key lock bolt to extend
in back of the clutch handle. The key lock key can
then be removed.
If the breaker is in the connected position the
breaker must first be opened.
Snap the selector switch to the "off" position.
The clutch handle can then bepulled forward allowing
the key lock bolt to extend in back of the clutch handle.
The key lock key can then be removed. With the
clutch handle pulled forward the positive interlock
cam plate has rotated the circuit breaker positive
interlock shaft so as to mechanically and electrically
block the breaker from closing.
To lower the breaker, snap the selector switch
to "LOWER", pull the clutch forward and lower the
breaker to the test position.
The key lock does not prevent operation of the
breaker in the test position. However, if the breaker
is elevated to the connected position the key lock will
prevent its closing until the key is returned and the
lock reset. See Fig. 15.
BREAKER INTERFERENCE STOPS
Stops are provided in the breaker unit to prevent
the insertion of a breaker with a 1200A continuous
current rating into a unit with a 2000A rating and
vice-versa.
.
The stop plate is bolted to the left hand unit frame
angle near the floor of all breaker units. A projec
32
metal-clad switchgear to facilitate
moving of circuit breakers from unit to unit or to
SPACE HEATERS
Space heaters are provided in all outdoor equip
ment in order to keep the inside temperature several
degrees higher than that outside. Heaters are also
furnished for indoor equipment when it is known that
abnormal atmospheric conditions exist at the instal
lation, or when specified by the purchaser.
By maintaining a slight temperature differential,
the heaters help facilitate drying and prevent con
densation and the resulting corrosion and insulation
deterioration which might occur.
Heaters are normally located at the sides of the
breaker units, a few inches above the floor. In
auxiliary compartments with a single rollout, the
heaters will be in a space above the rollout. In
auxiliary compartments with two rollouts, the heater
will be in a space between the rollouts. Heaters may
also be located in superstructure compartments,
transition compartments, and in bus ducts if the
operating conditions require them.
Before energizing the heaters, be sure the power
source is of the proper voltage, frequency, and phase
arrangement, and is connected in accordance with
the wiring diagrams furnished with the equipment.
Also, be sure to remove all cartons and miscellaneous
material packed inside the units before energizing the
heaters.
Heaters should be visually inspected several
times
a
year to make sure they are operating
properly.
It is recommended that the heaters be energized
at all times and that thermostatic control not be used.
Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-1802
If thermostaiic control is used, the contacts ^ the
thermostat should be set to close between
and
operation is not initiated.
The switchgear structure, bus duct, andconnec
lOO'F on falling temperature, de-energizing the
heaters only when strong sunlight beats on the
tions should be given the following overall main
thermostat be used to control the heaters because
1. Thoroughly clean the equipment, removing
all dust and other accumulations. Wipe clean the
buses and supports. Inspect the buses and connections
in the switchgear.
the insulation.
switchgear. Under no condition should a differential
under conditions of extremely high humidity this
type of thermostat will not operate at all times to
keep the heaters on enough to prevent condensation
MAINTENANCE
A regular maintenance schedule should be
established to obtain the best service and reliability
from the switchgear or bus duct. Plant operating
and local conditions will dictate the frequency of
inspection required. For specific information re
garding the maintenance of devices, such as circuit
breakers, relays, meters, etc., refer tothesepa^te
instruction book furnished for each device.
The
inspection cabinet, which is furnished, provides a
tenance at least annually.
carefully for evidence of overheating orweakemng of
2 Measure the resistance to groimd and
between 'phases of the insulaUon of buses ^d
connections. Since definite limitscannot begiven for
satisfactory insulation resistance values, a record
must be kept of the reading. We^eiung of^
insulation from one maintenance period to the ne^
can be recognized from the recorded readings. The
readings should be taken under simUar conditions
each time if possible, and toe record should include
the temperature and humidity.
relays do not operate, therefore, it is import^t to
check the operation of these devices regularly.
Hieh potential tests are not required, but if it
repairs, the test voltage should Mt
exceed 141cv A. C. for 4.16kv and 27kv A.C. for 13.8
A permanent record of all maintenance work
operating conditions. In any event, it will be a
Potential transformers andcontrol power trans
formers must be disconnected during high voltage
convenient means for maintaining the
circuit
breakers. Under normal conditions the protective
should be kept, the degree of detail depending oa the
valuable reference for subsequent maintenance work
seems advisable, based on the insulation resistance
equipments. These voltages are 75% of factory test
voltages and are in accordance with ANSI standards.
and for station operation. It is recommended that
the record include reports of tests made, the
condition of equipment and repairs and adjustments
testing.
that were made.
#D50H15 or equal.
BEFORE ANY COVERS ARE REMOVED OR ANY
DOORS OPENED WHICH PERMIT ACCESS TO THE
PRIMARY CIRCUITS, IT IS ESSENTIAL T|^T TOT
CIRCUIT OR CIRCUITS BE DE-ENERGIZED A^
BREAKERS BE WITHDRAWN TOADISCONNECTED
POSITION AND TAGGED.
3
Clean elevating mechanism and lubricate
jack screws and gears with lubricant G.E. Co.
4 Check primary disconnecting device
contacts for signs of abnormal wear or overheating.
Clean contacts with silver polish. Discoloration
of the silvered surfaces is not ordinarily harmful
unless atmospheric conditions cause deposits such
as sulphides on the contacts. If necessary the
deposits can be removed with a good grade of
IF WORK IS TO BE DONE ON REMOTE EQUIP
MENT CONNECTED TO A UNIT, THE BREAKER
FOR THAT UNIT SHOULD BE PLACED IN THE
silver polish.
THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE ISOLATED
FROM ANY OTHER POWER SOURCES CONNECTED
lubrication.
TO IT.
bolts 'in the structure are tight. Check tightness
and continuity of all control connections and wirmg.
DISCONNECTED POSITION AND TAGGED. AI^O
The primary circuits of metal-clad switchgear
are insulated in order to reduce the size of the equip
ment. However, this insulation, except in one or
two instances, requires a certain amount of air gap
between phases and to ground to complete the
insulation.
Inserting any object in this air space,
Before replacing breaker, apply a thm coat
of contact lubricant D50H47 to breaker studs for
5
Check to see that all anchor bolts and
6
If toe switchgear is equipped with heaters,
check' to see that all heaters are energized and
operating.
7.
All filters should be inspected and cleanec
when equipment is ener^zed, whether it be a tool
or a part of the body, may under certain conditions,
or replaced once a year.
cause serious damage or injury or both.
acrylic paint finish, blue gray ASA #24, providing
in effect, short circuit this air gap and may cause a
breakdown in the primary circuit to ground and
Care should be exercised in the maintenance and
checking procedures that accidental tripping or
OUTDOOR ACRYLIC PAINT FINISH
The outside of standard outdoor switchgear has
imoroved resistance to all atmospheric conditions,
loiter life and less maintenance than with ordinary
33
• ·. GEB-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear
B.
paint finishes.
If it is desired to refinish acrylic painted
'· switchgear, it is necessary to use one of the following
procedures in order to secure the best adhesion
of the paint to the original finish.
a,,,.,.,.
'
A.
Refinishi
with Acrvlic Paint. It is recom
mended tffiat renrusfilng be done with DuPont
acrylic paint of the desired color. Obtain
materials and instructions for application from
the DuPont Company.
Refinishing with Alkvd or OU Base Paints. Two
methods are recommended:
1.
Spray one sealer coat of DuPont 233E75300
or equivalent which has been reduced to
spraying viscosity with DuPont 37692 or
37666 thinner. Air dry for one hour. Apply
alkyd or oil base paint.
2.
Spray one sealer coat of Arco 214-806
primer which has been reduced to spraying
viscosity with Xylol. Air dry for one hour.
Apply alkyd or oil base paint.
OVE.RLAP
.i +o
! _s-x,
ME.TAL CLAD
FRAME ANGLE.�
-C
·x·
.l
1
}1� I
�·1- 1:0
Bl A 1 l4
tJJfl
SICTION K-K
rote's
AFTER ASM « AOJUSTMBNTOF MOTOR SUPr R2.
/S^CRIND EXCESS STUO UENCTHfOT. 2) FLUSH TO
^the nut. to provide safe clearance for
' D ®/i
Sieexep
BY TH6///TSitLOUi
,?0LL£A
' Lij'V-i'
_
i/C • Eff.'V
-«-a
UMS[ntoYMf»Ae}
4«R#^7W Lu^S^Jtu^
.•S7
rn
f.ei''. l^t^nKZ. on
wASPPE
NA«l P73
vM jAt "} Ao^oor^en etn. re
JA^-n /-jztf & faoMre^eA0H£
'"o VceusAir i.
Ton»»ltA"> O'
rttMnntf"
»B"'
~
Fmwts
#*4«« JMMf \
ms*f^
•
I
t-i-'
^
iwiiBcnoiB ran witive imtciiuicic *ttUBiwiiT
Iniirt trMMT flitn* and raiaa to lan at iMwi. TOo elaaraect
too araaaar tlatjjra twnortln; rail and tlia ttoo
tolti tiwiild not aa laia Oiao 3/31" and aotn tldat to at atuai. Sat fiiUra Intarlaek at V aotltian. Shtocao uaMft
e~3 to oalatatna I0-7/8" t
diaantlao batoaan tna back of tna llftlno taadia and tba front of tna intarlock cao
Dtata Indleatod at "n*. Alta adlvtt tar a I/IC" elaartnea to ftitiira rolltr at •*". witJi boitt at
Ioom. allow «•
A-*to ratt an ttao "f". Sat naodla F-/a to tntt oradit F-J It rtrtleal. Ilqbtto aolu at "S . Aftar tlqlttao^ baltt.
lock taeiirair wit# a Jano nut. Raima flitura Intarlock oin. Adjutt ttrtkar A -6
to
'"••''.•"IJ?',,
data In tita latt k" of tartlcal tra»al of eaa. Flatiro Intarlock roller nitt tndlcata batwaan I3» and iBj idian
Mtor twlun cloia. wian nandla p-ti It In fonard aatltlon and eluien * f P-7 fully anqajad. oint E
clottli P-7, Set fiitara Interlock In 130 ootltlan. ootrata unit Interlock! marmt autt ba ttoaaad ay tna
Interlock roller aaforc conacti of oottr twitcn clota and oafora eluun x g P-7 toqtqa. lower erMkar
Intvloek pin am aaarau unit Intarlaek: black "F" on eaa mt ottt in front of block C on
IM Intarfaranea bl«k on tna braakar flitura and tna Intarfaranea bl*k on tna intarlock can Attanoly i^ld
1/i" naliia. ro*a flataro out of noutmq to a onint tnat block "B" It oiar black F:. Oamto unit
Sat flktura interlock In S» ootltion, braakor intarlaek roller nutt ba eontarad In tna unit can « "ttb.
IimuJI
*i'tura
M•!/« to ^
anoaqa block "6" ana tna isitnant of cao bafora conuctt In ootor twlun clota. For
interlock foliar
In 13® ootltion, w.and........
aovo flitura
Into tna noutlnq. Osmta unit l^lact ^ wlUna elutcn oaMla
.w . . . .
w. .«• ii.ukww fiitum Intarlaek roller bafora tna contact! of tna •otcr
flpttm
'1? '
ttivwit of Inttrlpck cm biic t« ittpocd ^ tlit ftratktr fUturt Inurlock roU^
wt cnrt btfcr* tftt sHdln^ cluttft p^7
«•
tnJT;r.;i£J U-bi.ikid-|!,"«.i flituro lnt».|ock roll«-
FIG. 29B (829C0463) POSITIVE INTERLOCK ASSEMBLY FOR 1000 M.V.A.
35
GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear
�,
IO
Jlll.LHI ,:-+! � !Z-..
11
1
• L!..· ..
I
--- -.J
'
!
__
...
,__._
.....
"",.;""
-I
..,.
-=·
I
I
I
�
..,,..,.
___
')(
..:
-�
NI
;::ii
-·....·
1-
.\" i
...!�
:o
e""lll
,�"'·"� ,�
::.,
9. •
�-li
\
l@
i�
-
�,:
��
... Z'
..�1... ::i!
�1
.....
.:$
";'f
���
FIG. 29C (6519802) POSITIVE INTERLOCK ASSEMBLY FOR STD AM-2.4 ANO 4.6
Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-18C
3» 'f*
Q
UJ
z):
1
v^/
0)1
U)l
-r-
.§)
01 I
Si —
t" "
t
— —-^ j
•
•>^1
«. --"•!
1 t. ?•>
»!}*
S
Si *
1 1
0-7Cjt-'
:u.
Xft /
"» 2 r %! •>
''
.''''
£> J
.••S2S
I.I^oiSs^lsijsi'ratk
• oSSJSaStS-o*
• «
5|l?Ki:r:=55l55fs
,3S£j«
StSSVOSS
I i 2s3^*^
"s5si5-ij
^s2rs%!-ssr2|£vil°5
^ Ch
« 0*
3 »|
r^Z. :a-«
xSa
.S-SS-!
s.igrs55«"""
aSC
a ao
a-2^? ."s. .stviSsag.i?
-i2sr3TSa3'f2ss?'s|"s
»a!f-slss-.'ss-;-
s''o'5-";»- sscssas ~
——
^ i f J! .L «« • c « y <•«»i ••-"lo?—
^ ^
-»?"ss3tS
«
' V:^
'''U' C'
(»•
^
«
•'
IJAMl K i t
:sasa<-^j7s;i-3;'3S
- r - t .23"..'ss«
SSS'3 3St
S.:--''*5S..i:
•£r'5-=S':s:S»2!s43 2'»
s-oftsggsj-.a. :lczs
.233' i-Ci"SS"'^" S-.
i .^C-*5l!SSf-6C-oS"'5
9
«23. i-s «,.,
;nsas3:n6||23g-^2
iVL-^r-ssialfjg'is
2 e-t t J r s J r:
tirWafA ^/?-4
-55
vj
•y
* •? ♦59 k ^9!* ^ 1 &??«
w-
?«:•.
22-2
|!
»S
9
5fiSfSs;::sa:e33|-S
.8328:23223:15 ||Jl5
\''J
FIG. 29D {265C0235) POSITIVE INTERLOCK ASSEMBLY FOR M-36
GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear
RENEWAL PARTS
ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS
1. RENEWAL PARTS SHOULD BE ORDERED FROM THE SWITCHGEAR PRODUCTS DEPARTMENT.
2. ALWAYS SPECIFY THE REQUISITION NUMBER ON WHICH THE EQUIPMENT WAS ORIGINALLY
FURNISHED.
3. SPECIFY THE QUANTITY. REFERENCE NUMBER, DESCRIPTION AND THIS BULLETIN NUMBER.
4. STANDARD HARDWARE, SUCH AS SCREWS, BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS, ETC., IS NOT LISTED. SUCH
ITEMS SHOULD BE PURCHASED LOCALLY.
5. FOR PRICES, REFER TO THE NEAREST OFFICE OF THE GENER.-\L ELECTRIC COMPANY.
6. IF INSULATING M.^TERIAL, SUCH AS TAPE, VARNISH, COMPOUND, ETC., IS REQUIRED, IT MUST
BE SPECIFIED SEPARATELY.
7. IF PARTS LISTED SEPARATELY ARE TO BE ASSEMBLED AT THE FACTORY, ORDER MUST SO
bTATH •
8. NOT ALL PARTS LISTED HEREIN WILL BE USED ON ANY ONE EQUIPMENT. PARTS NOT USED IN
ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT SHOULD NOT BE ORDERED AS RENEWAL PARTS.
PRIMAHY DISCONNECT DEVICES
iSEE FIG. NO. Ill
REF.
NO.
DESCRIPTION
S
Front Primary Disconnect Device
Assembly, 3 Pole, Complete with
Connections
6
1Rear Primary Disconnect Device
1Assembly, 3 Pole, Complete with
;Conneciions
NOTE: Insulating material required lor
Ref. Nos. a and 6 will be furnished
with oroer.
POSITIVE MECHANICAL INTERLOCK
(FIG. NO. 30A)
REF. NO. I
DESCRIPTION
3
Complete positive mechanical
4
interlock assembly
Elevating mechanism motor
(llS-v Q-C)
4
Elevating mechanism motor
(230-v d-c)
4
Elevating mechanism motor
(230-v d-cl
18
Spring only
FIG. 30A VIEW SHOWING ELEVATING MECHANISM MOTOR AND CONTROL UNIT
38
INSTRUCTIONS
AND
GEH-1802V
RECOMMENDED PARTS
FOR
Supersedes
GEH-1802U & GEF-3837
MAINTENANCE
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR
Types
M26 and IVI36
FOR MAGNE-BLAST AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER
TYPES AM.4.I6
AND
AM-13.8
SWITCHGEAR PRODUCTS DEPARTMEIMT
GENERAL® ELECTRIC
PHILAOELFHIA. PA.
GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
PAGE
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig, 3
Fig, 4
Fig, 5
Fig. 6
Fig, 7
Fig. 8
Fig, 9
Fig. 10
Fig, 11
Fig. 12
Fig. 13
Fig. 14
Fig. 15
Fig, 16
Fig, 17
Fig. 18
Fig. 19
Fig. 20
Fig. 22
Fig. 23
FiJ. 23A
Fig. 24
Fig. 25
Fig. 25A
Fig. 25B
Fig. 26
Fig. 27
Fig. 28
Fig. 29
Fig, 29A
Typical Indoor Metal-clad Switchgear Equipment .............••••........ ..............................
Typical Outdoor Metal-clad Switchgear Equipment - Front View .............•.......... ...........
Typical Outdoor Metal-clad Switchgear Equipment With Protected Aisle - Side View.........
4
4
4
Installation Details for Indoor Metal-clad Switchgear ...... .... .......... ............... ..........•••••
Installation Details for Outdoor Metal-clad Switchgear ...................•••......................••••
Jnstalfatibn Details for Outdoor Metal-clad Switchgear With Protected Aisle ...................
Metal-clas Switchgear
Measu!'ement of Adjustment of Primary Disconnecting Devices .. ......... ..... .....................
Potential Tra.'ISformer Rollout Shown in Withdrawn Position .........................................
6
8
10
11
12
12
Padlocking Arrangement, Key Interlocking and Bus Boot Assembly.................................
Control Power Transformer Rollout Shown in Open Position.........................................
Outdoor Metal-clad Switchgear - Addition of Units to Line-up•.......................................
Outdoor Metal-clad Switchgear With Protected Aisle ........ ;..........................................
14
15
16
17
Magne Blast Breaker .................•.....•...........•.•.•••.•...•••..•..•.................•...•.•...•...... ...
Magne Blast Breaker ......•.................•..........••.••. •.....••.•..••.•.............. .••..•••.•.......... ..
Magne Blast Breaker •..•.................•.•.••••••..•••••••••••••••.••....•...........•••••••••............ .•.•.
Ollmmy Removable Element .•.•.. .••........•............ ........ .•.•.... .•..... ......•. ..•.... .•...•.. ........
Goound and Test Device ·····················································································•f••
Outdoor Tran.sition Compartment •.•.•.....•......•.....•......• ••••••••• •...• .• ...... ...... .••••.....•... .•••
Ou!doo� rr�Jtioµ Compartm�gt ········��············••••••••••••···············••••••••••••••••••••·······
Inspection Box for 13.8 KV Metal-clad Switchgear ......................................................
5
5
5
13
13
18
18
19
Bolt Torque Values •••.•.. .•...•...•••••.•...•...•.....•••..••••.••.••..••...•.••.•••••••••..•.....•••••••.•••..... 20
Bus Duct Gaskets ..•.....•.•...•....•........•.....•...•...•.•.....•...............•.........•...•••....... ,......... 2U
Method of Making Bus Bar· Connections ..................................................................... 21
13.8 KV Taped Joints
4.16 & 13.8 Bus Insulating: Boot
Taping Roof EntraJ1ce Bushing •.•.•••
Insulation of Connection Bars •.•.••....•.•••.•...•.•.....................•......••.•.•.•.•••.•.•.•.........•
·······································································••t1•••••••••••••••t1•••
••••ti•••••••••••••••••••••·····················•·······························
ti.........................................................................
ti..
2J
21
23
23
Termination Without Pothead Multi-Conductor ...........................................................
Positive Interlock Adju'stments
•••ti•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••···············································
25
29
Fig, SOA View Showing Elevating: Mechanism Motor and Control Unit ..........................................
Fig, 30 Elevating: Mechanism .for M-26 Equipments Rated 250 MV A
and M-36 Equipments Rated 1200A 500 mva .........................................
Fig. 31 Elevating: Mechanism for M-36H Equipments Rated 750 mva
M-26H Equipments Rated 350 mva
M-36 Equipments Rated 200A .............................................. .
Fig. 31A Elevating Mechanism for M-36HH Equipments Rated lOOOmva....................................... .
Fig. 32 A11gle Bracket and Ch.aln Drive ••••••••.•••••••.••••••••••••••...•.•••..••••.•....•••....•••••.•••••••.....••..
Fig. 33 Shutter Mechanism Assembly M-26 ....•......••••.•...•.••........•...............•...........•••••...•......
Fig, 34 Shutter MedhaniSm Assembly M-36 .......................................................................... .
Fig, 35 Bus Support ...........................................................................................................
Fig. 36 Molded Bus Support...•••....••.•••••...•••..••••••••....••...•.••••••..•••...•••••.••..•••.......................•
Fig, 37 Bus Connection Boot (4.16 and 13,SKV)...................................................................... .
Fig. 38 Door Handles and Locu.•...............................................•...•••••...•••••.•.•••.........•.......•
Fig, 39 Wiring Devices and Miscellaneous Parts.•••.......•.....••........••..•••.....•..••............••.•••...••.
Fig. 40 Fuse Rollout Unit ······················�···········································································
Fig, 41 Potential Transformer Rc>llout Unlt;..................,ti••······················•••••••••••••••••••···········
Fig, 42 Control Power Transformer Rollout Unit .................................................................. .
Fig. 43 Single and Triple-Conductor Potheads •....••••.....••••••....•.............•......•......•••.....•..••••..••
30
Rear View of Unit Showing Through-Type Current Transformers ..................................
Termination Without Pothead Single-Conductor ..........., .................... ............ ..............
24
24
Renewal Parts
2
31
31
32
33
33
33
34
34
34
35
35
35
36
36
36
Metal-Clad Swltchgear GEH-1802
CONTENTS
RECEIVING, HANDLING & STORAGE
I
1
1
I
RECEIVING
HANDLING
STORAGE
DESCRIPTION
SECONDARY ENCLOSURE
PRIMARY ENCLOSURE
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT
BREAKER ELEVATING MECHANISM
RLEVATING MOTOR
PRIMARY DISCONNECT DEVICE
BUS COMPARTMENT
CURRENT TRANSFORMER AND CABLE COMPARTMENT
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER COMPARTMENT
DUMMY REMOVABLE ELEMENT
ROLLOUT OUT-SWITCH UNITS
FUSE DISCONNECTING DEVICE
GROUNDING AND TEST DEVICE
INSTALLATION
LOCATION
PREPARATION OF FLOOR-ANCHORING
15
15
15
TRANSITION COMPARTMENTS
18
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT
TESTING CABINET
ADDITION OF UNITS TO EXISTING EQUIPMENT
MAIN BUS ASSEMBLY
TORQUE VALUES
TAPED JOINTS
BUS DUCT
I
1
1
1
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
.V/.V.V.V".V.V."V.V.".".V
CLEANING BUS INSULATION
PRIMARY CABLES
POTHEADS
TERMINATION WITHOUT POTHEAD SINGLE-CONDUCTOR
TERMINATION WITHOUT POTHEAD MULTI-CONDUCTOR
GROUND FAULT CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (THROUGH TYPE)
CONTROL CABLES
GROUND BUS
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
ROOF ENTRANCE BUSHING TAPING
DOOR ALIGNMENT
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
20
20
21
21
22
22
22
22
22
23
26
VESTING AND INSPECTION .
26
OPERATION
BREAKER POSITIONING
POSITIVE INTERLOCK GENERAL
POSITIVE INTERLOCK ASSEMBLY FOR SOLENOID OPERATED BREAKERS
POSITIVE INTERLOCK ASSEMBLY FOR STORED ENERGY BREAKERS
26
26
27
27
27
27
27
28
28
28
28
STATIONARY AUXILIARY SWITCH
SPRING DISCHARGE CAM
KEY LOCKS
BREAKER INTERFERENCE STOPS
TRANSFER TRUCKS
SPACE HEATERS
MAINTENANCE ....
28
RENEWAL PARTS
30
I
Metal-clad SwUchgear
GEH-1802
METAUCLAD SWITCHGEAR
TYPES M26 AND M36
FOR MAGNE-BLAST AIR CIRCUiT BREAKER
TYPES AM-4.16 AND AM-13.8
Metal-clad switchgear ia equipment to
control and protect various types of elec
trical apparatus and power circuits.
The switchgear consists of one or more
units which are mounted side by side and
connected mechanically and electrically to
gether to form a complete switching equip
INTERRUPTING
CAPACITY
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
CURRENT
FIGURE
KVA
ment.
Typical equipments are shown in
Figures 1, 2 and 3.
TYPE M-28
The circuit breakers are easily re
movable to provide maximum accessibility
for maintenance with minimum interrup
tion of services. The switchgear is designed
to provide maximum safety to the operator.
AM-4.16-250
230,000
350,000
AM-4.16-350
1200 - 2000
1200 - 3000
All equipment is enclosed in groundedmet^
compartments.
TYPE M-36
The
equipment
is
available
in the
ratings listed in the following table. The
ratings of the equipment and devices are
based on usual service conditions as cover
ed in 'A_NSI standards. Operation at cur
rents above the equipment rating will re
AM-13.8-500
AM-13.8-750
sult in temperature rises in excess of
these standards, and is not recommended.
For outdoor Installation the same basic
AM-7.2-500
500,000
AM-13.8-IOOO
1200 - 2000
1200 - 2000
750,000
1,000,000
1200 - 3000
500,000
1200 - 2000
equipment is built into a weatherproof
housing as in Figures 2 and 3.
•
A
'
•
!' h
I e.
/
/
Kagne-blaat Breakers
Thf9« instructions do not pur^iort to cover sli detsjis oz variations in ^ulp/wne not to provide for
pC'SiitJe eof!Cin<^ncy tn tv r-ft m ewrrection
snetaJiscion,
operation or BaintQoance4
Should
futther intOTiwti^
desired or should perttcular probiow^ ansv vhich are noe covered suffieiently (or
thv purv,'iaace'£ puiposes, the natter should be referred to the General Sleceric Company.
To the eatenc rvjuirod the pfduots described herein aeet applicablo A.'iSl,
tSSC and HtttA standardsr
bue no auc/i aasujance iS ylvcn i.'iCA respect to iocel coder end ordinances beeeose they vary greatly.
/-.
GEH-ld02
Metal^clad Swltchgear
.aCWOVA^LC COVCH
ACCCll
^ro wtm fX WIRIX6 rnouGH
>#
ALL FLOOR
STEEL TO BE FURNISHED BY PURCHASER
CHANNELS SHOULD BE SET LEVEL WITH EACH OTHER
AND SHOULD BE LEVEL OVER THEIR FULL LENGTH
ROUGH FLOOR THICKNESS AND REINFORCING DEPENDS
ON LOADING AND OTHER NORMAL FACTORS. AND SHOULD
BE DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH RECOMMENDED PRACTICE
BUfMCn REHMBLC
SIDE
tlNISHEa FLOOD IKE
•vM'.-r.v'
RECOMMENDED
METHOD
FINISHEO FLOOR LINE
NOTC: rr IS 1UPERDTIVE THDT
ALTERNATE
METHOD
FLOOR STEEL 8E EVEN
WITH FINISHED FLOOR
DNO THAT BOTH BE LEVEL
Fis> 7
InstalUtlen 0«UUb
Metal-Clad Svitchgear GEH-1802
IT MAT fiC NCCCSSAAY TO RCHOVC
POTKCAD 00 CAOLE tUPfOOT POO
MEHKO fi
[LiL
1 i
METHOD
MEMBERS A-aC
OF
LIFTING
TO BE FURNISHED BY PURCHASER
A-RAISINO MEMBER • CHANNEL OR WOOD BEAM
B- 3" CHANNEL FURNISHEO WITH GEAR
C- LIFTWG JACKS
3P
D« COVER TO BE REMOVEO AND REASSEMBLED
AFTER UNITS ARC IN PLACE
NOTE*. WHEN LIFTING M'26 SWITCHGEAR
LOCATE SEAM 'A' ABOVE LIFTING
CHANNELS "BT
-DOOR
OPEN
ALTERNATE
members
For Indoor Hotal-clad Switchgsar
ABC
TO
BE
METHOD OF LIFTING
FURNISHED
a -
3* CHANNEL
0 '
COVER
TO BE
AFTER
UNITS
E -
SPREADER
BT
FURNISHEO
REMOVED
ARE
IN
PURCHASER
WITH
AND
PLACE
CEAR
REASSEMBLED
OEH-1802
Metal-clad Swltchgear
CAM
CONNICTION
WOOD
00
K
S
TRACK MCK
METHODS OF UFTIN6
fiP/>iLY OsAr OA 3/0*aro c£A)£Afr
Aai'D '3A:r^
C^^SKBT To 57^£1 Si/e/AAres
/9zzat^
neyOP/T/^ TACA^ySAAoeB
dock
'
OASAAST
Roor cftP
1
li'li •".
STt.MUT
-IJRSICET
.|.n *|tST'l. BOlT
DOOR
.roof or (MO
/
ENLBKGED StC. B-B
MtfWOO
JfSsa.miBB/^1^
XloOfZ eSftSKST AT"
SA/A'A'/ivef
®=20 / 7 ^
ENLRRSCfl
SECTlOW
SEC.C-C
MBTAOJS or/fsSE.mS>BlfAti
/ScoA CAP
(^ASAsay
/?T •£A/AA/AAiM«7,s tu r.iHCvcrc
« CxfONSroN ff#iT5
•
ClAD
}j
h
ceR»i>»Bu
s!t
ecnwHUbccM °'z
V
«
~
^
]
I
j
i»giT
META^tCUfca
£>4^ SECTION
snav^Tt
HlHCtD I
PCVICE I
PANEL
I
lcni"Ml
I tMCL-l
Metal-clad Switchgear
GEH-1602
RECEIVING, HANDLING AND STORAGE
RECEIVING
Every case or crate leaving the factory
Is plainly marked at convenient places with
ease number, requisition number, custom
er's order, front or rear. anTwBenforsize
and other reasons it is necessary to divide
the equipment for shipment, with the unit
number of the portion of equipment enclosed
indication of rough handling Is visible, a
claim for damage should be filed at once
with the transportation company and the
General Electric Company notlfiedpromptly. Information as to damaged parts, part
number, case number, requisition number,
The contents of each package of the
This list is forwarded with the shipment,
packed in one of the cases. The case is
especially marked and its number can also
be obtained from the Memorandum of Ship
ment. To avoid thetossofsm^parts when
unpacking, the contents of each case should
be carefully checked against the Packing
Details before discarding the packing ma
terial. Notify the nearest General Electric
Company representative at once If any
shortage of material is discovered.
All elements before leaving the factory
are carefully inspected and packed by work
men experienced in the proper handlingand
packing of electrical equipment. Upon re
ceipt of any apparatus animmediate inspec
tion should be made for any damage sustain
ed while enroute. If injury is evident or an
2. Cover important parts such as jack
screws, gears and chain of lifting mechan
ism, ilnlage and moving machine-finished
parts with a heavy oil or grease.
etc., should accompany the claim.
HANDLING
in each shipping case.
shipment are listed In the Packing Details.
1. Uncrate the equipment.
Before uncrating, Indoor equipment
may be moved by a crane with slings under
3. Store in a clean, dry place with a
moderate temperature and cover with a
suitable canvas to prevent deposit of dirt
or other foreign substances upon movable
parts and electrical contact surfaces.
the skids. If crane facilities are not avail
able, rollers under the skids may be used.
Fig. 7 shows suggested method of handling
4. Batteries should be uncratedandput
on trickle charge immediately on receipt.
the swttchgear after it is removed from
the skids.
5. If dampness or condensation may be
encountered In the storage location, heaters
Methods of handling outdoor equipment
are shown in Fig. 8. After the equipment
should be placed inside the units to prevent
moisture ^mage. Approximately SOOwatts
is in place the lifting plates should be re
moved and reassembled, "turned In" so
of heaters per unit will be required. Re
that passageway at the ends of the equip
material packed inside units before energiz
ment will not be obstructed.
move all cartons and other miscellaneous
ing any heaters. If the equipment has iKen
subjected to moisture it should be tested
with a lOOOv or 2500v megger. A reading
STORAGE
of at least 200 megohms should be obtained.
If it is necessary to store the equip
ment for any length of time, the following
precautions should be taken to prevent
storage separately.
corrosion:
breaker instruction book.
6. Breakers should be prepared for
DESCRIPTION
Each unit is made up of a secondary
enclosure and a primary enclosure, as
shown In Figure 10.
SECONDARY ENCLOSURE
The
secondary enclosure is usually
located at the brewer withdrawal side of
the unit, although in certain units it may be
on the side opposite to the breaker with
drawal area. It consists of a compartment
with a hinged door or panel upon which are
mounted the necessary instruments, control
and protective ddvlces.
The terminal
blocks, fuse blocks, and some control de
vices are mounted inside the enclosure on
the side sheets and a trough ts provided at
the
top
to
carry' wiring between units.
PRIMARY ENCLOSURE
The primary enclosure contains the
high voltage equipment and connections ar
ranged in compartments to limit
the
effects of faults and so minimize the damage.
E
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT
The removable element consists of a
Magne-Blast circuit breakerwhichIncludes
its operating mechanism, interlocks, mov
able primary and secondary disconnecting
devices.
The Magne-Blast breakers are
equpped with wheels for easy insertion
and removal.
Refer to Figure 4, 5, 6.
All removable elements furnished on a
particular requisitian and of a like design
and ratings are completely Interchangeable
one with the other.
The removable as well as the station
ary elements are built with factory jigs
and fixtures thus insuring interchangeabUity.
Fig. 10 (8039690) Metal-Clad Switchgear
Refer to appropriate
GEB-1802
Metal-Clad SwiU wear
For adetaileddescrlptionotttieMagne•Blast breaker and its operation the applicable breaker instruction' book should'be
consulted.
BREAKER ELEVATING MECHANISM
are inserted into the sleeves leaving only
the bolted joints exposed.
Where stand
sulated with a Polyvlnyl Chloride boot.
Special conditions and non standards are
taped.
position. In the test position the breaker
is lowered to the guide rails and withdrawn
CQiii'Ctf'P
Potential transformers are located In
formers or in a separate unit adjacent to
the breaker untts.
carriage is so designed that the removable,
The transformers are mounted on a
element can be readily inserted or' with
movablecarriageequipped with primary and
drawn after the carriage has been lowered
to the disconnected position without neces
sitating the removal of any bolts nuts or.
secondary disconnecting devices. Whenthe
potential transformers are disconnected,
they are at a safe striking distance from
screws.
all live parts of the switchgear. In addi
tion a grounding device Is provided which
contacts the fuses when the potential trans
•cvCA CdwT
mutci
be lowered or
raised until Ithasbeentripped. The breaker
cannot be closed except with the breaker
formers are disconnected, effectively dis
charging the transformers. In this position
in either the operating or test position.
clad frame to guide the removable breaker
element into correct position before the
breaker is raised into the operating posi
tion by means of the elevating mechanism
which is motor operated.
the transformer fuses may lie safely re
I
moved and replaced. A terrier mounted at
•NCItlH
the rear of the carriage moves with thecar-
ttFT PMitKa
riage to a position In front of the stationary
mm
ELEMENT
Dummy removable elements. Fig. 13,
are used as a means of isolating circuits
or bus sections, where operation is infre
"OPERATION".
Fig. II
Heawrement of Adjustment for
Priaary Disconnecting Devices
One elevating motor is furnished for
each equipment.
part of the primary disconnect device, ^
providing a safe striking distance from all
live parts. See Figure 12.
DUMMY REMOVABLE
For a detailed explanation of the eievatiiw mechanism refer to descriptlonunder
ELEVATING MOTOR
COMPARTMENT
a compartment alxive the current trane-
This mechanism consists of heavyduty steel jack screws on which are carried
nuts to support the elevating carriage. The •
Guide rails are built into the metal-
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
PSO>4*9
from the fully insertedpositlon 2 1/4 inches.
cannot
The current transformers are mounted
In a compartment isolated from the other
equipment. Provision is made in this com
clamp type terminals.
to or from its connected position supports
the removable element in the operating
breaker
COMPARTMENT'
partment for connecting the purchaser's
primary cable by means of potheads or
The elevating mectianism lor eleva
ting or lowering the removable element
The
CURRENT TRANSFORMER AND CABLE'
ard configurations exist the joint is in
It is designed for quick
quent and
a
circuit breaker cannot be
economically justified.
The device con
sists of a framework to simulate the clrcull breaker removable element with a set
interchangeability between units and is
held in place by a stationary clamp under
the clutch handle and a snap hasp on the
front.
Two
dowels are located in the
base to maintain alignment.
A short cable with plug is provided
and must be plugged into the receptacle
above the motor mounting. Aselector switch
Is mounted on the motor for reversing the
motor direction.
This selector switch
should not be used to start and stop the
elevating gear motor.
PRIMARY DlaCONNECTLNG DEVICE
lize
The primary disconnecting devices uti
silver to silver contacts to insure
against reduction of current carrying cap
acity due to oxidation of the contact sur
faces. These contacts are of thehi^pres-
sure line contact tube and socket design,
the tube being backed up by heavy garter
springs to insure contact pressure. Refer
to Fi^re 11,
BUS COMPARTMENT
The
main
tnises are enclosed in a
metal compartment with removable front
covers to provide accessibility.
The Inis
is
supported by a flame
retardent, track resistant, glass laminate
insulating material which is practlcaiiy
impervious to moisture, and an excellent
dielectric.
The tnis insulation is an extruded ther
moplastic insulation sleeve, suitable for
105° C operating temperature. The bus bars
Fig. 12
Potential Tranaforner Kollout ShoHn in Withdrawn Position
MetaJ-clad Switchgear GBH-1802
breakers canno't be economically or func
tionally justified.
The fuses are mounted on a movable
support equipped with disconnecting de
vices. Control power transformers of 15
kro and smaller may be mounted on the
rollout with the fuses.
See Figure 16.
When the fuses are disconnected, they
are at a safe striking distance from aU
live parts of the swltchgear. In addition
a grounding device is provided which contects the fuses after they are disconnected,
effectively removlngany static charge from
the fuses.
In this position the fuses may
be safely removed arid replaced. The dis
connecting devices are capable of inter
rupting transformer magnetizing current,
but should not be used to Interrupt load
current.
Mechanical or key interlocks
are applied to prevent operating the dis
connecting device while the load Is con
nected. nis is genearally accomplished
by interlocking so that the transformer
secondary breaker must be locked In the
open position before the disconnecting de
vice can be opened or closed.
GROUNDING AND TEST DEVICE
The grounding and test device, Figure
14, provides a convenient means of ground
ing the cables or the bus In order to safe
guard personnel who may be working on the
Dumiy Removable Element
cables or the equipment.
potential
blast breakers. The lover end of the studs
bars vhlcb are fully insulated and me^l-
The stationary structure la the
same as for a circuit breaker. When the
device is elevated into position, it con
nects the front set of metai-ciad discon
necting devices to the rear set.
lUllU
or for fault location, to
also be used for phasing out cables.
The three studs of the device are sim
ilar to those of the magne-blast circuit
breakers.
The studs are mounted on a re
movable plate which can be placed in either
of two positions. In one position the studs
will engage the front (Bus) contacts only
Under no conditions must the dummy
element be elevated or lowered when the bus
or the unit is energized.
tests
measure insulation resistance (Megger).
By using potential transformers, it can
are connected, front to back, by copper
enclosed.
The device can
also be used for applying power for high
of six sbids similar to those on the magne-
and In the other position the studs will en
Key interlocks
gage the rear (Line) contacts only of a
are applied to insure that all source of
power are disconnected before the dummy
element can be operated. Refer to Figure
metal-clad unit.
15.
studs on the device, opposite sides of the
To indicate the proper placement of the
assembly are marked "Line" and "Bus".
The word corresponding to the desired
position mils' be toward the operator.
ROLLOUT FUSE-SWITCH UNTTS
Rollout load-break disconnect switch
es, with or without current limiting fuses
of hl^ interrupting capacity, are some
To use, the device is rolled Into the
metal-clad housing in place of the circuit
times used in metal-clad swltchgear to
protect and switch small transformers and
circuits where circuit breakers cannot be
economically or functionally Justified.
breaker, and raised into or lowered from
'lV—
The rollout switch Is designated as
bus and line side bi^hii^s , power operated
grounding contacts, posing receptacles,
ary Instructions furnished.
and a complete safety Interlocking system.
For details of construction and operation
FUSE DISCONNECTING DEVICE
or circuits where circuit
to the device described
ing and testing device equipped with both
For additional informatton on
transformers
addition
alx3ve, there is available a form of ground
these equipments, refer to the supplement
Current limiting fuses with high in
terrupting rating are sometimes used in
metal-clad swltchgear to protect small
circuit breaker elevating mechanism.
In
type SE-10, and the units In which they are
used are designated as type SEM-26 or
SEM-36.
the connected position by means of the
of this device, refer to GEI-38957 for 4.16
kv equipment, or GE1-50H4 for 7.2 kv and
Fig. 14 (8028015) Ground and Test
Device
(C^le shown not furnished by G. E. Co.
13.8 kv equipment.
GEH-1802
Metal-clad Switchgear
j Wj
B—m
M2ZZ2&.
Fig. IS Padlockiqg Arrangement, Key Interlocking and Bus Boot Assembly
14
Fig. 16 Control Power Transformer RoUbut Shown in Open Position
Before any installation work is done,
consult and study all drawings furnished
at the front and at the rear of the equipment
is shown on the floorplandrawingfurnislied
by the General Electric Company for the
particular requisition. These drawings in
for the particular re^isltion. The space at
clude arrangement drawings, wiring and
elementary diagrams and a summary of
insertion
the front must be sufficient to permit the
and
withdrawal
of the circuit
breakers, and their transfer to other units.
the equipment.
The space at the rear must besulficlentfor
Frequently
additional
shipping
mem
bers are installed in the tius and primary
area to insure against shipping damage.
It is imperative that all shipping members
be removed, joints properly tightened and
insulated before energizing the bus. All
exposed primary
installation of cables, for inspection and
maintenance, and on some equipments to
draw out potential transformers.
PREPARATION OF FLOOR - ANCHORING
The station floor must be strong enough
to prevent ss^ging due to weight of the
switchgear structure and to withstand the
impact stress caused by the opening of the
circuit breakers under short circuit con-
dltions.
LOCATION
The recommended aisle space required
It is essential that the floor
gear structure and the equipment be com
pletely aligned prior to final anchoring.
The
recommended
floor
construction Is
shown in Figure 7.
The floor channels
must be level and straight with respect to
each other.
Steel shims should be used
for final leveling of the switchgear tf nec
essary. Care should be taken to provide a
front of. the units to facilitate Installation
and removal of the breaker. If the floor is
not level and flush with the flOOT channels,
Indoor Equipment
ment drawings.
Mats, screens, railings, etc, which
are external to the switchgear, tnit which
may lie required to meet any local codes,
must be furnished by the purchaser.
to the floor.
be level to avoid distortion of the switch-
smooth, hard, and level floor under and in
joints and connections
must be insulated for the system rating.
Shipping braces are shown on fte arrange
the purchaser for anchoring the emipment
The impact loading is approxi
mately 1-1/2 times the static load.
Suitabie means must be provided by
It will be difficult to handle the breaker
because it will not be level with respect to
the stationary element.
Recommended practice is to weld the
switchgear structure to the floor channels,
using a tack weld at points indicated for
anchoring on the drawing. If welding fac
ilities are not available the gear should be
bolted to the floor channels.
GBH-1802
Metal-clad Switcbgear
AH, .
T"
"t;
t
1
ji
nTw vmrs Aooto a t t s ^ r c s o
Mfw
FROHJ
aooao a t
v/#iv
tm)
tttfwt ntesr Mrm m»ftr tcrr
CHO MtTf*** OKLT
I
f
if-
E«0 seCTtQ/4
^ M9kn f9t Aeiro*
ro%srHtm m k
snrt»n'^f-r*
GWIMp M
Cdiwrcndv
ipta
VOW-A-
assembly *0*
(OotAMtf
(fM&
i^vn Tb«rrMnO
WITH
REAR
enclosure:
/'HiNovt Tffi» STffip witv fftair
t.«ra
A^4Attrtt* Vt*ir)
/ |lt» SCCTlMf ONIY
i
Si
::i
V
CKB ^eri0N
r
"J
y
y
fnoicotjfie
I AtfwA /W CAA tfto SeAOH^ dMVigva COHMtCTtAH, Af*0
£AfO i£CTtOf4.
View iy f "fIfW V
2 srr MWVHtr&) tf*AtACt mo OOLT- r04€THtA AS SA0¥M
' ift ASSSMOLY
'^Ndlfs MR «MflNC
tdCcrMM
fCOOND SVS
e»NNunoN
^8-
^QMitr
vmvo
esssriitt
r*
MSStMBLT 'c
U94 e«fft vcMsreo
(B6trfK« w uNtrs i»
A
r"
caancnw
1
e
ro Knayc e«isTii(4 cno Sjrcer(i(M>
B
A. RrKOVC TNC MLlPWiMf iTfMS FM«t AIPLE StCTlM
tsppin M4U
^eOTEA
KtoA rurr
I vrNT pamii
t. t1» VtMT CUF
9. noof CAAS
4. IMP srcrrdN ctNSiArmf pa irrfis maiop a
s. ritoAr covCB (tmt rtutwitHn)
4 pcACfirs it)
B.
SECTION 0-fl
ACAPVe AMA CAA.CNP SCAieN, pMClAP BPS
coNNecTfw Awp tND sfcriPN mn nerAi cuo scmii
TO lASTALL Nfk^ ACTAl CLAP VAfTS^UAT;
I. scr NEW iuiir(s) m aiacc amp s#tr TAsifNCi
I. AssEneic iTfAs iisrco in •
ICT«L
S. ASSCAPK new tPAA CAPS
ClAO
4. Assmaic CCACMP svs spiicc Arrmf
NNP mew ^«(MP CPS
wciPAnsA
S ASSEMBU APS MAS AMP MSfflATE AEA
WSTAUCTUN BOAA
TO INSTALL NEW PAATECrfP AlSiC UNITSfiEAi:)
tOAATCA
CKO SMBT^
A
' 4«|lCS
t INSTALL NEW riOOA AAAIffS ANP ALOAA ALATI
TIC DOWN AAELE
e. ACAIACE AlOOA MANE AMClf AT NEW CAP mSflMN
5. INSTALL NEW TlONt AlATES
MlT'
4. ERECT NEW CMNCA COLHNN
S NOP NEW AISLE 1APSS ANAlC NNp NC1AL CUP
ROArTTR CLIP TO CAISTINC ENP A04A TAPSS
*»r ciiA
UNO SUffMr
n«(«
A
4. INSTALL NEW CNO AlUC TAPSS SttB-ASSCNBLT
SgCTlQN r-E
»A UIA A
riMA tAKKcr A
CIMfR*-
r»»r
A
cMwn
COOA
tiTftiifwari
etLOMt
•
r.fl4M nilTC Tir Qimi AMSU IS
yuMHSM
Vnirriiitfft vitn am fmat
VUff CVD
rtlMT C««tR
sE{;T!W ft'B
CONSISTINC OA AOOA TAOSS AN«U,A06A SUPT»
COLUKN CLIP, NETAL CLAP AMATfA CLIP AND
SUPT CLIPS
T VCIMSTALL TNC ITENS AINOrfP IN A-4
NOTEXISE NEW fASNETS ANP ALSO INSIAU
NtCVlOUS ENP AAONA COVfB ON AfOUT
OF NEW ENP UNIT
Tl
iMTfBMftt
eiisfiAS
0. INSTALL WIAtNE ANP tlCATlNO TEODfH
CfMrMCHT
Virw C
NOTE'.-A SINILAA PAOCEPPAE IS VSCP fOA
RtquT ENP AOPfTIONS
Fig. 18 Outdoor Metal-Clad Switehgear with Protected Aisle.
17
GEH-1802
Metal-clad Switchgear
1^^
SSff4"^^*
TM^te
AT TMMta. AMMAkVl
©-•]
•vyjSKS
¥
1a«S^wS*i
7th
with and without rear enclosures. Recom
mendations for foundations for both typos
are given in Fig. 8. Primary and secondary
conduits should be installed in accordance
with the requisition drawings, before the
equipment is put into place.
Since outdoor equipments are provided
with a 6" l»8e, a transfer truck is required
to place the breaker in the housing. The
level adjustment on the truck is shown in
Pig. 8.
When outdoor ewipments are shipped
tn more than one section, the Joint between
sections mustbeweatherproofed. Assemble
(3)
Apply Sterling U-310 or U-311
varnish to both sides of the gaskets fur
nished for the Joint between the ends
of the switchgear
and the aisle enclos
ure and to the surfaces against which
the gasket presses and hang the gaskets
on the projecting studs at the ends of the
switchgear lineup.
See Fig. 9, section
A«A.
(4) Move the aisle enclosure into posi
tion guiding the holes in the end sheets over
the studs on the switchgear lineup and
guiding the roof sills between the support
clips bolted to the upper front of the switchgear units above the control panels. This
operation may be simplified by temporarily
loosening the support clips.
The floor of the aisle enclosure must
fit under the hinged breaker cover of the
metal-clad, so the aisle enclosure must
be moved into position on a level with the
switchgear units. If desired this job may
be
simplified by
removing the breaker
enclosure doors.
Outdoor Equipment with Protected Aisle
When specified t)y the purchaser, out
door equipment is furnished with an en
closed, weatherproof operating aisle. See
Fig. 3.
The aisle enclosure is shipped
separately from the switchgear.
The following procedure outlines the
steps necessary to install outdoor equip
ment with a protected aisle:
(1) Install the switchgear In accordance
with the procedure given above for outdoor
equipment.
(2) Remove the shipping covers from
the control panels. Since the relay and
Instrument cases are not weather-proof,
the control panels should be protected
from inclement weather until the installa
tion of the atsle enclosure is completed.
18
O
in place until the aisle enclosure is as
sembled. in order to maintain alignment
of the enclosure.
(10) Connect secondary wiring to lights,
convenience outlets, etc., in accordmice
with the wiring diagrams furnished for
the equipment.
Since
the
aisle
(5) Bolt the aisle enclosure in place
at both ends, and bolt the roof sills to
the support clips, tightening any support
clips loosened in the previous operation.
Replace any breaker compartment doors
previously removed.
(6) If the aisle enclosure was shipped
in more than one section, bolt the sections
together and assemble the roof caps in the
manner described above for roof Joints in
outdoor switchgear.
(7) Anchor the outside floor sill of
the aisle enclosure with anchor Imltsplaced
in accordance with the requisition drawing.
See Fig. 9, view Y.
floor is level with
the floor of the switchgear units, no trans
fer truck is required for outdoor equipment
with a protected aisle.
The above procedure describes in
stallation of a protected aisle enclosure
with switchgear on one side of the aisle
only. If the aisle is common to two line
ups of switchgear, the procedure will re
quire slight modification. See thedrawinra
furntshed with the requisition for specific
instructions.
Transition Compartments
Transition compartments for outdoor
unit substations may be one of two types
(Figs. 19 and 20).
the gasket between the doors, using cement
provided. Refer to Fig. 8, Section B-B.
Assemble the gasket between the roof sec
tions, bolt together and Install the roof caps.
Refer to Fig. 8, Section C-C.
CJ.
These compartments
are normally shipped assembled.
The
full height compartment (Fig. 19) cannot
be
disassembled
for
installation.
The
throat trae compartment (Fig. 20) can tie
installed in any of three ways, in accord
ance with the following instructions:
^
(a) Should the switchgear be position-
on its fou^tion prior to the power
toansformCT.
the complete transition can
be mounted on the metal-clad as assembled.
Remove covers #8.
Apply Sterling U 310
varnish to lioth sides of gasket 2A, and
to the surfaces against which the gasket
presses. Bolt transition compartment to
throat on metal-clad switchgear. Before
Jacking the power transformer into its
final location, apply Sterling U 310 varnish
to both sides of gasket lA and to the sur
(8) Assemble the dome over the ruof
faces against which the gasket presses,
opening between the switchgear and the
aisle enclosure.
See Fig. 9. view X.
and place the gasket over the mounting
(9) Remove shipping braces from aisle
enclosure.
These braces should be left
studs on the transformer tank wall. Slide
transformer in place, guiding the trans
former mounting studs through the mounting
holes in #1.
Center rubber seal between
Metal-clad Swltchgear GEH-1802
BEFORE ANY COVERS ARE
II and *3 before tightening nuta, toaln-
tatnlng 24" between transformer tank wall
ACCESS TO THE PRIMARY CIRCDITS,
The main bus barsandother connection
and end of metal-clad.
IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT THE CIRCUIT
OR CIRCUITS BE DE-ENERGIZED AND
BREAKERS BE WITHDRAWN TO A DIS
CONNECTED POSITION AND TAGGED.
bars may be either copper or aluminum.
Do not apply var
nish to the rubber seal between *1 and #3.
Cut secondary conduit 110 to length and
assemble under the transition.
(b> Should the power tranaformer t)e
EQUIPMENT
swttchgear. follow the procedure of para-
THE BREAKER FOR THAT UNIT SHOULD
CONNECTED TO A UNIT,
In either case, the connection surfaces will
be silver surfaced or equivalent. All field
assembled Joints in primary conductors,
regardless of material or method of in
sulation, shouldbe made as described below:
(1) Wipe silver clean. ~ Do not use
BE PLACED IN THE DISCONNECTED PO
gear up to the power transformer after
san^faper or any abrasive on the
SITION AND TAGGED. ALSO THE REMOTE
silvered surface.
assembling the
EQUU-MENT SHOULD BE ISOLATED FROM
of
ANY OTHER POWER SOURCES CONNECT-
possible.
transition compartment
to the swltchgear.
(c) If the power transformerandmetal-
clad ssrttcheey are in place, dlaaasemble
transition aa lollop
Remove covers #8
and 19, ad^ter *1, dome 17, braces *4.
Apply Sterling U 310 varnish to tx>th sides
of gasket *2A, and to the surfaces against
which the ^sket presses, before tioltlng
12 to metal-clad throat.
Apply Sterling
I) 310 varnish to both sides of gasket IIA,
and to the surfaces against which the gasket
presses, and loosely fasten II and IIA to
transformer tank.
II and
from
13
Slide throat al *3 into
maintain approximately
to tank.
4
1/2"
Assemble braces 14
(2)
required to add new metal-
clad units to outdoor equipment with pro
tected aisle.
For indoor equipment, it
Connect
heaters
located
in 13.8 kv
Indoor transition compartments are
shipped assembled together with the ad
jacent metal-clad swltchgear units.
Figure 23.
(3)
In some cases external connections
are made to metal-clad bus by
bars.
Is usually necessary only to remove the
The metal-clad bars are
normaUy silver plated. Unptated
end cover sheets and lo.rerjissejiible them
bars, either copper or aluminum,
on the new units Mter these are located
should not be used to connect to
and bolted to the existing units. OUierwlse, the Installation procedure is the
anical assembly is completed, assemble
the main bus and other primary connec
class transition compartment.
torque values listed in Table A,
aisle, and Figure IB Indicates the special
supports and complete all Joints. Assemble
dome #7, side covers #8 and bottom cover
Cut secondary conduit *10 to length
as shown in Figure 24 and the
cedures required to add new metal-cl^
units to outdoor equipmentwlthoutprotected
procedures
Join the clean contact surfaces
by using the hardware provided
Figure 17. Indicates the special pro
same as described above.
19.
Avoid handling
cleaned surface as much as
ED TO IT.
top and bottom to maintain size and proper
alignment, then tighten *1 to transformer
tank. Assemble connections, terminals,
and assemble imder the transition.
ifa
IF WORK IS TO BE DONE ON REMOTE
positioned on its foundation prior to the
graph (a) above, except move the s^tch-
S
CONNECTIONS
REMOVED
OR ANYJ500RSOPENED WHICH PERMIT
silver plated bars.
(4) All field assembled Primary joints
and terminations must be Insulated
for the operating voltaige. There
When the units are in place and mech
are two methods of insulating
joints, boots where applicable and
tions per the instructions below. (Removal
taped Joints for all others.
of existl^ compound-filled connection box
A
detailed procedure for Joint in
es can be easily accomplished by packli^
sulation is described under "MAIN
BUS ASSEMBLY".
the box tn dry ice for 2 - 3 hours. Remove
the dry tee and the cord tying the box In
place, and strike the box with a hammer.
The hardened box and compound will crack
away from the Joint.)
Secondary wiring and control bus con
nections
should
be made In accordance
with the wiring diagrams furnished with
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT
the equipment
Before installing or operating the re
movable element consult the circuit breaker
instructions for directions on InstaltMion
and inspection.
-si'
The operation of the elevating mech
anism, positive interlock and associated
features are described under Operation
of Equipment and should be reviewed be
fore installing removable element.
££Zr/fi'€£
aurfM,
TESTING CABINET
The testing cabinet, Fig. 22, should be
installed on the wall at a location where
maintenance and testing of the breaker can
be convtently done. Conduits must be in
stalled to carry cables to supply control
power for testing.
ADDITION OF UNITS TO EXISTING
EQUIPMENT
"Z'
/O
Before adding units to existing equip
ment, consult ana study all drawings fur
nished with the equipment.
In addition
to the usual drawings furnished with new
MTU
-a/kwV/fnj —
(uHr/t ge\Me.)
v/£cu
equipment special drawings may be fur
nished covering complicated or special
assembly work.
Also, check to make
sure all necessary parts are on hand.
Fig. 22 Inspection Box for 13.8 KV Metal-Clad Swltchgear
19
GEH-1%02 Metal-clad Switchgear
(2) Prepare all Joints as outlined under
MAIN BUS ASSEMBLY
"CONNECTIONS".
For 4.16 lev, 7.2 kv and 13.8 kv equip-.
13) Place the PVC boot over the Joint
for inspection the 3/8" elastic conqmund
(4) Secure the PVC boot with self-lock
Joint insul
seal.
Removable front and rear covers of
vertical sections of bus duct must also be
(.5) Replace all covers previously remov
gasketed. Coat both sides th 4.16 kv
and 13.8 kv equipment.
(1) The instructions for the iiolted Joint
and application
the tape insulation
is the same as outlined for the 13.8
equipment excqit use 1/2 the amount
of insulating tape and use the U-311
1 - Taped Joints Fig. 26.
(Uack varnish).
2 - PVC(POLYVINYL CHLORIDE)
boots Fig. 2SA.
Refer to Table in.
Fig. 26.
(2) In unit substations, the connection bars
I-TAPEC JOINTS for 13.8 KV EQUIPMENT
should be assembled in the transition com
(1) Prepare all Joints as outlined under
partment (Figure 19 and 20)attdtheconnections at the transformer terminals taped and
"CONNECTIONS".
(2) Fill all cavities around bolts and nuts
with ASOHllO compound to form ai
smooth surface for taping, thus pre
venting air voids. This compound is not
an insulating medium imd should not
be used for mat purpose.
(3)
"T" Joint -
in or below the transition compartment.
thick Irrathene t^e over the ASOHllO
compound as shown in Fig. 25. (This
is not required for 4.16 J^ts).
(4) Wrap with insulating tape provided
maintaining tension on the ti^e wtiile
wrapping, as shown in Fig. 26. Where
titere are sharp angles apply addition
al layers to obtain e.
No insulation materials are furnished
for cable terminations. When potheads
are -siqmlied as part of switchgear insula
tion nunerials are furnished for the bar
terminations to the pothead studs;
In aU cases carefuUy follow the cable
manufacturer's recommendations for in
stallation of the type of cable beingus^.
r\
^ Metal-clad Switcbgear GEH-1802
A typical ejcample (tf termlnatiiig a shield
ed cable is shown in figures 28 and 29.
Omo
If the cable is aluminum, the conductor
surface must be carefully abraided and the
cable covered liberally with a joint com
pound recommended by the cable manu
OI lO
gi
facturer.
.INSULATING PRIMARY CABLE
O
terminati5n§
TTOCA
IMOt
BIK.
-»»•«»
lO
SCCT7-T-
TOIHT
All field assembled joints for primary
cable terminations shoiUd be prepared as
outlined under "CONNECTIONS". Upon
completion of the cable termination, care
must be exercised when taping the exposed
termination.
(1) Check to see that a sufficient area
of insulating tape extends beyond the
painted glass tape furnished by the
factory. (2" for 5KV, 3" for 15KV).
It may be necessary to remove the
current transformer primary con
ductor insulating support to obtain
proper insulation joint overlap. Re-
Jilace
support upon completion of
oint. Refer to fig. 26.
O
lO
or
OliO
Fig. 24 (132C7770) Method of Making Bus Bar Connections
(2) All terminations should be insulated
as outlined in table fig. 26 for
correct layers of insulating and
glass tape.
TAfitP
(3) The instructions for application of
the tape insulation is the same as
outlined for "Taped Joints" items
1, 2, 4, 5, 6 and 7.
POTHEADS
AgOMiie
Potheads are mounted on an adapter
plate extending across the width of the
metal-clad unit as shown in Fig. 27. Where
necessary the ad^ter plate is split into
two parts- to facilitate the installation of
e.nrMH»
^
rntAi^Hh%JiCt»ituL.oos
OAAS 4fSe
the potheads.
"ifSftOg
x*.!
Ztot.
f0
/OXfA. MA'Xt9' Xtoi
Three-Conductor Potheads
rAtm
Installation procedures for a
conductor
lead-sheathed
cable
threewith
a
wiping sleeve cable entrance fitting on
the pothead is outlined in GEI-28838H.
This, is the type most generally used.
Fig. 2S (104A2714) 13.8 kv Taped Jointe
The factory does not furnish insulating
materials for completing stress cones and
cable terminations.
•mtOWIHJOTM;
WMUWll »U!1~
In all cases care
fully follow the cable
manufacturer's
recommendation for installation of the type
" 'li. !l
cable being used. A suggested procedure
for shielded cables is outlined below. Refer
to fig. 28 and 20 for reference.
TERMlNAtlON WITHOUT POTHEAD
The factory does not furnish insulating
materials
for completing the primary
tl
MM. OM
t=vC=t^
I2I>0*-8IIS "
IZOO* TAKBaFV
cable termination at the cable damp or
for stress cones.
In all cases carefully
follow the cable manufacturer's recommen
dation for Installation of the type cable
beii» used.
A suggested procedure for
' sMelded cables is outlined below.
Refer
to-fig. 28 and 29 for reference.
Single Conductor
1. Cut cable to proper length.
2. Remove Jacket and cable tape for
distance of A plus B plus 3 inches, plus
l^gth to be inserted tntb terminal lug.
Fig. 29A (208A88S3) 4.16 kv and 13.8 kv Bus Insulating Boot
21
GEH-ia02 Metal-clad Swltchgear
3. Unwrap shielding tape to point M,
cut and solder it In place avoiding exces
with G.E. No. A50P68 adhesive cement
or equivalent.
When solvent evaporates,
Remove outer
apply slicing t^e GE8380 or equivalent
semi-conductin«r tape for same distance.
Thorouiddy clean surface from which the
semi-conducting tape was removed.
and make sheath seal as shown on drawing.
sive heat on insulation.
4. Remove insulation and inner semi
conducting tape to expose conductor for
distance of one inch plus length to be in
serted into terminal lug.
5. Attach terminal lug to conductor.
If the cable is aluminum, the conductor
surface must be carefully abraided and the
cable covered liberally with a Joint com
pound recommended by the cable manu
Apply one layer No. 33 Scotch tape or
equivalent, half lapped. Obtain a smooth
wrapping but do not stretch tape more than
necessary.
7. Apply end seal. Clean surface over
which splicing tape is to be applied and
coat with G.E. No. AS0P68 adhesive cement
or equivaient. When solvent evaporates,
build up with splicing tape GE8380 or
equivalent, as shown.
Dimensions in Inches'
must then be passed back along the cable
path through the currenttransformer before
12. Over entire termination, apply two
layers of No. 33 Scotch tape or equivalent,
half lapped, in manner to shed water. Ob
tain a smooth wrapping but do not stretch
ers, toepotn^d mountings mustbeinsulated
tape more than necessary.
from ground.
Where potoeads are used in units pro
vided with groundfault current transform
CONTROL CABLES
TERMINATION WITHOUT FOTHEAD
MULTI-CONDUCTOR
When control conduits enter toe unit
from
below, the conduit should not ex
A»
Indoors
Dry Locations
5
9
13
2 to 5
6 to 10
11 to 15
cable terminations at the clamp terminal
or for the stress cones. Refer to Fig.
29 for reference.
2
3
4
cement or equivalent. When solvent evapo
rates, build up cone with splicing tope GE8380 or equivalent, for length -B' plus B.
Between points M and P, tope is applied so
that wrapped thickness at N is equal to 75%
of the original insulation thickness - and
so that the cone tapers to zero thickness at
points M and P. Apply one layer No. 33
Scotch tope or equivalent, half lapped. Ob
tain a smooth wr^ping but do not stretch
tape more than necessary.
Pass a turn of tightly drawn braid
around exposed portion of shielding tape at
point M and solder In place. Then apply
shielding braid in tightly drawn 1/6 inch
lap wrappings to point N and spot solder.
Terminate the braid by cutting 1/2 inch
Turn down and
solder loose ends to preceding turns. Wrap
lour to six turns of No. 19 AWG tinned
copper wire around shielding braid and
solder. Solder all turns of braid together
along three lengthwise lines equally spaced
around braided surface.
10. Solder ground strip over shielding
tope near cable covering. Cover stress
cone with one layer No. 33 Scotch tope,
Obtain a smooth wrapping
but do not stretch tape more than neces
Add two toyers of splicing t^e.
11. Pencil jacket'for 1/2 inch asshown.
Clean surface. Take particular care in
cleaning outside jacket surface in order to
entirely remove black wax finish.
the
cables to the terminal
grams furnished for toe requisition.
gle-conductor except - substitute the follow
ing for paragraphs 10, 11 and 12;
Clean sur
If
toe
control
conduits
enter from
above, drill toe top and bottom covers
of the front enclosure wiring trough to
suit
the
conduits.
Fasten toe conduits
to toe bottom coVer with locknuts.
Take particular care in
cleaning outside jacket surface in order,
to entirely remove black wax finish. Coat'
The cables from toe control power
source to the switchgear should be large
equivalent. Allow to. dry. Apply splicing enough to avoid excessive voltage drop
tope GE8380 or equivalent to make moisture when the circuit breakers are operated.
s^ as shown. This is done by starting See testing instructions.
wrapping tape near end at jacket and wrap
ping over ground wires for 1-1/2 inches.
Where units have been split for ship
Bend ground wires out and back over taping ment, any control or other secondary leads
just applied and continue applying lapped which must connect across toe split will
layers of tape to completion of moisture be arranged with terminal blocks in toe
s ^ including a complete tape seal in cross trou^ or convenient side sheet
with G.'E. Vo. A50P6B adhesive cement or
8. Build stress cone. Clean cable sur
face and coat with G.E. No. A50P68 adhesive
beyond soldering point.
Connect
Make termination as indicated for sin
to be aoDlied.
B
venient.
blocks in accordance with the wiring dia
face over which sheath moisture seal is
* For ungrounded neutral use 1.33 times
the dimensions in selecting distance A.
See Fig. 28 and 29.
half lapped.
The control cables may be pulled through
The factory does not furnish insula toe conduits before or after toe switchting materials for completing the primary gear is installed, whichever is more con
Pencil jacket 1/2 Inch.
Rated
kv
Phase to Phase
22
or shield between toe transformer and toe
primary terminals. The ground conductor
tend more than 4 inches above the floor.
6. T^er insulation for one inch as
shown.
See Fig. 28.
sary.
terminals. In cases where the groundcannot
be applied before toe cable passes through
toe tnuisformer, bond toe lead to toe sheath
being connnected to toe ground bus.
facturer.
9.
current transformer away from the primary
Coat
crotch formed between the three conductors.
so
Bond and ground the ground wires.
The wires will be cut to length and form
ed before being folded back so that a
minimum of time will be required for
reconnecting them.
For a multi-conductor cable not having
ground wires, the individual terminations
should'have grounding strips applied as for
a single-conductor termination.
These
grounding strips are to be joined together
to a common ground. This common ground
must then be grounded.
GROUND FAULT CURRENT TRANSFORM
ERS (THROUGH-TYPE)
Throueh-type
current transformers
(see Fig. 27) are furnished where specified
for sensitive protection' against
ground
faults. These transformers are normally
installed in a horizontal position directly
above or below the primary cable terminals,
so that the primary cable or cables can pass
through them. One transformer is required
for each three-phase circuit.
Where armored cable is used, the arm
or must be terminated and groimded before
toe cable passes through the transformer.
Armor clamps are furnished for this pur
pose when specified.
When lead or other conducting sheath
that
toe
wires
can be reconnected.
GROUND BUS
The gromtd bus is bolted to toe rear of
toe frame near toe bottom. It is arranged so
that connections to toe station ground can be
made in any unit. Where the equipment is
shipped in more man one group, toe sections
of ground bus must be connected by using toe
splice plates furnished with the equipment.
Aspemble the ground bus joints as out
linedunder "Connections" (Page 19). Ground
bus connections are made in toe lower por
tion of the cable entrance compartment.
Itoe switchgear groimdtiusmustbeconnect
ed to toe station ground bus by a conductor
having a current carrying capacity equal to
that of toe switchgear ground bus. It is very
important that the equipment be adequately
grounded to protect the operator from injury
when short circuits or other abnormal oc
currences titoe place and to insure that all
parts of toe equipment, other than live
parts, are at ground potential.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
It will be toe responsibility of toe pur
cable, or cable with shielding tope or braid, chaser to provide suitable li^tningarrest
is usM, it is recommended that the sheath or ers to protect toe switchgear from dama^
shield be grounded solidly totoeswitchgear
ground bus. The ground lead should be bond
ed to toe sheath or shield on toe side of toe
due to lightning.
The General Electric
Company's reco.mmendations as to toe types
Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-1802
of circuits recpjlring lightning protection,
and a list of recommendedlightningarresters,
are contained in Bulletin GER-141
copies of which are available upon request.
When llghtninE arresters are furnished
the primary cable terminal will t>e insula
ted at the factory unless it must be dis
connected for shipment. When this con
nection is completed in the field it will
be necessary to insulate the primary con
nection before the swjtchgear is enei^lzed.
ROOF ENTRANCE BUSHING
When assembling the connection bar
end of roof entrance bushit^s inside of the
switchgear and other terminations where
porcelain insulators are used, insulation
should be applied as follows:
(1)
Prepare
the
connection bars
as
outlined under "CONNECTIONS".
(2) Fill all cavities around the contact
nuts and connection barswithA50-
H110 compound.
Form a smooth
surface for taping, thus preventing
air voids.
The compound is not
an insulating medium and should
not be used for that purpose.
(3)
Wrap joint with insulating tape pro
vided, maintaining tension on the
tape while wrapping as shown in
fig. 26 where there are sharp angles
IRRATHiWe ANO_
GLASS TAPE
ASOHin "
COMPOU/VO
apply additional layers to obtain
equivalent of the insulation on the
flat surfaces.
(4) Over the insulating tape, apply one
layer of glass tape, half lap as a
protective covering as shown in
fig. 26,
Fljf. 25B Taping of Roof Entrance Tern*
END
op OLASS TAPE
(5) Over the glass tape, brush a heavy
coat of U-310 brown (tor 15KV}
or U-311 black (for 5KV). varnish.
See fig 25B.
mm
CLASS
COVER TARE
rastm-noH iayehs[hois i)
IK30LATION
LEVEL
1-202
HOn 2
1CLASS
WMS 3
V.C.
MOYB I
wiifr
APPLY OHS
COAT LZBBRALLT
HOTE li
1-202 a V.C. - One layer, wound 2/3 lap requlr
In ona wldtti of tape.
One layer thlekneee la 3 t
class: - One layer, wound 1/2 lap requlree 2
ant width of tape.
One layer thiokneee la 2 tine
HOTE 2i
Irrathene #202, width 1 1/2" thiokneee 0.010
tape at all tlnaa while applying.
GCH-1802 Metal-cUd Switchgear
v\ 1 / f
Ml/
Fig. 27 {8026383) Rear View of Unit Showing
Through-Type Current Transformers
.DO I* Mmc TNC^
co»»ca «iAC
••0
) ) score*
r*»c ON soutw
SNVieiM
ON lOiKV
••ss
"
score* t*»r
ON tNurv
Fig. 28 (B230046C) Termination Without Pothead Single-Conductor
Metal-Clad Switcbgear GEH-i802
CAvBLE LU(q
5PLiaW(5, TAPE
C3.E.S360 OR EaUlV.
EWD SEAL
CABLE
IKJSULATIOM
NQ SB SCOTCH
TAPE OR
EQUIV.
SHlELDlKiS
BRA\0 (HAMD
APPLIED)
CABLE SHELWME
TAPE
Mass SCOTCH
TAPE OR EQUN.
)AO\STURE SEAL
SPLICING TAPE
G.E.8SaO OR EQUiV.
GROUND VWIRES
GROUND AT
ADJACENT
FRAhNE
MENABER
CABLE JACKET
Fig. 29 (B232004C) TerminaUon Without Pothead MulU-Conductor
25
GEH-1802 Metal-clad Swltchgear
DOOR ALIGNMENT
11for any reason it is necessary tore-
align the doors of metal-clad swltchgear
during installation the procedure given in the
following paragraphs should be followed.
When transformers are furnished to
supply the control power, the primary
taps should be selected so that the control
voltage indicated on the wiring diagram
is obtained on the secondary of the trans
former. When a battery is used to supply
the control power, the cables from the
unit uniil it rests against the rear of the
front lifting saddle of the elevating mech
anism.
The clearance between the interfer
ence block on the breaker and the inter
ference block on the interlock lock mech
battery to the swltchgear should be large
level and plumb as described above, startat
either end of the swltchgear lineup and re
align each door individually as required.
enough to avoid excessive voltage drqp.
The voltage at the terminals of the breaker
anism (view X-X Figure 20) should be
from 1/16" to 1/8". At this point the
breaker positive interlock roller should
closing coils, when the'breaker is being
be centered in the bottom "VEE" of the
interlock cam plate.
The top ofeachdoor shouldiSe levelwith
closed, should not be less than 112.S volts
for 125 volt coils and 225 volts for 250
After chei^ing that the swltchgear is
the adjacent doors; the sides of each door volt coils.
plumb; thesurfaceofeachdoorflushwlththe
The operation of the breaker with
adjacent doors; and the space between ad its associated devices may be tested in
jacent doors equalized to permit their free the unit while the equipment is energized
swing and present a neat appearance. The
door stops should be adjusted to permit a
door swing of approximately 105*>.
Doors noay be raised or lowered vertic
ally ,or moved,forward or. backward horlzonrally, tqr loosening the hinge mounting
nuts on the left side sheet and shifting the
hinge and door assembly as allowed by
by use of the test coupler which is fur
nished.
Lower the breaker to the test or do^
position. Attach the test coupler to con
nect the breaker secondary disconnecting
device to that on the structure.
STORED ENERGY OPERATED BREAKER
Lower the breaker to the down posi
Doors may be shifted to the right or
left by adding or removingwasherspr shims
from between the hinge and side sheet.
tion and withdraw the breaker 2 1/4"
Doors may be plumbed byslightly bend
ing the appropriate hinges. To do this, open
the test coupler to connect the breaker
secondary disconnecting device to that on
until a notch in the spring discharge cam
the breaker interlock.
Attach
the structure.
High potential tests to check the integ
rity of the insulation are not necessary
the drift pin will move the door to the right,
and pushing back will move the door to the'
H the insulation instructions in this bookare
quired to plumb the door.
carefully followed. Should the purchaser
desire to make high potential tests, the
left.
Adjust each hinge individually as re
When properly aligned, the doors of out
door swltchgear should be tightly seated on
the gasket all around. After aligning such
test voltage should not exceed 14 kv A.C.
equipments.
These voltages are 75% of
factory test voltages and are in accordance
during hi^ voltage testing.
improperly adjusted, and should be read
OPERATION
justed until the card will no longer pass
through.
TESTING AND
INSPECTION
After the equipment has been Installed
and all connections made, it should be
tested and inspected before putting in ser
vice. Although the emipment and devices
have been completely tested at the factory,
a final field test should be made to be sure
that the equipment has been properly in
stalled and that all connections are correct
and have not become loose in transporta
tion. The primary equipment should be
completely de-energized while the tests
the motor clutch engages to raise the break
er in the unit. CarefiHly raise the breaker
and while elevating note that the shutter
slides open and the breaker studs center
with respect to the openings in the station
contacts may result.
The clutch handle is held in the for
ward position until a limit switch dn the
structure opens to stop the motor at the
end of the upward travel of the breaker.
The motor selector switch must not
be used to energize or interrupt the motor
circuit at any time.
When the breaker is fully elevated the
clearance between the breaker lifting rail
and the upper stop bolts should not be more
than 1/8" and not less than 3/32".
for 4.16 kv and 27 kv A. C. for 13.8
doors, close and latch the door and check with ANSI standards.
the seal by running a 3" x 5" card, shipping
Potential transformers and control
tag, IBM card, or some similar card around
the edge of the door. If the card will pass power transformers must be disconnected
between the door and the gasket, the door is
ch handle is under the elevating motor
in the 1000 MVA Unit) is then puUed for
ary disconnecting devices or injury to the
the slotted holes in the hinge.
the door and Insert a drutpln in either of the
two holes in the binge. Fulling forward on
handle just above the elevating motor (clut
ward until a motor limit switch closes and
SOLENOID OPERATED BREAKER
releases
To elevate the breaker, operate the
elevating control selector switch on the
elevating motor to "RAISE". A clutch
The operation of metal-clad switchgear is similar to that of other types
except that it provides maximum safety
to the operator and the feature of easyremoval and replacement of the circuit
The positive interlock roller should
be centered in the upper "VEE" and the
interlock roller should have 1/16" clear
ance to the stationary interference plate
directly under it.
To lower the breaker, proceed the
same as for raising except operate the
selector switch to "LOWER".
normal ;msition, opening the electrical
circuit to the motor.
breaker.
All
The clutch
must be held in the engaged position;
otherwise, a spring will return it to its
The breaker may be raised or lower
circuit
breaker removable ele
ments of the same type and rating which
have duplicate wiring may be interchanged.
BREAKER POSITIONING
To place the breaker in the opera
ting position, proceed as given below.
ed tiy an emergency hand crank which can
be inserted after removing the motor.
The motor is removed by unlatching the
motor assembly from its support and disbonnecting the motor lead plug. After
removing the motor, pull the clutch for
ward and insert the manual crank into the
end of the clutch coupling.
The breaker
must be open before the crank can be
inserted and held in the clutch coupling.
are in progress.
The elevating mechanism is accura
tely leveled and checked at the factory and
should need no adjustment. Do not install
Directions for testing devices such as
relays. Instruments and meters are given
or remove the breweror make adjustments
unless the breaker is open.
drawn from the unit inspect the contact
in the instruction book furnished for each
device. The settings of the protective re
lays must be coordinated with the other
relays on the system and therefore these
relays must be set by the purchaser. Gen
eral instructions on setting the relays are
^ven in the relay instructloh'biooks.' Speic-
ul
instruction books
are furnished for
complicated automatic equipments, des
cribing the sequence of operation of the
devices required to perform the desired
fimction.
26
After the breaker is lowered and with
surfaces
of both the breaker studs and
the stationary disconnecting devices.
Rub a small amount of contact lubri
cant D50H47 on the silvered portion of the
breaker studs to form a thin coatii^ for
contact purposes.
Lower the elevating mechanism lift
ing brackets until the lifting brackets are
in the fully lowered position. The breaker
should then enter the housing freely. After
first assuring that the breaker is in* the
open position, push the breaker ,into the
(a) Each segment of the stationary
disconnecting device should make a heavy
impression in the contact lubricant D50H47'
on the breaker studs. Contact wipe should
start not less than 1/8" from top of th6
contact ball although each contact need
not start at the same location.
See Fig.
11.
(b)
The wipe of the breaker stud
Metal-Clad Swltchgear GEH-1802
inside t&e stationary disconnectins device,
as indicated by the contact lubricant D50H47,
should be 3/4" to 7/8", This indicates that
the
breaker
studs contacted at the full
Sressure center of the silver band on
le stationary disconnecting device.
Fig. 11.
(c)
See
Should the inspection of the con
tacts show that the. breaker is not beii^
raised to the proper position, readjust
the upper stop bolts and limit switches
to raise or lower the breaker to the
proper location.
Lock the sl^ bolts
in the new position.
(d) If proper contacting cannot be
attained by the above methods, additional
adjustments will be necessary.
ELECTRIC CO OFFICE FOR ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION.
Snap
a definite stop should be encountered pre
venting the motor circuit limit switch
from energizing the motor circuit and lower
GENERAL
to
prevent raising or lowering a breaker
except when the primary contacts are
open. It also prevents closing primary con
tacts when the breaker is being raised
or lowered by blocking the operating mech
anism mechanically and electrically.
POSITIVE INTERLOCK ASSEMBLY FOR
SOLENOID OPERATE BREAKERS
To place the breaker in the opera
ting position, proceed as given below.
The elevating mechanism is accurately
leveled and checked at the factory and
should require no adjustment. Do not
Install or remove the breaker or make
adjustments unless the breaker primary
contacts are open.
Lower the elevating mechanism lift
ing brackets until the lifting brackets are
in the fully lowered position. The breaker
should then enter the housing freely. After
first assuring that the breaker primary
contacts are in the open position, insert
the breaker into the unit until it rests
against the rear of the front lifting saddle
of the eleyating mechanism..
The interlock should be checked to
see that the removable element is obst
ructed from being raised to or lowered
from the operating position when the pri
mary contacts are closed.
STATIONARY AUXILIARY SWITCH
indicated above DO NOT MAKE ANY AD
JUSTMENT. COMMUNICATE WITH THE
NEAREST GENERAL ELECTRIC CO. OF
FICE FOR ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS.
POSITIVE INTERLOCK ASSEMBLY FOR
To place the breaker in the operating
Any adjustment in this dimension must
ing InterchangeabiUty of the circuit break
er by excessive adjustment.
adjustment
Do not install
Lower the elevating mechanism lift
ing brackets until the luting brackets are
A stationary auxiliary switch test posi
tion link is furnished as an accessory for use
when the circuit breaker is in the test
position.
in the fully lowered position. The breaker
should then enter the housing freely. After
first assuring that the breaker primary
contacts are in the open position, insert
the breaker into the unituntilitrests again
st the rear of the front luting saddle of
the elevating mechanism.
BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THIS CHECK
IT IS NECESSARY THAT THE PRIMARY
CIRCUITS BE DE-ENERGIZED.
When entering a breaker into a unit
for elevating the spring discharge cam.
(on the left hand side of the unit) will'
hold the breaker interlock trip free and
the closing springs discharged untU the
breaker is 1/4" off the breaker floor
SPRING DISCHARGE CAM
The spring discharge cam is mount
ed on the left hand side of the unit and
operates in conjunction with a spring dis
charge Interlock on the breaker.
'When entering a breaker into a unit,
to elevate to the operating position, the
spring discharge cam wiU hold the break
er interlock trip free and the closing
springs discharged until the breaker is
1/4" off the floor rails. At this poiiit the
positive interlock is blocking the spring
charging and closing circuit open.
rail. (See detailed description of Spring
When lowering the breaker from the
Discharge Cam under separate heading).' operating
position the breaker must be
AGAIN IT IS EMPHASIZED THAT THE
PRIMARY CIRCUITS MUST BE DE-JINERGIZED BEFORE MAKING THIS CHECK OF
THE POSITIVE INTERLOCK.
open before the elevating mechanism can
be operated. While' the breaker is being
lowered the spring are still charged Init
the positive interlock blocks the breaker
from closing.
Elevate the breaker to theraisedposi-
tion and electricaUy close the breaker.
The positive interlock should be checked
to see that the removable element is ob-'
structed from being lowered from the
venting the motor circuit limit switch from
energizing the motor circuit and lowering
When the breaker is alxiut
1/4" from the floor rails the spring dis
charge interlock holds the breaker trip
free, discharges the closing springs andholds them discharged so long as the
breaker remains in its unit.
To operate the breaker in the test
position it is pulled forward, (out of the
Snap the selector switch to "LOWER"
A definite stop should be encountered pre
the breaker.
tained between the sliding clutch and the
motor connector when the positive interlock
is blocked by the breaker interlock roller.
See Fig. 1$ for dimension. Trip the break
Trip the breaker manually and elevate
to the operating position. AGAIN IT IS
fully lowered position. During the last i/4''
of travel the spring discharge cam will
discharge the stored energy springs and
maintain the breaker trip free as long
er manually and lower the breaker to the
as the breaker remains in the unit.
unit) about 2 1/4" until a_notch in the sp
ring discharge cam releases the breaker
interlock and the breaker can l>e operat
ed manually, or, by assembling the test
coupler, electrically. In the test posi
tion a mechanical block prevents operating'
the elevating mechanism.
A mimimun of 1/16" must be main
lock is blocked \fv the breaker interlock
roUer. See Fig. 15 for dimension.
EMPHASIZED THAT THE PRIMARY CIR
1/8" with the circuit breaker in the rais
require no
or remove the breaker or make adjust
ments unless the breaker primary contacts
and or closing springs are discharged.
clutch handle forward.
CUITS MUST BE DE-ENERGIZED BEFORE
on the circuit breaker should be 0 to
elevating mechanism is accurately level
The
position and pull the clutch handle forward.
switch close and before the sliding clutch
and motor connector engage. A mimimun
of 1/16" should be malntitined between
the two clutch parts when the positive inter
tween the end of the smtch mechanism
operating rod and the operating plunger
be made on the auxUiary switch setting.
Care should be taken to prevent destroy
position, proceed as given below.
Using the maintenance closing device,
close the breaker and snap the selector
switch to "RAISE" position and pull tte
before the contacts of the motor limit
On units equipped with stationary aux
iliary switches (Fig.30A)the clearance be
ed and open position.
operating position.
be stopped by the breaker interlock roUer
DO NOT MAKE ANY ADJUSTMENT. COM
MUNICATE WITH THE NEAREST GENER
AL ELECTRIC CO. OFFICE FOR ADDIT
IONAL INFORMATION.
If the interlock does not function as
BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THIS CHECK
IT IS NECESSARY THAT THE PRIMARY
CIRCUITS BE DE-ENERGIZED.
Movement must
the interlock does not function as indica
ted above.
ing the breaker.
ed and checked at the factory and should
POSITIVE INTERLOCK
r*N
Electrically close the breaker.
the Selector switch to "LOWER" positipn
and puU the clutch handle forward. Again,
STORED ENERGY
DO NOT MAKE ANY ADJUSTMENT. COM
MUNICATE WITH THE NEAREST GENERAL
The positive interlock functions
MAKING THIS CHECK OF THE POSmVE
INTERLOCK.
If after test operations the breaker
is left closed and/or its closing springs
charged, it wiU be automatically tripped
and held trip free while the springs are
discharged when it is reinserted in; or
while being withdrawn from its unit.
If
27
Metal-Clad Swltchgear GEH-1802
.
KEY LOCKS
Key locks for breaker units can be
furnished when requested.
The purpose of this device is to pre
vent a breaker from lieing closed in the
connected position when the lock key is
removed from the lock.
The key lock
consists of si metal support and key lock
mounted on the top plate flange and ad
jacent to the elevating motor clutch.
adjustment. The truck is equipped with two
latches, one to bold the breaker on the
truck
and one to hold the truck to the
metal-clad switchgear unit. Both latches
engage automatically, and both are re
leased by a single T-shaped foot pedal
on the rear of the truck. Depressinig the
left side of the pedal unlatches the truck
from the switchgear unit, and depressing
the right side of the pedal unlatches the
To operate the key lock if the break
er is in the disconnected or test position
the clutch handle is pulled forward allow
ing the key lock bolt to extend In t>ack
breaker from the truck. Trucks can tie
stored in breaker unit when breaker is
in operating position.
of the clutch handle. The key lock key can
If the breaker is in the connectedposition the breaker must first be opened.
Space heaters are provided in all
outdoor equipment in order to keep the
Inside temperature several degrees higher
Snap the selector switch to the "off"
position.
The clutch handle can then be
nished for indoor equipment when it is
than that outside.
Heaters are also fur
pulled forward allowing the key lock bolt
known that abnornuil atmospheric condi
to extend in back of the clutch handle.
tions exist at the ins'tallation,'or 'when
With the clutch handle pulled forward tte
positive interlock cam plate has rotated the
circuit breaker positive interlock shaft so
as to mechanically and electrically block
the bresiker from closing.
To' lower the brewer, snap the select
or switch to "LOWER", puU the clutch for
ward and lower the breaker to the test
position.
The key lock does not prevent opera
tion of the breaker in the test position.
However, if the breaker is elevated to
the connected position the key lock will
prevent its closing until the key is re
turned and the lock reset. See Fig. IS.
specified by the purchaser.
By maintaining a slight temperature
differential, the heaters help facilitate dry
ing and prevent condensation and the re
sulting corrosion and insulation deter
Heaters are normally located at the
sides of the breaker units, a few 'inches
almve the floor.
In auxiliary compart
ments with a single rollout, the heaters
will be in a space above the rollout. In
The stop plate is bolted to the left
hand unit frame angle near the floor of
all breaker units. A projection on the
cumstances should the interference stop
BEFORE ANY COVERS ARE REMOVED
OR ANY DOORS OPENED WHICH PERMIT
ACCESS TO THE PRIMARY CIRCUITS,
IF WORK IS TO BE DONE ON REMOTE
EQUIPMENT
CONNECTED TO A UNIT,
BE PLACED IN THE DISCONNECTED POSI
TION AND TAGGED
the power source Is of the proper voltage,
frequency, and phase arrangement, and
is connected in accordance with the wiring
diagrams furnished with the equipment.
Also, be sure to remove all cartons and
miscellaneous material packed inside the
units before energizing the heaters.
be energized at all times and that ther-
inserted.
depending on the operating conditions. In
any event, it will be a valuable reference
for subsequent maintenance work and for
station operation. It is recommended that
the record include reports of tests made,
the condition of equipment and repairs and
adjustments that were made.
THE BREAKER FOR THAT UNIT SHOULD
The breaker rating should be checked
against the unit rating and under no cir
be removed to allow the breaker to be
A permanent record of all maintenance
work should t>e kept, the degree of detail
rollouts.
Heaters may also be located
in superstructure compartments, transi
tion compartments, and in bus ducts if
the operating conditions require them.
an Incorrect breaker into the unit.
stop plate when an attempt is made to insert
ing the circuit breakers. Under normal
conditions the protective relays do not
iterate, therefore, it is Important to check
the operation of these devices regularly.
the heater will be in a space between the
auxiliary compartments with two rollouts,
Heaters should be visually inspected
several times a year to make sure they
are operating properly.
breaker frame will interfere with the unit
relays, meters, etc., refer to the separate
instraction hook furnished for each device.
The inspection cabinet, which is furnished,
IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT THE dRCUIT
OR CIRCUITS BE DE-ENERGIZED AND
BREAKERS BE WITHDRAWN TO A DIS
CONNECTED POSITION AND TAGGED.
Before energizing the heaters, be sure
a 1200A continuous current rating into a
unit with a 2000A rating and vice-versa.
reliability from the switchgear. Plant oper
ating and local conditions will dictate the
frequency of inspection required.
For
specific information regarding the main
tenance of devices, such as circuit breakers,
ioration which mi^t occur.
BREAKER INTERFERENCE STOPS
Stops are provided in the breaker unit
to prevent the insertion of a breaker with
A regular maintenance schedule should
be established to obtain the best service and
provides a convenient means for maintain
SPACE HEATERS
then be removed.
The key lock key csui then be removed
MAINTENANCE
See Fig. 8, view A, for instructions for
It is
recommended that the heaters
fflostatic control not be used.
If thermo-
static control is used, the contacts of
the thermostat should be set to close be
ALSO THE REMOTE
EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE ISOLATED FROM
ANY OTHER POWER SOURCES CONNEC
TED TO IT.
The primary circuits of metal-clad
switchgear are insulated in order to reduce
the size of the equipment. However, this
insulation, except in one or two instances,
requires a certain amount of air gap be
tween phases and to grotmd to complete the
Insulation. Inserting any object in this air
space, when equipment is energized, wheth
er it be a tool or a part of the body, may
under certain conditions, in effect, short
circuit this air gap and may cause a break
down in the primary circuit to ground and
cause serious damage or injury or hoth.
tween 95 F and 100 F on falling temper
TRANSFER TRUCKS
Circuit breaker transfer trucks are
furnished with outdoor metal-clad switch-
gear to facilitate moving of circuit break
ers from unit to unit or to maintenance
areas.
The platform at the front end of
the transfer truck is adjustable in height.
28
Care should be exercised in the main
ature, de-energizing the heaters only when
strong sunlight beats on the switchgear.
tenance and checking procedures that ac
Under no condition should a differential
thermostat be used to control the heaters
itiated.
cidental tripping or operation is not in
because under conditions of extremely high
humidity this type of thermostat will not
operate at all times to keep the heaters on
enou^ to prevent condensation in the
switchgear.
Tne switchgear structure and connec
tions should be given the following overall
maintenance at least annually.
o
Metal-Clad Switchgear GEH-1802
OUTDOOR ACRYLIC PAINT FINISH
Potential transformers and control pow
1. ThorougMy clean the equipment,
er transformers must be disconnected dur
removing all dust and other accumulations.
Wipe clean the buses and sivports. In
ing high voltage testing.
spect the buses and connections carefully
for evidence of overheating or weakening of
paint finishes.
the insulation.
3. Clean elevating mechanism and lub
ricate jack screws and gears with lubri
cant G.E. Co. #D50H15 (Atlantic Ref. Co.
#52 or e(p^).
2. Measure the resistance to grotmd
and between phases of the Insulation of
buses
and
connections.
Since
The outside of standard outdoor switch-
gear has acrylic paint finish, blue gray
ASA #24, providing Improved resistance
to all atmospheric conditions, longer life
and less maintenance than with ordinary
If it Is desired to reflnlsh acrylic
painted swltchgear. It Is necessary to use
one of the following procedures In order
to secure the best adhesion of the paint to
the original finish.
definite
4. Check primary disconnecting device
contacts for signs of abnormal wear or over
heating. Clean contacts with silver polish.
limits cannot be given for satisfactory
Insulation resistance values, a record must
be kept of the reading. Weakening of the
insulation from one maintenance period
to the next can be recognized from the
recorded readings. The readings should
be taken under similar conditions each time
A. Reflnlshlng with Acrylic Paint.
Discoloration of the silvered surfaces Is
with Du Pont acrylic paint of the desired
not ordinarily harmful unless atmospheric
conditions cause deposits such as sulphides
on the contacts. If necessary the deposits
color.
polish.
Company.
B. Reflnlshlng with Alkyd or
Paints,
Before replacing breaker, apply a thin
coat of contact lubricant 050H47 to breaker
studs for lubrication.
High potential tests are not required,
but If it seems advisable, based on the In
sulation resistance tests or after repairs,
5. Check to see that all anchor bolts
and bolts In the structure are tight. Check
tightness and continuity of all control con
nections and wiring.
the test voltage should not exceed 14 kv
A.C. for 4.16 av and 27 kv A. C. for 13.8
equipments.
These voltages are 75% of
6. If the swltchgear Is equipped with
heaters, check to see that all heaters are
energized and operating.
factory test volt^es and are in accord
ance with ANSI standards..
Obtain materials and Instruc
tions for application from the Du Pont
can be removed with a good ^ade of silver
If possible, and the record should Include
the temperature and humidity.
It Is
recommendea that reimisnuig be done
Oil Base
•iwometnoasarerecommenaea:
1. Spr^ one sealer coat of Du Pont
233Er7S300 or equivalent which has
been reduced to spraying viscosity
with Du Pont 37692 or 37666 thinner.
Air dry for one hour.
Apply alkyd
or oil base paint.
2. ^ray one sealer coat of Arco
214-806 primer which has been re
duced to spraying viscosity with
Xylol. Air dry for one hour. Apply
alkyd or oil base paint.
OVERLAP
METAL CLAD
FRAME
ANGLE.^
m/c. fr.
/angle
*1 ^ j
ULI)
tm M
SHIMS
INTERLOCK
mJI
^CAM SUPT
BKR PQS
STOP
^1
interlock
CAM •plate
MOTOR
_aMlT SW.
LIFTIKIG BRKT.
iO
8
Jfl.
ENLARGED VIEW X-X
•
Fig. 29A (208A8952) Positive Interlock Adjustment
29
GEH-1802
Metal-clad SwUchgear
RENEWAL PARTS
OHDERING INSTRUCTIONS
1. RENEWAL PARTS SHOULD BE ORDERED FROM THE SWITCHGEAR PRODUCTS DEPARTMENT.
2. ALWA-ra SPECIFY THE REQUISITION NUMBER ON WHICH THE EQUIPMENT WAS ORIGINALLY FURNISHED.
3. SPECIFY THE QUANTITY, REFERENCE NUMBER, DESCRIPTION AND THIS BULLETIN NUMBER.
4. STANDARD HARDWARE, SUCH AS SCREWS, BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS, ETC., IS NOT LISTED. SUCH ITEMS
SHOULD BE PURCHASED LOCALLY.
5. FOR PRICES, REFER TO THE NEAREST OFFICE OF THE GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY.
6. IF INSULATING MATERIAL, SUCH AS TAPE, VARNISH, COMPOUND, ETC., IS REQUIRED, IT MUST BE
SPECIFIED SEPARATELY.
7. IF PARTS LISTED SEPARATELY ARE TO BE ASSEMBLED AT THE FACTORY, ORDER MUSTSO STATE.
8. NOT ALL PARTS LKTED HEREIN WILL BE USED ON ANY ONE EQUIPMENT. PARTS NOT USED IN
ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT SHOULD NOT BE ORDERED AS RENEWAL PARTS.
1
:
•
® «
A •
«
»
I
PRIMARY DISCONNECT DEVICES
(SEE FIG. NO. U)
DESCRIPTION
5
1
I^
^
'1
r
Front Primary Disconnect Device
Assembly, 3 Pole, Complete with
Connections
6
^ I
Rear Primary Disconnect Device
Assembly, 3 Pole, Complete with
Connections
NOTE;
Insulating material required lor
Ref. Nos. 5 and 6 will be furnished
with order.
POSmVE MECHANICAL INTERLOCK
(FIG. NO. aOA)
REF. NO.
3
4
4
4
18
DESCRIPTION
Complete positive mechanical
interlock assembly
Elevating mechanism motor
(115-v ^c)
Elevating mechanism motor
(230-v d-c)
Elevattng mechanism motor
(230-v d-c)
^ring only
Fig. 30A View Showing Elevating Mechanism Motor and Control Unit
\
Metal-Clad Swltchgear CEH-1B02
Complete Left Hand (Ref. No. 1)
Complete Right Hand (Ref. No. 2)
Fig. SO Elevating Mechanism for M.26 Equipments Bated 2S0 mva and M-36 Equipments Rated 1200A 500 mva
Complete Right Hand (Ref. No. 2A)
Complete Left Hand (Ref. No.- lA)
Fig. 31 Elevating Mechanism for M-Stm Equipments Hated 750 mva, M-26H Equipments Rated 350 mva and M-36 Equipments
Rated 500 mva 200CIA
(See Paee 32 for Parts Table)
GEH-1802 Metal-o.lad Switchgear
ELEVATING MECHANISMS
Flga. 30, 31, and 31A
REF. NO.
DESCRIPTION
7
Miter gears, pair
7A
8
Roll pin lor miter gear
Shaft, right
8A
9
9A
Shaft, left
Sprocket
Roll pin for sprocket
9B
10
10
lOA
Roll pin for spur gear
11
llA
Stop stud
Stop bolt
12
Pinion gear and rod
12
Spur gear
12A
Boll pin for spur gear
13
7
8ft 9B 9 9A
Complete Left Hand (Ref. No. IB)
Bearing Block
Spur gear
Pinion gear and rod
Locking spring
14
Stop sl^t
14A
14B
Roll pin for stop shaft
Stop shaft bracket
15
ISA
Clutch spring
Roll pin lor clutch spring
16
17
S'.tde Clutch
Jack Screw
9A 9 9B
7A7 7ft
IOIOA14AI3
Complete Right Hand (Bef. No. 2B)
Fig. 31A Elevating Mechanism for M-36HH Eqfuipments Rated 1000 MVA
9II Vutn*.1 •«« r#M *oi B»ii#a"aIBf nt i>»atp»a >u»M*n Wn >a»n
DESCRIPTION
Fig. o3 Shutter Mechanism Assembly M~26.
lu"
F^. 34 Shutter Mechanism Assembly M>36
QEB-1602
Metal-clad SwitchKear
REF. NO.
DESCRIPTION
25
26
Isolating barrier support angle
Rear Isolating barrier
27
Intermediate isolating barrier
28
29
Front isolating barrier
Isolating barrier clip
30
Isolating Ijarrier support
LOCATION RATING
1200A.
1200A.
1200A.
1
1
1
1
I200A.
1200A.
no connection tiar
no connection bar
1600A.
1600A.
1
1
1
I
1200A.
1600A.
1600A.
1600A.
Fig. 35
1600A,
Bus Support
DESCRIPTION
2000A,
connection
connection
connection
connection
connection
connection
connection
connection
bar,
bar,
bar,
bar,
bar,
bar,
bar,
bar,
down
up
down
up
down
up
down
up
no connection bar
no connection bar
1 connection bar, down
1 connection bar, up
2000A.
2000A,
2000A.
1 connection bar, down
1 connection bar, up
2000A.
2000A.
no connection bar
2000A.
2000A.
2000A.
2000A.
no connection bar
3 connection bars,
3-connection bars,
3 connection bars,
3 connection bars,
Insulating boot
dow
up
dow
up
Plastic rivet for tioot
• Specify unit number and phase on which boot is
to be used.
Fig. 36 Molded Bus support
(U.IS or 13.8 kv Units)
Fig. 37
Bus Connection Boot
4.16 kv and 13.8 kv
Metal-clad Swltcheear
REF. NO.
61
65
DESCRIPTION
60
Limit Switch SBl type
61
Light Switch
62
Keyless receptacle
63
Duplex receptacle
64
Strip heater
65
66
67
qEH-1802
Fuse block, open type*
Fuse block, dead front*
_ Limit switch, mercury type
(66 Complete secondary disconnect Device
Fig. 30A (6£ Complete stationary auxiliary
\
switch mechanism
'Specify amp rating of fuse and number of poles.
Fig. 39 Wiring Devices and Miscellaneous Parts
71
72
7J
DESCRIPTION
REF. NO.
Panel locking handle
Panel handle
Door locking tiandle
Door handle
Socket
w-
"ff
F«. 36 Door Handles and Locks
FUSE ROLLOUT UNIT
REF. NO.
75
DESCRIPTION
Fuse clip
76
Insulator
77
Ground Bar
76
Ground Finger
79
80
Barrier
Cover
81
82
83
Tray
Strap
Insulator Support
84
Insulator Clamp
85
Barrier
86
87
Compound Strap
Finger
88
39
90
Connection bar
Connection txir
Connection liar
91
Connection liar
Connection t>ar
Connection bar
locator Support
Fig. 40
Fuss Rollout Unit
GEH-1802 ' Metal-clad Swltchgear
=^H06
104
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER ROLLOUT UNIT
REF. NO.I
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
Fig. 41
DESCRIPTION
^
Insulator
Insulator clamp
Insulator support
Disconnect barl
Finger
Barrier
Disconnect bar
Disconnect tor
Barrier
Ground finger
Ground finger support
Ground finger support
Barrier
Sec. disconnect (stationary)
Sec. disconnect (movable)
Brace
Tray
Cover
Potential Transformer Rollout Unit
U>
CO
CO
St
CONTROL TRANSFORMER ROLLOUT UNIT
REF. NO.
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
fa
DESCRIPTKRf
Insulator
Insulator clamp
Insulator support
Contact bar
Ground finger support
Ground finger
Ground shoe contact
Fuse clip
Primary contact
Ground bar
Ground finger support
Ground finger
Cross angle
Barrier
Barrier
Sec. disconnect (movable)
Sec. disconnect (stationary)
u
(not shown)
192
193
Fig. 42
Tray
Cover
h
Control Power Transformer Rollout Unit
SINGLE & TRIPLE-CONDUCTOR POTHEAQS
REF. NO.
J0«<
2ar,208,209
Fig. 43
3-74
12-70
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
DESCRIPTION
Triple-conductor pothead assembly
Body
Insulators and support
Wiping sleeve
Gaskets for triple-conductor pothead
o
Terminal
Contact nut
Washer
Palnut (3/4 in. - 12)
Pipe plug (3/4 in. std.)
Pipe plug (1/8 in. std.)
Single-conductor pothead assembly
Body and insulator
Gaskets for single-conductor pothead
Wipii^ sleeve
Single and Triple-Conductor Potheads
GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY, PHILADELPHIA, PA.
fMi
GEH-1802R
INSTRUCTIONS
AND
RENEWAL PARTS
Supersedes
GtH>l802P AND 6EF-3837
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR
Types M-26 ond M-36
For Magne-blast Air Circuit Breoker
Types AM-4.16 and AM-13.8
SWITCHGEAR DEPARTMENT
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
PHILADELPHIA,
PA.
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
PAGE
Fig.
1
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
IS
16
Fig. 2
Typical Indoor Metal-clad Swltchgear Equipment
T^lcal Outdoor Metal-clad Swltchgear Equipment - Front View
4
4
iTPical Outdoor Metal-clad Swltchgear Equipment - Side View
Magne-blast Breaker
Magne-blast Breaker
Magne-blast Breaker
Installation Details for Indoor Metal-clad Swltchgear
Installation Details lor Outdoor Metal-clad Swltchgear
Installation Details for Outdoor Metal-clad Swltchgear with Protected Aisle
Metal-clad Swltchgear
Measurement of Adjustment of Primary Disconnect Devices
Potential Transformer Rollout Shown In Withdrawn Position
Dummy Removable Element
Ground and Test Device
Padlocking Arrangement, Key Interlocking and Method for Pouring Connection Boxes
Control Power Transformer Rollout Shown In ^en Position
4
5
S
S
6
8
10
11
12
12
13
13
14
15
Fig. 18
Fig. 19
Outdoor Metal-clad Sqltchgear - Addition of Units to Line-up
Outdoor Metal-clad Swltchgear - With Protected Aisle
16
17
Fig, 20
Outdoor Transition Compartment
18
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Outdoor Transition Compartment
Positive Interlock Mechanism Interference Block
Inspection Box for 13.8 KV Metal-clad Swltchgear
Torque Values for Metal-clad Swltchgear
18
19
19
20
Fig. 17
21
22
23
24
Tandem Lockfor Outdoor 13.8 I^ Units
IS
Fig. 24A
Bus Duct Gaskets
20
Fig. 25
Method of Making Bus Bar Connections
21
Fig. 26
13.8 KV Taped Joints
21
Fig. 27
to
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig,
Fig.
Fig.
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Potheads
22
Insulation of Connection Bars
Single-Conductor Pothead with Stress Cone
Triple-Conductor Pothead
Rear View of Unit Showing Through-type Current Transformers
Termination Without Pothead - Single-Conductor
Termination Without Pothead - Multi-Conductor
23
23
24
25
25
25
Renewal Parts
Fig. 45
Elevating Mechanism for M-26 Equipment Rated 250 mva or Less
and M-36 Equipment Rated 1200A 500 mva or Less
Fig. 45A View Showing Elevating Mechanism Motor and Control Unit
Fig. 46
28
28
Elevating Mechanism for M-36H Equipment Rated 750 mva
M-26 Equipment Rated 350 mva
M-36 Equipment Rated 2000A
28
Fig. 46A Elevating Mechanism for M-36HH Equipments Rated 1000 MVA
29
Fig. 47
Fig. 48
Angle Bracket and Chain Drive
Shutter Mechanism Assembly M-26
29
29
Fig. 49
Shutter Mechanism Assembly M-36
29
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
50
51
52
53
Bus Supports
Door Handles and Locks
Bus Connection Box
Bus Connection Boot
30
30
30
31
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
54
55
56
57
Wiring Devices and Miscellaneous Parts
Fuse Rollout Unit
Potential Transformer Rollout Unit
Control Transformer Rollout Unit
Fig. 58
Single and Triple Conductor Potheads
!
31
31
32
32
32
'
CONTENTS
PAGE
RECEIVING, HANDLING & STORAGE
RECEIVING
HANDLING
STORAGE
DESCRIPTION
SECONDARY ENCLOSURE
PRIMARY ENCLOSURE
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT
BREAKER ELEVATING MECHANISM
PRIMARY DISCONNECT DEVICE
11
II
11
11
11
11
11
12
12
BUS COMPARTMENT
12
CURRENT TRANSFORMER AND CABLE COMPARTMENT
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER COMPARTMENT
DUMMY REMOVABLE ELEMENT
ROLLOUT FUSE-SWITCH UNITS
FUSE DISCONNECTING DEVICE
GROUNDING AND TEST DEVICE
12
12
12
13
13
13
TANDEM LOCK (WHEN FURNISHED) FOR OUTDOOR UNITS
13
INSTALLATION
LOCATION
PREPARATION OF FLOOR-ANCHORING
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT
'
11
15
15
15
19
TESTING CABINET
19
ADDITION OF UNITS TO EXISTING EQUIPMENT
20
CONNECTIONS
CONTROL CABLES
20
25
GROUND BUS
DOOR ALIGNMENT
26
26
TESTING AND INSPECTION
26
OPERATION
BREAKER POSITIONING
TRANSFER TRUCKS
26
26
26
SPACE HEATERS
27
MAINTENANCE
27
RENEWAL PARTS
28
>« ^1
ii
rA
Typical Outdoor Metal-cUd Switciisear
Equlpnent • Front View
Figi 3
Typical Outdoor Hetal-clad Switchgear Equipasnt
Nitii Protected Aisle ' Side View
METAUCLAD SWITCHGEAR
TYPES M26 AND M36
FOR MAGNE-BLAST AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER
TYPES AM>4.16 AND AM-13.&
Metal-clad switchgear is equipment to
control and protect various types o( elec
trical apparatus and power circuits.
The switchgear consists of one or more
units which are mounted side by side and
connected mechanically and electrically to
gether to form a complete switching equip
ment.
Typical equipments are shown in
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
INTERRUPTING
CAPACITY
KVA
Figures 1, 2 and 3.
CURRENT
FIGURE
TYPE M-26
The circuit breakers are easily re
movable to provide maximum accessibili^
for maintenance with minimum interrup
tion of services. The switchgear is designed
to provide maximum safefy to the operator.
All equipment is enclosed in grounded metal
150,000
250,000
350,000
AM-4.16-150
AM-4.16-250
AM-4.16-350
conqiartments.
1200
1200 - 2000
1200 - 3000
TYPE M-36
The equipment is available in the rat
ings llstedin&e followingtable. The ratings
of the equipment and devices are based on
usual
service
conditions
as covered
AIEE and NEMA standards.
In
Operation at
currents above the equipment rating will
result in temperature rises in excess of
NEMA standards, and is not recommended.
For outdoor
equipment
is
Installation
built into
the
same
basic
AM-13.B-150
AM-13.8-2S0
AM-13.8-250
AM-13.8-750
AM-13.8-1000
AM-7.2-250
AM-7.2-500
150,000
250,000
500,000
1200
250,000
1200
1200 - 2000
1200 - 2000
1200 - 3000
1200
500,000
1200 - 2000
750,000
1,000,000
a weatherproof
bousing as in Figures 2 and 3.
I ar
Hagne-bUat Breakers
These initrvcffons do not purport lo cover oil datailt or rariatioru in equipmerrf rtor lo provide for every potsible
conlinganey lo be met in connectionwith instoHotron, operation or fflointenence. ShovM further informetion be daiirtd
or shouldparlieular problems arite which ore not covered sufftcienlly for the purchaser's purposes, the maftor should
be referred lo the General floetrie Company.
GEE-1802
Metal-clad Switchgear
RtHOValLE COVER POR ICCEIS
TO HIRES IN VIRINO TROUSH
ALL FLOOR STEEL TO BE FURNISHED BY PURCHASER
CHANNELS SHOULD BE SET LEVEL WITH EACH OTHER
AND SHOULD BE LEVEL OVER THEIR FULL LENGTH
ROUGH FLOOR THICKNESS AND REINFORCING DEPENDS
ON LOADING AND OTHER NORMAL FACTORS. AND SHOULD
BE DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH RECOMMENDED PRACTICE
SRERRER HEHOVARLE
SlOt
PINtSMED PLOOR LINE
SHINS'-
RECOMMENDED METHOD
riNISHEB FLOOR
HOTEi IT IS IMPERATIVE THAT
UNE
ALTERNATE
METHOD
FLOOR STEEL SE EVEN
WITH FINISHEO FLOOR
AMD THAT 80TH BE LEVEL
Fig. 7
Installation Details
Metal-Clad Switchgear OBH-1802
IT HAY K NIOeSSAIIY TO RtKOVC
POTWAO OH OABLC tUFPOHT FOH
KCHBCfl •
METHOD
OF LIFTING
MEMBERS A-a C
TO BE FURNtSHEO BY PURCHASER
A* RAtSlNO IfEMBCR - CHANNEL OR WOOD BEAM
B- 3* CHANNEL FURNtSHEO WITH GEAR
C* LIPTWO JACKS
0- COVER 10 BE REMOVED AND REASSEMBLED
AFTER UNITS ARE M PLACE
note: when UFTIN6 M-26 SWITCHGEAR
UOCATE BEAM V ABOVE UFTINO
CHANNELS *8*
-DOOR
OPEN
ALTERNATE 'METHOD OF LIFTING
MEMBERS A a E TO BE FURNISKEO BY PURCHASER
8-3* CHANNEL FURNISHED
For Indoor Metal-clad Swltchgear
WITH
SEAR
D -
COVER TO BE REMOVED AND REASSEMBLED
AFTER UNITS ARE IN
PLACE
E -
SPREADER
GEH-1802
Metal-clad Switchgear
MtLC
CONNeeTieM
/,
1=
•O
to
R
„n-T-r-r-is
TPACK 4ACIC
•OOP
CAM
METHODS OF LIFTING
anjusriiBLE
PLsmarl
SEE VIEW a
BPFiY CMT
OjfiOKt/
DOOR
STe-£^
c£(^/fS*YEr-
3n7
C£i»£nrr
/fUa>^
/9aYD 3^/:'
C£/f/E/\rr7S
iiey(£/r/4. tae^V SE/^aes
Roor c«P
/
•l-H *lj STl. 8«LT
ceoR
ENlflRCf P
SEC. B-B
neTMov OF £esa.m/e^AF/t^
3}eioJZ efftSfoET Ey
SH/FV//y
f
sttriON
src.c-c
/EBTEEB <9^/PSSEm&LW
iiBetween the tandem bar and
the locking bar, and aseparatepadlock used
on that door.
(In exceptionally long installations
of the tandem lock is clearly marked on
The light switches, front and rear,
two or more locks may be required on each
side). The unitcontalnlngtheoperatingarm
the drawings and also by nameplate on the
will be located in the units with the tandem
side.
equipment itself. Refer to Figure 17.
INSTALLATION
Before any installation work is done,
consult and study all drawings furnished
by the General Electric Company for the
particular requisition.
These drawings include arrangement
drawings, wiring and elementary diagrams
and a summary of the equipment. Mats,
screens, railings, etc., which are external
The space at the rear must t>e sufficientfor
pletely aligned prior to final anchoring.
maintenance, and on some equipments to
The
draw out potential transformers.
shown in Figure 7.
The floor channels
Steel shims should be used
for final leveling of the switchgear if nec
Indoor Equipment
smooth, hard, and level floor under and in
essary. Care shouldbe taken to provide a
The station floor mustl>estrongenough
to prevent sagging due to weight of the
impact stress caused by the opening of the
circuit In-eakcrs under short circuit con
The recommended aisle space required
at the front and at the rear of the equipment
Is shown on the floor plan drawiugfurnished
each other.
PREPARATION OF FLOOR - ANCHORING
switchgear structure and to withstand the
LOCATION
recommended floor construction is
must be level and straight with respect to
to the switchgear, but which may bo re
quired to meet any local codes, must t>e
furnished by the purchaser.
gear structure and the equipment be com
InstaUation of cables, fur inspection and
ditions.
The impact loading is approxi
mately 1-1/2 times the static load.
front of the tmits to facilitate installation
and removal of the breaker. If the floor is
not level and flush with the floor channels,
It will be difftoilt to handle the breaker
because it will not be level with respect to
the stationary elemenU
Recommended practice is to weld the
switchgear structure to the floor channels,
for the particular requisition. The space at
Suit^lc means must be provided by
using a tack weld at points indicated for
till' front must bo sufficient to permit the
the purchaser for anchoring the equipment
anchoring on the drawing. Ifweldingfacilities are not available the gear should
insertion
and
withdrawal
of
the
circuit
breakers, and their transfer to other units.
to the floor.
It is essenti^ that the floor
be level to avoid distortion of the switch-
be bolted to the floor channels.
GEH-ie02
Metal-clad SwttchBear
^
"T
I^
i k
l|
..
til
1
-•r
•h
>1
II
II
I!
I "I*
II
d
.Jl
ex*srtfr»
Htw vm/rs Aooeo AT
Mgw t/MffS
u^frx
Aec€0 AT Rl9»*r fMO
FfiO/*T
(MHti. CMD)
MtMOVt rxtsi Af*ftrt rn^tm ^trJ f o
Ao«^
t.HO
etiLf
•
.J
I
S
I"
r~
^ Mdars
ae^riMd
r»«*nr<« M r
se^TtoH 'f-r'
OAMva ass
cenMtenaH
ASSEMSCV *6'
(aanMf cf iMfi y9*MTMnii
(CM0
WITH
REAR
/
ENCLOSURE
MCTWM 0Mir
cf!
/
1^ '•8US 8ftRS
END ^CriON
"I
Y
y
®
y^RCKove Tins sTjriP vit* mst
irMf CUfS
r
V/£W*A'
Q^gMtsru^ vm')
PNoccov^r
/.
tteo^ C*f» gxc Scggp*, 0*09*0 Bvf cOMfttcn^*, AMO
£^o S£cr/oH. SEE VIEW TT t
VIEW V
2. Srr ffff UMtr^} M ^dAco MO eotr ToognttA aa Smowm
'^KOLtS MR 0AITINC
iM ASS£AtOLY 'B ' f
TORirtrtK
see KCTieH'T-*
J. ASSSAfOdO
ftOONO OUS
eoNNicnoM
r^6«srEr
«R04)KP
mssrutc
QdVfR
3r
^
ASSCKBtr 'C* rw CAPS RCNiveo
OSSIASir *C'
/rg/ts dJSTiO /ft PACceOtAOf MO.t
♦, ASS£MOt£ NiAf ftocr CAPS AS SftOmff* (f* YtrttA 'a' f FtfWV.
S
opovfto st/s
msTptfcrtoft 900A,
sesriN
VIEW 'D*
(aotriKS •» iMtrs n4if«fR^
(CNp VIEW «#C4nSTW9 OHtl)
WITHOUT RE/IR TNCLOSUR^
Flj. 18
16
SPiiCc eerweoAi £*tsrwo Afto
/tsiv cpovA/o aos. AS sffOMif tM AssrAfBir 'a ' t nsionxV
&. ASSPf^OLC OltS OAJfS AHO iNSUinrC TEN
Outdoor Hetal-clad Switchgear - Addition of Units to Line-up
Metal-clad Swttchgear
—
-ri--.
I I
'
r-Tlij
1
II
^j
ii
II
i.'
li
II
I
GKH-1802
I
II
II
li
i I
!!
II
I
II
II
II
II
li
ii
I
ii
! "I
A
Ji..j
II
,JL.
:z2
exISTlNft UNIT5
FRONT
NEW uMtTS ddpEB n
msiir end
View
vCNr
/BRTtCH
CNI VeNT
/MUlMrcltJlTe
rfNT CR^
ROD' Cir
3
(dSMT
<•>
Woor
itte RBurrfK CUP
WO CR^ —
t»»F surr
AlSlC TRUSS ANQIC
I CUPS &
NCTAL CUP
T« DEIUVC KISIIN^ tup SVECT ( lEEl)
QRMIIP IDS
a REHOVt THE E«llOWIN« ITEMS FRDM «IUE SECEION
(flOVCTtMl
(M«CT
RMPrit MRiC ^
fiooK PMre
fkM« ntiNC
M4U
riecu FRMC
SCRriNI-
w
SECTION
I VENT aUTTlM
I ENP VENT CNP
3 Mef CUPS
4 CNP SECTION COKSISTINIf OF ITEMS M»««B A
5. FRONT COVER (HOVE TO NEW UNIT;
C SCNCENS (e;
B.
REMOVE ROOF CAP,END SCREEN, «ROUNS BUS
CONNECTION AND END SECTION IROM NEEAl CIRO SECTION
TO INSTAIL HEW HETAL ClAO UNITSf lEFTJ
I. JET NEW UNIT(S) IN FIACE ANO BOIT TOOETNE*
t assemble items listed in B
S. ASSCMSIE NEW ROOF CAPS
4 ASSEHSIC WOUND BUS SPLICE SETWEEN lEISTINS
.4
AND NEW WOUND BUS
DMN—
mjc RORPflR .
WSIC f MSRtr
6
5 ASSEMBLE BUS BARS AND INSULATE FEN
INSTRUCTION BOOK
TO INSTALL NEW FROTECTEO AISLE UNITSfUFT;
^ao«fl RMPTM
CND sMcrr-t
A
I install new floor frames and floor plate
• RVRICS
1/
TIE DOWN ANOLE
A
E RcriACf floor frame anrle at new end position
J. INSTAIL NEW FLOOR PLATES
t u . MIT'
4 ERECT NEW CORNER COLUMN (OII«LE>
5 ROD NEW AISLE TRUSS AMALC AMD NETAL CLAD
ADAPTER CLIP TO ERISTIN4 END ROOF IRUSS
RtUC <
TOP tllP^
AND
SUPPORT
0 install new end AISLE TRUSS SUB-ASSEMBLY
mo MUtc I
»P CUP A
COHSISriNA or ROOF TRUSS AMBLE, ROOF SUPT,
COLUMN CLIP, NEFAl CLAD AAAPTER CLIP ANO
SECTION E'E
ROOF SUPT CLIPS
FLAM OKRCKCr A
MTrRNfewrt
e&LUKM
•
.riOM PlRTt Ttf CMIVN AN(i( fS
• — WITN
- I NCW
XrvMlSKCD
N
FMRf
T REINSTRIL TRE ITEMS FEMOVED IM R-«
NOTE -USE NEW OASnrs ARDALSO install
FRCriOUS END FRONT COVER ON FRONT
VifTeifp
OF NEW END UNir
rCMIT C»vtR
SECTION
MtV
l»
E««in 20
Fig. 21
Outdoor Transition Conpartaent
Provision should be made in the floor
for conduits for primary and secondary
cables, located as shown on the floor plan
drawing furnished for the particular requi
sition.
If desired, the co^utts may be in
stalled before the switchgear. Consider
ation should be given to conduits which
might be required for future connections.
Outdoor Equipment
Outdoor equipments are furnished both
with and without rear enclosures. Recom
mendations for foundations for both types
are given in Fig. 8. Primary and secondary
conduits should be installed in accordance
with the requisition drawings, before the
equipment is put into place.
Since outdoor equipments are provided
'th a 6" iKkse, a transfer truck is required
iKi place the breaker in the housing. The
level adjustment on the truck is shown in
Fig. 8.
When outdoor equipments are shipped
In more than one section, the joint between
sections mustbeweatherproofed. Assemble
(3) Apply Sterling U-310varnish to both
in place until the aisle enclosure is as
sides of the gaskets furnished for the joint' sembled in order to maintain alignment
between the ends of the switchgear and the
aisle enclosure and to the surfaces against
which the gasket presses and hang the
gaskets on the projecting studs at the ends
of the switchgear lineup. See Fig. 0,
section A-A.
(4) Move the aisle enclosure into posi
tion, guiding the holes in the end sheets
over the studs on the switchgear lineup
of the enclosure.
(10) Connect secondary wiring to lights,
convenience outlets, etc., in accordance
with the wiring diagrams furnished for
the equipment.
Since
the
aisle
floor is level with
the floor of the switchgear units, no trans
fer truck Is required for outdoor equipment
and guiding the roof sills between the
support clips bolted to the upper front
of the switchgear units above the control
panels. This operation may be simplified
by temporarily loosening the siqiport clips.
with a protected aisle.
The Hoor of the aisle enclosure must fit
only. If the aisle is common to two Itneiqis of switchgear, the procedure will re
under the hinged breaker cover of the metalclad, so the aisle enclosure must be moved
into position on a level with the switch-
gear units. If desired, this Job may be
simplified by removing the doors over the
circuit breaker compartment. To remove
these doors, loosen the two bolts holding
the lower hinge, remove the hinge, and
lower the door to remove the hin^ pin
The above procedure describes In
stallation of a protected aisle enclosure
with switchgear on one side of tte aisle
quire sll^t modification. See the drawings
furnished with the requisition for specific
instructions.
Transition Compartments
Transition compartments for outdoor
unit substations may be one of two types
the gasket between the doors, using cement
from the upper hinge.
provided. Refer to Fig. 8, Section B-B.
Annemble the gasket bemeen the roof sec
tions, bolt together and install the roof caps.
Refer to Fig. 8, Section C-C.
(9) Bolt the aisle enclosure in place
at both ends, and bolt the roof sills to
full height compartment (Fig. 20) cannot
the support clips, tightening any support
clips loosened in the previous operation.
throat ^e compartment (Fig. 21) can be
installed in any of three ways, in accord
Ckitdoor Equipment with Protected Aisle
When specified by the purchaser, out
door e.iuipment is furnished with an en
closed, weatherproof operating aisle. See
Fig. 3. The aisle enclostire is shipped
separately from the switchgear.
The following procedure outlines the
steps necessary to install outdoor equip
ment with a protected aisle:
(1) Install the switchgear in accordance
with the procedure given above for outdoor
Replace any breaker conqiartment doors
previously removed.
(6) If the aisle enclostire was shipped
in more than one section, bolt the sections
together and assemble the roof caps in the
manner described above for roof Joints in
outdoor switchgear.
(7)
Anchor the outside floor sill of
the aisle enclosure with anchor bolts plac^
in accordance with the requisition Rawing.
equipment
See Fig. 9, view Y.
(2) Remove the shipping covers from
the control panels. Since the relay and
instrument cases are not weather-proof,
(8) Assemble the dome over the roof
opening between the switchgear and the
tlie control panels should be protected
from inclement weather until the installa
tion of the aisle enclosure is compieted.
18
aisle enclosure.
See Fig. 9, view X.
(9) Remove shipping braces from aisle
enclosure.
These braces should be left
(Figs. 20 and 21). These compartments
are normally shipped assembled.
be disassembled for instalmtion.
The
The
ance with the following instructions:
(a) Should the switchgear be position
ed on Its fouiHiatlon prior to the power
transform^, the complete transition enn
be mounted on the metal-clad as assembled.
Remove covers #8.
Apply Sterling U 310
varnish to both sides of gasket 2A, and
to the surfaces against which the gasket
presses. Bolt transition compartment to
throat on metal-clad switchgear. Before
Jacking the power transformer Into its
final locaiion, apply Sterling U 310 varnish
to both sides of gasket lA ^d to the sur
faces against which the gasket presses,
and place the gasket over the mounting
studs on the transformer tank wall, ^ide
transformer in place, guiding the trans
former mounting studs throughthemounting
holes in #1.
Center rubber seal between
Metal-Clad Swltchgear
(d) U proper contacting cannot be at
#1 and fS before tightening nuts, main
tained by the above methods, It Is necessary
to adjust (hestationarydisconnectingdevice
taining 24" iKtween transformer tank wall
and end of metal-clad.
GEH-1802
Do not apply var
lube. DO NOT MAKE ANY ADJUSTMENT.
COMMUNICATE WITH THE
NEAREST
GENERAL ELECTRIC CO. OFFICE FOR
nish to the rubber seal between #1 and 43.
Cut secondary conduit #10 to length and
assemble under the transition.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
(b) Should the power transformer be
The trip interlock should be checked to
positioned on Its foundation prior to the
see that the removable element is obstructed
switcheear. follow the procedure of para-
from being raised to or lowered from the
operating position. Using the manual closing
graph (a) alxnre, except move the switch-
gear up to the power transformer after
assembling the transition compartment
to the switchgear.
1
(e) U ttepowertransformerandmetal-
clad OTltChgear are In place, disassemble
transition as follows:
Remove covers #8
.-•d
and #9, adapter #1, dome #7, braces #4.
Apply Sterling If 310 varnish to both sides
of gasket #2A, and to the surfaces agatnst
which the gasket presses, before bolting
#2 to metal-clad throat.
Apply Sterling
U 310 varnish to both sides of gasket #iA,
Slide throat of #3 into
#1 and maintain approximately 4 1/2"
from
#3
to tank.
alignment, then tighten #1 to transformer
tank.
Assemble connections, terminals,
FiQ. 22
Positive Interlock Hechanisn
interference Block
#9.
Cut secondary condutt #10 to length
and assemble under the transition.
(a) Each segment of the stationary dis
connecting device should make a heavy im
pression in the contact lubricant D50H47
on the breaker studs. Contact wipe should
Connect
heaters
located In 13.8 kv
class transition compartment
start not less tlian 1/8" from top of contact
ball although eacti contact need not start at
the same dimension.
Indoor transition compartments are
shipped assembled together with the ad
jacent metal-clad switchgear units.
(b) The wipe of the breaker stud Inside
the stationary disconnecting device, as in
dicated by the contact lubricant D50H47,
should be 3/4" to 7/8". This indicates that
the breaker studs contacted atthefullpres-
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT
A definite stop
circuit.
Then trip the breaker manually
and elevate to the raised position.
Elec
trically close thebreaker. Snap the selector
switch to the "Lower" position and pull the
clutch handle forward. Again, a definite
stop should be encountered preventing the
If the Interlock does not function as in
dicated above DO NOT MAKE ANY AD
JUSTMENTS. COMMUNICATE WITH THE
Inspect the contact surfaces of both the
breaker studs and the stationary discon
necting devices.
supports and complete all Joints. Assemble
dome #7, side covers #8 and bottom cover
handle forward.
the circuit.
Assemble braces #4
top and bottom to maintain size and proper
clutch
should be encountered preventing the motor
circuit limit switch from energizing the
motor circuit limit switch from energizing
and to the surfaces against whlchthcgasket
presses, and loosely fasten fl and #1A to
transformer tank.
device, close the breaker and then push It
into place for elevating. Snap the selector
switch to the "Raise" position and pull the
NEAREST GENERAL ELECTRIC CO. OF
FICE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
On units equipped with stationary aux
iliary switches (Fig. 45A, reference *69),
the clearance between the end of the switch
mechanism operating rod and the operating
plunger on the circuit breaker should beOtO
1/8" with the circuit breaker in the raised
and open position. Any adjustment in this
dimension must be made on the circuit
breaker. See instruction book furnished with
circuit breaker ior method of adjustment.
Care should be taken to prevent destroying
Interchangeabillty of circuit breakers by
excessive adjustment on one breaker.
sure center of (he silver bandon the station
TESTING CABINET
ary disconnecting device. See Fig. 11.
Before instalitng or operating the re
movable element consulttheclrcuitbreaker
instructions for directions on installation
and inspection. The operation of the inter
lock device is given below.
The elevating mechanism Is accurately
leveled and checked atthe factory and should
(c) Should the Inspectionofthecontacts
show that the breaker is not being raised to
the proper position, readjust the upper stop
tiolts and limit switches to raise or lower
the breaker to the proper location.
the stop twits in the new position.
Lock
The testing cabinet. Fig. 23, should be
installed on the wall at a location where
maintenance and testing of the breaker can
be convlently done. Conduits must be in
stalled to carry cables to supply control
power for testing.
need no adjustment. Do not Install or re
move the breaker or make any adjustments
unless the breaker is open.
Rub a small amount of contaci lubri
cant D50H47 on the silvered portion of the
breaker studs to form a thin coating for
contacting purposes.
Lower the elevating mechanism lifting
AC'.
brackets until the lifting brackets are in the
fully lowered or test position. Thebreaker
^should then enter the housing freely. Push
the breaker Into the housing until the wide
part of the breaker supporting plate rests
arainsl the front part of the lifting bracket
of the elevating mechanism. Theclearance
between the interferenceblock on the break
er and the interference block on the inter
lock mechanism (dimension "X", Fig. 22)
should be from 1/16" to l/8".
Carefully raise the breaker to the con
I-
/o
•*
I
nected position. The clearance between the
breaker supporting plate and the stop bolts
should be not more than 1/32". Then lower
and remove itfrorotheunlt. When elevating,
note that breaker studs center with respect
to the stationary disconnecting device or in>jury to the contJicts may result.
— g/Cg •J/£W
—
(u^rM coViSie.)
Fig. 23
^•eo . v r vAS'W
Ceovse eaMovs.sii
Inspection Box for 13.8 KV Hetal-eUd Switchgear
GEH-1802
Metal-clad Svltchgear
ADDITION OF UNITS TO EXISTING
EQUIPMENT
Before adding units to existing equip
ment, consult and study all drawings lurnlshcM with the equipment. In addition
to the usual drawings furnished with new
equipment, special drawings may be fur
nished covering complicated or special
assembly work. Also, check to make sure
all necessary parts are on hand.
BEFORE ANY COVERS ARE REMOV
ED OR ANY DOORS OPENED WHICHPER-
(5) Over the glass tape, brush a good
MAIN BUS ASSEMBLY
coat of U-310 varnish.
(1)
(b) Bolt splice plates and bus bars
together following assembly Instructions
above, we also Fig. 25 and Table A, Fig. 24.
(2) For 4.16 kv equipment:
(a) Remove compartment covers.
Torque Values for Metal-clad Swltchgear
(b) Bolt splice plates and bus bars
(Torque in Inch-Pounds)
together, following assembly Instructions.
Bolt
Copper
Aluminum
Size
or Steel
or Compound
IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT TEE CIRCUIT
BE DE-ENERGIZED.
3/8"-16
1/2--13
5/8"-ll
180-300
180-240
360-540
360-480
420-600
420-540
end cover sheets and to re-assemble them
on the new units after these are located
and bolted to the existing units. Other
wise, the installation procedure is the
same as described above.
When the units are In place and mech
anical assembly Is completed, assemble
the main bus and other prlnu^ connec
tions per the Instructions below. (Removal
of existing compound-filled connection box
es can be easily accomplished by packing
the box In dry Ice for 2 - 3 hours. Remove
the dry Ice and the cord tying the bm in
place, and strike the box with a hammer.
The hardened box and compound will crack
away from the joint.)
Secondary wiring and control bus con
nections
should be made In accorduce
with the wiring diagrams furnished with
The main bus bars and other connection
..ars may be either cqiper or aluminum. In
either case, the connection surfaces will be
silver plated.
All field assembled joints in conduct
ors, regardless of material or method of
insulation, should be made as follows:
(1) Wipe silver clean. Do not use
sandpaper or any abrasive on the
silvered surface. Avoid handling
cleaned surface as much as
possible.
(2) A sufficient quantity of DS0H47
grease should be applied to the
joint at each contact area so that
the complete contact area will be
thorou^y sealed with excess
grease squeezed out of the joint
when tightened.
(3) Brush a thin coat of D50H47 over
the outside surfaces of the joint
area and hardware covering the
silvered area.
In some cases external connections
are made to metal-clad bus by
bars.
20
joints where no tap Is made from bus the
opening In the molded cover should be at
the top<
(d) Secure 'flexible cover with selfFig. 2>l
(c) Complete the taping of the vertical
riser bars using insulating tape furnished
locking fasteners furnished. Joint Insula
tion Is now completed.
(e) Replace all covers previously re
(2/3 lap) stopping the tape at the bus bar.
move
If the riser l^s connect to the Inis from
below, sufficient tape should be added to
prevent compound leakage when filling.
should be assembled In the transition com
partment (Fig. 20 and 21) and the connec
the insulating tape, stopping the glass tape
just Inside molded splice cover.
conduit for secondary circuits should also
(d) Place molded covers around the
be assembled In or lielow the transition
compartment.
Apply a layer of glass tape (1/2 lap) over
bolted splice joints. Note that compound
filling smce is at top of joint, andadd filler
pieces furnished for the purpose to the
bottom of box and around bus 1^ lamina
tions (Fig. 20) to prevent compoundleakage
while filling. Duxseal should be placed
over the joints to make the box free of
leaks while filling. The Duxseal should be
removed after the compound has set. G.E.
#860 cord should be us^ to hold the molded
parts securely in place.
(e) Heat G.E. D50B49 compound (fur
nished) to minimum 200oc and maximum
for the dielectric strength may be seriously
CONNECTIONS
(4)
See Fig. 25 and Table A, Fig. 24.
(c) Place flexible molded cover over
joint, as shown In Fig. 15. Note that on
(3) In unit substations, the connection bars
tions at the transformer terminals greased,
taped and painted as Indicated above. The
BUS DUCT
Bus ducts connecting between groups of
metal-clad swltchgear, or between metalclad swltchgear and other apparatus, should
be installed as shown on the arrangement
drawings furnished with the ducts.
Sup
ports would be provided as Indicated on
the drawings.
All joints in the bus. Including adjust
able joints, should be assembled and In-
sulatM as described above for main buses.
of 220^0. Avoid overheating Ihe compound Adjustable joints are provided in long runs
the equipment.
of
(h) Replace all covers previously removed.
TABLE A
MIT ACCESS TOTHEPRIMARYCIRCUr^
Figure 18 indicates the special pro
cedures required to add new metal-clad
units to outdoor equipmentwlthoutprotected
aisle, and Figure 19 Indicates the special
procedures required to add new metalclad units to outdoor equipment with pro
tected aisle. For Indoor equipment, It
Is usually necessary only to remove the
Varnish
may tie thinned if necessary, with
Xylene, D5B9.
For 13.8 kv or 7.2 kv equipment:
(a) Remove compartment covers.
The metal-clad bars are
affected. Pour the compound into the molded
covers intermittently, allowing an interval
of bus duct to allow for variations in
building construction, etc. These joints
should be loosened before installation of the
of cooling to prevent formation of gas or
duct, then tightened alter being set in the
position required by the fixed points at the
level with the top of the box a:M should be
ends of the duct.
air pockets.
The final pouring should be
done only after due allowance for shrinkage
^
g
e terminals and wiping
BND COtlweCTION
Nstliod of Mklng Bus Bar Comectioos
sleeve or cable clamp.
In all cases carefully follow the cable
manufacturer's recommendations for In
stallation of the type of cable being used,
as well as the Instructions contained here
in.
See Flm> 43 and 44. If the cable Is
S
aluminum, the conductor surface must be
carefully abralded and the cable covered
liberally with a joint compound recom
mended by the cable manufacturer.
TAPED
A/SEH
SAP
sfooLo ovs>r
8
POTHEADS
Potheads are mounted on an ad^ter
plate extending across the width of the
metal-clad unit as shown In Fig. 10. Where
necessary the adapter plate Is split Into two
parts to facilitate the Installation of the
pe/fpourE SAP
L
potheads.
ouKseu.
Three-Conductor Potheads
The following description (qq>llestothe
Installation of a
three-conductor
lead-
sheathed cable with a wiping sleeve cable
entrance fitting on the pothead. This Is
the type most generally used. Instructions
POP
for installation of other types are Included
in the text following:
BAPS VSB /OAt/JL P
f/sppoi/rE
s «
Fig. 37
Fig. 38
i
Fig. 36
Fig. 35
bending which might damage the Insulation.
Mark a point on the lead sheath of the
cable about 1-1/2 Inch above the bottom of
the wiping sleeve.
(e) Remove the belt and interphase
Insulation down to within 1-1/2 Inches of
(c) Remove the pothead from the unit,
the lead sheath as shown in Fig. 30. The
last few layers should be torn off to avoid
damaging the individual conductor Insula
tion.
To reinforce and protect the con
disassemble the wiping sleeve and slip it
ductor insulation, wrap two layers of half
and its gasket over the cable as shown In
lapped varnished cambric or
tape over the factory insulation.
Fig. 27.
(d) Remove the lead sheath from the
cable to the point marked In operation
"b" as shown in Figs. 28 and 29 proceeding
as follows:
First, make a cut around the cable
half through the sheath at the reference
Eoint. Second, split the sheath lengthwise
etween the cut and the cable, holding the
cutting tool at an angle to the cable radius
to avoid damaging the Insulation,
l^ird,
remove the sheath by catching the split
edge with pliers and pulling directly away
from the cable axis.
Clean and tin the outside of the lead
Sheath for about 3 Inches and bell out the
end of the lead sheath.
Irrathene
(f) Disassemble insulator supportplate
from pothead body.
The insulators should
ance
with
the
recommendations
of
the
cable manufacturer. See Fig. 41 for one
recommended method. On lower voltage
cables, belling out the end of the lead
sheath ordinarily provides sufficient stress
relief. {Stress cone material will not be
furnished with pothead).
(h) Bolt pothead body to metal-clad
adapter plate.
Shape conductors Into final
position, then cut off each conductor to fit
Its terminals.
not be removed from the support plate
because they are factory assembled for
Insulators.
proper compression of their gaskets. Place
tion from the end of each conductor and
pothead body over cable and then fan out
the conductors Into approximately the final
position, as shown In Figs. 31, 32. The
middle conductor should be bowed slightly
for final adjustment of lengtt. Avoid sharp
bends and damage to (he insulation, par
assemble pothead terminals to cables.
(1) Remove pothead terminals from
Remove two inches of Insula
(j) Assemble ^skets where shown in
Fig. 41 and bolt insulator support plate
and wiping sleeve to pothead body. Com
press gaskets by a partial turn on each bolt
successively until the gasket Is uniformly
ticularly at the crotch.
compressed to dimensions shown in Fig. 41.
(g) For system voltage above 7500
Check to be sure the terminal studs are
volts It Is recommended that stress relief
seated properly on their gaskets, then
cones be built up when single-conductor or
screw contact nut In place afterassembllng
top gaskets and washers. See Figs. 32, 33
three-conductor
Construct stress
shielded
cable Is used.
reltel cones in accord
and 34.
Metal-clad Switchgear
GEH-1802
r-KTC/^O 7>9^e
sm OP auss taps
\
*iDr
ENP «P I-tPE »R r.C.
toHTPCfWr I
wwmnX
f »«icsuKin
^INK/LAIW
^v.C.ttl'UtMVl
'MUaUMf
CCJ,«M9
•4
0US5
COVTR TAPE
iraSOLATIO)! lAmaCWOTO \) I
IWOIATION IT-«« OUSS [ 7.C.
LEVEL
nOTt 8
^OCOT
2
15,000V
j
HOTE 2
HOTE ft
I
1
noyt«nn«f
tlARKCt-'
* riNiM wm*
SYERLIMO
1
*
PAUfT^ ^
APPLY OME
rrUT TTaw»JTtv
I
7
HIV msuiATih^ met
ffflurNf
HT-ifff
V3fO
STBRLINO
..Owub ge wr^n iomiv Ikc
I P-110 BROWW
€fa/rr%
or AliNVO UP TO M*vl
rHAM OAiOlHAU
NOn 1:
1-202 li T.C* - One laper. wound 2/3 lap revashers, and a packing nut which
"Connections" (Page 20). See Fig. 39. Insu
late connections as follows;
compresses the washers around the cable.
between
the
cable
sheath or
by single conductors in a common metallic
conduit, grounding procedure should be the
same as that described for three conductor
cables.
GEH-1B02
Metal-clad Swltchgear
#*nwBWflm*mao» eoMMim «
MOTR
KOTATIOM TO OQ
CH«cwu> b i f o a a «e*iM*eT(»4a
TO 1*OTHeAO -ntKMIMAiO.
o*«w«*F/*eeFFe»oew m i r it^ii rrniiiiiinrti r «Rtiin_ iinj
ut not rm ocwwowoion n«ermiiioioeiN8»E«*»Mow*w
t9a0nmMMrmmai*ommrmjKBaa^rtm«>M£,MOftmwmrt
fi-^rflTTo
0e—j m lutmn mvm
ai/iWit >ta do mmeaum ammr
deflwaomeepeea yeaww crrsMO ow»i>«
o.„f]
«3i 4 c«a Cff^v or im-
x]
Aow » 0 Mt nugme
4UBf3 i UAmwrwl*
sriKUNd ui'd remtM
flaCHPwar0Mt I'rcm
1
tr
mrwvr afiiw0*n«M
tXVWtXTKP >€»THKiKO^
* VKmT I*
Tua
at TMA Ta»e» WtMMfr M.R«V« TOOMAIW
AtvtL or coMVouNb with a wiriNa auiAve Aft
AMOWM MOVtOe A frM ALA. VKHT MOLA tN TH« WiT«0 JOINT
aVUlMta AM ftMAMUaO OA AlAMIKUW WM. CkOMTMC MOL«
tHY aocOEAiMa uAOii rnmn aTinn orr comtoumoino.
Fig- 41
Triple-Conductor Pothead
termtnation wtthodt pothead
or equivalent.
SINGLE-CONDUCTOR
build up with Atliclng tape GE8380 or
1. Cut cable to prer length.
2. Remove Jacket and cable tape for
distance of A plus B plus 3 inches, plus
length to be inserted into terminal lug.
equivalent, as shown.
Phase to Phase
cut and solder it in place avoiding exces
sive heat on insulation.
Remove outer
Thorou^iW clean surface from which the
semi-conducting tape was removed.
4. Remove insulation and inner semi
conducting tape to expose conductor for
distance of one inch plus length to be in
serted into terminal lug.
5. Attach terminal lug to conductor.
If the cable is aluminum, the conductor
siurface must be carefully abraided and the
cable covered liberaUy with a Joint com
pound recommended 03 the cable manu
facturer.
6. Taper insulation for one inch as
shown.
7. Apply end seal. Clean surface over
which splicing tape is to be applied and
coat with G.E. No. A50P68 adhesive cement
24
2 to 5
6 to 10
11 to IS
Turn down and
solder loose ends to preceding turns. Wrap
four to six turns of No. 19 AWG tinned
copper wire around shielding braid and
Rated
kv
lap wr^plngs to point N and spot solder.
Terminate the braid by cutting 1/2 inch
beyond soldering point
Dimensions in Inches
3. Unwrap shielding tape to point M,
.^mi'COnduct^ tape for aatne dlBtanra.
When solvent evaporates,
solder. Solder all turns of braid together
A»
Indoors
along three lengthwise lines equ^y spaced
Dry Locations
B
around braided surface.
5
9
13
2
3
tape near cable covering. Cover stress
cone with one layer No. 33 Scotch tape,
10. Solder ground strip over shielding
4
* For ungrounded neutral use 1.33 times
the dimensions in selecting distance A.
8. Build stress ccne. Clean cable sur
face and coat with G.E. No. A50P68 adhesive
cement or equivalent. When solventevmio-
rates, build up cone with splicing tape GE-
half lapped.
Obtain a smooth wrapping
but do not stretch tape more than neces
sary.
Add two layers
splicing tape.
11. Pencil Jacket for 1/2 inch as shown.
Clean surface. Take particular care in
cleaning outside Jacket surface in order to
8380 or equivalent, for length B plus B.
entireW remove black wax finish. Coat
with G.E. No. AS0P68 adhesive cement
that wrapped thickness at N is equal to 75%
apply spUcing tape GE8380 or equivalent
Between points Ma^ P, tape is applied so
of the original insulation thickness - and
so that the cone tapers to zero thickness at
points M and P. Apply one layer No. 33
Scotch tape or equivalent, half lapped. Ob
tain a smooth wrapping but do not stretch
tape more than necessary.
9. Pass a turn of tightly drawn braid
or equivalent.
When solvent evaporates,
and make sheath seal as shown on drawing.
Apply one layer No. 33 Scotch tape or
equivalent, half lapped.
Obtain a smooth
wrapping but do not stretch tape more than
necessary.
12. Over entire termination, apply two
layers of No. 33 Scotch tape or equivalent,
around eiqiosed portion of shielding tape at
half lapped, in manner to shed water. Ob
shielding braid in tlghtty drawn 1/6 inra
tain a smooth wrapping but do not stretch
tape more than necessary.
point M and solder in place.
Then apply
Metal-Clad Swltchgear
GEH-1802
OT COi
•eWD &SAL
' CdlLi MMkATlOM
-CABLE INBllLATION
r 5
• NO.M worcN Ta^E
m cftviv.
£ 1
-(PLiWM Tare ai.MfO
on eouiv
i|.J
• iHicLoiNe anaio
(•UNO aaniEsi
- n o tBMS TM<0
Bft?i .. V9 G
•/•'
MMcn rnmt
-DO »> SCOTCH
TAAC OH lewv
-casLE SMELOure
TaaE
\!
>HS as SCOTCH n a c
on EOuiK
i^\Tm'
vc)C>as laaiaLasM
I -i\' ^
oa coiav
m i l ICOTCa uac
-
Vlt\
oa COUIV.
WHTUHE (EEL
MllCIHE T»HI «a.UM
C«C9Ul»
9H0UND ET EDJECCKT
FHEUE UEWKH
Fig. >13
Teniination Without Pothead
Single-Conductor
grounding strips are to be joined together
to a common ground. This common ground
must then be grounded.
Fig. <|)|
Terninatlon Without Pothetd
Multi-Conductor
GROUND FAULT CURRENT TRANSFORM
ERS (THROUGH-TYPE)
Throu^-type
(see Fig. 42) are furnished where specified
for sensitive protection against ground
faults.
Fig. W Rear View of Unit Showing
Through-Type Current Transfomers
These transformers are normally
installed in a horizontal position directly
above or below theprimary cable terminals,
so that the primary cable or cables can pass
TERMINATION WITHOUT POTHEAD
through them. One transformer is required
MULTI-CONDUCTOR
for each three-phase circuit.
Make termination ae Indicated for sin
gle-conductor except - substitute thefollowIng for paragraphs 10, 11 and 12;
Where armored cable isusecL thearm-
or must be terminated and grounded before
the cable passes through the transformer.
Armor clamps are furnished for this pur
Pencil jacket 1/2 inch.
Clean sur
pose when specified.
with G.E. No. A50P68 adhesive cement or
equivalent. Allow to dry. Apply splicing
tape GE6380 or equivalent to m^e moisture
seal as shown.
This is done by starting
wrapping tape near end of jacket and wrap
ping over ^ound wires for 1-1/2 inches.
When lead or other conducting sheath
cable, or cable with shielding tape or braid
ground bus. The ground lead should be bond
ed to the sheath or shield on the side of Uie
current transformer awayfromtheprlmary
terminals. Incaseswherethegroimdcannot
be applied before the cable passes through
the transformer, bond the lead to the sheath
lust applied and continue applying lapped
layers of tape to completion of moisture
Bond and ground the ground wires.
For a multi-conductor cable nothavlng
ground wires, the individual terminations
should have grounding strips applied as for
a single-conductor termination.
These
The control cables may be pulled through
the conduits before or after the switch-
gear is installed, whichever Is more con
venient.
Connect
the
cables to the terminal
blocks in accordance with the wiring dia
grams furnished for the requisition.
If
the
control
conduits
enter from
above, drill the top and bottom covers
the front enclosure wiring trough to
suit the
conduits.
Fasten &e conduits
to the bottom cover with locknuts.
is used, itisrecommendedthat the sheath or
or shield l>etween the transformer and the
crotch formedl>etweenthe three conductors.
below, the conduit should not ex
tend more than 4 inches above the floor.
shield be grounded solidly to the swltchgear
Bend ^ound wires out and back over taping
seal Including a complete tape seal in
When control conduits enter the unit
from
of
face over which sheath moisture seal is
to be applied.
Take particular care in
cleaning outside jacket surface in order
to entirely remove black wax finish. Coat
CONTROLCABLES
current transformers
primary terminals.
The ground conductor
must then be passed tack along the cable
path through thecurrent transformer before
being connnected to the ground bus.
The
enough to avoid excessive voltage drw
when the circuit breakers are operated.
See testing instructions.
Where units have been split for ship
ment, any control or other secondary leads
which must connect across the split will
be arranged with terminal blocks In the
cross trough or convenient side sheet
so
Where potheads are used In units pro
cables from the control power
source to the swltchgear should be large
that the wires
can l>e reconnected.
The wires will be cut to length and form
vided with ^ound fault current transform
ed before being folded tack so that a
from ground.
reconnecting them.
ers, the potheadmountlnga must be Insulated
minimum
of time will be required for
GEH-1802
Metal-clad Swttchgear
GROUND BUS
The ground bus Is bolted to the rear of
the frame near thebottom. Itisarranged so
that connections to the station ground can be
made in any unit. Where the equipment is
shipped in more than one group, Uie sections
of ground bus must be connected by using the
splice plates furnished with the equipment.
Apply grease and assemble Joints as out
lined under "Connections" (Page 20). Ground
bus connections are made in tiie lower por
tion of the cable entrance compartment.
The swttchgear groundbus must be connect
ed to the station ground Ims by a conductor
haying a current carrying capacity equal to
that of the swttchgear groundbus. It is very
important that the emipment be adequately
grounded to protect the operator from injury
when short circuits or other abnormal oc
currences take place and to insure that all
parts of the equipment, other than live
parts, are at ground potential.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
It will be the responsibility of the pur
chaser to provide suitable lighlningarresters to protect the swttchgear from damage
due to lightning.
The General Electric
Company's recommendations as to the types
of circuits requiring lightning protection,
and a list of recommended lightning arrest
ers, are contained in Bulletin GER-Ml,
copies of which are available upon request.
DOOR ALIGNMENT
If for any reason it is necessary to re
align the doors of metal-clad swttchgear
during Installation the procedure given in the
following paragraphs should be followed.
After checking that the swttchgear is
level and plumb as described above, start at
either end of the swttchgear lineup and re
align each door individually as required.
The top of each door should be level with
the adjacent doors; the sides of each door
plumb; the surface of each door flush with the
^acent doors; and the space betweenad
jacent doors equalized to permit their free
swing and present a neat appearance. The
door stops should be adjusted to permit a
door swing of approximately lOSO.
Doors may be raised or lowered vertic
ally, or moved forward or tackward hori
zontally, l>y loosening the hinge mounting/^^S
nuts on the left side sheet and shifting the
'
hinge and door assembly as allowed by
the slotted holes in the hinge.
Doors may be shifted to the ri^t or
left by adding or removing washers or shims
from tietween the hinge and side sheet
Doors may beplumbedl>y slightly bend
ing the appropriate hinges. To do this, open
the door and insert a drift pin in either of the
two holes in the hinge. Pulling forward on
the drift pin will move the door to the right,
and pushing back will move the door to the
left Adjust each hinge individually as re
quired to plumb the door.
When properly aligned, the doors ofout
door swttchgear should be tightly seated on
the gasket all around. After aligning such
doors, close and latch the door and check
the 8^ by runninga 3" x S"card, shipping
tag, IBM card, or some similar cardaround
the edge of the door. If the card will pass
between the door and the gasket, the door is
improperly adjusted, and should be read
justed until the card will no longer pass
through.
TESTING AND INSPECTION
After the equipment has been installed
and all connections made, it should be
tested and inspected* before putting in ser
vice.
Althoue^ the equipment and devices
given in the relay instruction l>ooks. Spec
ial
Instruction books are furnished for
complicated automatic equipments, des
cribing the sequence of operation of the
have been completely tested at the factory,
devices required to perform the desired
a final field test sho^ be made to be sure
funcUon.
that the equipment has been properly in
When transformers are furnished to
stalled and that all connections are correct
relays on the system and therefore these
supply the control power, the primary
taps should be selected so that the control
voltage indicated on the wiring diagram
is obtained on the secondary of the trans
former. When a battery is used to supply
the control power, the cables from the
battery to the swttchgear should be large
enough to avoid excessive voltage drop.
The voltage at the terminals of the breaker
closing coils, when the breaker is being
closed, should not be less than 112.5 volts
relays must lie set by the purchaser. Gen
for
eral instructions on setting the relays are
volt coils.
and have not l)ecome loose in transporta
tion.
The primary equipment should be
completely de-energizra while the tests
are in progress.
Directions for testing devices such as
relays, instruments and meters are given
in the instruction book furnished for each
device. The settings of the protective re
lays must be coordinated with the other
125 volt coils and 225 volts for 250
The operation of the breaker with its
associated devices may be tested in the
unit while the equipment is energized by
use of the test coiqiler which is furnished.
Lower the breaker to the test or down
position. Attach the test coupler to con
nect the breaker secondary disconnectini
device to that on the structure.
High potential tests to check the in
tegrity of the insulation are not necessary
if the installation instructions in this book
are carefully followed. If the pxirchaser
wishes to make high potential tests the
voltage should not exceed 75% of the AIEE
factory test voltages.
Potential transformers
and
control
power transformers must be disconnected
during high voltage testing.
OPERATION
The operation of metal-clad switchgear is similar to that of other types
except that it provides maximum safety
to the operator and the feature of easy
removal and replacement of the circuit
breaker.
All
circuit
breaker removable ele
To raise the breaker, operate the
elevating control selector switch on the
elevating motor to "Raise". A clutch handle
just above the elevating motor is then pulled
ered l>y an emergency hand wrench which
switch and engages the motor to raise the
breaker in the housing. The clutch handle
is held in this position until a limit switch
can be inserted after removing the motor.
on the structure opens to stop the motor
at the end of the upward travel of the
BREAKER POSITIONING
used to energize or interrupt the motor
circuit at any time.
breaker.
Push the breaker into the unit until it
26
The motor is removed by unlatching
the motor assembly from the support and
disconnecting the motor lead plug.
The selector switch must not be
After removing the motor, pull the
clutch forward and insert the manual wrench
Into the end of the clutch coupling. The
breaker must be tripped before the wrench
To place the circuit breaker in oper
ating position, proceed as given below:
rests against the stop.
The breaker may be raised and lowY'^>i
until it closes the clutch limit
forward
ments of the same type and rating which
have duplicate wiring may be intercnanged.
Clean contacts and cover with a very
thin coating of Contact Lubricant D50H47.
return it to its normal position opening
the electrical circuit to the motor.
To lower the breaker, proceed the
same as for raising except operate selector
switch to "Lower".
The clutch must be held in the en
gaged position; otherwise, a spring will
can
be
inserted and held in the clutch
coupling.
TRANSFER TRUCKS
Circuit breaker transfer trucks ar(
furnished with outdoor metal-clad switch-
Metal-clad Switchgear
gear to facilitate moving of circuit brealcers from unit to unit or to maintenance
areas.
The platform at the front end of
the transfer
See Fig. 8,
adjustment
two latches,
truck is adjustable in height
view A, for instructions for
The truck is equipped with
one to hold the breaker on
the truck and one to hold the truck to the
tions exist at the installation, or when
specified Ijy the purchaser.
By maintaining a slight temperature
differential, the heaters he^ facilitate dry
sulting corrosion and insulation deter
ioration which might occur.
leased by a single T-shaped foot pedal
on the rear of the truck. Depressing the
Heaters are normally located at the
sides of the breaker units, a few inches
from the switchgear unit, and depressing
above the floor.
In auxiliary compart
ments with a single rollout, the heaters
breaker from the truck.
will be in the space above the roUout.
In auxiliary compartments with two roll
outs, the heater will be on one of the
the right side of the pedal unlatches the
SPACE HEATERS
Space heaters are provided in
all
outdoor equipment in order to keep the
inside temperature several degrees higher
than that outside.
Heaters are also f(ur-
nished for indoor equipment when it is
known that abnormal atmospheric condi
is connected in accordance with the wiring
diagrams furnished with the equipment.
Also, be sure to remove all cartons and
miscellaneous material packed Inside the
units before energizing the heaters.
ing and prevent condensation and the re
metal-clad switchgear imit. Both latches
engage automatically, and both are re
left side of the pedal unlatches the truck
GEH-1802
rollouts, for greater accessibility. Heat
ers may also be located in superstructure
compartments, transition compartments,
and In bus ducts, if the operating con
ditions require them.
Before energizing the beaters, be sure
the power source is of the prtqjer voltage,
frequency, and phase arrangement, and
Heaters should be visually inspected
several times a year to make sure they
are operating properly.
It is recommended that the heaters
be energized at all times and that thermostatlc control not be used.
If thermo-
static control is used, the contacts of
the thermostat should be set to close be
tween 95 F and 100 F on falling temper
ature, de-energizing the heaters only when
strong sunlight beats on the switchgear.
Under no condition should a differential
thermostat be used to control the heaters
because under conditions of extremely high
humidity this type of thermostat will not
operate at all times to keep the heaters on
enough to prevent condensation in the
switchgear.
MAINTENANCE
A regular maintenance schedule should
reliability from the switchgear. Plant oper
ating and local conditions will dictate the
frequency of inspection required. For
The switchgear structure and connec
tions should be given the following overall
specific information regarding the main
maintenance at least annually.
Instruction book furnished for each device.
The inspection cabinet, which is furnished,
provides a convenient means for noainlaining the circuit breakers. Under normal
conditions the protective relays do not
operate, therefore. It Is Important to check
the operation of these devices regularly.
A permanent record of all maintenance
work should be kept, the degree of detail
depending on the operating conditions. In
any event, it will be a valuable reference
for subsequent maintenance work and for
station operation. It is recommended that
the record Include reports of tests made,
the condition of equipment and repairs and
adjustments that were made.
1. Thoroughly clean the equipment,
removing all dust and other accumulations.
Wipe clean the buses and supports. In
spect the buses and connections carefully
for evidence of overheating or weakening of
buses
and connections.
Since
definite
limits cannot be given for satisfa'ctory
insulation resistance values, a record must
be kept of the reading. Weakening of the
Insulation from one maintenance period
to the next can be recognized from the
recorded readings. The readings should
be taken under similar conditions each time
if possible, and the record should include
the temperature and humidity.
CUITS, IT IS ESSENTUL THAT THE CIR
pairs, the test voltage should not exceed
Care should be exercised In the main
tenance and checking procedures that ac
6. If the switchgear is equipped with
heaters, check to see that all heaters are
energ^ed and operating.
OUTDOOR ACRYLIC PAINT FINISH
2. Measure the resistance to ground
and between phases of the insulation of
High potential tests are not required,
Init if it seems advisable, based on the
The primary circuits of metal-clad
switchgear are insulated in order to reduce
the size of the equipment. However, this
insulation, except In one or two instances,
requires a certain amount of air gap l)etween phases and to ground to complete the
Insulation. Inserting any object In this air
space, when equipment Is energized, wheth
er it l>e a tool or a part of the body, may
under certain conditions. In effect, short
circuit this air gap and may cause a break
down In the primary circuit to ground and
cause serious damage or Injury or both.
5. Check to see that all anchor bolts
and bolts in the structure are tight. Check
tightness and continuity of all control con
nections and wiring.
the insulation.
BEFORE ANY COVERS ARE
RE
MOVED OR ANY DOORS OPENED WHICH
PERMIT ACCESS TO THE PRIMARY CIR
CUIT BE DE-ENERGIZED.
Before replacing breaker, apply a thin
coat of contact lubricant D50H47 to breaker
studs for lubrication.
ituted.
tenance of devices, such as circuit breakers,
relays, meters, etc., refer to the separate
r\
cidental tripping or operation is not In-
be established to obtain the best service and
insulation
resistance tests or after
re
75% of the AIEE factory test voltage. Po
tential transformers and control power
transformers must be disconnected during
high voltage testing.
3. Clean elevating mechanism and lub
ricate jack screws and gears with lubri
cant G.E. Co. #D50B15 (Atlantic Ref. Co.
#52 or equal).
4. Check primary disconnecting device
contacts for signs of abnormal wear or over
heating. Clean contacts with silver polish.
Discoloration of the silvered surfaces is
not ordinarily harmful unless atmospheric
conditions cause deposits such as sulphides
on the contacts. If necessary the deposits
can be removed with a good grade of silver
polish.
The outside of standard outdoor switch-
gear has acrylic paint finish, blue gray
ASA #24, providing improved resist^ce
to all atmospheric conditions, longer life
and less maintenance than with ordinary
paint finishes.
If It Is desired to refinlsh acrylic
painted switchgear, it is necessary to use
one of the foUowing procedures in order
to secure the best adhesion of the paint to
the original finish.
A. Reflnishlng with Acrylic Paint.
It is
recommended that reiimsning oe done
with Du Pont acrylic paint of the desired
color.
Obtain materials and instruc
tions for application from the Du Pont
Company.
B. Reflnishlng with Alkyd
Paints,
or
Oil Base
"iwo memods are recommended;
1. Spr^ one sealer coat of Du Pont
233£f75300 or equivalent which has
been reduced to spraying viscosity
with Du Pont 37692 or 37666 thinner.
Air dry for one hour.
or oil base paint.
Apply alkyd
2. Spray one sealer coat of
Arco
214-806 primer which has been re
duced to spraying viscosity with
Xylol. Air dry for one hour. Apply
alkyd or oil base paint.
27
GEg-1802
Metal-clad Switchgear
RENEWAL PARTS
ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS
1. RENEWAL PARTS SHOULD BE ORDERED FROM THE HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR DEPARTMENT.
2. ALWAYS SPECIFY THE REQUISITION NUMBER ON WHICH THE EQUIPMENT WAS ORIGINALLY FURNISHED.
3. SPECIFY THE QDANnTY, REFERENCE NUMBER, DESCRIPTION AND THIS BULLETIN NUMBER.
4. STANDARD HARDWARE, SUCH AS SCREWS, BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS, ETC., IS NOT LISTED. SUCH ITEMS
SHOULD BE PURCHASED LOCALLY.
5. FOR PRICEH REFER TO THE NEAREST OFFICE OF THE GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY.
6. IF INSULATING MATERIAL, SUCH AS TAPE, VARNISH, COMPOUND, ETC., IS REQUIRED, IT MUST BE
SPECIFIED SEPARATELY.
.
.
.
7. IF PARTS LISTED SEPARATELY ARE TO BE ASSEMBLED AT THE FACTORY, ORDER MUST SOSTATE.
8. NOTALL PARTS LISTED HEREIN WILL BE USED ONANY ONE EQUIPMENT. PARTSNOT USED IN
ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT SHOULD NOT BE ORDERED AS RENEWAL PARTS.
PRIMARY DISCONNECT DEVICES
(SEE FIG. NO. 10)
DESCRIPTION
5
Front Prlmarr Disconnect Device
Assembly, 3 Pole, Complete with
Connections
6
Rear Primarv Disconnect Device
Assembly, 3 Pole, Complete with
Connections
NOTE: Insulating material required for
Ref. Nos. 5 and 6 will be furnished
with order.
^SaiMKll
Ccaalete Left Hand (Kaf. Ho. I)
Fig. 46
Coapleta Right Hand (Raf. Ho.
Elevating Hechanlsn for |ih26 Equipnente Rated 250 ava or lass
and H-36 Equipoenta Rated 1200* 600 ava or lesa
FiS- 46* View Showing Elevating Heehanin Motor and Control Unit
POSITIVE MECHANICAL INTERLOCK
(HG. NO. 45A)
REF. NO.
3
4
4
4
18
DESCRIPTION
Complete positive mechanical
Interlock assembly
Elevating mechanism motor
(1I5-V (Pc)
Elevating mechanism motor
IL
(230-v d-c)
Elevating mechanism motor
(230-v d-c)
Spring only
Coaplate Left Hand (Ref. No. f*)
Fig. HO
Coapleta Right Hand (Raf. Ho. 2A)
Elevating Hechanisa for K-36H Eguipaents Ratad 760 ava,
K-2GH Equipmenta Rated 350 ava and H-SG Equipnents Rated 2000*
Metal-cUd Switchgear
7
9A 9 9B
8A 9B 9 9A
7
Complete Left Hand (Ref. Ko. IB]
Fig.
17
7A7 7A
GEH-1802
1OI0AI4AI3
r
Conplete Ri^i Hand (Ref. No. 2B)
Elevating Hechanlam for H-3SHH Equipments Rated iOOO HVA
ELEVATING MECHANISMS
Figs. 45, 46 and 46A
REF. NO. '
9
Miter gears, pair
Roll pin for miter gear
Shaft, right
Shaft, left
Sprocket
9A
9B
Bearing Block
7
7A
8
8A
10
10
lOA
11
l£>
<0
CO
40
56
Insulator
Insulator clamp
Insulator support
Disconnect barl
Finger
Barrier
Disconnect bar
Disconnect bar
Barrier
Ground finger
Ground finger support
Ground finger support
Barrier
Sec. disconnect (stationary)
Sec. disconnect (movable)
Brace
Tray
Cover
Potential Transfonier Rollout Unit
ni-l8B
CONTROL TRANSFORMER ROLLOUT UNIT
REF. NO.
189
I
DESCRIPTION
175
176
177
Insulator
178
Contact bar
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
Ground finger support
Ground finger
Insulator clamp
Insulator support
Ground shoe contact
Fuse clip
Primary contact
Ground bar
Ground finger support
Ground finger
Cross angle
Barrier
Barrier
Sec. disconnect (movable)
Sec. disconnect (stationary)
(not shown)
192
193
Fig. 57
Control Transformer Rollout Unit
Tray
Cover
SINGLE & TRIPLE-CONDUCTOR POTHEADS
DESCRIPTION
REF. NO.
207, ZC
207.20«.209
Fig. 58
7-63
Single and Triple-Conductor Potheads
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
Triple-conductor pothead assembly
Body
Insulators and support
Wiping sleeve
i
Gaskets for triple-conductor pothead
Terminal
Contact nut
Washer
Palnut (3/4 in. - 12)
Pipe plug (3/4 in. std.)
Pipe plug (1/8 in. std.)
E
Single-conductor pothead assembly
Body and insulator
Gaskets for single-conductor pothead
Wiping sleeve
1
GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY, PHILADELPHIA, PA.
^
'
GEH-1802K
INSTRUCTIONS
SUPERSEDES
AND
GEF.3837
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR
Types M-26 and M-36
For Magne-blast Air Circuit Breaker
Types AM-4.16 and AM-13.8
MEDIUM
VOLTAGE
GENERAL
SWITCHGEAR
DEPARTMENT
ELECTRIC
PHILADELPHIA,
PA.
GEH- t 802J I1
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
PAGE
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
Fig, 9
Flg.10
Flg.11
Fig.12
Fig.13
Fig.14
Fig.15
Fig.16
Fig.17
Fig.18
Fig.19
Fig. 20
Fig, 21
Fig.22
Fig. 23
Fig, 24
Fig.25
Flg.26
Fig.27
to
Flg.38
Fig. 39
Fig.40
Fig.41
Fig.42
Fig.43
Fig.44
Typical Indoor Metal-clad Switchgear Equipment •••••••••••••••••••• •••••••••• 4
Typical Outdoor Metal-clad Switchgear Equipment - Front View •••••, ••••••••••••, • 4
Typical Outdoor Metal-clad Switchgear Equipment - Side View •••, , , , •••••••••••••• 4
Magrie-blast Brea.ker ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• •••••••••••••••••••• 5
Magne-bls:a.st Breaker ••••••••••.•••••••••••••••• .•• ••••••••••••••••••• 5
Magne-bla.st Breaker •••••.•••••••••••, .•• .•.. .•.••••••.••• ••• ••••.••• 5
Installation Details for Indoor Metal-clad Switchgear •••••• , •, ••••, ••••, •••, ••, • 6
Installation Details for Outdoor Metal-clad Switchgear •••, , • , , •••, •, •••, •••••• , • 8
Installation Details for Outdoor Metal-clad Switchgear with Protected Aisle •••••, ••••, • 10
Metal-clad Switchgear •••.•, •••••, , ••.•, ••.••••.......•••.••, •..••••.• 11
Measurement of Adjustment of Primary Disconnect Devices •••••••• , ••••••••••••• 12
Potential Transformer Rollout Shown In Withd rawn Position ••• , •, , •••• , •••• , , •• , , 12
Dummy Removable Element •••.••••••••••••••...•••••••, •••..••••••.••• 13
Ground and Test Device .••••••.••••••••, ••• , ••.. ... ••••••••••.••••••.• 13
Padlocking Arrangement, Key Interlocking and Method for Pouring Connection Boxes ••••, • 14
Control Power Transformer Rollout Shown In Open Position ••••••••••••••• , ••• , , • 15
Tandem Lock for Outdoor 13.8 KV Units •, .••, ••• , ••••••••••, •, , , , •••• •••••• 15
Outdoor Metal-clad Sqitchgear - Addition of Units to Line-up •••••••• , , , , , •••••, , • 16
Outdoor Metal-clad Switchgear - With Protected Aisle , •••••••••••••, ••••••••••• 17
•• , •, , •••••••••••, • , • , •••••, • , • , •••••, • 18
Outdoor Transition Compartment
Outdoor Transition Compartment •••••••.•••••••••...•. ., , , , , •••.•.••••.. 18
Posltlve Interlock Mechanism .Interference Block ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••, , 19
Inspection Box for 13.8 KV Metal-clad Switchgear •••••, , , , •••••••••••••••••, , • 19
Torque Values for Metal-clad Switchgear ••, ••••••••••, ••••••••••••••••••••• 20
Melliod of Making Bus Bar Connections , , , , •, • , ••, , , ••••••, •, •, , , ••••••••, • 21
13.8 KV Taped Joints ••••••.•..•••••.••...•..•..••.••..•, ••••••..••, • 21
Potheads •.•••••••••.•..•...••. •• .••.•••••. .... .. .•••••••••.• .•••• 22
Insulation of Connection Bars , •••••••••••••••••••, , , , , •, •••••••• •••••••• 23
Single-Conductor Pothead with Stress Cone •••, •• , •••••••••••••••• , , •••••••• 23
Triple-Conductor Pothead ••••••••••• , ••••••••••, •••••••••••• , , , , , ••••• 24
Rear View of Unit Showing Through-type Current Transformers •••••••• , , ••••••••• 25
Termination Without Pothead - Single-Conductor •• , •••••••• •••••• ••••••••••••• 25
Termination Without Pothead - Multi-Conductor •••••••••••• , , , , •••••••••••• , • 25
Renewal Parts
Fig.45
Elevating Mechanism for M-26 Equipment Rated 250 mva or Less
and M-36 Equipment Rated 1200A 500 mva or Less , •••••••••••• 28
Fig.45A View Showing Elevating Mechanism Motor and Control Unit •• • ••• •••••••••• , •••••• 28
Fig. 46 Elevating Mechanism for M-36H Equipment Rated 750 mva
M-26 Equipment Rated 350 mva
M-36 Equlpment Rated 2000A , , , •• , , ••• , , , , , •••• , ••••• 29
Angle
Bracket
and
Chain
Drive
••••, •••, •, •, •••••.•.• , •••••••••• ••• · ••• •• 29
Fig.47
Shutter Mechanism Assembly M-26 ••••••••.••••••.•••••••••••••••••••, ••• 29
Fig.48
Shutter Mechanism Assembly M-36••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••.••••••••• 29
Fig.49
Bus Supports. •••••••, •, ••••••••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••••••• 29
Fig. 50
Door Bandies and L<,cks ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• •••••• 29
Fig.51
Bua ConnecUon Box ••.••.•••••••..••..••••..•••••••• •••••••• · ••••••• 30
Fig. 52
Bua Connection Boot .......•••••••••••••••••..••••••••••••••••••••••• 30
Fig. 53
Wiring Devices and Miscellaneous Parts•••••••...••••••••••••••.••••••••· ••• 30
Fig.54
Fuse Rollout Unit •.•••••••....••. •••••••.•.•••.••••••••••••••••••••• 31
Fig.55
Potential Transformer Rollou\ Unit ••••••••••••.•••••• •.• , ••••••, ••••••••• 31
Fig.56
Control Transformer Rollout Unit , •••, ••••••, •...• , • •.., .• , ••••••••••••, 31
Fig.57
Single and Triple Conductor Potheads •, , •••••, , •, , •, , , , , , , ••, •, , •, , •, , , ••, , 31
Flg.58
2
CONTENTS
PAGE
RECEIVING, HANDLING & STORAGE
RECEIVING
HANDLING
STORAGE
11
11
11
DESCRIPTION
SECONDARY ENCLOSURE
PRIMARY ENCLOSURE
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT
BREAKER ELEVATING MECHANISM
PRIMARY DISCONNECT DEVICE
BUS COMPARTMENT
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
CURRENT TRANSFORMER AND CABLE COMPARTMENT
12
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER COMPARTMENT
DUMMY REMOVABLE ELEMENT
ROLLOUT FUSE-SWITCH UNITS
FUSE DISCONNECTING DEVICE
GROUNDING AND TEST DEVICE
12
12
13
13
13
TANDEM LOCK (WHEN FURNISHED) FOR OUTDOOR UNITS
13
INSTALLATION
LOCATION
PREPARATION OF FLOOR-ANCHORING
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT
m
11
TESTING CABINET
15
15
15
19
19
ADDITION OF UNITS TO EXISTING EQUIPMENT
CONNECTIONS
20
20
CONTROL CABLES
25
GROUND BUS
DOOR ALIGNMENT
26
26
TESTING AND INSPECTION
26
OPERATION
BREAKER POSITIONING
TRANSFER TRUCKS
SPACE HEATERS
26
26
26
27
MAINTENANCE
27
RENEWAL PARTS
27
OUTDOOR ACRYLIC PAINT FINISH
The outside of standard outdoor swltchgear has an acrylic paint finish, blue gray ASA#24, ^ovidtog im
proved resistance to aU atmospheric conditions, longer life and less maintenance than with ordinary
paint finishes.
If it is desired to refinish acrylic paintedswltchgear, it is necessary to use one of the following procedures
in order to secure the best adhesion of the paint to the original finish.
A. RefinishinR with Acrylic Paint. It is recommendedthat refinishlng be done with DuPont acnrllc paint
of the des&ed color. UbtauTmaterials and instructions for application from the DuPont Company.
B. Refinighing with Alkyd or Oil Base Paints. Two methods are recommended:
(1) Storay one sealer coat of DuPont 233E75300 or equivalent which has been reduced to spraytog
viscosity with DuPont37692 or 37666 thinner. Air dry for one hour. Apply alkyd or oil base paint.
(2) ^ray one sealer coat of Arco 214-806 primer which has been reduced to sprayingviscosity
with Xylol. Air dry for one hour. Apply all^d or oil base paint.
m
f
re:
t
i--
i.-rL
•5-^
Typical Outdoor Hetal-clad Switchgear
Equipaeat - Front View
Typical Outdoor Hatal-clad SMttchgear Equipaant
With Protected Male - Side View
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR
TYPES M26 AND M36
FOR MAGNE-BLAST AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER
TYPES AM-4.16
AND
AM--13.8
Metal-clad switchgear is equipment to
control and protect various types of elec
TYPE M-26
tric^ apparatus and power circuits.
The switchgear consists otoneormore
units which are mounted side by side and
connected mechanically and electrically to
gether to form a complete switching equip
ment.
Typical equipments are shown In
Figures 1, 2 and 3.
INTERRUPTING
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
CAPACITY
KVA
FIGURE
CURRENT
TYPE M-26
The circuit breakers are easily re
movable to provide maximum accessibility
for maintenance with minimum Interrup
tion of services. The switchgear is designed
to provide maximum safety to the operator.
All equipment is enclosed In grounded metal
AM-4.16-150
AM-4.16-250
AM-4.16-3S0
150,000
1200
250,000
1200 - 2000
350,000
1200 - 3000
compartments.
TYPE M-36
The equipment Is available in the rat
ings listedlnthefoUowlngtable. The ratings
of the equipment and devices are based on
usual
service
conditions
as covered In
AlEE and NBMA standards.
Operation at
currents above the equipment rating will
result in temperature rises In excess of
NBMA standards, and is not recommended.
For outdoor installation the same basic
AM-13.8-1S0
AM-13.8-250
AM-13.8-250
AM-13.8-750
AM-13.8-1000
AM-7.2-250
AM-7.2-500
150,000
250,000
1200
1200
500,000
1200 - 2000
TSO.OOO
1,000,000
250,000
500,000
120O - 2000
120O - 3000
1200
1200 - 2000
equipment is built Into a weatherproof
housing as in Figures 2 and 3.
al ,{*n.
•-•--Is' • 1,^ , I
«
/>:
1-7.
,c
Haone-bUst Breakers
Thete /nrirueh'ons do net purport to cover all detai't or variatioru in eqvipnient nor to provide for every potsbie
contingency to be met in connectionwith insfo/iotion, oporation or mointenonce. Should furthar information bo desired
or shou/d particular preblamt ariie which ore not covered mffieianlljr for the purchoser's purposes, the fflotfar should
be re/erred to the Generoi {lactric Company.
G£H-1802
Uetal-clad Switchgear
.FIEHOVABLC C0V6ft FOR ACCSSS
/TDWREB in WIRlNfi TROgftH
I
M
ALL FLOOR STEEL TO BE FURNISHED BY PURCHASER
CHANNELS SHOULD BE SET LEVEL WITH EACH OTHER
AND SHOULD BE LEVEL OVER THEIR FULL LENGTH
ROUGH FLOOR THICKNESS AND REINFORCING DEPENDS
ON LOADING AND OTHER NORMAL FACTORS, AND SHOULD
BE DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH RECOMMENDED PRACTICE
ftR£AKCR RUIWkSLC
SlOE
flKISHED R.OSR LRIE
•Dromon ftoon
RECOMMENDED METHOD
FWItMEO FLOOR UMC
NOTC: 4T 1$ IWPSRATIVE THAT
ALTERNATE
METHOD
FLOOR STWL BE EVEN
WITH FIHISHEO FLOOR
AHD THAT BOTH BE LEVEL
Fig. 7
InBUItfttion DeUils
Metal-clad Switchgear
IT MAY B£ NUeSSAKY TO ACMOVC
poTKeAo OA CAOLC
MEMBCR B
i
eONBUITS
METHOD
OF
LIFTING
MCMBCftS A-a C
TO 6£ FURNISHED 8Y PURCNASCft
A-RAISINS MEMBER - CHANNEL OR WOOD BEAM
B- 3* CHANNEL FURNISHED WITH GEAR
C- UFTtNG JACKS
D- COVER TO BE REMOVED AND REASSEMBLED
AFTER UNITS ARE IN PLACE
note; when lifting m-zg switghgear
U3CATE BEAM V ABOVE LIFTING
CHANNELS "B*
i-i
DOOR
y n
r-i
OPEN-
ALTERNATE
MEMBERS
METHOD OF LIFTING
A a E TO BE FURNISHED BY PURCHASER
B • 3' CHANNEL FURNISHED WITH GEAR
0 -
COVER TO BE REMOVED AND REASSEMBLED
UNITS ARE IN
PLACE
AFTER
E -
For Indoor Hetal-clad Switchgear
iT
SPREADER
fon
GEH-1802
GBB-1802
Hetal-clad Switchgear
CAILC
eONNtCTION
/<
—n
F=F^
wt o o
9
WOOD •CAH
ff
a
METHODS OF LIFTING
E,—I
I
'
—e:
'
RCntVE TALC VITH LDCQOCR THINKER (
DOOR-^
KOISTEN cement sack with 3-H
CEMEMT/CC-BZ6
ROOF CAP
Z
,|-lt «l| 571. B#tT
(JASKET
|-lt *1^ ST L. BSIT
z
ENLARSEO SEC. B-B
ENinRliED SEC. C-C
ROOF OR END
. SECTION
Fig. 8
Inotallatlon Details
Metal-clad Switchgear
GEH-1802
fJlIEO
COTtfS
tiK. ACCESS
TO CTS
AND TO
PKIMRRY
CABLE
COHPARTMCNT
FOR ANCHOR BOLT
locations see FtSOR
PLAN OAAWINAS
FUANISMEII KITH REOUISITIOH
VIEW *X"
SHOaiNS AHCMOAIHe OP UNIT*
WITH CHANNEL MtC
i
HEATH
-SCREENS TO BE BOITCO ON
EACH ENO AT INSTALLATION.
must be kept clean for
VENTIiATION
RCHOVABLE PLATES TO BE CUT
TO SUIT COHOUITS BY PURCHASER
FOUNDATION DATA
Without Hear Enclosure
r-*C
AREA AND DEPTH Of SOIL DEAAING SURfACES OF EACH
FOUNDATION MUST BE ALTERED TO SUIT SOIL CONDITIONS.
bottom surfaces of
frost action or BACKFILLED *ITH PERUIOUS MATEHIAL
AND AOeeUATCLT DRAINED.
SURFACE -B'SHOULD BE LEVEL OVER ITS
w
WITH STAHOARO PRACTICE.
TO CUANOE HCISHT OF TRUCK FLOOR
UeSEM NUT If. POJUST LEVER'D* TO
LIVE DESIRED UtlCNT AND LACK 8T
tiehteninc hut 'a'.
adjustable platform VIEW A*
HEATER
V.5CREtNS TO BE BOLTED ON
eoCM END AT tNLTALlATION.
MUST UE kept clean for
AEKOVABLC PLATES TO 0£ CUT
TO SUIT CONDUITS SY PUACHASEA
VCNTIlAriOH
With Rear Enclosure
for Outdoor Hetal-clad Swltchsear
""I®™
TO INSURE EAST MANOLIHS OF REMOVABH
,
CONCRETE PAD SHOULD BE HEIHPORCEO IN ACCOROAHCE
GEH-1802
Metal-clad Swltchgear
CftlfCRS
TO
9L
RCmVABLC
scxecN
001 TIP
COVtRS
FOk A>:ci.»5
TO c r. >
PHI>
in
lOCRTIONS SCr FUSR
Crerienced In the proper handlingand
packing of electrical equipment. Upon re
ceipt of any apparatusanimmediate inspec
indoor
2. Cover Important parts such as jack
screws, gears and chain of lifting mechan
3. Store in a clean, dry place with a
HANDLING
number of the portion of equipment enclosed
in each shipping case.
1. Uncrale the equipment.
should be placed Inside the units to prevent
moisture damage. Approximately 500watts
of heaters per unit will be required. Re
move all cartons and other miscellaneous
material packed inside units before energiz
ing any heaters. If the equipment has been
subjected to moisture it should be tested
with a lOOOv or 2500v meggar. A reading of
STORAGE
at least 200 megohms should be obtained.
If It Is necessary to store the equip
ment for any length of time, the following
precautions should be taken to prevent
corrosion;
6. Breakers should l>e prepared for
storage separately.
DESCRIPTION
Each unit is made iqi of a secondary
enclosure and a primary enclosure, as
,0^ shown In Figure 10.
SECONDARY ENCLOSURE
The secondary enclosure Is usually
located at the breaker withdrawal side of
the unit, although in certain units it may be
on the side opposite to the breaker with
drawal area. It consists of a compartment
with a hinged door or panel upon which are
mounted the necessary instruments, control
and protective devices.
The terminal
blocks, fuse blocks, and some control de
vices are mounted inside the enclosure on
;jni
the side sheets and a trough Is provided at
the top to carry wiring between units.
PRIMARY ENCLOSURE
The primary enclosure contains the
high voltage equipment and connections ar
ranged in compartments to confine the
ItMU • '
effects of faults and so minimize the damage.
_ _
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT
—tr
- iSSis
^llj il
The removable element consists of a
circuit breaker with trip-free operating
II
mechMlsm mounted directly on the breaker
frame, interlock mechanism, the removable
portion of the primary and secondary dis
connecting devices, the operating mech
anism control device, and necessary con
trol wiring. The magne-blast breakersare
equipped with wheels for easy removal and
Insertion.
Refer to Figs. 4, 5 and 6.
The circuit breaker Interlock mechan
ism is designed to obstruct the operator
from lowering the breaker from the con-
nected position or raising it from the disconnected position unless the breaker is in
the open position.
This interlock is also
Fig. 10
Refer to appropriate
breaker instruction book.
Hetal-clad Sxitchgear
GBH-lBOe
MeUl-cUd Swltchgear
desired to keep the breaker in the open
CURRENT TRANSFORMER AND CABI.E
position while it is being elevatedor lower
COMPARTMENT
ed. With this arrangement it is imperative
that the circuit breaker be tripped prior
The current transformers are mounted
in a compartment isolated from the other
equipment. Provision is made in this com
partment for connecting the purchaser's
to any vertical travel o( the removable
element.
Obviously if the mechanism is
forced, it cannot perform its proper func
tions.
primary cable by means of potheads or
A positive stop prevents overtravel
clamp type terminals.
of the removable element when raised to its
connected position.
The secondary dis
TI»e IM&ULATION
connecting device coupler is used for con
necting outside control circuits to the circuit
POTENTUL TRANSFORMER
COMPARTMENT
IN&ULATICN COMPOUND
breaker, operating mechanism, trip coil and
auxiliary switches.
This coupler makes
contact automatically when the removable
element is raised to the connectedposition.
Potential transformers are located In
a
flEUOVABLE STUD
A control test jumper Is furnished which is
POACCLAIN euSHINfi
compartment above the current trans
formers or in a separate unit adjacent to
Uie breaker units.
plumed into the coupler on the stationary
The transformers are mounted on a
and removable elements when it is desired
movable support equipped with primary and
secondary disconnecting devices. When the
potential transformers are disconnected,
they are at a safe striking distance from
to operate the breaker in the test position.
All removable elements furnished on a
particular requisition and of like design
all live parts of the swltchgear. In addi
tion a grouitding device is provided which
contacts the fuses when the potential trans
formers arc disconnected, effectively
charging the transformers, fo thin posi
tion the transformer fuses may be safely
removed and replaced. When &e carriage
and ratings are completely Interchangeable
one with the other. The removable as well
as the stationary elements are built with
POUtB CIKCUIT
factory Jigs and fixtures thus insuring
mcuc*
interchangeabiUty.
is drawn out tt moves a barrier In front ot
BREAKER ELEVATING MECHANISM
the stationary part of the primary discon
The elevating mechanism for elevating
or lowering the removable element to or
from its connected position supports the
removable element In the operating posi
_jn:i=.-.='uTr
r
* PQWtH CKCUIT
I
•KeARCH
DUMMY REMOVABLE ELEMENT
I TCBT RO^kTION
tion.
In the test position the breaker is
lowered to the guide rails. This mech
anism consists of heavy-duty steel jack
Dummy removable elements, Fig. 13,
are used as a means of isolating circuits
or bus sections, where operation is infre
screws on which are carried nuts to sup
port the elevating carriage. The carriage
is 80 designed tlut the removable element
can oe readily Inserted or withdrawn alter
necting device. See Figure 12.
quent
and
a
circuit
economically Justified.
Fig. II
Heasurenent of Adjustaenl of
Prinary Diaconnecting Devices
breaker cannot be
The device con
sists of a framework to simulate the cir
cuit breaker removable element with a set
the carriage has been lowered to the dis
connected position without necessitatingthe
removal of any bolts, nuts or screws. The
breaker cannot be lowered or raised until
It has been tripped. The breaker cannot
be closed except with the breaker in either
the operating or test position.
Guide rails are built Into the metal-
clad frame to guide the removable breaker
element Into correct position before the
breaker Is raised into the operating posi
tion by means of the elevating mechanism
which is motor operated.
PRIMARY DISCONNECTING DEVICE
The primary disconnectingdevicesuti
lize
sliver to silver contacU to insure
against reduction of current carrying ed
acity due to oxidation of the contact sur
faces. These contacts are of the hlghpressure line contact tube and socket design,
the tube being backed up by heavy garter
springs to Insure contact pressure. Refei
to Figure 11.
BUS COMPARTMENT
The main buses are enclosedinametal
compartment with removable front covers
to provide accessibility.
The bus is supported by an insulating
material which is practically Impervious to
moisture, and an excellent dielectric.
The bus Insulation Is molded on the
bars except at the joints where the insula
tion Is completed by means of compound
filled boxes, molded boots or tape.
Fig. 12
Potential Transforitier Rollout SIiomo in Withdrawn Position
Metal-Clad Swltchgear
GEH-1802
breakers cannot be economically or func
tionally Juatified.
V
The fuses are mounted on a
movable
support equipped with disconnecting de
vices. Control power transformers of 15
leva and smaller may be mounted on the
rollout with the fuses.
See Figure 16.
When the fuses are disconnected, they
are at a safe striking distance from all
live parts ot the awitchgear.
In addition
a grounding device is provided which con
tacts the fuses after they are disconnected,
effectively removlngany static charge from
the fuses. In this position the fuses may
be safely removed and replaced. The dis
connecting devices arc capable of Inter
rupting transformer magnetizing current,
but should not be used to Interrupt load
current.
Mechanical or key interlocks
are applied to prevent operating, the dis
connecting device while the load Is con
nected. This Is gencarally accomplished
by interlocking so that the transformer
secondary breaker must be locked in the
open position before the disconnecting de
vice can be opened or closed.
GROUNDING AND TEST DEVICE
The grounding and test device, Figure
14, provides a convenient means ofground
ing the cables or the bus In order to safe
guard personnel who may be working on the
cables or the equipment.
The device can
also be used for applying power for high
potential tests or for fault location, to
measure insulation resistance (Megger).
Dunniy Renovable Element
of six studs similar to those on the magne-
By
using potential transformers, It can
also be used for phasing out cables.
The three studs of the device are sim
blast breakers. The lower end of the studs
ilar to those of the magne-blast circuit
are connected, front to back, by copper
bars which are fully Insulated and metalenclosed. The stationary structure is the
breakers.
same as for a circuit breaker.
The studs are mounted on a re
movable plate which can l>e placed in either
of two positions. In one position the studs
will engage the front (Bus) contacts only
When the
device is elevated Into position, it con
and in the other position the studs will en
nects the front set of melal-clad discon
gage the rear (Line) contacts only of a
necting devices to the rear set
metal-clad unit.
To Indicate the proper placementofthe
studs on the device, opposite sides of the
Under no conditions must the dummy
element be elevated or lowered when the kius
or the unit Is energized. Key interlocks
are applied to Insure that all source of
power are disconnected before the dummy
element can be operated. Refer to Figure
assembly are marked "Line" and "Bus".
The word corresponding to the desired
position must be toward the operator.
15.
To use, the device Is rolled Into the
metal-clad housing In place of the circuit
breaker, and raised Into or lowered from
ROLLOUT -FUSE-SWITCH UNITS
the
Rollout load-break disconnect switch
times
In addition
used In metal-clad swltchgear to
ing and testing device equipped with both
circuits where circuit breakers cannot be
bus and line side buildings, power operated
economically or functionally justified.
grounding contacts, phasing receptacles,
and a complete safety Interlocking system.
The rollout switch is designated as
type SE-8, and the units In which they are
For details of construction and operation
of this device, refer to GEI-38957 lor 4.16
kv equipment, or GEI-50114 for 7.2 kv and
used are designated as type SEM-26 or
For additional information on
13.8 kv equipment.
these equtpmenta, refer to the supplement
ary Instructions nimlshed.
FUSE
DISCONNECTING
TANDEM LOCK (WHEN FURNISHED)
FOR OUTDOOR UNITS
DEVICE
Outdoor
Current limiting fuses with high in
terrupting rating are sometimes used in
metal-clad swltchgear to
protect small
transformers
where circuit
or
circuits
to the device described
above, there Is available a form of groimd-
protect and switch small transformers and
SEM-36.
connected position by means of the
circuit breaker elevating mechanism.
es, with or without current limiting fuses
ol high interrupting capacity, are some
Fig. IV firound and Test Device
(Cable shown not (urniihed by G, E. Co.)
metal-clad equipments with
more than one unit may be provided with a
tandem locking arrangement which makes it
necessary to padlock only one door on each
GEH-1802
Metal-ciad Swltchgear
RIGHT HAND SDC SHgFT BKR COMPT
RIGHT HflUT Gify <^yFT RKR r
+
c
-\—
POTOGKHn
ARRflwr-FMPHT
«»rvrwre BU9HI-. ea irmeUMr, Pr « «
hmuy
KEY M^ftuxK foft p_ca
ERYEH'5 .-a.> ouicoiw a •.xoi
W" >\AOTLA5W,ATl'ii53q.'!T
•cffiffiECTaNjeoxES
RIGHT HflMT RIGF 9HFET &sR COM|YT.
/
BUS
BflRRFR
•KCP
Ij
KItilLJ.C£A
METHOD FqaFWWB cparjpyrw BOffiS
KtT ROWfeftC
ESPtCE.
I
BEiJiiEaQ^.CTiiifiiiLSwvaE
j 11
osrvrwK AaKrjr. m irwrcAr* rtuniv Rriawftf^r F< fvfni
Fig. 15
14
Padlocking Arrangement, Key Interlocking and Method for Pouring Connection Boxes
Metal-clad SwLtchgear
GEH-1602
h
[ItiFMHIi.T f
•
Fig. 17
Tanden Lack for Outdoor 13.6 Units
Betore any door Intheequipmentcanbe
opened, It is necessary to open the padlocked
door and operate the tandem locking arm to
the open position. In locking the equipment
the
reverse
procedure should be used.
Where it is desired to separately lock
any particular door, the tandem lo^ can
Fig. i6
Control Power Transforser Rollout Shown in
Open Position
be disconnected In that unit by unbolting a
connecting clip between the tandem bar and
the locking bar, and aseparate padlock used
on that door.
side.
(In exceptionally long installations
two or more locks may be required on each
side). The unltcontainlngtheoperatingarin
of the tandem lock is clearly marked on
the drawings and also by nameplate on the
equipment itself. Refer to Figure 17.
The
light switches, front and rear,
will be located in the units with the tandem
lock.
INSTALLATION
Before any installation work is done,
consult and study all drawings furnished
by the General Electric Company for the
particular requisition.
These drawings Include arrangement
drawings, wiring and elementary diagrams
and a summary of the equipment.
Mats,
screens, railings, etc., which are external
The space at the rear must besulficlentfor
installation of cables, for inspection and
maintenance, and on some equipments to
furnished by the purchaser.
LOCATION
The recommended aisle space required
is shown on the floor plan drawing furnished
for the particular requisition. The space at
the front must be sufficient to permit the
iimertion and withdrawal of the circuit
breakers, and their transfer to other units.
recommended floor construction is
shown In Figure 7.
PREPARATION OF FLOOR - ANCHORING
for final leveling of the swltchgear If nec
essary. Care should be taken to provide a
Indoor Equipment
smooth, hard, and level floor under and in
The station floor mustbe strong enough
to prevent sagging due to weight of the
swltchgear structure and to withstand the
impact slresa caused by the opening of the
circuit breakers under short circuit con
at the front and at the rear of the equipment
The
draw out potential transformers.
to the swltchgear, but which may be re
quired to meet any local codes, must be
gear structure and the equipment be com
pletely aligned prior to final anchoring.
ditions.
The impact loading is approxi
mately 1-1/2 times the static load.
The floor channels
must be level and straight with respect to
each other.
Steel shims should be used
front of the units to facilitate installation
and removal of the breaker. If the floor is
not level and flush with the floor channels,
it will be difficult to handle the breaker
because It will not be level with respect to
^e stationary element.
Recommended practice Is to weld the
Suitable means must be provided by
the purchaser for anchoring the equipment
swltchgear structure to the floor channels,
using a tack weld at points Indicated for
anchoring on the drawing. If welding fac
to the floor. It is essential that the floor
be level to avoid distortion of the switch-
be bolted to the floor channels.
ilities are not available the gear should
GBH-1802
Metal-clad Switchgear
Id
.
1
•W
•f
I
il
•r_v.viJ .Jl
*oceonTi^fir et*»
fffW twv/y
vMfrs
ffiOrtT
A»DCO AT RtS»*T
v/X«/
(i^MCL CM)
ntest ^ttrtn m»nf icrr g t e
tHo
oHvr
t —^
=3i
rli
.-J
I
s
I-
^ Moi^n
'^ro«cnr«« 4tt
srKtftH'r'r*
' VSft^ M
^ Crw•
^1^
••
I
I
GEB-1802
-f];
I \
rt
I
I
)•
ll
I
ll
> ll
I
NtW
11
i 11
stc e weather-
proofed. Assemble the gasket between the
roof sections and bolt together. See Fig. 8.
Ouidoor Equipment wiih Protected Aisle
When specified by the purchaser, out
door equipment is furnished with an en
closed, weatherproof operating aisle. See
Fig. 3.
The aisle enclosure is shipped
separately from the switchgear.
which the gasket presses and bang the
section A-A.
(4) Move the aisle enclosure into posi
tion, guiding the holes in the end sheets
over the studs on the switchgear lineup
and guiding the roof sills between the
support cl^s tolled to the upper front
of the switchgear units atove the control
panels. This operation may be simplified
by temporarily loosening the support clips.
The floor of the aisle enclosure must fit
under the hinged breaker cover of the metal-
clad, so the aisle enclosure must be moved
into position on a level wiih the switch-
gear units.
If desired, this Job may be
simplified by removing the dtors over the
circuit breaker compartment.
To remove
these doors, loosen the two bolts holding
the lower hinge, remove the hinge, and
lower the door to remove the hinge pin
from the upper hinge.
(5) Bolt the aisle enclosure in place
at both ends, and bolt the roof sills to
the support clips, tightening any support
clips loosened in the previous operation.
Replace any breaker compartment doors
previously removed.
(1) Install ihe switchgear in accordance
wiih ihe procedure given above for outdoor
equipment.
(2) Remove the shipping covers from
ihe control panels.
Since ihe relay and
instrument cases are not weather-proof,
the control panels should be protected
from inclement weather until the installa-
lion of the aisle enclosure Is completed.
18
of the enclosure.
(10) Connect secondary wiring to lights,
convenience outlets, etc., in accordance
with the wiring diagrams furnished for
the equipment.
Since the aisle floor is level with
the floor of the switchgear units, no trans
fer truck is required for outdoor equipment
with a protected aisle.
The above procedure describes In
stallation of a protected aisle enclosure
with switchgear on one side of the aisle
only. If the aisle Is common to two line
ups of switchgear, the procedure will re
quire slight modification. See thedrawings
furnished with the requisition for specUic
instructions.
Transition Compartments
Transition compartments for outdoor
unit substations may to one of two types
(Figs. 20 and 21). These compartments
are normally shipped assembled. The
full height compartment (Fig. 20) cannot
to disassembled for installation.
The
throat type compartment (Fig. 21) can be
Installed In any of three ways, in accord
ance with the following instructions:
(a) Should the switchgear be position
(6) If the aisle enclosure was shipped
in more than one section, bolt the sections
together and assemble the roof caps In the
The following procedure ouilines the
steps necessary to install outdoor equip
ment with a protected aisle:
in place until the aisle enclosure is as
sembled in order to maintain alignment
manner described atove for roof Joints in
ed on its foundation prior to the power
transformer, the complete transmon can
be mounted on the metal-clad as assenabled.
Remove covers #8. Apply Sterling u 310
outdoor switchgear.
varnish to toth sides of gasket 2A, and
(7) Anchor the outside floor sill of
the atsle enclosure wiih anchor tolls placed
in accordance wiih the requisition drawing.
See Fig. 9, view Y.
presses.
(8) Assemble the dome over the roof
opening between the switchgear and the
aisle enclosure.
See Fig. 9, view X.
(9) Remove shipping braces from aisle
enclosure.
These braces should be left
to the surfaces against which the ga^et
Bolt transition compartment to
throat on metal-clad switchgear.
Jacking the power transformer into its
fln^ location,apply Sterling U310varnish
to toth sides of gasket lA and to the sur
faces against which the gasket presMS,
and place the gasket over the mounting
studs on the transformer tank wall. Slide
transformer in place, guiding the fraMformer mounting studs throughthe mooting
holes In #1. Center rubber seal between
4
Metal-Clad Swltchgear
(d) If proper contacting cannot be at
tained by the above methods, U is necessary
to adjust the stationary dlsconneciL-.g device
#1 and »3 before tightening nuts, mai;.taining 24" between transformer tank wall
and end of metal-clad.
GEH-1802
Do not apply var
tube. DO NOT MAKE ANY ADJUSTMENT.
COMMUNICATE WITH THE
NE.AREST
GENERAL ELECTRIC CO. OFHCE FOR
nish to the rubber seal between •! and "3.
Cut secondary conduit *10 to length a;.':
assemble under the transition.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIGN.
(b) Should the power transformer (*•
The trip interlock should be checked to
positioned on its foundation ttrior to tt. •;
see that the removable element is obstructed
switcheear. follow the procedure of para-
graph (a) above, except move the switc.'.gear up to the power transformer aiti:.assembllng the transition compartmtr,'
to the switchgear.
=
from being raised to or lowered from the
fl
operating position. Using the manual closing
device, close the breaker and then push it
into place for elevating. Snap the selector
switch to the "Raise" position and .ouU the
clutch
(c) If the power transformer and metai •
transition as follows:
and
circuit.
braces "4.
of gasket #2A, and to the surfaces again.s-
i_J
which the gasket presses, before boliir..112 to melal-clad throat. Applv Sterling
Slide throat of #3 Inf.
.
.ve
^
#1 and maintain approximately 4 1/2'
If the Interlock does not function as in
Inte' ^
• ercnce
b
dicated at>ove DO NOT MAKE .ANY AD
JUSTMENTS. COMMUNICATE WITH THE
NEAREST GENERAL ELECTRIC CO. OF
FICE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORM-ATION.
,
Assemble braces •4
top and bottom to maintain size and prope.tank.
Assemble connections, terminals,
-y
'•-.'aIv
'
'iilact suir...
•
.'.d the su>-car} ;;scon-
5 . ' U'.,
supports and complete all joi.-.ts. Assemble
On units equipped with slatior.ary aux
dome »7, side covers "8 and bottom cove,-
#9.
Cut secondary conduit 'IQ lo lengt.-.
V »• -
K'A
.
•.
'Mr
1'-^ ..irfr
• —i \ ju*
V-.-
•
=
.:LjdS.
•••••.-
*"*
•I-
• •
•••••
T'.
lock device is given below.
The elevating mechanism is accurately
leveled and checked at the faciorv a.-,dshould
need no adjustmenL Do not install or re
move the breaker or make anv ad'ustmenis
interchangeablllty of circuit breakers by
excessive adjustment on one breaker.
ndicati# that
hefu'.lcres-
•- ^--silverbcj-.• -T ihcszition:ii ,• device, i..
TESTING CABINET
^ Fig.
Before installing or operating the re
movable element consult the circuit breaker
instructions for directions on installatior.
and inspection. The operation of die inter
.
.-...ui r- inspect....• f thec.-dtacts
.xer is no
pf.n*'-
installed on the wall at a location where
•
readju: ••e uK^rstop
be convlently done. Conduits must be in
stalled to carry cables to supply control
•
-itches I- -•'se
or lower
-r proper •.••stioii. Lock
ne new p-j; 'on.
jnr
:.1oi
>• .
The testing cabinet. Fig. 23, should be
.
•»ing
ra'.sedto
llurr
•
•
maintenance and testing of the breaker can
power for testing.
f-lj—
unless the breaker is open.
i
Rub a small amount of contact lubri
cant D50H47 on the silvered portion of the
breaker studs to form a thin ccating for
contacting purposes.
Lower the elevating mechanism llftins
brackets until the lifting brackets are in the
fully lowered or test position. Tkebreake.-
should then enter the housing freeiv. Pusr.
the breaker into the housing until the wide
part of the breaker supporting plate rests
against the front pan of the lifting bracket
) t sr
of the elevating mechanism. Theclearance
between the interferenceblockonth.ebreak
er and the interference block on the Inter
lock mechanism (dimension "X", Fig. 22
should be from 1/16" to 1 '8".
Carefully raise the breaker to the con
nected position. The clearance between the
breaker supporting plate and the stop bolts
should be not more than 1/32", Tr.en lower
and remove Itfrom the unit. Whenelevating,
note that breaker studs center wiuh respect
i il
i'|- Ivr
2>A KHGCKOvr<»
7
•-ii
—-j ^WOLt FOR jMTfe. fra.-J
rftOHTVlCW COVCR RCMOVCO
lo the stationary disconnectlngdev.ee or in
jury to the contacts may result.
circuit
Care should be taken to prevent destroying
-ar.l r-0H47,
Tn,
made on tl-.e
breaker. See Instruction book furnished with
circuit breaker for method of adjustment.
if the brr.i-'.^r sfj; --.side
I'Onneciui. '«vicf iS in-
.-ontactec j'
t'ft'**
Any adjustmen-. in this
dimension must be
• intact luu-
'.M «
• -* r
and open position.
n.v surt at
in.
7 8".
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT
mechanism operating rod and the operating
plunger on the circuit breaker should be 0 to
1/8" with the circuit breaker in ir.e raised
Ccitlw- • wipt s.tould
contact .i.
•
jacent metal-clad switchgear unl-.s.
the clearance between the end of the switch
!..• 1/8" fro.. r-p o; ; -"ntact
-.1.
alUh
Indoor transition compartments are
shipped assembled together wich the ad
iliary switches (Fig. 45A, reference -69),
;'-.;;iient of ti„ .••ac-lona.-v dis• •• should CiA-.-* a hi-d'v imontact lu.^ •-•i-: r50H47
/'.I'.ir,' !«u
and assemble under the transition.
Connect healers located Ir. 13,8 k-.
class transition compartment.
Again, a definite
the circuit.
presses, and loosely fasten -l andKlA t.
alignment, then tighten 41 to iranswrme.-
switch to the "Lower" position and pull the
clutch handle forward.
motor circuit limit switch from energizing
and to the surfaces against which die gaskv
#3 to tank.
Elec
trically close the breaker. Snap the selector
stop should be encountered preventing the
U 310 varnish to both sides of gasket "l A.
transformer tank.
Then trip the breaker manually
and elevate to the raised position.
Apply Sterling U 310 varnish to both sld'.-,
from
A defi.-.ite stop
circuit limit switch from energtzing the
Remove covers
adapter »1, dome
handle forward.
should be encountered preventing thetnotor
clad switcheey are in place, disassemhi-j
Box for 13*6 KV HeU1*c1atf SwUchgear
Metal-clad Swltchgear GEH-1802
ADDITION OF UNITS TO EXISTING
(5) Over the white cotton tape, brush
MAIN BUS ASSEMBLY
a
EQUIPMENT
Before adding units to existing equip
ment, consult and study all drawings fur
nished with the equipment. In addition
to the usual drawings furnished with new
equipment, special drawings may be fur
nished covering complicated or special
assembly work. Also, check to make sure
all necessary parts are on hand.
BEFORE ANY COVERS ARE REMOV
ED OR ANY DOORS OPENED WHICH PER
MIT ACCESS TOTHEPRIMARYCIRCUII^
rr IS ESSENTIAL THAT THE CIRCUTT
BE DE-ENERGIZED.
Figure 18 indicates the special pro
cedures required to add new metal-clad
units to outdoor equipment without protected
aisle, and Figure 19 indicates the special
(a) Remove compartment covers.
(b) Bolt splice plates and bus bars
together, follonring assembly instructions
above. SeealsoFig.2SandTableA, Fig. 24.
TABLE A
Torque Values for Metal-clad Swltchgear
(Torque in Inch-Pounds)
Bolt
Size
3/8"-16
l/2"-I3
5/8"-11
good coat of U 310 varnish.
Varnish may be thinned if neces
sary, with Xylene, DSB9.
(1) For 13.8 kv or 7.2 kv equipment-
(h) Replace all covers previously re
moved.
(2) For 4.16 kv equipment:
(a) Remove compartment covers.
(b) Bolt splice plates and bus bars
together, following assembly instructions.
See Fig. 25 and Table A, Fig. 24.
Copper
Aluminum
or Steel
or Compound
lSO-300
180-240
360-540
360-480
Joint, as shown in Fig. 15. Note that on
Joints where no tap is made from bus the
opening in the molded cover should be at
420-600
420-540
the top.
(c) Place Hexlble molded cover over
(d) Secure flexible cover with selflocking fasteners furnished. Joint insula
Fig. 24
tion is now completed.
procedures required to add new metalclad units to outdoor equipment with pro
tected aisle.
For indoor equipment, it
(c) Complete the taping of the vertical
riser- bars using insulating tape furnished
(2/3 lap) stepping the tape at the bus bar.
is usually necessary only to remove the
If the riser bars connect to the bus from
(3) In unit substations, the connection bars
below, sufficient tape should be added to
prevent compound lealo^e when filling.
should be assembled in the transition com
end cover sheets and to re-assemble them
on the new units after these are located
and bolted to the existing units.
Other
wise, the installation procedure is the
same as described above.
Apply a layer of cotton tape (1/2 lap) over
the insulating tape, stopping the cotton tape
Just inside molded splice cover.
(e) Replace all covers previously re
moved.
partment (Fig. 20 and 21) and the connec
tions at the transformer terminals greased,
taped and painted as indicated above. The
conduit for secondary circuits should also
be assembled in or below the transition
When the units are in place and mech
anical assembly is completed, assemble
the main bus and other primary connec
tions per the instructions below. (Removal
^ existing compound-filled connectionbox
es can be easily accomplished by Peking
the box -in dry ice for 2 - 3 hours. Remove
the dry ice and the cord tying the box in
place, and strike the box with a hammer.
The hardened box and compound will crack
away from the Joint.)
(d) Place molded covers around the
bolted splice Joints. Note that compound
filling space is at top of joint, and add filler
pieces furnished for the purpose to the
bottom of box and around bus bar lamina
tions (Fig. 20) to prevent conspound leakage
while filling.
Duxseal shm^ be placed
should be made in accordance
be installed as shown on the arrangement
ports should be provided as indicated on
(e) Heat G.E. D50H49 compound (fur
with the wiring diagrams furnished with
nish^) to minimum 200OC and maximum
of 220OC. Avoid overheating the compound
for Uie dielectric strength may be seriously
aUected. Pour the compound into the molded
covers intermittently, allowing an interval
of cooling to prevent formation of gas or
air pockets. The final pouring should be
level with the top Of the box and should be
done only alter due allowance for shrinkage
The main bus bars and other connection
bars may be either c<9per or aluminum. In
either case, the connection stirfaces will be
silver plated.
All field assembled Joints in conduct
ors, regardless of material or method of
insulation, should be made as follows:
(1) Wipe silver clean. Do not use
sandpaper or any abrasive on the
silvered surface.
of
Avoid handling
cleaned surface as much as
possible.
(2) A sufficient quantity of DS0H47
grease shotild be applied to the
Joint at each contact area so that
me complete contact area will be
thoroughly sealed
with excess
grease squeezed out of the Joint
when tightened.
(3) Brush a thin coat of D50H47 over
the outside surfaces of the Joint
area and hardware covering the
silvered area.
(4)
In some cases external connections
are made to metal-clad bus by
bars.
The metal-clad bars are
normally silver plated. Unplated
bars, either cqiper or aluminum,
should not be used to connect to
silver plated bars.
20
Bus ducts connecting between groups of
metal-clad swltchgear, or between metalclad swltchgear and other apparatus, should
leaks while filling. The Duxseal should be
removed after the compound has set. G.E.
#860 cord should be us^ to hold the molded
parts securely in place.
the equipment.
CfRfNECTIONS
BUS DUCT
over ihe joints to make the box free of
Secondary wiring and control bus con
nections
compartment.
is made. Refer to Fig. IS.
(f) Paint the e:qiosed cotton tape on
vertical riser
bars with U310 or U311
varnish fumishe
tiijA.—' J
r
-
VAtr ftarrcH
TA^-C
Acnfru
In all cases carefully follow the cable
>
manufocturer's recommendations for in
SawiCI
stallation of the tj^e of cable being used,
riLiCB
as well as the instructions contained here
etmcH
BA«4
in. See Figs. 43 and 44. If the cable is
aluminum, the conductor surface must be
carefully abraided and the cable covered
liberally with a Joint compound recom
mended by the cable manufacturer.
I
rtre rtoTR3N
OOTTOM
_
Mrs 04*4
SAvicr
.TAft
POTHEADS
SCCTIOh AA
SCCTIOH'AA'
CO
3
3
v£^
3 '
BA/f
ings. Handle with care and avoid sharp
bending which might damage the insulation.
Mark a point on the lead sheath of the
cable about 1-1/2 inch above the bottom of
the wiping sleeve.
/f£/rwL ir£ baa
(c) Remove the pothead from the unit,
disassemble the wiping sleeve and sl4> it
OUXSBAL
and its misket over 'the cable as shown in
Figure 27.
''fv.
(d) Remove the lead sheath from the
cable to the point marked in operation "b"
as shown in Figures 28 and 29 proceeding
as follows:
£0A y
First, make a cut around the cable
half through the sheath at the reference
point. Second, split the sheath iengthwise
tietween the cut and the cable, holding the
cutting tool at an angle to the cable radius
to avoid damaging the insulation. Third,
remove the sheath by catching the split
edge with pliers and pulling directly away
St/S
Jf.'w/0£ /O AO/a X ZOZ AABB£0
TZOZ . BOB 6 'BBBS fse
jOOC/BAB 77//C/f/^£SS Oy£B BOAT
B/T£A A/ZO OVS/tAAfB/r/B Af/SBAf
yo Af/L. MB-' X Z9 ' .r zoz
BAB / ' -riASB BBOCBBO
BA/tS e/S£
A ^
/////OA/Y/AL AfA/Z/yeB.
BOuAf"' £*•)
7-aP£ boa 4-'BAAS AAB Ca AOAaS BOA
& ' SAAS.)
from the cable axis.
Clean and tin the outside of the
lead sheath for about 3 inches and bell out
the end of the lead sheath.
Fig. 26
i3.8 KV Taped Joints
21
¥
VI
&
(e) Remove the belt and interphase in
sulation down to within 1-1/2 inches of the
lead sheath as shown in Figure 30.
The
last few layers should be torn off to avoid
damaging the individual conductor insula
tion. To reinforceandprotecttheconductor
insulation, wrap two layers of half lapped
varnished cambric or irrathene tape over
the factory insulation.
(f) Disassemble insulator support plate
from pothead body.
The insulators should
not be removed from the support plate
t>ecause they are factory assembled for
proper compression of their gaskets. Place
pothead t>ody over cable and then fan out the
conductors
into iq)proximately the final
position, as shown in Figs. 31, 32. The
middle conductor should be bowed slightly
for final adjustment of length.
Avoid
sharp bends and damage to the insulation,
particularly at the crotch.
(g) For system voltage above 7500
volts it is recommended that stress relief
cones be built up when single-conductor or
three-conductor
shielded
cable Is used.
Construct stress relief cones in accordance
with the recommendations of the cable
screw contact nut in place after asMoahil
manufacturer, SeeFiguredlforonerecoffl-
33 and 34.
mended method.
On lower voltage cables,
belling out the end of the lead sheath ordi
narily provides sufficient stress relief.
(Stress cone material will not be furnished
with pothead).
(h) Bolt pothead body to metal-clad
adapter plate.
Shape conductors into final
position, then cut off each conductor to fit
its terminal.
(i) Remove pothead terminals from
Insulators. Remove two Inches of insulation
from the endofeachconductor and assemble
pothead terminals to c^les.
(j) Assemble gaskets where shown in
Fig. 41 and t»lt insulator support plate and
wiping sleeve to pothead body. Compress
gaskets by a partial turn on each bolt suc
cessively until the gasketls uniformly com-
preesed to dimensions shown In Fig. 41.
Check to
be sure the terminal studs are
seated properly
on their
gaskets, then
top gaskets and washers. See FtgurM
(k) Make a plumber's wiped joist
tween the wiping sleeve and the lead sbia
of the cable, as shown in FlguresSSaad
(I) Remove the 3/4"filling plug ta M. j?f
pothead body, the pipe plugs in the
the studs and In the insulator supportPiaWj -
Insert a stand pipeand ftmnel in the fUIttJ ,
hole of suXficlent height to extend abcjf*
top of the studs as shown In Figure Jj*
•
Heat #227 or ll332compousdtO^.;: T
pouring temperature, 165 C. Do nworw^ heat compound as htgher tcmperalurW rfl v
injure cable insulation and aiso rw« •
excessive shrinkage of the comp^
cooling.
Before and while
SS--
pothead body and stand pipe to prevent
den chiUing of compound which mayp^2
in the formation ofair voids, "rae pwaj^
may be warmed by playing ablowtor
,
the body, taking care that no
reaches the porcelains or gaskets.
V
Metal-Clad Swltchgear
IMO Of COTTON TAPE
^
GEH-1802
oy^'C /'MCg-t.Af^ AS SAcWM
snp Of i-sc: OR v.c.
\ COnoN TPPC
I
?02ORy,C.
Lrp~Topf
««ojt«p
✓:
cflfffR «
/j»iwH(Wf
^
eoKTihCT wrr |
V¥ASHMn\
//^e»p
ptfKftuitn
^IMSUtJkTM
f f I- T«?
L?lllii.'4:+.'H
f F«Cft«U*C
rCUAM^
9*tiii
N'
^tnPt Ui
ItM3UUn^LA«RS(W01B 1)
IMS9WTI0K
1£V1L
1-202
WOTE 2
ICOTTOH
WOTK S
V.C.
MOTE 0
I
PAIKT
I
APPLt OKE
Komntin^f
COAT LIBERALLY
SUAffXC.-*
' .inish vz.fr£r.s ii-Afi.
u/.,/» Er£«Li»i?
U3I0 k»*4'/.S/T'
P
_#ui.o u» wr™ WMii. Ikc,'-•»*•.
ncj^sn.
OF .LNLO UP TO NOV. TETiMOFK TAP&
THAK ORiaiHAk
INSULATION.
I *202 ft V-C. • Om Uyof. wound 2/3 Up requires 3 tumo around Oar
|A em vtdch of Upe. On« layer thtckneas le 3 tlviea t«pe thickness.
COTTOK • One layer, wound 1/2 lap requiree 2 turns around bar in
^
wUih of Upe.
i COPnm BRNO TO Rl, CUT iTT AN ANSLS
. « IS« C SoLOCRtO TO eopPCROHlKLO
"•TAPC ON CASLl. BRAIO TO B. WOUNB
One layer thleloieas is 2 tlses tape thlckneea.
9on fi
Imthene 1202, width 1 1/2
thickness O.OlO".
TI.NT ANO Cuoei. All TURN. OP _
OAAIO TO SC .OLDCRCO ALONO TWO
Keep tension on
LINC. PARALLEL TO CABLC TO
PR.VCNT aCPARATION.
ae#e St all tlaes while applying.
•PB
5i
cotton ABAIPIO (#63Q-ll6) width 1 1/2" thickness 0.007".
M l fti
famished esabrlo A22A11A (#992) width 1 1/2*, thickness
^^OPPCA BNAIO To O. WOUNO AAOUNO
CtfT WI.IM.y
M.TALLIC BINO.K AND SOLOERCO
SOTN TO BINO&R AND LtAD SHEATH*
.lO.^ To/
a« e*/
/
PtOlf*.
usci.AL...E.ee>iPoun •( holes at the top of terminal
(4) Over the white cotton Upe,
brush a good coat of varnish (11-310 for
on air Tolas which might form.
be thinned if necessary, with Xylene, DSB9.
_
Single-Conductor Potheads
Wssrt plugs and continue lUling until It
.
Fig. HO
Inaulation of Connectioo Bars
Mm. Insert plugs and continue pouring
vWls the pothead and compound cools to
When the pothead has coole^ re-
•MW filling pipe and Insert plug. Clean
Ml compound which might have overflowed
M tbe outside of the porcelains.
15 lev and U-311 for 5 kv).
described
for three-conductor
i
25^Sli*''i^"^'"Bipreventing
^leeompoundlsnotanlnsulatlnB
222
should not be used lor that
Wrap with 1202 Irrathene tapepro-
usually desirable that both ends ofthecable
other apparatus. In some cases this may be
accomplished by the mounting of potheads
Stuffing box cable entrance fittings are
used for cables other than lead sheathed.
These fittings may be provided with or
without armor clamps as necessary.
The fitting consists of acastandmach
ined base, one or more rubber or neoprene
washers, and apacklngnutwhichcompresses
above order, with the base nearest to the
•Cn
Where layers
there a?e
Sfl .ywlea, ^^"'P^ent.
apply additional
to
pothead. The packing nut should be tightened
alter the cable is located In the potheadand
'S) Over the Insulating Upe, ap
where non-conducting sheath cable is car
ried in meUlllc ducts or conduits, it is
Cable Entrances Other Than Wiping Sleeves
WMA. as shown In Pigs. 30, 40 and il, the
Insulation of the
conducting
shcatn or conduit be grounded directly to
the awitchgear ground bus or structure or
S5? ,I, .layers depending on the voltage
Sf^cta.
three-conductor
or shielded cables are used, or
potheads.
•"••etloos as lollows:
(1) Fill all cavities around bolts
*''h Duxseal compound to form
Cable Sheath or Conduit Grounding
Where
gle-conductor potheads ts In general the
as
before the assembly of the pothead is com
pleted.
sheath
The procedure for insUUatlon of sin
same
. .(m) Assemble potheadconnectlonbars.
• ' OM^Tlhige
Wwtaf^case
as outlined under"Connec18). See Pig. 38. Insulate
Varnish may
ing nut. This requires that the packing nut
and armor clamp be listened on the cable
the washers around the cable.
These
parts should be assembled on the cable In the
before any compound is poured.
Where an armor clamp is required, it
ts usually made an integralpartof the pack
or terminating fittings on a grounded sup
port.
When such mounting cannot be ar
ranged, a separate ground wire should be
connected between the cable eheath or con
duit and the swltchgear ground bus.
Where single conductor conducting
sheath cables are used, the same procedure
should be observed, except that only one
end of the sheath should be grounded. This
also applies to single conductor non-conducting sheath cables in separate metallic
conduits. Where three phases are carried
by single conductors In a common metallic
conduit, grounding procedure should be the
same as that described (or three conductor
cables.
GEH-1802
Metal-clad Switchgear
#*ni^er«**yeWF»<«i*ii^W4»»i«W w w ^ <
fX ward travel of the breaker.
The selector switch must not be used to
energize or interrupt toe motor circuit
at any time. See Fig. 22.
To lower the breaker, proceed the
same as for raising except operate selector
switch to "Lower".
The clutch must be held in toe en
gaged position; otherwise, a spring wiU
return it to its normal position opening
the electrical circuit to the motor.
The breaker may be raised and low-
ered by an emergency hand wrench which
can be inserted after removing the motor.
The motor is removed by unlatching
the motor assembly from toe support and
disconnecting toe motor lead plug<
After removing toe motor, pull the
clutch forward and insert the manual wrench
into the end of toe clutch coupling. The
breaker must be tripped before the wrench
can be inserted and held in toe clutch
coupling.
TRANSFER TRUCKS
Circuit breaker transfer trucks are
furnished with outdoor metal-clad switch-
Metal-Clad Swltchgear
gear to facilitate moving of circuit break
ers from unit to unit or to maintenance
,areas.
tions
exist at the installation, or when
specified by the purchaser.
See Fig. 8, view A, for instructions for
adjustment. The truck is equipped with
two latches, one to hold the breaker on
the truck and one to hold the truck to the
met^-clad swltchgear unit. Both latches
engage automatically, and both are re-
leas^ by a single T-shaped foot pedal
on the rear of the truck. Depressing the
left side of the pedal unlatches the truck
from the swltchgear tmlt, and depressing
the ri^t side of the pedal unlatches the
breaker from the truck.
By maintaining a slight temperature
differential, the heaters help facilitate dry
ing and prevent condensation and the re
sulting corrosion and insulation deter
ioration which might occur.
outdoor equipment in order to keep the
inside iemperature several degrees higher
than that outside.
Heaters are also fur
nished for indoor equipment when it is
known that abnormal atmospheric condi
Heaters should be visually inspected
several times a year to make sure they
are operating properly.
be energized at aU times and that ther-
ments with a single rollout, the heaters
will be in the space above the rollout.
static control is used, the contacts of
In auxiliary compartments with two roll
outs, the heater will be on one of the
compartments, transition compartments,
Space heaters are provided in all
miscellaneous material packed inside the
units before energizing the heaters.
Heaters are normally located at the
stdes of the breaker units, a few inches
above the floor.
In auxiliary compart
rollouts, for greater accessibility. Heat
ers may also be located in superstructure
SPACE HEATERS
is connected in accordance with the wiring
diagrams furnished wiih the equipment.
Also, be sure to remove all cartons and
The platform at the front end of
'the transfer truck is adjustable in height.
GEH-1802
and in bus ducts, if the operating con
ditions require them.
It' is recommended that the heaters
mostatic control not be used.
If thermo-
the thermostat should be set to close be
tween 95 F and 100 F on falling temper
ature, de-energizing the heaters only when
strong sunli^t beats on the swltchgear.
Under no condition should a differential
thermostet be used to control the heaters
because under conditions of extremely high
humidity this type of thermostat will not
Before energizing the heaters, be sure
the power source is of the proper voltage,
frequency, and phase arrangement, and
operate at all times to keep the beaters on
enough to prevent condensation in the
swltchgear.
MAINTENANCE
A regular maintenance schedule should
be established to obtain thebestserviceand
reliability from the swltchgear. Plant
operating and local conditions will dictate
the frequency of inspection required. For
specific information regarding the mainten
ance of devices, such as circuit breakers,
relays, meters, etc., refer to the separate
requires a certain amount of air gap be
tween phases and to ground to complete the
Insulation.
Inserting any object in this air
space, when equipment is energized, wheth
er it be a tool or a part of the body, may
under certain conditions, in effect, short
circuit this air gap and may cause a break
down in the primary circuit to ground and
instruction book furnished for each device.
cause serious damage or injury or both.
The inspection cabinet, which is furnished,
provides a convenient means for maintaining
tenance and checking procedures that acci
the circuit breakers. Under normal condi
tions the protective relays do not operate,
therefore, it is important to check the oper
ation of these devices regularly.
A permanent record of all maintenance
work should be kept, the degree of detail
depending on the operating conditions. In
any event, it will be a valuable reference
for subsequent maintenance work and for
station operation. It is recommended that
the record include reports of tests made,
the condition of equipment and repairs and
adjustments that were made.
BEFORE ANY COVERS
ARE
RE
MOVED OR ANY DOORS OPENED WHICH
PERMIT ACCESS TO THE PRIMARY CIR
CUITS, IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT THE CIR
CUIT BE DE-ENERGIZED.
The primary circuits of metal-clad
swltchgear are insulated in order to reduce
the size of the equipment. However, this
insulation, except in one or two instances.
Care should be exercised in the main
dental tripping or operation is not initiated.
The swltchgear structure and connec
tions should be given the following overall
maintenance at least annually.
1. Thoroughly clean the equipment, re
moving all dust and other accumulations.
Wipe clean ihe buses and supports. Inspect
the buses and connections carefully for
evidence of overheating or weakening of
the insulation.
High poteniial tests are not required,
but if it seems advisable, based on the
insulation resistance tests or after repairs,
the test voltage should not exceed 75% of
the AIEE factory test voltage. Potential
transformers and control power transform
ers must be disconnected cfuringhi^ voltage
testing.
3. Clean elevating mechanism and lub
ricate jack screws and gears with lubri
cant G. E. Co. #D50H15 (Atlantic Ref. Co.
#52 or equal).
4. Check primary disconnectingdevice
contacts for signs of abnormal wear or over
heating. Clean contacts with silver polish.
Discoloration of the silvered surfaces is not
ordinarily harmful unless atmospheric con
ditions cause deposits such as sulphides on
the contacts. If necessary the deposits can
be removed with a good grade of silver polish.
2. Measure the resistance to ground
Before replacing breaker, apply a thin
and between phases of the insulation of
coat of contact lubricant D50H47 to breaker
studs for lubrication.
buses
and connections.
Since definite
limits cannot be given for satisfactory in
sulation resistance values, a record must
5. Check to see that all anchor bolts
be kept of the reading, weakening of the
insulation from one maintenance period
to the next can be recognized from the re
corded readings. The readings should be
and bolts in the structure are tight. Check
taken under similar conditions each time if
possible, and the record should include the
temperature and humidity.
tightness and continuity of all control con
nections and wiring.
6. If the swltchgear is equipped with
heaters, check to see that all heaters are
energized and operating.
RENEWAL PARTS
ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS
1. RENEWAL PARTSSHOULD BE ORDEREDFROMTHE MEDIUM VOLTAGESWITCHGEAR DEPARTMENT.
2. ALWAYS SPECIFY THE REQUISITION NUMBER ON WHICH THE EQUIPMENTWAS ORIGINALLY
FURNISHED.
3. SPECIFY THE QUANTITY, REFERENCE NUMBER, DESCRIPTION AND THIS BULLETIN NUMB^
4. STANDARD HARDWARE, SUCH AS SCREWS, BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS, ETC., ISNOT LISTED. SUCH
ITEMS SHOULD BE PURCHASED LOCALLY.
5. FOR PRICES, REFER TO THE NEAREST OFFICE OF THE GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY.
6. IF INSULATING MATERIAL, SUCH AS TAPE, VARNISH, COMPOUND, ETC., IS REQUIRED, IT MUST
BE SPECIFIED SEPARATELY.
27
GEH-1802
Metal-Clad Swltchgear
PRlMAftY DISCONNECT DEVICES
(SEE FIG. NO. 10)
DESCRIPTION
Front Primary Disconnect Device
Assembly, 3 Pole, Complete with
Connections
Rear Primary Disconnect Device
lAssembly, 3 Pole, C
'..J L_ 1 l» -
Connections
ti
u
1 rI
\
•
\\
NOTE: Insulating material required for
Ref. Nos. 5 and 6 will be furnished
with order.
I -*.v,
.T
\J_I8
Fig. ilSA
View Showing Elevating Hech-
lI
Conplete Left Hand (Ref. Ko. ll
Complete Right Hand (Ref. No. 2)
anisn Motor and Control Unit
Fig. 15 Elevating Mechanism for H-26 Eguipments Rated 250 »va or less
POSITIVE MECHANICAL INTERLOCK
(FIG. NO. 45A)
REF. NO.
3
DESCRIPTION
Complete positive mechanical
Interlock assembly
Elevating mechanism motor
(I15-V d-c)
Elevating mechanism motor
(230-v d-c)
Elevating mechanism motor
(230-v d-cj
Spring only
and H-36 Equipments Rated I2O0A 500 nva or less
—I
111
Fi9> •><
REF. NO.
Ingle Bracket end Chain Drive
DESCRIPTION
Bracket
Roller
Retainer
Chain
?-^l
Fig. SO
REF. NO.
Bus Supports
DESCRIPTION
laolaling barrier support angle
Rear isolating barrier
Intermediate isolating barrier
111
Front isolating larrier
Isolating barrier clip
Isolating barrier support
Front support clip (not shown)
Front intermediate support
Intermediate support
Rear intermediate support
Rear support clip (not shown)
Lower intermediate support
Lower Intermediate support clip
Intermediate clamp assembly
Fig. US
(supersedes but does not replace
Shutter Mechanism Assembly H-2S
Rel. Nos. 31 - 35)
Fig. SI
P^l
REF. NO.
Door Handles and Locks
DESCRIPTION
Panel locking handle
Panel handle
Door locking handle
Door handle
Socket
Fig. 19
Shutter Mechanism Assembly
H-36
GEH-1802
Metel-clad Swltchgear
DESCRIPTION
LOCATION RATINC
38
39
40
41
42
Int.
Int.
end
end
int.
•
X200A.
1200A.
1 connection bar, down
1 connection bar, up
1200A.
1 connection bar, down
1200A.
1200A.
no connection bar
no connection bar
43
44
end
1200A.
int.
45
int.
end
end
int.
1600A.
1600A.
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
59A
59B
1600A.
1600A.
1600A.
1600A.
2000A.
2000A.
2000A.
2000A.
end
Int.
int.
end
end
Int.
end
int.
int.
end
end
1 connection bar, up
1 connection bar, down
1 connection bar, up
1 connection bar, down
1 connection bar, up
no connection bar
no connection bar
1
1
1
1
connection
connection
connection
connection
liar,
bar,
bar,
bar,
down
up
down
up
2000A.
no connection bar
2000A.
no connection bar
2000A.
2000A.
2000A.
2000A.
2 connection bars, dowi
2 connection bars, up
2 connection bars, dowi
2 connection bars, up
Insulating boot
specify
Plastic rivet for boot
Fio. S2 Bus Connection Box
[<
£Ssssta;^,
Contact
Ground shoe
Support
'•
Tr.nsfor„,ar Ronout
Unit
Si^pport
Support
Cover
Carriage
CONTROL TRANSFORMER ROLLOUT IRJIT
176
"7
Sf®®
<"PPor;
autter*'^®'''
Transformer
Contact
Contact
Contact
•"NtCTJ
Shutter support
Ground shoe
Ground contact
Cover
Frame
/f
Support
Support
Support
2S1AS-
Carriage
Barrier
TfMjfomer Rollout Unit
SINGLE
& TRIPLE-CONDUCTtW POTHEADS
Triple-conductor pofMaul assembly
Body
Insulators and support
Wiping sleeve
..
.
Gaskete for trlple-csvfcsnor pothead
IM
Terminal
Contact nul
Washer
Palnut (3/4 In. - 12)
^
Pipe plug |3/^4 In. sW-;
Pipe plug (1/8 in Btd-J
f A i n u b vv/-s
Single-conductor potb«»'
assembly
Body and insi^tor
pothead
Gaskets for 8lngle-c"«w»»
Wiping Sleeve
entrance
»s««
-
Adapter for mechan1o-l e»
tlttings
\
7"^
uV
Metal-clad Swltchtl"l' r
REF,NO.
85
\,(.."'l.'\.,Y"-!-rii>.H--+-14------1-7'i"
r.1--1.......11---4-92
89
1u..-l���r
75
67
7 7
82
78
79
80
81
82
l-4-+4-,1.\..\-87
BB
83
86
fig, 55
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
Fuse Rollout Unit
�
.....
...
...
...
106
k:fJ: '"
�
�IOI
e=J
Jl02
v,� ..... -:....-a·
(d�C. o,•cON#V6�rJ
Fl g, 56
Ir
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
175
176
177
178
179
179
180
181
I
�18
u:
�
e
Fig, 57
Control Transformer Rollout Unit
'"
CNI A!EtlP "'lw t:a•
(GltO,U,,,D .....OU)
186
187
188
189
190
191
201
206
;_et
.
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
Fig, 58
Single and Triple-Conductor Potheads
Fuse support (upper)
Fuse support (lower)
Shutter
Transformer
Barrier
Barrier
Contact
Shutter support
Ground shoe
Ground contact
Cover
Frame
Support
Support
Support
Carriage
Arc Quencher
Insulator
Barrier support
P.T. barrier
Shutter
Shutter support
Contact (movable)
Contact (statioruµy)
Sec. disconnect (movable)
Sec. disconnect (stationary)
Barrier
Contact
Ground shoe
Support
Frame and carriage
P. T. braid (specUy JMgtb)
Support
Support
Cover
Carriage
Fuse support (upper)
Fuse support (lower)
Shutter
Transformer
Contact
Contact
Contact
Shutter support
Ground shoe
Ground contact
Cover
Frame
Support
Support
Support
Carriage
Barrier
SINGLE & TRIPLE-CONDUCTClll POTHEADS
2 034
20
205
....
...
;.:
·. .
184
202
co
\
182
183
185
�
,.
3
.;.
T1PIC."L "'Cc.T10hlAL s,oe y,ow
FUSE ROLLOUT UNIT
CONTROL TRANSFORMER ROLLOUT UNIT
1\1--1--1--- 17�
187
95
96
111
112
113
114
-------177
co
DESCRIPTION
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER HOLLOUT UNIT
94
Barrier support
106
107
108
109
Potential Transfonner Roi lout Unit
GEH-1802
Triple-conductor p� asaembly
Body
Insulators and support
Wiping sleeve
Gaskets for triple-ct� pothead
Terminal
Contact nut
Washer
Palnut (3/4 ln. - 12)
Pipe plug (3/4 in. std,)
Pipe plug (1/8 in std,)
Single-conductor � assembly
Body and insulator
Gaskets for single-�r pothead
Wiping sleeve
Adapter for mechan1� eatrance
fittings
Jt''"'
't
GEH-1802H
INSTRUCTOOSVSS
:f >
t^sfn: :h •\
(SUPERSEDES GEK.SeOS-sS
AND
AND GEF-3837
RENEWAL ^ARTS
;
/
• ;v^v/
Clfa.!
4 la®®'
^ ^ UH
Types ^"26 csnd ^-36
For Magne-bSost Air Circuit Breakaj
i.16 snd Ai^i-13.£
CONTENTS
RECEIVING, HANDLING
AND STORAGE
3
DESCRIPTION
8
INSTALLATION
11
OPERATION
19
TESTING AND INSPECTION
...
19
maintenance
20
RENEWAL PARTS
20
•I Mwm :fc.tfwno"rfiMiirt
MEOiUM VOLTAGE S^iTSHGEAR OEPARTMEHT
^
"F H i
^ Is? i
FHILAOElPHiA. PA.
i ^
/
V
-«
Flfl. 3
(S03WS)
Wi m**
\ •
f
J/»
- _
"
.
.
.
2
(•010211))
.i
.. i. 1
fiB,
I
(ftoanisi
tISETAL-CLAD SWITCH6EAR
TYPES RS26 AND P«136
FOR MAGNE-BLAST AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER
TYPES Aftfi-4.16 ANO AfVl-13.8
TYPE M26
Mctal-clad switchgear is equipment to
control and protect various types ot elec
trical apparatus and power circuits.
The switchgear consists of one or more
units which are mounted side by side and
connected mechanically and electrically to
gether to form a complete switching equip
ment.
Typical equipments are shown in
Figures 1, 2 and 3.
m
The circuit breakers are easily re
movable to provide maximum accessibility
for maintenance with minimum interrup
tion of services. The switchgear is designed
to provide maximum safety to the operator.
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
TYPE
CURRENT
FIGURE
AM-4.16-150
Magne-bl.>st
150,000
1200 • 2000
4
AM-4.16-250
Magne-blast j
230,000
1200 - 2000
4
TYPE M36
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
TYPE
All equipment is enclosed in grounded metal
n
fNTERRUPT
CAPACITY
KVA
1
INTERRUPT
CAPACITY
KVA
CURRENT
FIGURE
compartments.
AM-13.8-150
Magne-blast
150,000
1200 - 2000
4
The equipment is available in the rat
ings listed in the following table. The ratings
of the equipment and devices are based on
AM-13.8-250
Magne-blast
250,000
1200 - 2000
4
usual
AM-13.8-S00
Magne-blast
500,000
1200 - 2000
4
AM-i3.8-750
Magne-blast
750,000
1200 - 2000
4
AM-7.2-250
Magne-blast
250,000
1200 - 2000
4
AM-7.2-500
Magne-blast
500,000
1200 - 2000
4
service
conditions
as covered in
AIEE and NEMA standards. Operation at
currents above the equipment rating will
result in temperature rises in excess of
NEMA standards, and is not recommended.
For outdoor installation the same basic
equipment is built into a weatherproof
housing as in Figures 2 and 3.
RECEIVING, HANDLING AND STORAGE
RECEIVING
•il
i
fw-tiij
Every case or crate leaving the factory
is plainly marked at convenient places with
case number, requisition number, custom
er's order. tronTor rear, and when for size
5.:
-Jt
and other reasons it is necessary to divide
the equipment for shipment, with the unit
number of the portion of equipment enclosed
rs]
in each shipping case.
The contents of each package of the
shipment are listed in the Packing Details.
This list Is forwarded with the shipment,
packed in one of the cases. The case is
especially marked and its number can also
be obtained from the Memorandum of Ship
ment.
To avoid the loss of small parts
when unpacking, the contents of each case,
should be carefully checked against the
Packing Details before discarding the pack
ing material. Notify the nearest General
Electric Company representative at once
If any shortage of material is discovered.
All elements before leaving the factory
are carefully inspected and packed by work
men experienced in the proper handling
iiRd packing of electrical equipment. Upon
Fig. 4
Hagne-bUst Breaker
Fi» 5
DuBBy Reaovable Elonent
Theta intlntdiont do not purport to cover oil dafailt or varioliont in equipmanl nor lo provide tor every pouSJa
confingency lo be met in eottneelion with imialhlion, operation or maialemrKe. Should further informalion be deiircd
or thould portieuhr problemi arise whkh ore not covered tuffidentif for the purthaier't purposet, the matter dtould
be referred to the General Sledrie Company.
•w
GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear
RCMOVAUe COVE« rOR Access
/TO WIRCS IN WmiNS TROUGH
-sslri
C]
ALL FLOOR STEEL TO BE FURNISHED BY PURCHASER
CHANNELS SHOULD BE SET LEVEL WITH EACH OTHER
AND SHOULD BE LEVEL OVER THEIR FULL LENGTH
ROUGH FLOOR THICKNESS AND REINFORCING DEPENDS
S
ON LOADING AND OTHER NORMAL FACTORS. AND SHOULD
BE DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH RECOMMENDED PRACTICE
te
CH
X
3-
lO
t:
RCA RUIOVABU
SlOe
1
t
!
1
{
FihiSKCO FLOOR UNt
wS
•
i
_ -
••
i
s-r-'-rVrr—
*. .r?5v.! =
' •
'
BOUSM fLOOR
•
RECOMMENDED METHOD
flNtSHCO FLOOR LINC
J—
-nOVSH FLOOR
" —
'
KOTt! IT IS IMReRATIVE THAT
FLOOR STEEL BE EVEN
ALTERNATE METHOD
WITH FINISHEO floor
AND THAT BOTH BE LEVEL
Fig. 6
InstalUtton OoUils
»
Metal-clad Swltchgear OEH-1802
IT UKt et KtelTlMT to HtHOlrt
fOTKIAO OA CAOte SUAMAT FOft
MHOCK 0
Dooa
OFCN
SCAOUITS
METHOD
mehbcrs A-a c
OF LIFTING
-TO BE furnished BY PURCHASER
A-RAISINS HEMBER - CHANNEL OR WOOD BEAN
S-3* CHANNEL fURNSKEO WITH SEAR
C- LIFTmC JACKS
D- COVER to BE REXDVEO AND REASSEMBLED
AFTER UNITS ARE IN PLACE
note; W€N lifting M-26 SWITCHOEAR
UXATE SEAM V ABOVE LIFTING
CHAWiEES'.rB"
9
<0
-DOOR
open
ALTERNATE METHOD OF LIFTING
MEMBERS ABE TO BE FURNISHED BY PURCHASER
B - 3" CHANNEL FURNISHED MITH GEAR
0 - COVER TO BE REMOVED AND REASSEMBLED
AFTER UNITS AAC
e -
For Indoor Ketal-clcd Sultehgaar
sppEAoed
IN
PLACE
GEH-1802
Metal-clad Switchgear
I
CADLE
|1
^—n
n
CONNCCTiOW
ft,
r
TAACK JACK
ifF^
METHODS
*000 StAII
OF LIFTING
9
«0
I:
J
tmiuAMt
scconqahv
COMOUtT
COMOtftTS
ACKOvAfUE ruATC$ TO 8£ Cut
TO lUlT CONDUITS DV PUflCHASCPI
Fig. 7
Inatallation Oetaila
i
Mctal-clad Swltchgear GEH-1802
TO CM**!! HIItNT ortiive« fioo».
•nmo eri»4 m T«ue«
tcnm "»• r'TH lt«l»
mciomt ano loo< §t ticwtcn'no not a .
,1
.TAUC* fLOCN
AOAlSTAtU VNfCk V(C«*A*
KAUM TO ic loctee on
CACH CM AT IN4TAUAT10H
ftQ.)U9fA9LC
VNCCW
VtCW *A
iNOoiac ucMRino or wim
•itn I lEui w>t
FOUNDATION DATA
ME* *H0 ooriH or jon. bemitc su«rACE» or uck
rouasino* MUST it altebeo to svit s04l cohoitions.
aoTTOH TuorACEi or rcoBO«tio*» iboolo be oelo»
r«OBT AOTIO* OS SACKriULED W>T» rtRV'OOS MATEBIAC
ABO AOCOUATEiY OBAIBtO.
BUBTASE 'O'EBOUIO BE EEVEI. OTEB ITS rULL (.EBOTh
TO mSURE EAST HAKOLIBG Or BEBOVABLE ELEBEBTJ.
COBCBCTE fBO SnOUUO BE BEinrOBCED IB aCCOBOABCE
•ITH BTABOARO rRACTICE.
For Outdoor Hetal-cUd Swltchgear
r
VIEW 'X*
VIEW OF BREAKER END
"JiV*'
IhSIIJ
TO sivc.«si«l0
1802 Metal-clad Swltchgear
i^k.eipt of any apparatus an immediate
inspection should be made lor any damage
the swltchgear after it is removed from
the skids.
sustained while enroute.
U injury is
evident or an indication of rough handling
is visible, a claim for damage should be
filed at once with the the transportation
company and the General Electric Company
notified
promptly.
Information as
to
damaged parts, part number, case number,
requisition number, etc., should accompany
Before uncrating, indoor equipment
may be moved by a crane with slings under
are shown In Fig. 7. After the equipment
is in place the lifting plates shouUt be
removed and reassembled, "turned in so
that passageway at theendsoftheequipment
will not be obstructed.
STORAGE
If it is necessary to store the equip-
men! for any length of time, the following
precautions should be taken to prevent
corrosion;
the skids. H crane facilities are not avail
3. Store in a clean, dry place with a
moderate temperature and cover with a
suitable canvas to prevent depos.t of mrt
or other foreign substances upon movable
parts and electrical cont.T". surfaces.
4. Batteries should be uncrated andput
on trickle charge immediately on receipt.
5. If dampness or condensation may be
encountered In the storage location, heaters
should be placed inside tne units to prevent
moisture damage. Approximately 500watts
of heaters per unit will be required.
Remove all cartons andother miscellaneous
1. Uncrate the equipment,
able, rollers under the skids may be used.
Fig. 6 shows suggested method of handling
nism, linkage and moving machine-finished
parts with a heavy oil or grease.
Methods of handling outdoor equipment
the claim.
HANDLING
screws, gears and chain of
material packed inside units before ener
2. Cover ImporUnt parts such as jack
gizing any heaters.
I i
description
Each unit is made up of a secondary
enclosure and a primary enclosure, as
shown in Figure 8.
A control test jumper Is furnished which Is
plugged into the coupler on the stationary
and removable elements when It Is desired
to operate the breaker in the test position.
All removable elements iurnlshed on a
breaker cannot be lowered or raised until
It has been tripped. The breaker cannot
be closed except with the breaker in either
the operating or test position.
factory jigs and fixtures thus Insuring
Guide rails are built into the metalclad frame to guide the removable breaker
element into correct position before the
breaker is raUed into the operating posi
SECONDARY ENCLOSURE
and of like desl^
The secondary enclosure is us^ly particular requisition
are completely interchangeable
located at the breaker withdrawal side of andratings
with the other. The removable as
the unit, alUiough incertain units It
^e one
as the stationary elements are built with
on the side opposite to the breaker
drawal area. It consists of a compartment
with a hinged door or panel upon which are
can be readliy Inserted or withdravm after
the carriage has been lowered to the dis
connected positionwithout necessitatingthe
removal of any bolts, nuts or screws. The
mounted the necessary instruments,
and protective devices. The termlral
^^ocks, fuse blocks, and some controldeHes are mount^ Inside the enclosure on
'
islde sheete and a trough is provided at
top to carry wiring between units.
PRIMARY ENCLOSURE
Interchangeabllity.
BREAKER-RLEVATING MF.CH.^S!SM
tion bv means of the elevating mechaiUsm
The elevating mechanism for elevating
or lowering the removable element to or
from its connected position supports the
removable element in the operating posi
tion. In the test position the breaker is
lowered to the guide rails. This mech
anism consists of heavy-duty steel Jack
PRIMARY DISCONNECTING DEVICE
which is motor operated,
The primary enclosure contains the screws on which are carried nuts to sup
hieh voltage equipment and connections ar
ranged in compartments to confine the port the elevating carriage. The carriage
effects offaulU andso mlnimiae the damage. is so designed thai the removable element
Theprimary discor,nectingdevices uti
A
lize silver to silver contacts to Insure
against reduction of current carrying cap
acity due to oxidation of the contact sur
faces. These contacts are of thehlghpres-
sure line contact tube and socket aesign,
the tube being backed up by heavy garter
breaker removable element
The removable element consists of a
circuit breaker with trip-free operating
mechanism mounted directly onthebreaker
frame, interlock mechanism, theremovable
portion of the primary and secondary dis
connecting devices, the operating mech
✓
I
i
C / '
anism control device, and necessary con
a
trol wiring. The magne-blast breakers are
i
equipped with wheels for easy removal and
insertion. Refer to Fig. 4.
The circuit breaker interlock mechan
ism U designed to obstruct the operator
from lowering the breaker from the con
nected position or raising it from the dis
connected positionunless the breaker is in
the open position. This interlock is also
designed to keep the breaker in the open
position while it is being elevated or lower
ed. With this arrangement It is Imperative
that Oie circuit breaker be tripped prior
to any vertical travel of the removable
element. Obviously if the mechanism is
forced, it cannot perform its proper func
tions. A positive stop prevents oyerUavel
of the removable element when raised to its
>ns£onnected position. The secondary disJ^^t«mecting device coupler Is used for con
necting ouUide control circuits tothecircuit
breaker, operating mechanism, trip coll and
auxilUry switches. This coupler makes
contact automatically when the removable
element is raised to the connected position.
I:
fzn
&as w
pn n i, t
Tt n I
Fig. 8
I
{
Hetsl-cUd Swltchgear
I
Uetal-clad Swltchgear
CEH-1802
springs to insure contact pressure. Refer
to Figure 9.
BOS COMPARTMENT
The main buses are enclosedina metal
compartment with removable front covers
to provide accessibility.
T»Pt lll«ltAT«N
The bus Is supported by an Instdatlng
material which Is practically Impervious to
moisture, and an excellent dielectric.
mtuuTiCN ooiirowe
..FIUCI KCTBI.
The bus insulation
is molded on the
.•ciievme tnie
tKirs except at the Joints where the Insula
tion is completed by means of compound
filled boxes or mold^ boots.
1
.PCffCCLBUI tuVIM
I:
CURRENT TRANSFORMER AND CABLE
COMPARTMENT
8
cn
tfk
C4
The current transformers are mounted
in a compartment Isolated from the other
equipment. Provision is made in this com
partment for connecting the purchaser's
primary cable by means of potheads or
clamp type terminals.
&
PO«eM CIRCUIT
>
rf
1POSIT ON
\
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
COMPARTMENT
Potential transformers are located In
a compartment above the current trans
formers or in a separate unit adjacent to
the breaker units.
(.oaUEO
post TION
The transformers are mounted on a
movable support equipped with primary and
secondary disconnecting devices. When the
potential transformers arc disconnected,
they are at a safe striking distance from
all live parts of the switchgear. In addl-
*Uon a grounding device is provided which
contacts the fuses when the potential trans
Fig. 9
Heasureaent of Adjustaent of
Priaary Disccnnecting Devices
Fig. 10
Potential Transforoer Rollout
Sham In wlthdraun position
formers are disconnected, effectively dis
charging the transformers. In this posi
tion the transformer fuses may be safely
removed and replaced. When the carriage
is drawn out it moves a barrier In front of
the stationary part of the primary discon
necting device. See Figure 10.
DUMMY REMOVABLE ELEMENT
8
Dummy removable elements, Fig. 5,
O
are used as a means of isolating circuits
or bus sections, where operation is infre
quent and a
circuit breaker cannot be
economically justified.
The device con
sists of a framework to simulate the cir
cuit breaker removable element with a set
of six studs similar to those on the metalclad breakers. The lower end of the studs
are connected, front to back, by copper
bars which are fully insulated and metalenclosed. The stationary structure is the
same as for a circuit breaker.
When the
device is elevated Into position, it con
nects the front set of metal-clad discon
necting devices to the rear seL
lA
r>
Under no conditions must the dummy
C>4
s
element t>e elevated or lowered when the bus
or the unit is energized.
Key Interlocks
are applied to Insure that all sources of
\
power are disconnected before the dummy
element can be operated. Refer to Figure
12.
FUSE DISCONNECTING DEVICE
Current limiting fuses with high In-
'srrupting rating are sometimes used in
metal-clad switchgear to protect small
transformers or circuits where circuit
Fig. II
Potential Transforssr and Fuse Rollout Unit
GEH-1802
Metal-clad Swttchg^ar
Rl^^T HflfjD snf
) !
Pub rrwPT
TT
P
P I
T2£LS^ ,i
TOP P»-flTE
•
K, i-
1 :ry
/
f
j- -;.V'
.zr
»'
1
•
I
J
'9
•V-
WSMVtar
.n-f- vi or p «
r,w.r
r.«/v
f JLS-
l e n r , cnn
O
o
i
:
(
1
O
o
01R5!
1
I'
I
jGljOl
Q:?-'iS^.0y
sajaj5jiffit£upsi!CJ.a.wT£^j3Si2i
J j ;%:cec« i ».»-;>
raOEMt^O'iS
sd5[:.
'KT-rx i orn
/8SSL£*:i'«C
MEiaai Tflg-pgyfc cp/tcTcw boxes
KEY NTFRif,y FOR rt/.". CFV<-^ f H F^.ct.r
fLStySift&iJtLtSESJ
Fiji 12
10
j
i
l±
wifvfNK acw.
4
Padlockiag Arrangeacnt, Key Interlodilng And Method For Pouring Connection Boxes
Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-1802
\
,'8akers cannot be economically or funcjnally justified.
The fuses are mounted on a movable
support equipped with disconnecting de
vices.
When the fuses are disconnecied
they are at a safe striking distancefroroall
live parts of the swilchgear. In addition a
grounding device is provided which contacts
the fuses after they are disconnected, ef
fectively removing any static charge from
the fuses.
In this position the fuses may
be safely removed and replaced. The dis
connecting devices are capable of inter
rupting transformer magnetizing current,
but should not be used to interrupt load
current.
For larger transformers arc
quenchers are furnished to assist the dis
connecting devices in interrupting the mag
netizing current. Mechanical or key inter
locks are applied to prevent operating the
disconnecting device while the load is con
nected. This is generally accomplished by
s
fig. 14
interlocking so that the transformer sec
ondary breaker must be locked in the open
position before the disconnecting device can
Tandea Lock For Outdoor 13.8 Units
TANDEM LOCK (WHEN FURNISHED)
be opened or closed.
FOR OUTDOOR UNITS
GROUNDING AND TEST DEVICE
Outdoor metal-clad equipments with
more than one unit may be provided with a
The grounding and test device, Figure
13, provides a convenient means of ground
ing the cables or the bus in order to safe
guard personnel who may be working on the
cables or the equipment. The device can
also be used for applying power for high
tandem locking arrangement which makes it
necessary to padlockonly one door on each
si(je. (In exceptionally long installations
fig. 13
two or more locks may be required on each
side). The unit containing the operating arm
Ground And Tejt Device
(Cable shorn not fumiilied by C. E. Co.)
of toe tandem lock is clearly marked on
potential tests or tor fault location, to
the drawings and also by nameplate on the
measure insulation resistance (Megger).
equipment itself.
By ""using-"potential transformers, it camalso tie used for phasing out cables.
To use, the device is rolled into the
metal-clad housing in place of the circuit
Refer to Figure 14.
Before any door in the equipment can be
opened, it is necessary to openthe padlocked
door and operate the tandem locking arm to
The three studs of the device are sim
ilar to those of the metal-clad circuit
breakers. The studs are mounted on a re-
breaker, and raised into or lowered from
the connected position by means of the
In addition to the device described
and In the other position the studs will en
above, there is available a form of ground
any particular door, the tandem lock can
ing and testing device equipped with both
lie disconnected in that unit by unbolting a
metal-clad uniL
bus and line side buildings, power operated
connecting clip between the tandem bar and
the locking bar, and a separate padlockused
To Indicate the proper placement of the
studs on the device, opposite sides of the
and a complete safety interlocking system.
on that door.
movable.plate which can be placed in cither
of two positions. In one position the studs
will engage the front (Bus) contacts only
gage the rear (Line) contacts only of a
circuit breaker elevating mechanism.
toe open position. In locking the equipment
the reverse procedure should be used.
Where it is desired to separately lock
grounding contacts, phasing receptacles,
assembly are marked "Line" and "Bus".
The word corresponding to the desired
position must be toward the operator.
For details of construction and operation
of this device, refer to CEI-38957 for 4.16
kv equipment, or GEI-50114 for 7.2 kv and
13.8 kv equipment.
The light switch, front and rear, will
be located in the units with the tandem
lock.
INSTALLATION
Before any Installation work is done,
consult and study all drawings furnished
The space at the rear must be sufficient lot
by the General Electric Company lor the
particul^ requisition.
installation of cables, for inspection and
maintenance, and on some equipments to
draw out potential transformers.
These drawings include arrangement
PREPARATION OF FLOOR - ANCHORING
drawings, wiring and'elementary diagrams
and a summary of the equipmenL
Mats,
screens, railings, etc., which are external
furnished by the purchaser.
LOCATION
The recommended aisle space required
at the front and at the rear of the equipment
Is shown on the floor plan drawing furnished
for toe particular requisition. The space at
:toe front must be sufficient to permit the
insertion and withdrawal of the circuit
breakers, and their transfer to other units.
The floor channels
must be level and straight with respect to
each other. Steel shims should be used
for final leveling of the switchgear if nec
front of toe uniLs to faciliute insuliatton
The station floor must be strong enough
to prevent sagging due to weight of the
switchgear structure and to withstand the
impact stress caused by the opening of the
circuit breakers under short circuit con
ditions.
The recommended floor construction is
shown in Figure 6.
essary. Care should be taken to provide a
smooth, hard, and level floor under and in
Indoor Equipment
to the switchgear, but which may be t6-
qulr^ to meet any local codes, must be
gear structure and the equipment be com
pletely aligned prior to final anchoring.
and removal of the breaker. If the floor is
not level and flush with the floor channels,
it will be difficult to handle the breaker
because it will not be level with respect to
toe stationary clement.
The impact loading is approxi
mately 1-1/2 times the static load.
Suitable means must be provided by
the purchaser for anchoring the equipment
to the floor. It is essential that the floor
be level to avoid distortion of the switch-
Recommended practice is to weld the
switchgear structure to the floor channels,
using a tack weld at points indicated for
anchoring on the drawing. If welding fac
ulties are not available the gear should
be bolted to the floor channels.
11
w
MUSB H. oag
A
WW '•' *
»iafr-;-v «^:s^-J.~a;'a.t«g=: jt^j^HMtit
-1802
Jiy,'; •
Metal-clad Swltchgear
s
r*:
i
-i
I
-I-.
__ '»4.
-ffn. _
-»r-
.1
fi
if
I
•J
fft!
!
I
I
i:
f
0
4-!^ iW
•f
t
ir
I V|
;i
i|
'b
I
1'^
ii
II
i|
0
LJi
-J
...
ExisTinb
Mw K»/rJ neoeB *r LCrr r«ra
AiTk* i/f^fTTf
uM.-rj
Aceeo AT
•fA's/r "yrsi
C/*ff i £ i r i ^ f:'i.r
A—* fi^AS
A.9J»r
f-y-
f
\
(t
ill
I
r
£N0 £eC7lo/4
V
.1
1
i
r
i
rMcrwd* MT
Sn^rtsu -f-v'
0/Vp«/W^
Bvssf^/er
"!
ti-
.L-.
t:
assembly *©'
(b0kt9t9
vrew A
-VaoX
(£t*G f
umlTJ rO«#7>c#w)
*^0*0ZJV fCCMPAPTMC^r 5/il to transformer tank. Assemble copper,
terminals, supports and complete ail juinUs.
Assemble dome
side covers -iS and bot
tom cover #9. Cut secondary conduit *10
to length and assemble under tlie transi
Transition compartments for outdoor
(Fig. 16 and 16A). These compartments are
normally shipped assembled.
The full
height compartment (Fig. 16) cannot be
disassembled for in.>;iallation.
The throat
type compartment (Fig. 16A) can lx< instalied in eitlier of two ways, in accordance
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT
Before installing or operating the re
movable clement consult the circuit break
er instructions for directions on inslal-
ation,
adjustments and inspection.
The
operation of tlie interlock device is given
below.
(a) Should the switchear be positioned
leveled and checked at the factory and should
sa.
on its foundation prior to the powerlrans-
^
mounted on the metal-ciad as assembled.
need no adjustment. 1X> not install or re
move the breaker or make any .tdjustments
unless the breaker is open.
* Registered trade-mark of General Cicctric
Company.
Check to see
Carefully raise the breaker to the con
nected position where the breaker plate or
sujjport solidly meets the upper stop bolts
on the frame and then lower and remove it
from the unit.
When elevating, note that
brc.iker studs center with respect to the
stationary disconnecting device or injury
lo the contacts may result.
the breaker studs and the stationary dis
connecting devices,
(a) Each segment of
the stationary
disconnecting device should make a heav7
impression in the contact lubricant D50H47
on the breaker studs.
(b) The wipe of the breaker stud inside
the stationary disconnecting device, as in
dicated by the contact lubricant D50H47,
should bo 7/8". This indicates tliat the
breaker studs conlticled at the full pres
sure
The elevating mech.inism is accurately
former, the complete transition can iw
is lifted clear.of the floor.
Inspect the contact surfaces of both
Indoor transition compartments are
shipped assembled together with the ad
jacent metal-clad switchgear units.
/^^swith the following instructions:
WS
position relative to the lifting brackets.
Raise the lifting brackets until the breaker
tion.
Transition Compartments
unit substations may be one of two types
breaker should thc-r. enter the h vaslng free
clad swftchgear are in place, disassembTe
former
Joints between transformer throats and the
switchgear should be weatherproofcd in the
same manner. Refer to Figures 16 and 16A.
Lower the eievating mechanism lift
ing brackets uniil the lifting brackets are
in the fully lowered or test position. The
ly. The iowor limit switch can be adjusted,
if necessary, to allow the brc.tker to enter
the housing.
Push the breaker into the
housing until it rests against the stop at the
rear of the elevating mechanism frame.
The Slop has been .adjusted at the factory
ening nuts, maintaining 24" between trans
Recommendations for the foundations
contacting purposes.
tion, apply Clypfil * varnish "1201 to easKOt
sition. If desired, the co.ndults may be instalied before the switchgear. Considerction should be given to conduits which
night be required for future connections.
for outdoor equipment are given in Fig. 7.
Primary and secondary conduits should be
installed in accordance with the requisition
drawings, before the equipment is put into
place.
Rub a small amount of contact lubri
cant DoOH47 on the silvered portion of the
l)reai-;er studs to form a thin coating for
center
of
the
silver
band on the
st;iHonary disconnecting device. The max
imum permissible variation in the wipe is
3, 32".
(c) Should the inspection of the con
tacts show that the breaker is not being
!3
sr»-7.".37' irT?^T-7-^^ "jTrT^
GEH-1802
'
'
Metal-clad Swltchgear
-.••*-
the insulating tape, stopping the cotton tape
CONNECTIONS
The main bus borsandotheruonncrtion
bars may be either copper or aluminum. In
either case, the connnectionsurfaces'.vill be
silver plated.
All field assembled joints in conduct
ors, regardless of material or methc/d of
insulaticrt, should be made as follows:
(1) Wipe silver clean.
Do not use
sandpaper or any abrasive on the
silvered surface. Avoid handling
of
cleaned
surface as much as
possible.
(2) A sufficient quantity of D50H47
grease should be applied to the
Joint at each contact area so that
the complete contact area will be
thoroughly scaled with excess
grease squeezed out of the joint
when tightened.
(3) Brush a thin coat of DS0H47 over
the outside surfaces of the joint
4II.VU-
area and hardware covering the
ZA-
silvered area.
MAIN BUS ASSEMBLY
View Showing Elevating Hechaniso
Fig. 17
^•waiTrgv>ti^^
Motor and Control Unit
raised to the proper position, readjust the
upper stop bolts and limit switches to raise
or lower the breaker to the proper location.
Lock the stop bolts in the new position,
(d) If proper contacting cannot be at
tained by- the above methods," it is neces
sary to adjust the stationary disconnecting
d/*^ tube.
/
^lENT.
1
EST
DO NOT MAKE ANY AD-
COMMUNICATE WITH THE
GENERAL
ELECTRIC CO.
Or r ICE FOR ADDITIONAL IN FORhUTION.
For 13.8 kv or 7.2 kv equipment:
(a) Remove compartment covers.
(b) Bolt splice plates and bus bars
together, following assembly instructions
above. &e also Fig. 20 and Table A, Fig. 18.
TABLE A
Torque Values for Metal-clad Switchgear
Torque in Inch-Pounds)
Dolt
Size
Copper
Aluminum
or Steel
or Compound
3/8"-16
180-300
180-240
l/2"-13
360-540
360-480
S/8--11
420-600
420-540
bottom of box and around bus bar lami
nations (Fig. 20) to prevent compound leak
age while filling. Duxseal shotild be placed
over the joints to make the box free of
leaks while filling. The ITuxseal should be
removed after the compound has set. G. E.
#860 cord should be used to hold the molded
parts securely in place.
(e) Heat G. E. D50H49 compound (fur
nished) to minimum 200OC. and maximum
of 220''C. Avoid overheating the compound
for the dielectric strength may be seriously
affected. Pour the compound into the molded
ewers intermittently, allowing an interval
of cooling to prevent formation of gas or
air pockets. The final pouring should be
level with the top of the box and shoiUd be
done only after due allowance for shrinkage
is made. Refer to Figure 12.
(f) Paint the exposed cotton tape on
vertical riser bars with U310 or
varnish furnished.
U311
(g) Replace all covers previously re
moved.
(2) For 4.16 kv equipment:
(a) Remove compartment covers.
(b) Bolt splice plates and bus bars
together, following assembly instructions
above. See also Fig. 20 and Ta^le A, Fig. 18.
(c) Place flexible molded cover over
joint, as shown in Fig. 12. Note that on joints
where no tap is made from bus the opening in
the molded cover should be at the top.
Fig. 18
see that the removable element is obstruct
Iwen tripped open. The breaker is provided
with an arm which is pushed forward or
pulled back when the breaker is open or
closed. This arm engages and holds a ver
tical bar when pulled back (breaker closed)
and prevents the clutch from being pulied
forward to engage the motor. When the
breaker has been tripped,, the clutch can
(d) Place molded covers around the
bolted splice joints. Note that compound
filling space is at top of joint, and add filler
pieces furnished for the purpose to the
(1)
The trip interlock should be checked to
ed from being raised to or lowered from the
operating position unless the breaker has
just inside molded splice cover.
(c) Complete the taping of the vertical
riser bars using insulating tape furnished
(2/3 lap) stopping the tape at the bus bar.
(d) Secure flexible cover with selflocking rivets furnished. Joint insulation is
now completed.
below, sufficient tape should be added to
prevent compound leakage when filling.
(e) Replace all covers previously re
move.
(3) In unit substations, the connection bars
Apply a layer of cotton tape (1/2 lap) over
should be assembled in the transition com-
If the riser bars connect to the bus from
•s , i
Het.E RtK
raise the vertical bar and engage the motor.
eoiT
CZ9
A limit switch on the verticai bar closes
the electrical circuit to the motor, if the
elevating control selector switch has been
moved to either "raise" or "lower". Refer
fUMf
C
rro^ —<
to Figure 17.
y
TESTING CABINET
£
The testing cabinet. Figure 19, should
''i
be installed on the wall at a location where
maintenance and testing of the breaker can
be conviently done. Conduits must be in
stalled to carry cables to supply control
power for testing.
ADDITION OF UNITS TO EXISTING
EQUIPMENT
Figure 15 indicates the special proced
ures involved to add new metal-clad units to
i
si4
•J
rvftT CLOcn
rpii
I
«
1
I
«
•
»
«
A
•
9
• » • •
Li.
JL'
an existing outdoor equipment. For Indoor
ejMltefnent, it is usually necessary only to
f'
i
^
the end cover sheets and to re-as-
a; . .ocated and bolted to the existing units.
Ot^erwise, the installation procedure is the
same as described above.
-
r
"i
f
16
^
i them on the new units after these
*
7 -'"J
I
AC
rffONTVie'M CtNtM RCHO^eO
Si^evtcw
Fig. 19
Inspection Box for 13.8 KV Met«l-cl«d Switchgear
14
•i
Metal-Clad Switchgcar
*|artflient (Fig. 16) and the connections at t!ie
-inted as Indicated above. The conduitfor
secondary circuits should alsobe assembled
cable to the point marked m operation "b"
as shown in Figures 22 and 23 proceeding
Potheads are mounted on :n aduiUer
plate
in or below the transition compartment.
e.vtendir.g across the wiail' of
uhe
as follows:
metal-clad unit as shown in Figure 8. The
PRIMARY CABLES
The primary cable connections in in
door switc'hgoar are reached by removing
the rear bolted covers. In outdoor switch-
adapter plate is split into two parts to
facUitate the installation of Uie pothe.uls.
The polhettds will usiuUy lie sr.ipped .irranged for cables to enter from' below;
however, the steel and copper arc usu.illv
First, make a cut around the cable
half through the sheath at the reference
point. Second, split the sheath lengthw ise
between the cut and the cable, hoidim: the
cutting tool at an angle to the cable radius
for cable entrance from above.
to avoid damagi.-.g the insulation. Third,
remove the shocta by catching the split
Three-Conductor Potheads
from the cable axis.
interchangeable for the potheads arran.jei
gear the hinged instrument p.incl, Uprcsent,
must be swung open and the bolted covers
edge with pliers and pulling direcily away
behind it removed.
Before any primary cable connections
The following description applies to the
are made, the cables should be identified
installation
to indicate their phase relationship with the
of
a
three-conductor
Ic.iJ-
sheathcd cable with a wiping sleeve cable
switchgcar connections. This is necessary
Clean and itn the outside of the
lead sheath for .ibi.ut 3 incncs and bell out
Che end of the lead sheath.
entrance fitting on the poihead. This is the
to insure that motors will rotate in the
type most generally used. Instructions for
proper direction and that the phaseroutloii
is the samewhen interconnecting two differ
ent sources of power.
There aretwo common methods of mak
sulation down to within l-l. 2 inches of the
(a) Remove the wiping sleeve and cut
last few layers should be torn off to avoid
damaging the individu.il conductor insula
will enter It freely, and file off sharp edces.
Temporarily reassemble on the pathe.ifl.
(a) Potheads (see Figures 34 and 35)
are used when it is desired to hermatlcaliy
(e) Remove the belt and Interphase In
installation of other types are included in
the text following:
the tapered end at a point where the cable
ing primary cable connections:
lead sheath as shown in Figure 24.
v.-inilshed cambric or irraihene tape over
the factory insulation.
inches above the top of the porcelain bush
ings.
Handle with caie and avoid sharp
A pothead also pre
vents seeping of oil from the end of oil
Impregnated varnish cambric or paper In
sulated cable.
(b) Clamp type terminals and wiping
.djons contained herein. See Figs. 37and38.
I- Y-
because they are factory assembled for
jjothead body over cable and then fan nut the
conductors into approximately the final
position, as shown i.n Figs. 25. 26. The
middle conductor should be bowed slightly
disa-ssemble the wiping .sIppvp and slip it
for
and its gasket over the table as shown i:i
Figure 21.
sharp bend--, and aam.tge to the insulation,
final
adjustmeri
length.
Avoid
particularly at the crotch.
"•
18.
of
jrr
3 ^ - r 4-1 —
I
The insulators should
be removed from the suopori plate
proper compression of the ir gaskets. Place
(n) Remove the pothead from the unit,
of cable being used, as well as l.he insiru'c-
not
Mark a point on the load sheath of the
cable about 1-1/2 inch above the bottom of
fully follow the cable manufacturer's rec
ommendations for installation of the h.-oe
(f) Disassemble insulator supportplate
from pothead body.
bending which might caniairv the insulaiK.n.
the wiping sleeve.
sleeve or cable clamp. In all cases care
* I
The
tion. To reinforceandprolectiheconducior
insulation, wrap two layers of h.ill lapped
(b) Train the cable In front of the
pothead allowing it to e.xtend about two
seal the end of the cable to make a moist
ure-proof connection between the cable and
the switchgcar bus.
(d) Remove the lead sheath from the
POTHEA13S
^nnstormer terminals greased, taped and
CEH-1802
1
.
r J
W»rf
s
K'-
•
•bl 'iOJOc
•• •
.
.
;'3
"
•1 n
t*»c
J »
£SU,n '
, j I ".v.
?• 'xl. rf )<
^
P
i :
:-7tw*t6
1-3
f.
h'7'' s
i
[I: M
--
^tCtiOUAA*
Fig. 20
Method of Hiking Odi Sar Connections
Fig. 23
^
-j-
Fig. 2it
CEM-1802 McUl-eUdSwltchgear
1^
• art
.
1 .
• 1,-
!S
in.iiW
tLS-
w-
i
.M
r-T^-W
/1' ^ 1^
U
f
1^
'•4
•.
-AI
to 10
•--'•A'
CiDi
CO
01 9
Fie.
fit. 25
Fig. 27
26
U. w
Fig. 28
*0 V
CtD;
op Q
Vv'
'
K'i''
if ** *
735
558
a ^
Si^
rig. 29
Fig. 30
Fig. 31
(e) For syntem voltage above 7500
injure cable insulation and also result in
•niu It Is recommended that stress relief
excessive shrinkage of the compound while
cooling. Before and while filling, warm
i-.n.i-a he batlt uii when single-conductor or
lAfec-cociijctor shielded cable is used.
t.l'>^truct stress relief cones in accordance
•»«h -the
recommendations of the cable
3sa.-.uf4cturer. See Figure 35for one recomc.«raic O
oa «i
Where
three-conductor
conducting
sheath or shielded cables are used, or
where non-conducting sheath cable is car
ried In metallic ducts or conduits, it is
usually desirable that both ends of the cable
sheath or conduit be grounded directly to
4 4- T
<» 9
O
port.
When such mounting cannot l>e ar-
Metal-Clad Switchgear
GEH-1802
joopv-c;
SACk? COAT
C*3Tf^ttNO
I «C O* tf^T70S TAPt
VARNl^M — ,
e»«c* i-*ot OR v.c.
f
NCI tip
s
«i4
«OV»* TAfy
9(d«ew.y^
I A
— t.j
*
insuiATiON
I^SWATlCR urtRS
LCVCL
v.c.
9000 V.
tSOOO V.
IW !:-^o2
4
I
7
1114-
1
1
2
yrTw to Htv
V.C. IS CUCr vaR^jS^C) cloth {Ci»^Ic;*TAsr©92 »iC^ Ji*
jiAT
IXlOOiCSS 0.9X2 COn:^ TAPt IS BMiTE C.C.A.2AiE ThlCKNESS Cf OftC lATW is 3 TH« /
wMzoau.«.t.ceNAoto«o,As rudtuoNCO.
TO riUb OOTACAO aRTCa T»AMrM9
\MJ>0 ShmTN
Flj. 33
Insulation of Ccnnecticn Bars
Fig. 3Wi,cAry>cK>«««- «*««o.ca*u
**«'•»•*
»<
r».«
O^I«i Arwrraoe ^acocasma AeA^aafAaa<*.pay..^a<;a*eo. /w w
asC«AC«t«i.
/r/SA* ^«AF»-. fi«^c»t»A«>CA'»jni^£ocxaiSi,'Af*AA'W*««ftC
C4
r»
m
Aft»*Aay»A^tAiPA-Mn«aPAeAifc4. «c/%A»A:A««.r
s
or/liM/tr aew* A-7rwiw*»,os »»* AOCS
*-.£> 'X^a.a.^ix
«o
A« 0«AiOO»
dTf»«d
OAAOAoAOM AAAOOdWANO^t^MttOfSAc -AACCOr/yi* /|AAS
scn«/rA«}AATAp c«J er«amc* crr^vo c«*a r»c -^—-p.^p,
j
>• m
f—T.
. r.
?f
w -o—v•****'
/
- •!
-2.
"f- =/
>
•. / /
/ /
'wR'"*
»^~crr2CT' \V•.,^,5, _i|r"7^' // ^ "" "/
_sr%V^'
'
M
Of^Ai^AAMAMl - -.V-^
^OAA
\
'
M
/O
Fig. 35
Triple-Conductor Pothead
17
GEH-ie02
Metal-ci2d Switcbgeir
3. Unvrip shielding Upe to point M,
cut and scKer it In place avoiding exces
sive
heat
on
Insulailon.
Remove
scnii-conductina tape for
outer
same distance.
Thoroughly cie.m suriace Irom which the
Bemi-conductjng tape was removed.
h ^r-
».
r^'-^a
••" *^ • >-•Jl
4. Remove insulation and inner semi
conducting tape to expose conductor for
distance of one inch plus length to be in
serted into terminal lug.
i
r~is=N
5. Attach terminal lug to conductor.
6. Taper Insulation for one inch as
CAScC
shown.
Has> scoTcx T«^e
,-^ •
7. Apply end seal. Clean surface over
which splicing tape is to be applied and
ccatwith G. £. No. A50PC3 adhesive cement
or equivalent.
When solvent evaporates,
build up with splicing tape GE8380 or
equivalent, as shown.
f, 1
ml
4
8.
I+.J
ITli
-
ac iisd
OA e9u(v
- smcboiwo eAAie
Build stress cone. Clean cable sur
face and coat with G.E. No. A30P68 adhesive
CA6kt SHELCiaO
f'iBBr,r..-.5»>^:'-"«» •••*£?»::
TAPE
_
<•0
I
SMUH TAAC
ON CO^IV
irrsr-
M0r9T\>NC HAL
oeulo
Off CQUIV
—
M
^
-Avj
ii^4
swovwoiTuiia-r
>
Fig. 38
V
,
' u u r wswtcw
Terwinetion Hon-Leaded Cable
Hulti-^onductor
T
1
1
1
Fig. 36
B
'H
Rear View of Unit Showing Through
Type Current Trensforaeri
.
^
I* *•« *Mce
C0*>4a VrCi
1
' *0 >1 scdtt*
1
7«*t
1
cu»v
1
-f J
ranged, a separate ground wire should be
connected between the cable sheath or con
j"
single
so that the cone tapers to zero thickness at
1
.W3•M
conductor conducting
9* COuiV
sheath cables are used, the same procedure
^
should be observed, except that only one
end of the sheath should be grounded. This
M)i les't" T««(
4« I4vi«
MOWWft Rr 42.*Cer. All unit while the equipment te energized by
questions relative to such devices shoaid use of the test coupler which is furnished.
be referred to the manui-icturer.
Lower the breaker to the lest or down posi
tion. Atuch the test coupler to connect
the breaker secondary disconnectmgdevice
The extent of the tests on the equip
are in progress.
ment as a whole will depend on the type and
to that on the structure.
When transformers are furnished to
supply the control power, the primary taps
territy of the Insulation are not necess^
function of the equipment.
Directions for testing devices such as
relays, instruments and meters are given
in the instruction book furnished for ea^h
device. The settings of the protective re
lays must be coordinated _^th the oUier
relays on the system and therefore these
relays must be set by the purchaser. Gen
eral instructions on setting the relays are
given inthe relay instruction boote. spec
ial insUucUon books are furnished for
complicated automaUc
cribing the sequence of operation of the
should be selected so Ui.at
age indicated on the
^ Hg
^
obtained on the secondary of the trans
formed When a battery is used to supply
the conUol power, the cables
terv to the switchgear should be larc.e
SiouRh
to avoid excessive voltage arop.
The voltage at the terminals of the breaker
size of the equipment. However, thisin
Aregular maintenance schedule should the
sulation, except in one o*"
instances, re
be established to obtain thebestserviceand quires a certain amount of
reliability from- the switchgear. Plant, ohases andto ground tocompletegap
Meratlng and local conditions wUldlctete ?ten
Insertlnlany object m thein..ula/^*^the frequency of inspection retwired. For when equipment Ise?®reized, wheteer it^a
I'^^'saeclfic information regarding Uie mainten tool or a part ofthebody, may under "f n
ance of devices, such as dfc""
' conditions, in effect, short®'rcuit teis air
relays, meters, etc., refer tothe separate eap and may cause a breakdown ofthep. iminstruction book furnished for each 14
Bus Supports
r •-•
t~
DESCRIPTION
REF. NO
Isolating barrier support angle
Rear isolating barrier
Intermediate isolating barrier
Front isolating barrier
Isolating liai rier clip
Isolating barrier support
Front support clip (not shown)
Front Intermediate support
- .."^g
c
Intermediate support
Rear intermediate support
Rear support clip 'not shown)
lower Uitermediate support
Lower intermediate support dtp
Intermediate clamp assembly
Fig. W Shutter Mechaniso Assembly H-26
(supersedes but does not replace
Rel. Nos. 31 - 35)
21 •
70
74
72
¥
.;
Fig.' 45
."3
REF. NO.
70
71
72
73
74
Fig. 43 • Shutter Hechanisa Asaesbty
32
M-36
i
Doer Handles and Locks
description
Panel locking handle
. i
1 '
Panel handle
Door locking handle
Door handle
Socket
Metal-c^d Switchgear
REF.
IXJCATION RATING
NO.
rid
r
fe
1200A.
1200A.
1200A.
1200A.
1200A.
1200A.
1600A.
int.
int.
end
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
53
59
59A —'
59B
end
int.
end
int.
1600A.
1600A.
1600A.
int.
end
end
int.
end
int.
int.
end
end
int.
end
int.
int.
end
end
1600A.
1600A.
2000A.
2000A.
2000A.
2000A.
2000A.
2000A.
2000A.
2000A.
2000A.
2000A.
specify
CEH-1802
DESCREPTiON
1
1
1
1
connection
connection
connection
connection
bar,
tiar,
bar,
bar,
down
up
down
up
no connection bar
no connection bar
1 connection
1 connection
1 connection
1 connection
bar,
tnr,
bar,
tiar,
down
up
down
up
no connection bar
no connection bar
1 connection tiar, down
1 connection bar, up
1 connection bar, down
1 connection i>ar, up
no connection bar
no connection bar
2 connection tars, dowi
2 connection bars, up
2 connection bars, dowr
2 connection bars, up
Insulating boot
Plastic rivet for boot
i. ;
Fig. 46
Bus Connection Box
f
(•i.lB or 13.8 KV Units)
if
; JA
l
i
<
598
Fig. 47
Bus Connection Boot
(4.16 KV Units Only)
REF. NO.
3
60A
60B.
61
62
63
64
65
66
m
rr
s
67
See
i
(68
DESCRIPTION
Limit Switch SBl type (upper)
Limit switch SBl type (lower)
Light switch
Keyiess receptacle
Duplex receptacle
Strip heater
Fuse block, open type
Fuse block, dead front
Limit switch, mercury type
Complete secondary disconnect device
Fig.l7l69 Complete stationary auxiliary
switch and mechanism
Fig. 48 Wiring Deviges and Miscallaneous Parts
GEH-1802
Metal-cUd Swltchgcar
77
79
76 92
83
-
78 81 9t
I
! i
80
i
DESCRIPTION
ref.no.
FUSE ROLLOUT UNIT
-79
-92
r
,
82
ri-'M
trn^ee
Fig. 49
Fuse support iupper)
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
Fuse Rollout Unit
Fuse support (lower)
Shutter
Transformer
Barrier
Barrier
Contact
Shutter support
Ground shoe
Ground contact
Cover
Frame
Support
Support
Support
Carriage
Arc Quencher
Insulator
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER ROLLOUT UNIT
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
T^mCJkL
Fig. SO
SeCTtpt^L
Potential Transfomer Rollout Unit
0
P.T. barrier
GO
0
Shutter
CM
«o
Contact (stationary)
Sec. disconnect (movable)
Sec. disconnect (stationary)
Barrier
Conttct
Ground shoe
Support
Frame and carriage
p; T. bratd (specify length)
Support
Support
Cover
Carriage
CONTROL TRANSFORMER ROLLOUT UNIT
LT.!
Fuse support (upper)
175
176
177
178
179
180
Fuse support (loiver)
Shutter
Transformer
Contact
Contact
Contact
lA
ga«-*ft
?"i
5—:0r.208.209
'iiL-"'
Shutter support
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
Ground shoe
Ground contact
Cover
Frame
Support
Support
Support
Carriage
Barrier
SINGLE & TRIPLE-CONDUCTOR POTHEADS
201
Triple-conductor pothead assembly
202
203
Body
Insulators and support
204
205
2QT.{C
206
207
208
209
210 .
:
Wiping sleeve
-Caskets for tripic-conductor pothead
Terminal
Contact nut
Washer
Palnut (3/4 in. - 12)
Pipe plug (3/4 in. std.)
211
212
Pipe plug (1/8 in std.)
Singie-conductor pothead assembly
213
'Body and insulator
214
Gaskets for single-conductor pothead
215
Wiping sleeve
216
, Adapter for mechanical entrance
fittings
Fig. 52
12.58
01
Shutter support
Contact (movable)
106
107
108
109-i
111
112
113
114
rcee.
t/fSLy
Barrier support
Barrier support
Single and Triple-Conductor Fatheads
GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY, PHILADELPHIA, PA.
0
\n
c*
GEFwt351B
Supenetitt Gt£F-43SlA
RENEWAL PARTS
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR
TYPES M-26 AND M-36
II
GENERAL
i W I 1
ELECTRIC
6
I A a
ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS
1.
Always specify the complete nameplate data of the equipment.
2. Specify the quantity, catalog number (if listed), reference number (if listed), description, and this
bulletin number.
3.
Standard hardware, such as screws, bolts, nuts, washers, etc., is not listed in this bulletin. Such
items should be purchased locally.
4.
For prices, refer to the nearest office of the General Electric Company.
GENERALS ELECTRIC
Goto svbjoct to ehongi wIthoMi notleo,
GENERAL ^ ELECTRIC
SWiTCHGIAfi
»HtlA0CL»H1A. 9k
M«0| tM U s A
I
Ordering Number
733-328X600
328X601
328X602
328X603
328X604
328X605
328X606
328X607
328X608
328X609
328X610
328X611
328X612
328X613
328X614
328X615
328X616
328X617
328X618
328X619
328X620
328X621
328X622
328X623
328X624
328X625
328X626
328X627
Description
Front primary
Front primary
Front primary
Front primary
Front primary
Front primary
Front primary
Rear
Rear
Rear
Rear
Rear
primary
primary
primary
primary
primary
disconnect
disconnect
disconnect
disconnect
disconnect
disconnect
disconnect
disconnect
disconnect
disconnect
disconnect
disconnect
Rear primary disconnect
Rear primary disconnect
Front
Front
Front
Front
installation
installation
Installation
installation
accessories
accessories
accessories
accessories
Front Installation accessories
Front installation accessories
Front installation accessories
Rear installation accessories
Rear Installation accessories
Hear Installation accessories
Rear
Rear
Rear
Rear
installation
installation
installation
installation
accessories
accessories
accessories
accessories
GEF-4351B
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR
^
28
-t-l
t"9
Elevating mechanism for M-26 equipments
rated
250 mvo and M-36 rated
1200A 500 mvo
4
'^13®.
Elevating mechanism for M-36H equipments
rated 750, M-26H rated 350 mva and
M-36 rated 500 mva 2000A
I 10 n
Fig. 5
Ref. No.
17,19 19
27
29
Elevating mechanism for M-36HH equipments rated 1000 mva
Orderli^ Number
733-328X628
328X629
328X630
328X631
328X632
328X633
328X634
326X635
328X636
328X637
328X638
328X639
328X640
328X641
328X642
328X643
328X644
328X645
328X646
328X647
328X648
Description
Positive mechanical interlock assembly, complete
Elevating mechanism motor
Spring
Complete secondary disconnect device
Complete stationary auxiliary switch mechanism
t Miter gears, pair
Roll pin for miter gears
Shaft, right
Shaft, left
Sprocket
Roll pin for sprocket
Bearing block
Spur gear
Pinion gear and rod
Roll pin for spur gear
Stop stud
Stop bolt
Pinion gear and rod
Spur gear
Roll pin for spur gear
Locking sprii^
328X649
Stop shaft
328X650
328X651
Roll pin for stop shaft
Bracket for stop shaft
Clutch spring
Roll pin for clutch sprii^
328X652
328X653
328X654
Slide clutch
328X655
Jack screw
tWhenever gears mesh, they must be ordered as a pair.
GEF-4351B
METAL-CLAD 5WITCHGEAR
35
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
36
Angle bracket and chain
Fig. 10
Shutter mechanism M-26 (Ref. 37)
Fig. 11
Bus support, molded
Bus connection boot (4.16 KV and 13.8 KV)
Specify unit No. and phase on which boot is to be used
Fig. 8
Shutter mechanism M-36 (Ref. 38)
f
I
f
5.1
N 48
47
46
5
Fig. 12 Wiring devices and miscellaneous
Fig. 13
Door handles and locks
GEF-4351B
METAUCLAD SWITCHGEAR
Description
Ordering Number
Ref. No.
Bus support, 5KV
733-328X656
328X657
33
34
35
Bus support, ISKV
Bracket assembly
328X658
328X659
328X660
328X661
328X668
328X669
328X670
328X671
328X672
328X673
328X674
36
37
38
45
46
47
48
49
30
51
52
53
54
Chain
Shutter mechanism assembly (M26)
Shutter mechanism assembly (M36)
Limit switch, Type SBl
Light switch
Keyless receptacle
Duplex receptacle
Strip heater
{Fuse block,
{Fuse block,
Limit switch,
Panel locking
328X675
328X676
328X677
328X678
328X679
328X680
55
56
57
open type
dead front
mercury type
handle
Panel handle
Door locking handle
Door handle
Socket
{Specify amp rating of fuse and number of poles.
Fig. 14
Fuse rollout unit
t ROLLOUT UNIT
Fig.
No.
14
14
Ordering Number for
5K
Ref.
No.
14
58
59
60
14
61
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
733-328X681
328X682
328X683
328X684
328X685
328X686
328X687
328X688
328X689
328X690
328X691
328X692
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
£
G1
G1
£
£
G1
G1
Description
15KV
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
02
a
G2
Fuse clip
Insulator
Ground bar
Ground finger
Barrier
Cover
Tray
Strap
Insulator support
Insulator clamp
Barrier
Compound strap
{All rollout units and potheads can be either 5 KV or 15 KV. When ordering give complete ordering
number plus G1 for 5 KV and G2 for 15 KV.
4^Does not apply to 5 KV unit.
*Not shown.
GEF-4351B
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR
90
88
95 —
Fig. 15
Potential transformer rollout unit
8^109
110
Fig. 16
o
I
Control power transformer rollout unit
NOTE; Figure No. 17 and Ref. No's. 115 thru 129 have been removed and these
parts are no longer avlalable.
METAUCLAD SWITCHGEAR
GEF-4351B
t ROLLOUT UNIT (Cont'd)
Fig.
Ref.
No.
No.
14
14
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
14
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
15
IS
15
IS
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
*
16
16
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
Orderlnt Number for
5K
733-328X693
328X694
328X695
328X696
328X697
328X698
328X699
328X701
328X702
328X703
328X704
328X705
328X706
328X707
328X708
328X709
328X710
328X711
328X712
328X713
328X714
328X715
328X716
328X717
328X718
328X719
328X720
328X721
328X722
328X723
328X724
328X725
328X726
328X727
328X728
328X729
328X730
328X731
328X732
328X733
328X734
328X735
328X736
328X737
G1
A
G1
A
G1
G1
G1
G1
A
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
A
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
A
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
A
G1
A
G1
G1
G1
G1
Description
15KV
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
Finger
Connection
Connection
Connection
Connection
Connection
Connection
Insulator
bar
bar
bar
bar
bar
bar
Insulator clamp
Insulator support
Disconnect bar
Finger
Barrier
Disconnect bar
Disconnect bar
Barrier
Ground finger
Ground finger support
Ground finger support
G2
Barrier
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
Secondary disconnect (stationary)
Secondary disconnect (movable)
Brace
Tray
Cover
Insulator
Insulator clamp
Insulator support
Contact bar
Ground finger support
Ground finger
Ground shoe contact
Fuse clip
Primary contact
Ground bar
Ground finger support
Ground finger
Cross angle
Barrier
Barrier
Secondary disconnect (movable)
Secondary disconnect (stationary)
Tray
Cover
t All rollout units can be either 5 KV or 15 KV. When ordering give complete ordering number
plus G1 for 5 and G2 for 15 KV.
^ Does not apply to 5 KV unit.
» Not shown.
GEF-4351B
METAUCLAD SWITCHGEAR
t3a—
Refer toGEI-77065
Fig. 18
Fig. 19
Taping material for bus connection joints
Auto—charged trip device
^3^-
Refer to GEI-77007C
Refer to GEI•88760
Fig. 20
Fig. 21
Silicon rectifiers for circuit breaker closing
Capacitor trip device
ACCESSORIES
Ordering
Description
Number
733-328X753
Irrathene ® tape (1-202) 4 in. wide b>' 21 in. longpiece (tor 1200 amp joint)
328X759
328X760
Irrathene tape (1-202) 4 in. wide by 29 in. long piece (for 2000 amp joint)
Irrathene tape (1-202) 1 1/2 in. wide by 25 ft roll
Glass cloth tape (A2L12B) 1 1/2 in. wide by 36 yd roll
Black msulating varnish {U-311) (for 2.4 KV and 4.16 KV)
Brown insulating varnish (U-310) (tor 7.2 KV and 13.8 KV)
Packing compound (A50H119) 5 lb package
Auto charged trip device (ST-230)
328X761
328X762
Silicon rectifier assembly for circuit breaker closing service
328X754
328X755
328X756
328X757
328X758
Capacitor trip device
GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY • SWITCHGEAR BUSINESS DEPARTMENT • PHILADELPHIA, PA 19142
INSTRUCTIONS
GEI-88775A
MC-4.76 Horizontal Drowout
MetokClad Switchgear
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR DEPARTMENT
GENERAL^ ELECTRIC
PHILADELPHIA, PA.
CONTENTS
Section I INTRODUCTION •••••••••••
Section II RECEIVlNG, HANDLING, STORAGE
Section m DESCRIPTION
...
.........
......
Page No•
...
.r'\
'-
3
General•• .Housing•• .Secondary Enclosure•• .Primary Enclosure •••••••
Breaker Removable Element. • .Secondary Disconnecting Device. •••••••••
Primary Disconnecting Device •••Bus Compartment•••Current Transformers
Shutters•••Potential Transformer Compartment. •• ••••••••
Control Power Transformers•• .Dummy Removable Element ••
Handling Dolly. ••Transfer Truck. • .Outdoor Equipment. •• ••••
Accessories. • •Test Cabinet. • .Secondary Coupler. •••••
••••• •• •
Breaker Maintenance Operating Handle. • .Rackout Mechanism Operating Handle••••
Position Switch. • .Auxiliary Switch. • .Breaker Interference Stops •• ••• • •• • ••
Key Lock 4. 76 Kv. • • •. • . . . • . . . . . . • • • . • • • • . . • . • • . . • . • .
Section IV INSTALLATION
Location. • .Preparation of Floor - Anchoring
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . .
Breaker Removable Element•••Test Cabinet•• .Addition of Units to Existing Equipment
Section V TESTING & INSPECTION
Section VI OPERATION
Breaker- Positioning••••
Space Heaters •••••••
Section VII MAINTENANCE. ••••
.....
......................
......................
Figure 1.
Figure 2.
Figure 3.
Figure 4.
Figure 5.
Figure 6.
Figure 7.
Figure 8.
Figure 9.
Figure 10.
Figure 11.
Figure 12.
Table I
Table II
Line-up of
Figure A.
Figure B.
Figure C.
.......
......
....
...
TABLES AND ILLUSTRATIONS
Hoisting and Jacking Indoor Equipment •
Installation of Indoor Equipment •••• •
Hoisting and Jacking Outdoor Equipment •
Installation of Outdoor Equipment. •••••
Breaker Compartment 4.76 KV •••••
Installation of Appearance Trim •••••
Installation of Outdoor Protective Aisle •••
Installation of Outdoor Transition ••••
Installation of Outdoor Common Aisle •••
Breaker Key Lock 4.76 KV•••••••••
Foundation Floor••••••••••••••
Main Bus Connections in Match and Lineup
.....
...
........
.....
..
.....
... ...
...
.. .
............
....
....
...
.........
... ....
....
..... .......
...
Ratings for Horizontal Drawout Metal Clad
Bolt Torque Values for Metal Clad Switchgear .
PHOTOGRAPHS
Metal Clad Switchgear••• • ••••••••
Indoor Unit ••••• • • •• ••••••••••••••
AMH-4.76-250 Magne Blast Breaker . ••••••••
AMH-4. 76-250 Mague Blast Breaker with Front Cover,
Box Barrier and Arc Chute Removed ••••••••••
....
...
5
10
16
10
12
12
17
17
17
18
19
20
21
22
2�
,
z ..
6
7
8
9
11
13
14
15
16
18
19
21
5
20
Cover
4
fl'!!tl
( \1.
4
-
,.
MC-4.76 HORIZONTAL DRAWOUT
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR
unpacking, the contents of each case should be
checked against the packing details before discard
ing the packing material. Notify the nearest General
SECTION i
Electric Company representative at once if any
shortage of material is discovered.
INTRODUCTION
This book contains instructions for Installing,
operating and maintaining MC-4.76 Horizontal Drawout Metal-Clad equipments.
It should be care
fully read before installation and initial operation
of these equipments.
For application and specification information
refer to GEA-8629 MC-4.76 Metal-Clad Switchgear.
Separate publications will be supplied for break
ers, relays and other devices not described in this
publication.
All equipment leaving the factory is carefully
inspected and packed by personnel experienced in
the proper handling and packing of electrical equip
ment. An inspection should be made immediately
upon receipt of any apparatus for any damage
sustained while enroute.
If injury is evident or
an indication of rough handling is visible a claim
for damage should be filed at once with the trans
portation company and the General Electric Com
pany notified promptly. Information on damaged
parts, part number, case number and requisition
number should accompany the claim.
In addition to instruction books, the following
drawings will be supplied:
1.
2.
Front view and floor plan drawings - these
show the general arrangement, height, reccommended aisle space, etc.
Summary of switchgear equipment - this is a
partial parts list, giving catalog numbers of
all breakers, devices, etc.
j.
HANDLING
The indoor switcl^ear units are most con
veniently handled by a crane.
Lifting angles are
provided on the top of the switchgear.
A cable
spreader must be used when lifting with a cr^e
in order to obtain a vertical pull on the lifting
angles. Otoerwise the lifting angles will be bent.
If crane facilities are not available the equip
When required:
ment may be moved into position by naeans of
construction rollers placed under the shipping sldd.
(a)
Control wiring diagram.
Where overhead clearance is too low the shipping
(b)
Elementary or schematic wiring diagrams.
by rollers placed under the channel sections in the
bottom of the gear. These channels are parallel
with the front of the equipment so movement of
the equipment using the floor plate channels and
rollers can only be accomplished in one direction,
i.e. parallel to the front. The rollers should be
spaced so that the channel sections only are in
skid may be removed and the equipment moved
All of these documents are needed for installa
tion, operation and maintenance of the equipment.
SEaiON II
RECEIVING, HANDLING, STORAGE
Every case or package leaving the factory
is plainly marked with case number, requisition
number and customer's order number.
If for any
reason it is necessary to divide the equipment for
shipment, the unit numbers of the portion of the
equipment enclosed in each shipping package are
marked on the package.
The contents of each package of the shipment
are listed in the packing details attached to the
package.
To avoid the loss of small parts when
contact with the rollers since a direct jqrplication
of the rollers in the space between the channels
may tear or distort the floor plates. Jacks may
also be used to handle the equipment when a crane
is not available. Methods (rf handling are shown
in Figures 1 and 3.
All outer crating should be removed after the
equipment has been moved to the desired location.
Methods of handling outdoor equipment as shown in
Figure 3 are much the same as for indoor equip
ment except that lifting plates are provided at the
base of the structure instead of at the top of the
These insfrvetions do not purport to cover all dotails or yariations in equipment nor to provide for every possible
conh'ngency to be met in eonneetion with installation, operation or maintenance. Should fbrther information be desired
or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purposes, the matter should
-j- fae referred to the General Blectric Company,
I
E2?_
iJfSLlC
-250 M
nt Cov
c
Chut
(303'
Metal-Clad Swltchgear Type MC-4.76 GEI-88775
stationary housing is compartmented and contains
the instrument panel, bus compartment, breaker
units.
compartment and cable or termination compartment.
Each of these compartments is enclosed in grounded
sheet metal.
The switchgear is designed to provide maxi
STORAGE
mum safety to the operator.
If it is necessary to store the equipment for
any length of time, the following precautions should
be taken to prevent breakage, corrosion, damage
provide maximum accessibility for maintenance
The circuit breakers are easily removable to
with minimum service interruption.
or deterioration:
1.
The equipment is available in the ratings listed
Uncrate the equipment,
Check thoroughly for
in Table 1,
The ratings of the equipment and
damage.
devices are based on usual service conditions as
covered in ASA and NEMA Standards.
Store in a clean dry place with moderate
temperature and cover with a suitable canvas
to prevent dust, dirt, water or other foreign
substances from entering the swltchgear.
For outdoor use the same basic equipment is
enclosed in a weatherproof steel housing.
Batteries should be uncrated and put on trickle
charge immediately on receipt.
the following paragraphs.
If dampness or condensation may be encounter
ed in the storage location, heaters should be
placed inside the units to prevent moisture
damage. Approximately 500 watts of heaters
per unit will be required. Remove all cartons
and other miscellaneous material packed inside
units before energizing any heaters.
If the
equipment has been subjected to moisture it
shoiiid be tested with a 1000 V or 2500 V meg
ger. A reading of at least 200 megohms should
be obtained. On outdoor switchgear dampness
or condensation can be prevented by making a
temporary power supply connection to the heat
ers already installed in the equipment.
The principal parts and features of the MetalClad equipment are described in greater detail in
HOUSING
The Metal-Clad housings are made of formed
steel panels riveted or bolted together to form
rigid, self-supporting units with metal barriers
between the different enclosures.
Each unit is basically divided into a secondary
and a primary enclosure as described below.
Secondary Enclosure
The secondary enclosure is located above the
breaker compartment on the breaker withdrawal
side of the unit.
It consists of a compartment
with a hinged and latched door on which cm be
SECTION ill
mounted instruments, control andprotectivedevices.
Terminal blocks, fuse blocks and some control
DESCRIPTION
devices are mounted inside the enclosure and a
Metal-Clad switchgear is equipment designed to
control medium voltage circuits.
The switchgear consists of one or more units
which are mounted side by side and connected
mechanically and electrically to form a complete
switching etpiipment.
Each Metal-Clad unit consists of a stationary
housing and a removable breaker element.
The
trough is provided at the top to carry wirmg
between units.
Primary Enclosure
The primary enclosure contains the high voltage
equipment and connections. It consists of the breaker
compartment, the bus compartment and the cable
termination compartment. Each of these compart
ments is separated from the others by metal
barriers for maximum reliability and safety.
RATINGS FOR HORIZONTAL DRAWOUT METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR
CIRCUIT BREAKER
NOMINAL
3 PHASE
KVA CLASS
RATED
CONTINUOUS
CURRENT
AT 60 CYCLES
TYPE MC-4.76
AMH 4.76-250
250,000
TABLE I
1200
2000
O
A
M
oo
Oo
SPftEADERS
A
NOT
-3
m
I
o
p
o.
1
CO
H-
»-'•
f-t-
C
o
I
FRONT-
3
M
.siimber
V
S
CD
p
•t
;REAR
&
not
furnished
H
cr
oq
0
1
M
HO
1^.
•
9
-3
a>
S
TIE
P<
/
9
JACK
CABLE
NOT
FURNISHED
HERE
3
a
rollers NOT
furnished
o
o
front
VIEW
SIDE
VIEW
s*
TJ
B
0)
ti
(2) JACKING ANGLES ZflXljjXl, THK
(FRONT a REAR) NOT FURNISHER
VIEW
(673D0515-1Q't)
A-A
Holstlnjj &Jacking Indoor Equipment
)
()
)
)
LOCATION fOU
INTEAUMT 80LT8
MAIN
BUS
splice
ISEC VIEW*A'|
DUMMT C0vCR-FO8USC
WM£N ORCflKfH IS «£•
MQVeO FKOM UNil.
ASSCMBLC ev hOOKINC
LU68 ON BOTTQU INTO
CHANNEL IN Floor
Plate.secure top ev
GROUND BUS-assemble WITH
rotating handle.
bolt, PLAIN washer and STAR
lock washer, star washer to
^ • 16 BOLT
se located BETWEEN GROUND
plain washer
BUS AND UNIT STEEL
PLAIN
WASHER
H
O
BO
ED
rv-
I
o
I—»
Q*
0
ar
aq
SELF LOCKING
NUt
(D
PLAIN WASHER
1-3
Cmvlon
NVLON
poLVviNVL
boot
RIVET
Chloride
-Plain waSmcr
-1^-13 BOLT
VIEW-'A'
Q
H
00
00
(673110515-185)
Installation of Indoor Equipment
-3
-3
CJl
0
HH
1
00
SPREADER
NOT
00
FURNISHED
•a
01
timber
hot
(P
FURNISHED
E.
I
0
a*
1
o
FRONT —»
A
P
H
H
10 *32 TAPTllES
setF ThRCAONO
l-3X>6-
SECTIOM
X-X
TRIM
SlOe TRIM
SH 607-26 INfX)
SH 607-27 t FK)
EQUIPMENT
ROOF
see
FhONT TRIM
Supports
FACTORY ASSEMBLED
TRIM
SH 667-37
CORNER
TRiM
$H 669• 37
SIDE TRIM SUPPORTS
FACTORY assembled
Sli 667-32
(WHEN REQUIRED)
SiliPPiNO
SPLIT SPLICE
Sli 600-43
SH 607- 33
Sh 667-34
SH 687-35
SH 667-36
FRONT TRIM
0
i!
P*
CO
1
(D
I
(D
S
0
1
-J
cn
O
M
T
00
00
-a
>3
Figure 6. {0673IX)515-696) Installation of Appearance Trim
CO
cn
o
n
r
00
00
-J
•4
cn
UC 047)e0»ld.«N.«t7
CONMtll
ANMt
• f O
lO-M M»mc
S
TA^mc
Slt7 •
MifoTAMlHC
O
OAaiktT
tWNMteHAOC
UAUC
«ii7.umii»a
C»l7L*f WLSKtAS
IMDCM lACH HU0
MAA70TMK.
4%*M»n
iwacHHUkia f
vA-HvKiruicics
SCCTIOM 'A.A'
I
a
^AlSlC
CMO WMk
MjiMui VA-M.aiL
"Altu 7 LOOM
n
AOOf TMIU
ixvwstCR %««Aro V
CAiP«ei^t«xi4C>
«»-i«>KriAeics
AlSkC
1/4 -10 CAf
IMO WAli
S£CTlQM 'C'^'
*41 i
SMiPfiHC
$reci
MM.L W]
, ilfflNd SraCAOCAS
Mi,4r ic u$co
jACKiso
res
times
soalino
•ifN 1 CA
MMt Mlf»
tt.
y«6>>"g
•
rtOISTIWG
AWO 0«
«aiu»»
AH1.C into' wmnOM
INSftUNC
.trtim Alien.
MoceBiAf
fflOTCCllVC
gem
iTosnow AiHC ooM «
.Qtww
AlSLt
iuLt i
ArrcMncc to •/«*-«•««
tTOSltlQN AifO ASSCHlLl. AiHI 'fllD «Atc« lUfI • AlSifJ
to Altu. aooit AM «/C
OMR.
OAUeMAkC roo OAttCHt to CM WALAO
4.A1KMIi(
9i70SlT>0l|
WAft
A»LC' WAlk
MO' AMCWBLC
0007
OACSfHOtC' 0007 CLIPS AMD A007 lAlU flUOHt A LiftI
t.'AMCMKC AISLC COMitll AWdLlS
ie.i4Ui«|S LissiMS AwsresT rc Ami vA^i.
AHCMOvt SHi^mo srccij
kMtU WiOlA^ ACIOAIMI Mils COAMA AS Mom. •
Figure 7. (0673110515-017)
)
Installation of Aisle
MMMBLIO
)
>
yicw
c
-
')
IMlMttNl
llM iNltlS
•Ckf
LW»IM
•v'g* T :
ri«M wAtMiA
M*0 AAMt
MOI
6*SKfT
IlUk
YItW'A
•«M9»A»l4
rooar
A
COUCH*
MAA
CHAM M
S3
«tA*
E
M iOUIIO HIaCCA CAOm
[M
I
AHOVMT
n
INSIflLLArtOtI Of TftOMSfORMi;^
t«AII»t«M MtA* tMC *«)TCN6CA« AM M vmt
iMf CninM m fi€ S«nTCMCCAA CM VAti.
t ACMOvC *AO«r M« ACM CMCM raoH im immuhob.
* *>M«C IwAAia SkMOAt* MO AM COMmCTM* a«t rAStCMO
mt„ ACAJUMAt
MM rM $*M«M *««
•tCAiirtcooT iciiOiA
«. AA«C lM< IMAMlllOM *-AM«( CAOmOU»CL IAMO A»CA» OA
AAO Al»CN MOwAtaAC MkC*.
A. CaIICA lAAAlalCMi to CAttCMIM tolanO i/« -M •OLIA.wASmCNIi,
ANB iOen vAiMins At ahoan.
t. AIMOirl AACCA MCaaiG CAOH ThI ^ACK COM «k*Atl HAlCRiCA.
Ml** OAIACIMTO AtAGC Cm nAH|4l*0N AI.«N«I*C N0«4» IN
•AtAll wtlN MM* m nAA*tti«M.MCB« BCM6*»KCf mTO
AtAM At BM— «
O MiMaC AMCAOitimC CAto* taC ciAtf< COM CAM1
CM Cn( lAiAtCQAMA IMOAt Ancu «AM«r MAtCIAAk AlO
AiCM OnClAAMCCr tAAAtCOHAC* lOAAtttaOA ImMAI AUCAMO
M9iC« •A CASACt ailM nOAC* aA l«t IMBAl CaaaM*.
fASlCN IHC t«AN»4llON 10 T((i IRAAOCORHCn 0»4n» wl-ll NUlt
o*
MAhlCH AM cOCAAAiMCn.
I(. tHACAOOHC or tnC iAtCA AaaIcO NUlAMCaCn 01 t«4
CO
thAMsrcHucn •utM'NC MvM
11. ^
!.« IA«M
I
CAMVC(A( tdC CvaCCA%AlCl AaO (UMbaCC fMAaVtCO ««/! •
•> OOaIVaaWAS AAO aOCa AalA)
i>
MMl
to Ml a
lAAMCOAMA IHOA «C iMf COPtfAClOA*«M !(«
TAAMWOAMCn OwBmM «tM4 AM BCCmAC HIIN M«c« AkAice
A MOitt con uriiN«.
». fctM tH« tAAAbttOA AktoMtlllOA « MltCNACAi |AO VAfci.
A—"
TROtCSinON
n
» riACC m
VIEW 'B'
am
iHt TAANAltrfM COnOmCIOMwWnO IhC AOklVlN'l CnVDAiet
MOT. «0u*f IhC MOI riAA* WllHNHONAivCK.
IHAMSITIQM IM
sn
PlAtLf
It. MtuiAU Tn< nCKitl COMNlCToHtCM MANirOMMCn
MtHiM ttvOl Of tcrtM.MI Ml tAAIt CO* IAC«M MllAaCIMd
10- COAMtCI ti« CMJAOow) to tM( tAAMTMMC* CMWAO
COAKtCfM.HtlAO IM COAtUClOA aMMMMM Cu*Att(<0.
It.
in
o
a
Figure 8. (0673IX)515-Ol8) Installation of Outdoor Transition
00
CO
-J
-J
CJ1
GEI-88775 Metal-Clad Switchgear Type MC-4.76
16
''5
•
a • a a »
isSisSl**
-
1 5 a ^
ill lllllflsll::zz>a
00
c
Q
O
U
o
f*-i
c
o
"S
•H
'3
<—I
c
to
•p
O
r-4
0\
I
lf\
S
t^
cn
o
vo
4>
U
00
3
_
A
Metal-Clad Swltchgear Type MC-4.76 GEI-88775
is located at each end of the aisle. The basic indoor
the breaker contacts to permit checking of the
portion with its weatherproof enclosure is factory of
contact wipe.
/-^ssembled in shipping split lengths.
The aisle
-ortion, which consists of prefabricated end panels, Rackout Mechanism Operating Handle
:front wall, roof and floor base, is shipped knocked
This handle is used to manually operate the
down for assembly in the field. The assembly breaker
racking mechanism. It is a crank type
method is shown in Figure 7.
handle with a cross pin in the end which engages
Common aisle equipment is similar to pro- in slots in the coupling on the end of the racking
tected aisle except that there are two lineups of mechanism jackscrew.
basic indoor equipment with outdoor enclosures
arranged face-to-face and joined by the aisle en
closure. The aisle enclosure permits transfer of
breakers from one lineup to the other or between
umte in the same lineup. Access doors are located
m the end walls of the aisle enclosure. The basic
indoor equipments withoutdoor enclosure are factory
assembled. The prefabricated aisle is shipped
Position Switch
A cam operated position switch can be furnished
as an accessory when requested. The purpose of
this switch is to indicate the position of the breaker
in the house.
The switch is located in the rear of the breaker
compartment on the left-hand side.
The switch
Imocked down and is field assembled after the operating
cam
is
mounted
on
the
left-hand
of
basic e^pments have been set in place. Assembly the house and is actuated by a fixed pinside
on the
instructions are given in Figure 9.
breaker frame. As the breaker is moved into the
jtastallation of Outdoor Transitinn
The conductor material and the enclosure for
house the breaker pin lifts the cam and sequentially
operates the switch, first opening one circuit and
closing a second. The switch mechanism is
making connections from the switc^ear lineup tothe then
spring returned to its original position as the break
transformer may be either factory assembled or er is moved out of the house.
smpped knocked down for assembly in the field. In
either case the assembly of the transition and the
connections to the transformer would be made as
illustrated in Figure 8.
Transitions for indoor switchgear are similar
to those used with the outdoor gear except that the
weather resistant gaskets areomittedfromthe indoor
installation.
'^stallation ofAppearance Trim onOutdoorSwitchgear
A horizontal trim band for installation at thetop
of the outdoor switchgear is furnished in knocked
down form for installation in the field. The method of
assembly is shown is Figure 6.
Test Cabinet
The test cabinet is designed for wall mounting
and provides a means for operating the breaker
when the breaker is removed from the housing.
The cabinet includes push buttons to close and
Auxiliary Switch
A stationary auxiliary switch can be furnished
in the equipment when requested.
This switch is
operated by an arm off of the breaker mechanism
and can be used for remote indication of the position
of the breaker contacts or for control circuits
which are dependent upon the position of the breaker
contacts. The switch is spring returned to its
original position when the breaker is opened.
The auxiliary switch is mounted in the breaker
compartment.
The operating linkage is mounted
on the right-hand side of the compartment. The
linkage is arranged so that the auxiliary switch can
be operated when the breaker is in either the test
position or the connected position in the house.
A crank on the side of the breaker contacts the
operating linkage in the house and the auxiliary
switch is operated when the breaker closes or opens.
The switch can be made to operate only in the con
"ip the breaker and fuse blocks to protect the
nected position, if desired," by removal of the front
bell crank and connecting link.
connection to the breaker.
Breaker Interference Stops
conteol power cables. A multiconductor cable is
equipped with secondary disconnecting devices for
Secondary Coupler
An extension cable with secondary couplers,
one of which can be attached to the stationary
blocks in the house and the other to
secondary disconnects, is furnished so
that the breaker can be operated outside the house
wiui the box barriers and arc chutes removed.
Breaker Maintenance Operating Handle
This handle provides a means of charging the
stored energy breaker operating springs manually
jnd with gag pins in place permits slow closing
Stops are provided in the breaker compart
ment to prevent the insertion of the breaker with
a ^ 1200A continuous current rating into a house
with a 2000A rating and vice-versa.
The stop block is bolted to the floor of the
breaker compartment. A projection on the breaker
frame vdll hit against the interference stop if an
attempt is made to insert an incorrect breaker into
the house.
The breaker rating should be checked
against the house rating and under no circumstances
should the interference stop be removed to allow
the breaker to be inserted.
17
GEI-88775
Metal-Clad Switchgear Type MC-4.76
Key Lock
The key lock for the breaker is located in the
instrument compartment above the breaker com
If the breaker is in the connected position the
breaker must first be opened. The jackscrew
shutter slide can then be pushed to the open position.
This moves the interlock linkage on the breaker
partment in the Metal-Clad unit. See FigurelO. to the tripped position and away from the key lock
The purpose of the breaker key lock is to prevent blocking Ihik in toe house. With the jackscrew
the brewer from being closed in the connected shutter slide held in this position it is then possible
position when the key lock key is removed from to pull toe key lock slide forward and turn and
the lock.
The key lock mechanism consists of a
remove toe key lock key. The breaker then c^ot
series of links and levers which extend from toe
be closed while in toe connected position until toe
lower left side of the breaker compartment.
in toe test or disconnect positions.
lock in the upper compartment to a blocking link
fixed to the stationary interlock cam plate on the
key is returned and toe key lock is reset. The
key lock does not prevent operation of toe breaker
The breaker
To operate the key lock if the breaker is in
can be operated in these positions even when the
key lock key is removed. However, if the breaker
is pulled forward and the key lock key is turned
will prevent its closing until the key is returned
the disconnected or test position the key lock slide
and removed.
is moved to toe connected position the key lock
and toe lock reset.
KEY
KEY LOCK
SLIDE
RETURN
SPRING
ADJUSTABLE
ROD
BLOCKING
LINK
Figure10 (0673D0515-182}
18
Breaker Key Lock h.j6 KV
Metal-Clad Switchgear Type MC-4,76
GEI-88775
The recommended floor construction is shown
in Figure 11.
The floor channels must be level
and true. Installation and removal of the breakers
will be facilitated if the floor in front of the units
is smooth, hard, level and flush with the floor
SECTION IV
INSTALLATION
Metal-Clad switchgear is accurately built and
carefully gauged to be true and level to insure
channels.
ease of operation and interchangeability of breakers
and housing. It is therefore essential that the
foundation on which it is installed be true and
Provision
should
be
made in the floor for
conduits for primary and secondary cables.
level to avoid distortion of the switchgear structure.
The
location of these conduits can be determined from
the floor plan drawing which is furnished for each
Location
metal-clad switchgear requisition.
If desired, the
The recommended aisle space required at the
conduits may be installed prior to the installation
floor plan drawing furnished for the particular
to installing conduits which might be required for
future connections. Conduits should project ap-
^ont and rear of the equipment is shown on the of the switchgear. Consideration should be given
requisition.
Space must be provided at the front to permit
insertion and withdrawal of the circuit breakers
and their transfer to other units. Space at the rear
IS required for installation of cables, for inspection
and maintenance and in some equipments for draw-
pro:dmately two inches above the finished floor
for indoor switchgear andapproximately eight inches
above the foundation for outdoor switchgear. If
practical, the shipping skid should be left on the
equipment until it is at its final location.
The
remainder of the crating should be carefully re
moved so as not to damage instruments or devices
mounted on the front of the equipment.
out potential transformers.
Preparation of Floor - Anchorintr
The floor or foundation on which the switchgear
IS to be erected must be strong enough to prevent
sagging due to the weight of the switchgear struc
The skid is bolted to the equipment through
the anchor bolt holes used for final installation.
The bolts in the rear can be reached by removing
the rear covers. The bolts in the front of the
breaker units are available when the breakers
ture and to withstand the shock stress caused by
the openii^ of the breakers under short circuit are out of the compartments. In auxiliary units
fault conditions. The shock loading is approxi
mately 1-1/2 times the static load.
the front doors must be opened for access to the
anchor bolts.
—
5,a—
•-
lUK
^
;
SLAMP
A-i-
.•^TERNATC
4LTt'»NATC
VCrwoO
MtfHOO
OP
')9
C>*AM3>< PtOOP «C •iiS'ivfi
PtfC'i
>0
rxAi*
Ck.;: i.CtSC>«Kitgk»
CASE
vOwr.* Pd
a4»P4 4iM<»VtNT.
CM4M*«4 PHic *•
MAMMP
.-XlkOA]' '•
e^^,.PwCwT
WAriPt-,
&
«s
'O
amt puiL'
IM C>*AH*4au 'VgS
tkc«a fin «tae« 'aTtSb wuqm ucumtujs
0>«tCVbV
9h axKOPrM
ir |g« eov(ii 0
he*
«oe-£NeRG»2E g*isTi«o eauipMeNT
s. "fwovc '{.a
raou (MSTiKe
C;,v«atHN« acMOvC «n4««a 9* acCflU**!
aaooara hirau^ear ?eoa.
* MXT
t'Ctk -0»« 'X taC aea
>9
t'rtTwaa ccwa^eaT
r «SMwae« •*« •cif fa« «*ewa
^aeiM«c aoi'Ctiia 9i4U Mate ^
3a»v(
Ua •« a(«ov|9 9* eM«*a<3
awtM ^ 914. avMon 4*0
aavwo 'mc aivC'l Otit.
». atMOvl twaacat «a4Cii(>
•aaCMOvc (ao toei <|)
•••4»M««.f Mua atoVKW lUi
2 nabhCC eoi Oia ® •*
Figure 12 (06730)515-189)
Vi
CQutaMeat
Main Bus Connections in Match and Lineup
21
GEI-88775
Metal-Clad Switchgear Type MC-4.76
SECTION V
TESTING & INSPECTION
After the equipment has been Installed and all
connections made, it must be tested and inspected
before putting it in service. Although the equip
ment and devices have been completely tested at
the factory, a final field test shovdd be made to be
sure that the equipment has been properly installed
and that all connections are correct. The prima^
equipment should be completely de-energized while
the tests are in progress.
BEFORE ENERGIZING SWITCHGEAR BE SURE
THAT ALL JOINTS AND BUS ENDS ARE COVERED
WITH THE POLY VINYL CHLORIDE BOOTS PRO
VIDED FOR INSULATION AT THESE POINTS. ALSO
A POLYESTER GLASS INSULATING BARRIER IS
PROVIDED FOR INSULATION BETWEEN THE BUS
ENDS AND THE STEEL END COVERS. IT IS IM
PERATIVE THAT THIS SHIELDING BARRIER BE
IN PLACE BEFORE THE BUS IS ENERGIZED.
Directions for testing relays, instruments and
meters are given in the instruction books furnished
for each device. The settings of the protective
relays must be coordinated with the other relays
on the system and, therefore, these relays must be
set by the purchaser.
General instructions on
setting the relays are given in the relay instruction
books. Special instruction books are furnished for
complicated automatic equipments. These instruc
tions describe the sequence of operation of the
devices required to perform the desired function.
The extent of the tests on the equipment depend
on the type and function of the eqmpment. Tests
which should be performed on all equipments should
include breaker operation, switchgear meggering,
phasing and grounding checks.
electrical control circuit without energizi^ the
primary power circuit.
When the breaker is first
put into service, its control circuit should be''^^
tiioroughly tested while in this position to make
sure that all closing and tripping circuits are
complete and functioning properly.
The TEST position is not suitable for inspec
tion and maintenance of the breaker and should,
therefore, be used only for testing breaker opera
tion.
Key Interlocks
After initial installation of the switchgear equip
ment, all necessary interlockkeys should be inserted
into the appropriate locks and all spare keys should'
be placed in the hands of a responsible person.
Refer to the key interlock schematic on the front
view furnished with the equipment to determine
the sequence of operation and the correct number
of operating keys required. This precaution is
necessary since improper use of spare keys will
defeat the interlock scheme.
SECTION VI
OPERATION
Breaker Positioning and Racking
The breaker is positioned by centering it with
the compartment and lining up the guide element
on the breaker with the guide in the house. For
the 4.76 KV breaker a single guide channel is.
centered in the house. This guide channel mates
with a similar piece fixed to the bottom of the
breaker frame.
The breaker guide is flared to
aid in alignii^ it with the house guide.
When the breaker has been aligned with the
house through the engagement of the guide elements
High potential tests to check the integrity of the
the breaker should be rolled into the house until
insulation are not necessary if the installation in
structions are carefully followed. If this test is
required by local codes or the purchaser wishes to
make 60 cycle A.C. high potential tests the voltage
the stop pin engages in the stop block on the floor
of the house.
The stop pin is spring loaded and
biased so that its engagement in the stop block
should not
is then in the disconnect position. As the breaker
reaches the disconnect position the racking jackscrew shaft engages with the jacknut in the house.
This nut is spring loaded and self aligning. It is
retracted as it is struck by the end of the jackshaft. The spring backed nut is automatically fed
exceed 75% of the ASA factory test
voltage.
For the power circuit the ASA factory
test voltage for 4.76 KV gear is 19 KV.
Potential and control power transformers must
be disconnected during high voltage testing.
When transformers are furnished to supply the
control power, the primary taps should be selected
so that the control voltage indicated on the wiring
diagram is obtained on the secondary of the trans
former. When a battery is used to supply control
power, the cables from the battery to the switchgear
should be large enough to avoid excessive voltage
drop.
is automatic as the breaker is rolled in. The breaker
onto the sh^t when the shaft is rotated by the
operating handle.
DAMAGE TO THE JACKSCREW THREADS MAY
OCCUR IF THE STOP POSITION FOOT PEDAL IS
HELD DEPRESSED WHEN THE BREAKER IS IN
SERTED INTO THE HOUSE.
To move the breaker from the disconnect posi
tion it must be first determined that the breaker
Breaker Operation Test
is open.
handle
All breaker compartments have a test position
in which the primary disconnects are disengaged
while the secondary contacts are engaged. This
TEST position permits complete testing of the
22
The sliding shutter which covers the
socket on the front end of the jackshaft
must then be pushed aside and the handle crank
?
inserted. The sliding shutter is part of the inter- —
lock mechanism and cannot be moved aside unless
the breaker is in the open position.
After the
Metal-Clad Switchgear Type MC-4.76
crank handle has been inserted the stop pin must
released.
This is done by stepping on the
''^ot pedal while simultaneously rotating the crank
.andle clockwise.
After a slight movement of the
--breaker the foot pedal should be released. By
continui^ to rotate the handle the breaker will be
GEI-88775
pedal to move the breaker to the disconnect posi
tion,
The stored energy mechanism operating
springs on the breaker are automatically discharged
between the disconnect and test positions by a house
mounted cam. This discharge of the stored spring
energy will occur each time the breaker is moved
moved into the test position, l^en this position
into or out of the house.
secondary contacts on the breaker are in contact with
Space Heaters
breaker can be electrically operated providing the
crank h^dle has been removed and the jackscrew
shutter is permitted to close. The shutters covering
Space heaters are provided in all outdoor
equipment in order to keep the inside temperature
several degrees higher than that outside. Heaters
may also be furnished for indoor equipment when
it is known that abnormal atmospheric conditions
exist at the installation or when specified by the
is reached the stop pin will again drop into the stop
block. With the breaker in the test position the
the stationary secondary blocks in the house. The
the primary disconnects in the house are closed.
To move the breaker from the test position the
breaker must be open. The jackscrew shutter is
then pushed aside and the handle inserted. The
stop pin is released by the foot pedal and the crank
handle is turned clockwise.
By continuing to
turn the crank handle the breaker is moved to the
connected position. When this position is reached
a collar on the jackshaft is jammed against the
jacknut and further rotation of the crank handle is
impossible. If the motion of the breaker into the
house should be halted between the test and the
connect positions a fixed cam in the house holds
the interlock mechanism in the tripped position
even though the racking handle has been removed
and the breaker cannot be closed. When the breaker
reaches the fully connected position the primary
and the secondary disconnects are both engaged and
closing of the breaker will energize the primary
^^ircuit.
The breaker is removed from the house in a
manner similar to that used to insert it. The breaker
must first be open, then the jackscrew shutter is
retracted, the operating crank is inserted and by
counterclockwise rotation of the crank the breaker
is moved out of the house. The stop pin will again
automatic^y eng^e with the stop block in the
test position and must be retracted with the foot
customer.
By maintaining a slight temperature differential
the heaters facilitate drying and prevent condensa
tion.
Before the heaters are energized be sure the
power source is of the proper voltage,, frequency
and phase arrangement.
The heaters should be
connected in accordance with the wiring diagrams
furnished with the equipment. Also be sure all
cartons and miscellaneous material packed inside
the units have been removed before the heaters
are energized.
Heaters should be visually inspected several
times a year to be sure they are operating properly.
It is recommended that heaters be energized at
all times and that thermostatic control not be used.
If thermostatic control is used the contacts of the
thermostat should be set to close between 95 and
100 F on falling temperature de-energizing the
heaters only when strong sunlight beats on the
switchgear. Under no condition should a differential
thermostat be used to control the heaters because
under extremely high humidity conditions this type
of thermostat will not operate at all times to keep
the heaters on enough to prevent condensation in
the switchgear.
23
GEr-88775 Metal-Clad Switchgear Type MC-4.76
SECTION VII
(a) Operate each breaker while in the TEST posi
tion and check all functions. This is particular-
MAINTENANCE
A regular maintenance schedule should be
established to obtain the best service and reliability
from the switchgear. An annual check and overall
maintenance procedure for the switchgear, devices
and ^1 connections should be followed as a mini
mum requirement. Equipment subject to highly
repetitive operation may require more frequent
maintenance.
A permanent record of all maintenance work
ly important for breakers that normally remain f
in either the open or closed position for long'
periods of lime.
(b) Remove the breaker from its compartment to
a clean maintenance area.
The test cabinet
provides a convenient means for operating the
breakers when toey are removed from the
compartments.
The maintenance operation
should be performed in accordance with the
procedure suggested in the appropriate breaker
maintenance manual.
should be kept. The record should include a list
of periodic checks and tests made, date made,
condition of the equipment and any repairs or ad
Instruments, Instrument Transformers & Relays
and instruments refer to the separate instruction
Breaker Compartment Interiors
Since under normal conditions, the protective
justments that were performed. This record will relays do not operate, it is important that the
be a valuable reference for subsequent maintenance operation of these devices be checked regularly.
work and for station operation.
Check and inspect all devices to see that they
are
functioning
Check device mounting.
For specific information regarding the main Check that all properly.
electrical
connections are tight.
tenance of devices, such as breakers, relays, meters
book for each device.
BEFORE ANY COVERS ARE REMOVED OR
ANY DOORS OPENED WHICH PERMIT ACCESS
TO THE PRIMARY CIRCUITS, IT IS ESSENTIAL
THAT BREAKERS BE WITHDRAWN TO THE DIS
CONNECTED POSITION AND TAGGED.
IF WORK IS TO BE DONE ON REMOTE EQUIP
MENT CONNECTED TO A UNIT, THE BREAKER
FOR THAT UNIT SHOULD BE PLACED IN THE
DISCONNECTED POSITION AND TAGGED. ALSO
THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE ISOLATED
FROM ANY OTHER POWERSOURCES CONNECTED
TO IT,
The primary circuits of metal-clad switchgear
are insulated in order to reduce the size of the
equipment.
This insulation, however, in most
instances requires a 'srtain amount of air gap
between phases and to grou'nd to complete the
insulation. Inserting any object in this air space
(a) Thoroughly clean the interior of the breaker and
instrument compartments. Use a vacuum clean
er and clean rags only. Do not use steel wool
or oxide papers. Blowing with compressed
air is not reconunended.
(b) Check indicating devices, mechanical and key
interlocks.
(c) Check primary disconnecting device contacts
for signs of abnormal wear or overheating, f
Discoloration of the silver surfaces is not
normally harmful unless atmospheric conditions
cause deposits such as sulphides on the con
tact surfaces.
If necessary, deposits can be
removed with a good grade of silver polish.
Otherwise, wiping with a lint free cloth will
suffice.
Before replacing the breaker, apply a thin
coat of contact lubricant D50H47 to the house studs
when equipment is energized whether it is a tool and
the finger disconnects on the breaker.
or a part of the body may, under certain conditions,
short circuit this air gap and may cause a break
down in the primary circuit to ground and cause
serious damage or injury or both. The solid in
sulation surrounding an energized conductor must
never be relied on to provide protection to personnel.
Bus Compartment
(a) Remove covers and check buses and connec
tions for evidence of overheating or weakening
of the insulation.
Care should be exercised in the maintenance
and checking procedures that accidental tripping or
operation is not initiated.
(b) Check that all bus mounting bolts and splice
connection bolts are tight.
The switchgear structure and connections should (c) After cleaning, megger and record the resis
be given the following overall maintenance at least
tance to ground and between phases of the
annually.
insulation of buses and connections.
Breaker and Instrument Compartments
definite limits cannot be given for satisfactory
insulation resistance values, a record should
Breakers - Test and inspect all breakers for
proper operation as follows:
De-energize equipment completely except for
test circuits.
24
be kept of the readings.
Since
Weakening of the
insulation from one maintenance period to the
next can be recognized from the recorded
readings. The readings should be taken under
similar conditions each time and the record _
should include temperature and humidity.
\
Metal-Clad Swltchgear Type MC-4.76 GEI-88775
Cable and Bus Duct Terminal Compartment
(b) Blue lacquer 254-84299 as make by DuPont
Co.
Inspect all main cable connections for signs
of overheating and, when possible, check that
f
(c) Lacquer thinner
connections are tight.
(d) Viscosity Sand Gray 25 seconds Zahn #2
cup. Blue 27 seconds Zahn #2 cup.
Overall Switchgear
(a) Check that all secondary control wiring connec
tions are tight. Check continuity.
(b)
2,
Check to see that all anchor bolts and bolts
in the structure are tight,
(a) Spray one wet coat.
(c) If the switchgear is eqviipped with heaters
check to see that all heaters are energized
and operating.
(
(d) Check the ground bus connection and mounting
bolts for tightness.
Clean the ground bus.
(e) Clean and inspect all painted surfaces. Retouch
Application
(b)
Air dry 30 minutes.
(c)
Thickness 1.00 mil.
Outdoor Finish
1.
This finish is applied to surfaces previously
cleaned and primed.
2.
Materials
where necessary.
Paint Refinishing
(a) Acrylic Sealer 881-007
Indoor and Outdoor Primer
1.
Remove all loose paint, rust, scale, oil or
grease.
Sand scratches smooth with fine wet
(b) Acrylic Lacquer 890-5001 as made by Du
or dry sanc^aper before priming.
2.
as made by DuPont
Co.
Pont Co,
Materials
(c) Acrylic thinner
E-615
as made by Geo.
Senn Co,
(a) Synthetic phenolic, alkyd paint 214-488
Sand Gray as made by Arco Co,
(b) Thinner, Xylol made by Standard Oil Co.
3.
3.
(c) Viscosity 30 seconds Zahn #2 cup.
(a) Reduce sealer to spraying viscosity usiiK
1 parts 881-007
to 1 parts E-615.
Application
(b) Spray one coat of sealer.
(a) Primer is preheated to 185°F and sprayed
(c)
with OeVilbiss type hot spray unit.
(b) Air dry 30 minutes.
(c) Thickness of paint coating 0.45 to 0.65 mils.
Indoor Finish Coat
1.
Application - Sealer Coat
Materials
(a) Sand Gray lacquer 246-84296 as make by
DuPont Co.
4.
Air dry one hour.
Application - Finish Coat
(a) Reduce 1 part 890-5001 to 1 part E-615 to
spraying viscosity of 21 seconds Zahn#2 cup.
(b) Apply one coat of finish.
(c)
Air dry 30 minutes.
(d) Thickness of finish coat 1.00 mil.
25
GENERAL ELEaRIC SALES OFRCES
AlAOr 10 ASSST YOU... wrm Yov Krv* SlMtrteai 9rool«iM... NMd INtftlMfbdornaM*... Raqiorc Or4«rtiR( tMtrncaoM
XST TO SAUS OraUTlOM*
> Alcaer A OiitntMlx
I
fort WifM 44*04. . 6001 ftAoUkaoy BcdO.
tAduasRQU* 44S0T . .31*011. Mcrldua ft.
htiUeaeert* «i3«0 .... toto C. Mtt ft.
AC
OMtfe Bod 48401... 430(1. MttfeftOA St.
V • ClMtne UttUtjr SeIm
aCKU
OtrmuciaaSttM.. lUiat^tEBdAv*.
I
H«ftUtnll«MMI..UnMcaBmlPlnTS.
All
MoMUMCM
ini s.
tfwy.
ARIZONA
PbMou 84012 . . . . 3S94 H. C««U*i Avt.
TMmtSYU
40110. 9««bM.
H. UtU« RocA nil*
PtM Btvfl Tim
ttOMtuft.
?.0. a000afciUrwart SL
AI
rrM»93no
isa El. wmc Av*.
C
U«A(«*IM *091* .1*43 W.OI7S9M Blvd.
A 1H $ V U» A(«clM «00M ... 3U N. Vl«aM A.
A
OtUiAdOlOSI
8103 edftwucr Or.
A
ORUrto 91T64
314 W«« C ft.
S
AS U
P«lo AKo *4303 . . . . *00 Sm ABtOBMAd.
!fter«ntae *380* . . . . . . . >401 -r* ft.
AMSU
3uO(«co*ai03
ftau Cftn *30*0 . . .1400 CalRoaa A«t.
rotOHAlK?
AC ISO
Ocavtr moo . . . . 301 U»T«r«Aif 01*0.
coNN£C-nci;r
tUnd«a 06318 . . . . . . 3M8 Outwall Av*.
Harttard OOIO* . . . . . 784 Afrt«ia AW.
1 PrflMIS* Or.
M*fftd«a 08430 .
I U
A
C t * V
owmiCT or coLUMsu
IM V
Q
IttI t. ft* SL
WlMJifCM X0003... 11T.14thft.. N.W.
FLORIDA
A IS V
ASU
A
V
.lackaaMnll* 33301.. 4040 Woodcock Dr.
MUni 33134
4100W. rU(i«rft.
Oria^ 33*03 . . 101 N. Fcra Crwft A**.
PwmbbU 33308
P.ft Boa 1931
ACI«U
TtB^3*408
SlOOftLMtAw.
AUtott 3030*.. .1100 Paacbcrw Ad. N.W.
tdacm 31304
1130 RimMd* Or.
stwaoab 3140*
S003 Piutwa ft.
.i*34ldaMS4.
OMMOSTOI .
ILWOD
AtUSO
C
AIV
ChleafB«e*S8
*40 9. Ctotl ft.
OalfrrMR 80931
1300 Harftr Rd.
Pcoru 41903. . . . 100* N.B. Pcmr AW.
A I
RMldordOltO*
4333 S. ftaic ft.
U
9prti«fUM 43101... 801 C. AdtO* ft.
A
Sprtninctd4rrOt...43*l/3S9.nR»ft.
A
V
WtcMft «T>lt.. . 830 B.ftdiaMp«U8 A**.
Wtetuta 81393. .194 S. 8read««r
XENTCCRY
A U
Umvtsa «OSOa. . . . 443 S. AlAtaAd Av*.
iMsnUt 40318
3309 MaidM Or.
LOUISIANA
AU
Alcxaotfru TISOI. . .3001 MACAnftur Or.
B«toQAoucf T04O8. . .8313 Ftorttt Blvd.
Uh* C{iari«a 10604
1434 Asru St
Mom* 11301
103* li.ftlft ft.
(
Is
A19
N«w Orl««M T0133. . 4141 Etrtan Blvd.
U
MawOrlaaBa lOttt. . . • 33*8amMft.
U
.-(fwOrloM T0U0.930 (ptcf.Tnd* Mart
ASU
SArvTcpot 11104..3430CeetoAry BItd.
MAINS
I33ftai«ft.
11 CMVal ft.
Auoiftd M330. .
Oaj«0r O4403 . .
V
Maachaaur 03104
AC8 U
C
S
41114 . .3108 Waaktafwa Aw.
Fort waync 44804
1839 Oroidwar
FOR Wayac 44801. . • 3804 S. Callma ft.
44 Bay ft.
NIW fWUX
C
Ban Oraaa* 01011. S4 Mcimaw Gardcaa
Aisv
ttUbBwami
PartUiM 04103
19 U
AU
Battusor* 31301
IN.CktrlWft.
OalvASU 31403.. 10331 WtaeopiaCircle
U
A
Hi|crt(e*B 31140
SUiAOuTF 31101
P.O. Boa 811
P.a Bai 438
kSASSACNUSSTTS
lU
I
9o«tea 08111
01103
ACIMS
WcUwiw 03181
31SL9tAC« A*«.
UOKapldft.
IWMttectMft.
MICHIGAN
ACISU
t
AC!
OawDtt 48303
PliAt 48*03
Craad Rapida 48804
.TOO AacfttMat ft.
80 1 9. Safuav Si.
8(1
9
A19
3ackam48491
310 W. rraaUta SL
KaUewae 4*003
P.O. Sax 30*9
Saclsiw ilMl. 13*0 S.iWaaia((M Aw.
A
ntWXQUK
AlMSV Afiaay moi.. . . ilCastpuur Or.waM
V
TllfPtaataviUa 044T9
444 wwt Ira ft.
4411 EaM 49tA SL
•Coiwoawa 4039
840 Haidlay Rd.
MICFIfOAN
• •aiOavoiO Riwrviaw. . .107* Krauw Aw.
«Fliet4*$0*
. l*ME.CarpefturRd.
«>Ti»lade43M8
«0* Oaartora Avt^
•y»i(a(ctaa« 44*01. . 10 C. lodliaeU Ava.
lOtb « CraMfta.
vT«laaT4l48
• • (AlUiitt) CimniMaa XOMI
*0*8 PaacBtrw ladwtntl Blvd.
*330S. tOOlk BaMAva.
• OotiOb 5*07
SOut AW.WA SLLMia Bay
• •Muuop.il.SMU ... >o«.M AO.....
MBSOURt
CBORCtA
ORBCOM
ri?;.** ?!,•.?.»•
« • Portland 91310
1131
"IL"*. "•
KW 39ui Aw.
eRHMSVLVAMta
• •Catea«»608** . . 804* 9. Kettwciaa Aw.
10EJoarataaSL
• •salt Law City 94110. .NlEltaWaaift.
VAdNtA
• •Rtetwigad 3*114
*403 iPdfaa Ava.
1004 Rivaa Ava..SB
WaSHDICTOM
a«9«ama0|*4.... $40 Pira4 AW..SB«a
•Spabana tMII
£.4*0 Miaaica ft.
30 Eftecertia Ava.. SB
lll*Ba«Raad
vA'taekwe 19103
88* E.MMUaad ft.
•(Dettwra
VallaylCftarrr
KUI.N.J. 0*0*4
ElBWJBRdBY
•Naw BrwtwiCK 090 . . . 3 LawrteeaSL
«Jaaa«n«n iSaOE
*4lOkk9traa4
APftiladalpaia 19134 - .1040 BaM Brta Ava.
9l.Lai«ia0UO
l190B.MarUMPika
ILUNOS
• Mmmm 1100.. 880 flarvay wuaaa Dr.
•Raaaafca 3401*
MiXNBSOTA
••Ttnpa 3301
0 0 Kaaer Way
•HaiaMM nOM.. 8884 Karwy wilaaa Dr.
OKLAHOMA
no Alwaur ft.
FLORSA
v'Jackaoovitla 3**03 . . JOSOW.Bwwr ft.
• (MMCDII HUlai* 33010. J043 EacStck ft.
vCdrpaaChrlctt 7*401 .. 118 Wacd Siraal
• •Oattaa 0338
• MMIaad 19101
«*CtacuMMn 4*10
••oaawUlM 44133
0*3 Uruavr 9t.
CONNCCTtCVT
aBeaaBKMtmOS... 140 w. Cardlaal Or.
OHIO
• *4(0accoai Mwiord 019*
COLORADO
«*0aawr80308
••OMrlatu3S30
««a-n. hma
300 lunliltd.
10 Heroi Haw SL
TEXAS
•aScftaaaetwy U3M
I Rivar Ra0
♦ByrmcttM 100 . . IOlS6.KU«aiM Blvd.
301 B. taPalBia Awi
• lUa Aoccleal (nstavead MM!
• Ha^ta 010
* Wd* Yerk C»y) ClUtaa, N.2. 01913
• SaiMRauce 10114 . .10** Nerta Dual ft.
a L»a Aocaiat 90301.. -9900 ftaMard Aw.
•Sacnstaio 98*14
490 iMirafnin Itotlov Rd.
SitLKamioaSL
NEW YORE
IOWA
ARIZONA
«• (PttMaartUWaai Mifltia UI2*
NEW MCXICO
• FL Waraa46*0*
miBdnllAw.
• • Dtiisoipalis 46333 . . 110 W. Varcua SL
««Biriala(*aa 38*11
•MWUa ]«409
praoiaca. lAcatt tae»ry nct&eda aad (caaiM CB rcwwl parta ara
wad t» oMiaata parferniaaca of year cqaipowL For tall lafonaaUMi
090
m s Racua ft.
•HUaptakw 8*01 . 20 W.OaUAooM Ava.
^
4-E
GENERAl ELECTRIC COMPANY. PHIIAOEIPNIA, PA.
.
GEH-230Z
Supersede! GfH*2S0T
INSTRUCTIONS
INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
BUTYL-MOLDED AND COMPOUND-FILLED
600-V THROUGH 15-KV
INTRODUCTION
These instructions apply to indoor and outdoor
instrument transformers of butyl-molded and other
dry-type constructions. For information on the in
stallation and care of transformers with unusual
ratings of frequency, secondary voltage, current,
or on installations where unusual conditions exist
(refer to American Standards for Instrument Trans
formers, ASA C57.13-1954, section 13-00), consult
the nearest sales office of the General Electric
Company. When special information is requested,
give the complete nameplate data in order to identify
until the transformer is dry. It will usually require
24 to 48 hours to dry a transformer.
.The amount of current necgssary to obtain a
winding temperature of 80 C varies because of the
differences in heat dissipation and current densities
in the different typesoftransformers.Itisadvisable
to start with a current notgreaterthantwo amperes
in the secondary of a potential transformer, or not
greater than five amperes in the secondary of a
current transformer. Gradually increase this cur
rent until the proper heating is obtained. Increases
qj current should be made cautiously with frequent
checking of the rise in temperature of the winding,
the transformer.
BEFORE INSTALLATION
The temperature of the winding may be deter
mined conveniently by the "resistance change"
method. Since the resistance of a copper winding
increases approximately 1 percent for each21/2C,
INSPECTION
Before installation, transformers should be in
spected for physical damage that may have occurred
during shipment or handling. During shipping, trans
formers usually are supported only by the base or
mounting supports, except that certain butyl-molded
types may be shipped from the factory supported by
butyl surfaces. Transformers should be dry andthe
surface of the bushings should be clean. All butyl
surfaces should be considered the same as the sur
face of a porcelain bushing in regard to cleanliness
and dryness.
DRYING OUT
Transformers that have been submerged in water
should be dried out before installation. Wet asphaltimpregnated or varnish-impregnated transformers
may be dried by self-heating. To do this, allow the
transformer to stand not less than twelve hours in a
room of constant temperature. Measure and record
the room temperature and resistance of the second
ary winding. Short-circuit the primary winding and
apply a controllable voltage to the secondary wind
ing. Adjust the voltage so that sufficient current will
flow in the winding to raise its temperature to approximately 80 C. The rate of temperature rise
should not exceed 6 C per half-hour. The winding
temperature should be held at approximately 80 C
the temperature rise may be calculated by measur
ing the "before" and "after" resistances and finding
the percentage increase in resistance. For example,
if the "after" resistance is 0.244 ohm andthe re
sistance at the start (room) temperature is 0.200
ohm, the percentage increase is
0.244-0.200
O50
= 0.22 = 22%
which corresponds to a temperature rise of 22 x
2 1/2 = 55C (approximately). The approximate wind
ing temperature at any time is the temperature rise
at that time added to the ambient (room)temperature.
Butyl-Molded Transformers
Butyl-molded transformers, particularlydesigns
for outdoor use, are relatively impervious to mois
ture. If, due to unusual circumstances, insulation
tests indicate the possibility of the entrance of mois
ture into a butyl-molded transformer, refer to the
nearest General Electric Apparatus Sales Office for
detailed information on proper procedure.
TESTING
If it is desired to make insulation tests after the
drying out period, or at any other time, these tests
These /njffwch'ortt do nol purport to covor oU defo'lt or vongtions m oqu'pmoni nor to providt for every pouibio conlhgoncy to be Tie' it connec'/on
w/'h intloHolion, operation or maintonorKO. Should furlhor inhrmofion be
or ihould partieutor prohlomt arito which ore no' cptprod soffieitnity
for 'he purchoser't purposes, 'he matterihouldbe referred 'o /he Genero'Electric Compony.
GEH'230Z
Instrument Transformers
may be made in accordance with American Standards
amperes this distance should be not less than 24
for Instrument Trans formers, ASA C57.13-1954.
inches. If this type transformer is used with more
than one primary turn, the loop should be at least
(Note: Periodic field tests of insulation should not
exceed 65 percent of the ASA test voltage. Incoming
tests of new equipment should not exceed 75 percent
of the ASA test vdltage.)
24 inches in diameter. Make sure that the secondary
leads are twisted closely together and carried out
without passing through the field of the primary
conductors. It is not necessary that the bus exactly
Convenient methods for testing polarity are given
fill the window, but the bus or buses should be cen
tralized. For ratings of 1000 amperes or less these
precautions are generally unnecessary.
in American Standards C-57.13, the Electrical Metermen's Handbook published by Edison Electric In
stitute, and General Electric publication GET-97.
CONNECTIONS
For ratio and phase angle tests, refer to Elec
trical Metermen's Handbook and General Electric
publications GET-97 and GET-1725.
Certificates
A certificate of test is supplied with many types
of butyl-molded potential and current transformers.
The certificate is in the form of a tag attached to
each transformer. The tag shows the ASA accuracy
classification of the transformer, the burden at
which it has been tested, and the actual test results
of ratio correction factor and phase angle. The tag
is perforated and can be detached as a 3- by 5-in.
card for filing.
SECONDARY CONNECTIONS
The resistance of all primary and secondary con
nections should be kept as low as possible to prevent
overheating at the contacts, and to prevent an in
crease in the secondary burden.
The resistance voltage drop of the secondary
leads should be included in calculating the secondary
volt-ampere burden carried by instrument trans
formers. The total burden should be kept within
limits suited to the transformers used.
Short-circuiting Device
INSTALLATION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Always consider an instrument transformer as a part
of the circuit to which it is connected, and do not touch
the leads and terminals or other parts of the transformer
which are not grounded.
The butyl surface of transformers should be considered
the same as the surface of a porcelain bushing, since a
voltage stress exists across the entire butyl surface from
terminals to grounded metal parts.
Do not open the secondary circuit of a current trans
former while the transformer is energized. Thisprecaution
is advisable since current transformers may develop opencircuit secondary voltages which may be hazardous to per
sonnel or injurious to the transformer or equipment con
nected in the secondary circuit.
Always ground the metallic cases and frames ofirutrument transformers. The secondaries should be grounded
close to the transformers. However, when secontfaries of
transformers are interconnected, there should be only one
grounded point in this circaif.
On some designs the secondary cover is inter
locked with the secondary hardware, so that the lead
openings in the cover will be 180 degrees from the
usable position unless the short-circuiting device is
open. The short-circuiting device should be re
placed for safety before the burden is removed from
the transformer secondary.
Dual-ratio current transformers with mid-tapped
secondary windings are completely inoperative when
either portion of the secondary winding is shortcircuited.
MOUNTING
Instrument
Many current transformers are provided with a
device for short-circuitingthe secondary terminals,
and are shipped from the factory with this device in
short-circuiting position. When the transformer is
installed and the primary circuit is energized, the
shorting device should be opened only after a suitable
burden, such as an ammeter, wattmeter, watthour
meter, relay, etc., is connected to the transformer
secondary terminals.
transformers should be mounted so
that connections can be made to the power or dis
tribution lines in such a manner as to avoid placing
appreciable strains upon the terminals of the trans
formers. For high-current transformer ratings,
2000 amperes and above, there may be some inter
ference from the electric field of the return bus
unless the bus centers are kept at a minimum dis
tance of 15 inches apart; for ratings above 5000
On current transformers with multiple
secondary taps, short-circuit at least one half the
secondary winding before making or removing con
nections at the secondary terminals when the trans
former is energized.
On dual-ratio or multiple-ratio current trans
formers with secondary taps, all short-circuiting
devices must be in the open position for normal op
eration, so that no portion of the winding is shortcircuited.
Instrument Transformers
GEH-230Z
When connection is made to a secondary terminal
having a polarity marking similar to a given primary
terminal, the polarity will be the same as if the
primary service conductor itself were detached from
the transformer and connected directly to the sec
PRIMARY BY-PASS PROTECTION
Thyrite ® primary by-pass protectors are rec
ommended for the proper protection of current
transformers which are so located as to be exposed
to the effect of surge currents. They are especially
recommended for low primary-current ratings, as
these ratings have a relatively high winding imped
ondary conductor. In other words, at the instant when
the current is flowing toward the transformer in a
primary lead of a certain polarity, current will tend
to flow away from the transformer in the secondary
lead of similar polarity.
ance.
Thyrite primary by-pass protectors consist of
When connecting instrument transformers with
meters or instruments, refer to the Instructions fur
one or more Thyrite disks which are connected in
parallel with the primary winding of the transfor
mer. When high-frequency or steep-front voltage
surges occur, the characteristic of the Thyrite is
such that an appreciable part of the surge current
is by-passed through the protector. A high-surge
voltage, which might result in failure within the pri
mary winding, is thus prevented from building up
across the winding.
nished with the meters or instruments involved.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
All General Electric transformers are designed
to operate at either or both the ambient tempera
tures, as indicated by the Company, at the standard
rating or ratings for the corresponding ambient
temperatures, provided the altitude does not exceed
GROUNDING
3300 feet. Refer to American Standards for histra-
ment Transformers, ASA C57.13-1954, section
13-00. Generally, the allowable ambient tempera
tures and ratings are marked on the transformer
nameplate.
Grounding of instrument transformers should be
made in accordance with AIEE Standard No. 52,
March, 1951, Application Guide for Grounding of
Instrument Transformer Secondary Circuits and
Cases.
FUSES
POLARITY
Potential transformer fuses are intended pri
marily to protect the line rather than the trans
former, although the modern fuse will afford pro
tection to the transformer in a large number of cases.
In wiring instrument transformer circuits, it is
necessary to maintain the correct polarity relation
between the line and the devices connected to the
secondaries. For this reason, the relative polarity
of each winding of a transformer is indicated by a
The fuses on butyl-type transformers, rated at
0.6-kv through 2.5-kv Insulation Class, are provided
marker Hi (or a white spot) on or near one primary
terminal, and a marker Xi (or a white spot) near
one secondary terminal; and in some cases by
white bushings. See Figure 1. Where taps are
present, all terminals will be marked in order. The
primary terminals will be Hi, H2, H3, etc.; the
secondary terminals Xi, X2, X3, etc.; and the
tertiary terminals, if present, Yi, ¥3, Y3, etc. Hi
with molded butyl fuse enclosures which are se
cured to the transformer by the spring action of
the fuse clips.
Each fuse and its enclosure may be removed as
a unit from the transformer, using a fiber fuse
puller or by hand if suitable protection is providec.
always indicates the same instantaneous polarity as
for the operation. The fuse is then removedthroug'.
Xi and Yi-
an opening in one end of the enclosure.
PRIMARY CURRENT
PRIMARY
VOLTAGE
SECONDARY
CURRENT
CURRENT
TRANSFORMER
Fig. I.
SECONDARY/^
VOLTAGE W
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
Elementary Connections of Instrument Transformers
GEH-230Z
Instrument Transformers
When replacing the fuse and enclosure, be sure
that the plastic insulating piece, fastened under the
transformer fuse clip, is inserted between the end
of the fuse and the open end of the fuse enclosure.
Then press the enclosure firmly onto the trans
former to seat the fuse into both clips.
The fuses of some dry-type transformers, 2400
volts and below, are supported by a hinged cover.
If it is necessary to replace a fuse while the trans
former is connected to an operating circuit, the
cover should be opened by use of an insulating hook,
which should be of sufficient length to prevent the
operator from being burned in case a short circuit
exists in the transformer.
In testing fuses for continuity of circuit, not
more than 0.25 ampere should be used.
used for precision work. Connect at least 50 ohms
resistance in series with the meters or instruments
in the secondary circuit. Bring the primary current
up to as near full load as possible and gradually
reduce the series resistance until it reaches zero,
being careful not to open the secondary circuit in
the process. For best results, gradually reduce the
primary current to zero before disconnecting the
resistance circuit.
Demagnetizing JAR-0 Auxiliary Transformers
Due to the wide range of current ratios available
in the Type JAR-0 current transformer and the lack
of standards for demagnetizing the odd ratios avail
able, the following method is necessary to protect
personnel and transfoirmers from excessively high
voltages that could develop. See Fig. 2.
In replacing fuses, be certain that the voltage
rating of the fuse is the one nearest above the line-
OPEN-
VARIABLE
to-line voltage of the circuit, regardless of the rated
POWER
voltage of the transformer. Do not use fuses of
higher voltage ratings, as undesirable overvoltages
may result should the fuse blow. One permissible
exception to this general rule is the use of Size A,
Type EJ-1 fuse in the Types JE-2 and JVM-2
' CIRCUITED
/
SOURCE^
JAR-0-^
Fig. 2. Scfiemah'c diagram for demagnetizing
JAR-O transformers
transformers. In this case the Size A fuse can be
Key to Fig. 2.
used on either 2400-volt, delta circuits or 2400/
4160-volt, solidly grounded Y Circuits.
Ijj = ammeter for reading demagnetizing cur
rent.
= voltmeter for reading demagnetizing vol
tage.
MAINTENANCE
The I^ reading shall not exceed;
After instrument transformers for indoor use
have been installed, they should need no care other
than keeping them clean and dry. Transformers for
outdoor installations should receive the same care
in operation as power transformers of similar
design and of similar voltage rating.
CLEANING BUSHINGS
Porcelain bushings may be cleaned by means of
a wet cloth or by use of carbon tetrachloride* or
ammonia. After cleaning a bushing, wash thoroughly
with clean water to remove foreign material from
the surface.
Butyl-molded transformers may be cleaned by
Rated current of the winding energized
§5
The
reading shall not exceed:
160
Rated current of the winding energized
For example, for demagnetizing any 5-ampere
JAR-O winding, do not exceed 32 volts and 0.1 am
pere. The core will be adequately demagnetized
when either the voltage or the current is increased
to over 80%ofthe maximum value shown in the appli
cable formula (see above), and then gradually re
duced to zero.
scrubbing the butyl surface with detergent and a
stiff brush to remove accumulated dirt or oil film.
Remove the detergent by washing with clean water.
Then apply a light grade of silicone oil (G-E Silicone
Liquid, SF-92 or equal) to the butyl surface.
DEMAGNETIZING
If by accident a current transformer becomes
magnetized, it should be demagnetized before being
* Precautions against toxic vapors should be taken
when using carbon tetrachloride.
DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION
Standard General Electric current transformers
may be used for differential protection through a
considerable range of burden and overcurrent. The
range is limited by the difference in burden, the
maximum overcurrent, and the mechanical and
thermal short-time rating. Information regarding
these points may be obtained from the G-E publica
tion GET-97 or from the nearest sales office of
the company.
METER DEPARTMENT, GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY, SOMERSWORTH, N. H.
1045
(25M)
n
JJ.'A ...M .J
.
GEH-908
INSTRUCTIONS
LOW
VOLTAGE
SWITCH6EAR
DEPARTMENT
GENERAL A ELECTRIC
PHILADELPHIA.
PA.
'0
i*ir
II
f:|!l
'•"••:• :.. i*
iC
•
CONTROL AND INSTRUMENT SWITCHES
TYPES SB-1, SB-9, AND SB-10
INTRODUCTION
APPLICATION
The I^e SB-1 switches (see cover illustration
and Fig. 1} are multi-pole rotary switches with
cam-operated contacts. They have their positioning
device or return spring located between the front
seaport and first barrier while the Type SB-9 (see
Fig. 2) has the positioning device or return spring
located at the rear of the switch. The Type SB-9
also has better Insulation to ground, more sub^stantial bearings, and long life cams.
The Type SB-10 switches (see Fig. 3) combine
contacts operated by rotation of the shaft, as In the
SB-1 and 9 switches, with contacts operated by a
lateral motion (push or pull) of the shaft. Only two
lateral positions of the shaft are possible. Inter
locks are usually provided so the push-pull contacts
can be operated only In specific rotary positions of
the switch, and also the rotary contacts can be
operated In only one lateral position of the shaft—
either push or pull.
The Type SB-1, SB-9 and SB-10 switches are
primarily Intended for the control of electrically
operated circuit breakers, small motors, magnetic
switches and similar devices, and for the transfer
of meters. Instruments and relays. The Type SB-1
switch Is suitable for most applications, but where
the switch is subject to abnormally frequent opera
tion (approximately ICQ operations or more per
hour), more durable cams are required. In which
case the Type SB-9 switch shomd be ordered.
RATINGS
All switches are rated 600 volts, 20 an^eres
continuous, and 250 amperes for 3 seconds.
The Interrupting rating depends on several
factors; namely, voltage, current, and Inductance
of the circuit.
It Is often necessary to connect
several
contacts
In
Interrupting capacity.
NOTE: Instructions for Type SB-1 switches
also apply to superseded Type SB-7 switches.
series
to secure sufficient
The Interrupting ratings In
the table below are based on the Inductance of the
average trip coll.
INTERRUPTING RATINGS - ABfPERES
NON-INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT
VOLTS
NUMBER OF CONTACTS
2 In Series
24d-c
48 d-c
125 d-c
250 d-c
600 d-c
115
220
440
550
a-c
a-c
a-c
a-c
INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT
6.0
5.0
2.7
0.75
0.25
40.0
25.0
12.0
6.0
30.0
25.0
11.0
2.0
0.45
75.0
50.0
25.0
12.0
2 In Series
4 in Series
40.0
25.0
8.0
1.35
4.0
3.0
2.0
0.7
0.15
24.0
12.0
5.0
4.0
20.0
15.0
6.25
1.75
0.35
50.0
25.0
12.0
10.0
4 In Series
30.0
25.0
9.5
6.5
1.25
40.0
20.0
15.0
Thete instrvctioiu do not purport to cover all details or yariations in equipment nor to provkle for every possible
contingency to be met in connection vrith insialkition, operation or maintenance. Should further information be desired
or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purposes, the inaffer dtould
be referred to the General Electric Company.
GEH-908
Control And Instrument Switches Type SB
INSTALLATION
RECEIVING AND STORAGE
RECEIVING
Immediately iq>on receipt of a switch, examine
it for any damage sustained in transit. If injury or
rough hamdling is evident, file a damage claim at
once with the transportation company and promptly
notify the nearest wneral Electric Apparatus S^es
Office.
For panel-mounted switches, holes should be
Erovided
in the panel as shown in Fig. 4. The shaft
ole is shown with a 1-1/8 inch diameter. This is
done to provide one panel hole for all switches,
liie removable handle and lock handle switch^
require toe 1-1/8 inch diameter hole, while a 1/2
inch diameter hole suffices for all other switches.
For switches furnished in metal enclosures, mount
The switches are completely assembled and
packed in individual cartons before shipment.
ing dimensions should be obtained from toe ^proved
outline drawings, or from toe switches themselves.
To mount a fixed-handle switch on a panel, first
remove toe handle and escutcheon, including where
STORAGE
If the switches are for stock purposes or not
for immediate installation, they should be left in
the shipping carton and stored in a clean dry location.
DESCRIPTION
CONSTRUCTION
All types of these switches are built up of a
series of individual stages, each nested into the
other, plus a common fixed contact support, operat
ing shut, front siqoport and rear support (see Fig. 5).
nte complete stack is tied together with two tie
bolts threaded into the front support Each rotary
stage consists of an insulating barrier carrsring one
or two moving contacts, and two or three cams on
the shaft which operates the moving contacts. A
push-pull stage is similar to the rotary stage except
only one cam is used. Each moving contact and its
provided, the position-indicating pointer and curved
spring washer (saddle spring). Next, holdtoe switch
in place on toe back of toe panel and insert the
mounting screws through toe escutcheon and panel
into toe switch front support, but do not ti^ten the
mounting screws. Attach toe pointer, saddle spring
and handle. Align toe escutcheon on toe panel.
Insert toe mounting screws throu^ the escutcheon
and panel and place toe spacers (if used) on toe
screws before putting toe switch in place.
When moimting removable-handle switches be
certain that toe shaft dt toe switch is properly
positioned, so toe handle is easily removed, b^ore
toe mounting screws are tightened.
Switches with a key lock in toe handle have toe
handle attached to toe escutcheon so toe two parts
are removed or installed as a unit. The shaft and
associated fixed contact on the fixed contact support
handle are joined by a slotted coupling on the back
constitute a complete switch contact.
of the escutcheon and these parts sh<^d be lined
iq) before inserting toe mounting screws.
CONTACT IDENTIFICATION
The movable contacts are marked for identifi
cation following a standard system. Starting with
the stage next to the panel, the contacts on the right
side—looking toward the rear—are given odd num
When a back-of-board locking mechanism and
separate (Tale) lock are furnished with a switch,
the panel drilling shown in Fig. 4 is required. The
lock should be installed first. Turn toe key imtil
bers beginning with "1" (see Fig. 1), and the contacts
toe lever at toe back of toe lock is entirely within
the barrel diameter, and remove toe two knurled
on the left side even numbers beginning with "2".
Occasionally, a contact is omitted from a stage. If
so, toe corresponding number is also omitted.
the front, with the spacing ring (where used) at toe
ENCLOSURES AND MOUNTING
The basic switch design is for panel mounting
rings.
Insert toe barrel throu^ the panel, from
front of the lock and fasten it in place by tiVtening
toe knurled rings on toe barrel behind toe panel.
With toe cylinder in toe locked position the lever
on toe back of toe barrel should extend on toe verti
cal center line towards the switch shaft. Turn toe
and includes a molded cover as shown on toe front
cover. When requested, switches are furnished
assembled in various enclosures, such as toe fabri
cated-metal enclosure for wall mounting, toe water
tight enclosure, and the e^qplosion-proof enclosure.
When conditions require toe switch to be operated
immersed in oil, it is furnished mounted in an
Sf
enclosure similar to toe watertight enclosure except
that toe lower removable portion is filled with oil.
Switches for panel mounting are furnished with
D//J.
When re
PANEL DRILLING
For intermediate
thicknesses of panels, spacers are furnished to fill
the excess space between the front support and toe
panel.
D/e/LL
"a
vested, shafts and mounting screws are furnished
for 1, 1-1/2, or 2 inch panels.
-
ESCUTCHgQM
shafts and mounting screws suitable for mounting on
panels 1/8 inch to 3/16 inches thick.
iA°">
FRONT VIEW
Fig. It (II6AI32-U)
Panel Drilling (Front View)
^
Control And Instrument Switches Type SB
GEH-908
switch shaft to a locked position and mount the
switch on the panel as directed in a previous para
graph. being careful to put the pin on the lock lever
(B),
into the slot in the locking bolt of the mechanism.
Operate the switch and check to see that the locking
bolt will easily enter each slot in the locking wheel.
It may be necessary to loosen the lock and shift its
position slightly to secure satisfactory operation of
the locking mechanism. When the mechanism oper
ates correctly, the lock must be re-tightened on the
contact must be closed at this point or it must be
panel.
OPERATION
Type SB-1 and SB-9 switches are rotary camRotation of the switch shaft
causes contacts to close or open according to the
shape and setting of the cams in the various stages.
Each stage has one or two contacts with two or three
cams. On drawings these cams are designated A,
B and C (see Fig. 5). Cam (A) is the one nearest
the panel and is the closing cam for the even num
bered contacts.
The (B) cam is next and is the
opening cam for both contacts; cam (C) is farthest
from the panel and is the closing cam for the odd
which allows the contact to close, will be
opposite the No. 1 contact and there will be nothing
to hold the No. 1 contact open. Therefore, the No. 1
omitted from the switch. In other words, whatever
happens to one contact at any point in the periphery
of Uie switch rotation must happen to its companion
contact in the same stage when the switch is rotated
180 degrees from that point.
Generally, it is possible to design the switch
so those contacts that close 180 degrees opposite
each other are in the same stage, but sometimes it
is necessary to design the switch with only one
contact per stage.
operated switches.
•COR CLOS ING CAN
FOR NO. I CONTACT
NOT SnONN.
OPCHINC
SHOMING Ml PE
NO.2 CONTUCT
numbered contacts. When a con&ct is omitted, its
NO. I CONTACT
B' OR COMMON
PENINC CAM.
NOTCH
IN*B* CAM
corresponding closing cam is omitted and a spacer
substituted.
yV OR CLOSING CAN
FOR NO.2 CONTACT
When the total rotation of the switch is more
than 150 degrees, there is, due to the common open
ing cam (B), a certain limitation to the opening
and closing of the contacts (see Fig. 6). If the No. 2
contact is closed at zero degree, then after the shaft
has been rotated 180 degrees, the notch in the cam
Fig. 6 {K-65079^6)
IVplcal Section aiowing
Operation Of Cams - Front View
BARRIER
MOVING CONTACT
SCREW'F"
.MOVING
CONTACT
SUPPORT.
SCftEW *6"
-TERMINAL
FIXED CONTACT
AND SUPPORT
THIN WASHER WITH
SQUARE HOLE
'E5CUTCHE0N
•TIE BOLTS-
REAR SUPPORT-
TORSION SPRING-
-FRONT SUPPORT
INDENT WHEEL OR
PIN FOR HOLDING
SPRING STRETCHEF
SHAFT IN PLACE
Fig. 5 (8009283)
Exploded View Of lire SB-1 Switch
GEH-908
Control And Instrument Switches Type SB
Some applications, particularly of momentary
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
contact switches, which have a torsion spring to
return the switch to a central-neutral position,
require a contact action which lags behind the switch
motion (lost motion or slip contacts). Such contacts
use cams with a special loose fit on the shaft. When
the shaft has turned far enough to close or open
these contacts, it can be rotated 45 degrees in the
reverse direction without moving the cams, but
beyond this point, the cam moves with the shaft, and
the contacts either open or close as the case may be.
Momentary
contact switches have a torsion
^ring that returns the switch to a central or neutral
position when the handle is released after operation
to a side position or positions. This torsion spring
is design^ for a maximum of 90 degrees operation
to each side of the central position. The torsion
spring znay have one end cut off or tied back in such
a manner as to be effective on one side of the central
position only. That is, the switch may have mo
mentary contact to one side of the central position
and maintaining contacts to the other side, witches
may also be furnished that are spring return from
the extreme-end positions to a position in between
the end position or positions and the central position.
In some momentary contact (spring return)
switches, a locking device is provided by which the
shaft may be held against the action of the torsion
spring by pulling out the handle when the switch is
turned to one of &e side positions.
Type SB-10 switches, in addition to rotary con
MOVABLE CONTACTS
If a movable contact is burned, or has a broken
. shunt, replace the entire contact assembly. To do
this, position the switch so the contact to be replaced
is open. Remove screw (E, Fig. 5) and its clamping
washer. Press in on the top of the contact to re
lease the tongue at the lower end and pull the as
sembly upward and off (see Fig. 7).
To replace the new contact assembly, slide it
downward with its shoe (1, Fig. 8) on the inside of
the support (3, Fig. 8), until the ton^e (2, Fig. 8)
at the lower .end of the contact drops into the hold
ing notch. (4, Fig. 6) on the support. Bring the loose
end of the shunt (3,. Fig. 7) down to the terminal and
fasten it in place with the clamping washer and
screw (E). Avoid creasing or kinking Die thin metal
, strips of the shunt. Operate the switch and observe
whether the contacts meet squarely and simul
taneously. The contacts can be adjusted by bending
slightly with smooth-faced pliers. After adjustment
. there should be an appreciable opening, with the
contacts closed, between the moving contact and the
moving contact support.
FIXED CONTACTS
Damage to a fixed contact requires replace
ment of Uie complete assemblv of fixed contacts
and support Remove screws (F, Fig. 5), change
assemblies and replace the screws. Operate &e
switch and check the contact alignment.
tacts using SB-1 cams, have contacts operated by
pulling out or pushing in the switch handle. The
push-pull contacts are located at the front of the
switch, with closing action provided by leaf springs
and opening action by a cylindrical cam which slides
over the shaft to the rotary contacts.
MAINTENANCE
At regular intervals, switches should be In
spected for burning of the contacts, for broken shunts
on the moving con&cts and for contact wipe.
If contacts are slightly pitted, or coated with
sulphide, scrape them gently with a sharp knife or
dress with a fine file, such as a #00 dental file.
\
R the shunts are broken or the contacts badly
pitted, they should be replaced as directed under
"Repair and Replacement".
I
Contacts have sufficient wipe as long as there
is an appreciable opening, with the contact closed,
between the moving contact and the moving contact
support (see Fig. 6). If there is no opening, it indi
4
5
cates that the parts of the moving contact support
that bears on the cam or the cam itself has become
worn and needs replacing as directed under "Repair
and Replacement".
Sometimes it is possible to
1. Cam
'i. Barrier
2. Movable Contact
5. Operating Shaft
secure a temporary repair by bending the moving
3. Shunt
contact so it has a smaller separation from the fixed
contact when in the open position.
Pig. 7
Eemovlng Contact Finger
Control And Instrument Switches Type SB
GEH-908
otherwise noted on the drawing. Remove the handle
and fixed-contact support.
Unscrew the tie bolts
from the switch support, but leave them in the
switch. Stand the switch on the bench, resting on
the rear support, and slip the front support off the
shaft being careful to hold the shaft in the switch
so as not to pull it out of the cams in the rear stages.
Do not lose the ball from the positioning device.
Slide the shaft out just enough to remove the pin,
through the shaft, which seats in the counterlrare
in the indent wheel or spring-stretcher (refer to
Fig. 5). Do not slide the sh^t out of the cams in
the rear stage.
Push the shaft back Into the switch
and slip off Uie indent wheel and thin washer that is
assembled between the indent wheel and front sup
port.
Remove the first barrier to expose the cams
for contacts No. "1-2".
Check these cams against the cam arrangement
drawing. Be sure the cam arrangement drawing is
fully understood before disturbing the cams.
On the drawing, the cams for each stage are
usually shown in horizontal rows of three cams,
or two cams and a spacer. Beside each horizontal
row are the numbers of the contacts, such as "1-2",
with which the cams are used.
The vertical rows
are lettered "A", "B", and "C". Cam (A) is the one
1. Shoe
3. Support
2. Htongue
It. Holding Notch
Fig. 8
Installing New Contact Finger
On some switches the ball and spring of the
positioning device are carried in the fixed-contact
support. Care must be exercised to prevent losing
the ball and spring when removing the fixed-contact
support.
The ball and spring are replaced best,
after the new fixed-contact support has been as
sembled on the switch, by removing the spring
retainer on the top of the fixed-contact support,
inserting the ball and spring, and replacing the
retainer.
CAMS, BARRIERS, MOVING-CONTACT SUPPORTS,
ETC.
When cams, barriers, moving-contact supports,
etc., need to be replaced or changed, the switch
should be removed from the panel and disassembled
on a bench and re-assembled with replacementparts.
The moving-contact support and terminal areHghtly
assembled on the barrier in the factory.
It is
practically impossible to remove them from the
barrier without damage to the parts or the barrier.
If any of the parts require replacement it is best to
secure a complete assembled replacement unit,
including the barrier, moving contact support, and
terminal, from the factory.
SWITCH DIS-ASSEMBLY
Before dis-assembling the switch, secure a
drawing showing the cam arrangement in all the
stages of the switch.
removed first, working from the front end of the
switch, cam (B) next, and cam (C) last (see Fig. 5).
Unless otherwise stated, the position of the cams
on the drawing are for the twelve-o'clock switch
position.
Remove the cams from the first stage, and after
making sure there are no jumpers holding the
barriers together, remove the barriers. Continue
removing cams and barriers until the damaged part
is reached
SWITCH ASSEMBLY
To assemble the switch, place the rear support
on the bench, with the rear side down, and with the
bolt heads a^inst the bench, so they are retained
in the rear support, with the dreaded ends extending
vertically. Place the end of the shaft in the rear
support so the shaft stands vertically. Turn the
shaft to the twelve-o'clock position, or to the switch
position that agrees with &e cam arrangement as
stated on the drawing. The cams for the rear stage
may now be assembled in the exact position shown
on the drawing, cam (C) first, cam (B) second, and
cam (A) last. The remaining barriers and corres
ponding cams are similarly assembled.
When the
front terrier, which carries no contacts, is inplace,
assemble the indent wheel (or spring stretched and
torsion spring) with the counterbored end toward
the front of the support.
Pull the shaft out just
enough to permit the locking pin to be inserted
through the shaft. Push the shaft back into the switch
and slide the thin washer over the shaft.
Slide the
front support into place. Hold the stack of barriers
together and turn the switch to a horizontal position
with the moving contacts pointed up.
Turn the switch shaft to the
switch position corresponding to the cam arrange
ment.
This is a twelve-o'clock position unless
If it is a maintaining-contact switch with a
large indent wheel, that is, with the ball and spring
GEH-908
Control And Instrument Switches Type SB
in the fixed-contact support, or if it is* a spring-
return switch, the tie bolts may now be screwed
into the front support. Before ti^tening the tie
bolts be sure the barriers are all properly nested.
If the switch is a maintaining-contact switch
with a small indent wheel, slide the front support
forward enough so the ball may be placed into the
socket in toe front siqtport and line ig) a notch in
toe indent wheel with the ball in toe front support.
Then the front support may be slid back into place
against toe front barrier. Blake sure toe barriers
are all pr<9erly nested before tightening toe tie
bolts.
The fixed contacts and siqiport may now be assembed on toe switch. If toe switch has a position
where all the contacts are open, turn it to this posi
tion to assemble toe fixed contacts and support.
SHAFT CHANGE
When it is necessary to change toe switch shaft,
that is, instaU a longer or shorter shaft, toe switch
may be dis-assembled as directed, or the new shaft
may be used to push out the old shaft as follows:
Remove the fixed-contacts and si^port. Re
move the rear support, being careful to leave toe
rear cams on the shaft. Slide toe complete stack,
including toe indent wheel or spring stretcher, liack
on toe shaft Just enough to remove toe locking pin
toat seats in the counterbore in toe front end en the
indent wheel. This leaves toe shaft free to move
through toe switch.
First, check and make sure toe tapped hole in
toe new shaft for toe handle-holding screw aligns
correctly with toe hple in toe old shaft. Then insert
the new shaft into toe rear end of toe switch, and at
toe same time withdraw the old shaft from toe front
ol toe switch. The front end of toe new shaft should
touch toe rear end of toe old shaft at all times so
toat all toe cams are on one shaft or toe other and
never loose within toe switch.
Replace toe locking pin. If toe positioning ball
has become dislodged, replace it in toe manner
previously described. Replace toe rear support,
tie bolts, and fixed contacts and stq^ort. Check for
prefer operation of toe switch using the new shaft.
RENEWAL PARTS
Refer to Renewal Parts Bulletin GEF-2357. In
If there is room enou^ behind thepanelto work
on toe switch, it is not necessary to remove the
switch.
Otherwise the switch must be removed to
a bench vise where the front siqpport can be siqsported
firmly, with toe fixed contact at toe top.
10*64
toe absence of a renewal parts bulletin address
nearest General Electric Sales OHice, specify
quantity required, describe toe part and give
complete data from toe nameplate at toe rear of
switch.
GENERAL ELEaRIC COMPANY, PHILADELPHIA, PA.
the
the
toe
toe
198
4555K10-006
TYPE AB-30
AMMETERS AND VOLTMETERS
(THIS PUBLICATION FORMERLY IDENTIFIED AS GEH-1560
Cut and drill the panel as indicated in Fig. 1. All
cuits to the instrument case. Use No. 12 Awg copper
drilling and wiring on the switchboard should be
completed before mounting the instruments. The in
wire. Grounding connections should be made in ac
cordance with the provisions of the National Electric
struments must be mounted in a level position.
These instruments are practically unaffected by
stray fields, but it is advisable to keep wires carrying
heavy current as far as possible from all indicating
Code.
instruments.
When the instrument is mounted in a
A-C AMMETERS
When the circuit exceeds 30 amperes or 650 volts,
a current transformer of the ratio indicated on the
nameplate must be used.
level position, any deviation from zero should be
corrected by means of the zero adjustment.
Connect the instrument as shown in the appropriate
diagram.
transformer of the ratio indicated on the instrument
GROUNDING CASES OF A-C INSTRUMENTS
nameplate must be used.
A-C VOLTMETERS
When the circuit exceeds 750 volts, a potential
If transformers are used on circuits of over 150
volts, connect the grounded side of the secondary cir
_v
/•
An external Form-3 resistor must be used on in
struments rated 750 volts.
^
^
'
4oiA.(4HOLes) na panels up tob incl.
L
^ TKCX
j^OIA-FOR PANELS OVEN |^*TH1CK
ADAPTER MOUNTING STUD
fON PANELS OVER ^ THICK
SPECIFY PANEL THICKNESS
WHEN ORDERINS
Fig. 1. Cuf-out and panel drilling dimensions
Fig. 2. Adaplor mounting stud
—i
r 'H'iI
10.KT«oL....ri.
I
i/Xn
ir—.r---''—
Fig.
3.
Dimensions of single-tube, Form-3 resistor
Tfiese instruelioni do not purport to cover all datails or voriotions in aguipmani nor to provida for every
possible contingency to be met in connection with initol/otion, operotion or mointcnonce. Should further in
formation be datirad or should porticulor problems orise which ore not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's
purposes, the motter should be referred to the Generol Electric Company.
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
4555K10-006 Case and Door Assemblies
TERMINAL SCREWS
10-32 THREAB-,
4MOUNTINC S1U0S £-26 THREAD^
USE ON VOLTMETERS ONLV
o
©
3
USE ON DOUBLE RATED AMMETERS ONLY
"A"« 3ig FOR AMMETERS
"A* »3|l" FOR VOLTMETERS
fig, 4. Dtfflontiont of Type AB-30 ammofsn and voltmeters
souaec
SOURCE
LOAD
•
mr-eoMBwa noavaaum
HIGH RATING
SOURCE
LOAD
fig. 5.
External eoaneethns of a-e
ammeter
fig. 6.
LOW RATING
External eonneetiani of
double-rated a-e ammeter
aim ciTtmuL niaoaec luow msvi
fig. 7.
External eonneetions of
a-e voltmeter
ISU MS
fig. 8. External connections of a-e
voltmeter with potential transformer
fig. 9. External eonneethns of
double-rated a-e voltmeter without
double-rated a-e voltmeter wHh'
potential franiformer
potential transformer
fig. JO. External eonneetions of
r, OENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY, WEST LYNN, MASS.
57-114
INSTRUCTIONS
GEH-1788D
SUPERSEOes
TIME
OVERCURRENT RELAYS
Types
IAC53A
IAC53B
IAC53C
- *1^--
IAC53R
IAC54A
IAC54B
SWITCHGEAR
DEPARTMENT
GENERAL0ELECTRIC
PHILADELPHIA,
PA.
GEH-I78BC
TIME OVERCURRENT RELAYS
TYPE lAC
INTRODUCTION
Type
]AC53A(-)A
IAC53B(-)A
IAC53C(-)A
IAC53R(-)A
IAC54A(-)A
IAC54B(-)A
Contact
Circuits
Instan.
A-C Trip
Indue.
Unit
Unit
Unit
One
One
One
One
Two
Two
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
The Types IAC53 and IAC54 relays are time
relays with a very-inverse time char
overcurrent
acteristic.
overcurrent
The various
They are employed to protect against
on single-phase and poly-phase circuits.
relays described in this instruction book
differ in the number of circuits they close, and if an
instantaneous unit and/or an a-c tripping unit is
included.
These relays consist of an induction unit or an
induction unit with an instantaneous unit which per
One
One
One
One
One
One
Outline
&P. D.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
20
20
20
21
20
21
Int.
Conn.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
12
13
14
15
16
17
mits instantaneous tripping for exteremely high cur
rents, or an induction unit with an a-c tripping unit for
use where d-c power is unavailable or a-c tripping is
preferred. Since practically all Type lAC relays are
composed of various combinations of the above (that
is, file induction imit, the instantaneous unit and the
a-c tripping unit), they are, for convenience, describ
ed separately in the following text. The above table
indicates the units comprising each type and also lists
the internal connections and outline and panel drilling
diagrams.
INDUCTION UNIT
INTRODUCTION
The induction unit is the basic unit in all Type
IA.C relays. Figs. 1 and 2 show the induction unit
mounted in the cradle.
These imitsareof the induc
tion-disk construction type. The disk is actuated by a
current operating coil on a laminated U-magnet. The
disk shaft carries the moving contact which completes
the alarm or trip circuit when it touches the station
ary contact or contacts. The disk shaft is restrained
by a spiral spring to give the proper contact-closing
current and its motion is retarded by a permanent
magnet acting on the disk to give the correct time
delay.
APPLICATION
The induction unit is the main unit in all Type
lAC relays, supplying the very inverse time delay
characteristics of the relay and sounding an alarm or
tripping the breakers for overload currents which
cause it to close its contacts.
OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
The induction unit may have one or two circuitclosing contacts which close as the current increases
to the pick-up value as set on the tap block. The
time delay in closing the contacts is determined by
the setting of the time dial (Fig. 1). The time-cur
rent characteristics are shown in Fig. 3.
There is a seal-in unit mounted on the front to
the left of the shaft. This unit has its coil in series
and its contacts in parallel with the main contacts
such that when the main contacts close the seal-in
unit picks up and seals in. When the seal-in unit
picks up, it raises a target into view which latches
up and remains exposed until released by pressing
a button beneath the lower left corner of the cover.
RATINGS
The induction unit is designed to use any one of
three operating coils, each having a different com
bination of taps as follows, 4,5,6,7, 8. 10, 12 and 16
amperes; 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, S.OandS.O amperes;
0.5, 0.6, 0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.5 and 2.0 amperes.
These insfruefiom do not purport to cover aU details or variations in equipment nor to provide for every possible
contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further information be desired
or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purposes, the matter should
be referred to the Generof Bectric Company.
GEH-1788
J
Type IA.C Time Overciirrent Relay
.6 .7 .8 .9 1
2
3
4
5 8 7 8 9 10
MULTIPLES
Fig. 3
20
30
40 00 88 70 B090S
g
OF RELAY TAP SETTING
Time-Current Curves for Type (AC Relays with Very-Inverse-Time Characteristics
|
Type lAC Time Overcurrent Relay
GEH-1788
CALIBRATION
-PLATE
ADJUSTABLE
-POLE PIECE
INSTANTANEOUS
•UNIT
OPERATING
COIL
CONTACTS -
SHORTING
COIL
-TARGET
-STATIONARY
CONTACTS
- MOVING
CONTACT
ASSEMBLY
i TT v,' j'- ,j
iii'i—r!!-. .''.liViu.
A-C
TRIPPING
UNIT
Type lAC Relay with an Instantaneous Unit
nsHi
Type lAC Relay with an A-C Trip Unit
(Front View)
(Rear View)
The current-closing rating of the contacts is
BURDENS
30 amperes for voltages not exceeding 250 volts.
The current-carrying ratings are affected by the
selection of the tap on the target and seal-in coil
as indicated in the following table:
Burdens for the standard coils are given in the
following table. These are calculated burdens at
five amperes based on burden of minimum tap.
Volt-ampere burdens for the lowest tap on any
Amperes, a-c or d-c
Function
2-Amp Tap
of the three coils can be determined for any value
of current, up to 20 times tap setting, from Fig. 6.
0.2 Amp Tap
Coil
Tripping Duty
5
Carry Continuously
Operating Range
0.2-2
Amps
Amps
0.3
Resistance
Impedance at 60 cy
7
2.0
52
1.7
1.3
14.5
12.0
9.0
1.5-6
If the tripping current exceeds 30 amperes an
auxiliary relay should be used, the connections being
such that the tripping current does not pass through
the contacts or the target and seal-in coils of the
protective relay.
105.0
86.0
82.0
INSTANTANEOUS
INTRODUCTION
UNIT
the contacts of the main unit.
Its coil is connected
in series with the operating coil of the main unit.
The instantaneous unit is a small instantaneous
hinge-type unit which may be mounted on the right
front side of the induction unit (See Fig. 4). Its
value, the instantaneous unit operates, closing the
contacts are normally connected in parallel with
contact circuit and raising its target into view.
* Denotes change since superseded issue.
When
the
current
reaches a predetermined
GEH-1788
Type lAC Time Overcurrent Relay
TAP
RANGE
0.5-2.0
AMPS.
V
0
L
T
A
G
E
TAP
RANGE
1.5-6.0
AMPS.
TAP
i. RANGE
4-16
AMPS.
2
4
6
6
10
12
14
16
18
MULTIPLES OF MINIMUM PICK-UP CURRENT
Fig. 6
Saturation Curves for Lowest Taps of the induction Unit of Type lAC Relays with
Very-lnverse-TimeCharacteristics
S
%o
I
Type IA.C Time Overcurrent Relay
GEH-1788
0.030
0.029
00
s
s
S>
0.020
0.019
-
0.010
0.009
4
9
6
MUlTlfLES OF FICK-UF
Fig. 7
Time-Current Characteristics of the Instantaneous Unit
The target latches in the eiq)osed position until
released by pressing the button beneath the lower
left-hand corner of the relay cover.
of two coils having pick-up ranges of 10 to 40, or 20
to 80 amperes, respectively. The current-closing
rating of the contacts is 30 amperes for voltage not
exceeding 250 volts.
APPLICATION
BURDENS
The instantaneous unit is used on certain Type
lAC relay models to provide instantaneous tripping
for current exceeding a predetermined value.
Burden data on the instantaneous-unit coils are
given in the following table:
OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
The instantaneous unit operates over a 4 to 1
range and has its calibration stamped on a scale
mounted beside the adjustable pole piece. Time-
Coil
Imp.
Ohms
U.U33
U.U5
0.032
0.027
0.008
0.008
0.007
0.95
0.98
0.95
10-4U
60
5
20-80
50
25
60
5
5
5
5
5
0.80
0.68
0.20
0.20
0.18
50
The instantaneous unit is designed to use either
Volt-
Amp
o.dd
current characterisitcs are shown in Fig. 7.
RATINGS
Freq. Amp
25
PF
0.95
0.98
A-C TRIPPING UNIT
INTRODUCTION
The a-c tripping unit is a Type REA relay unit
designed to energize a circuit-breaker trip coil
from its associated current transformer upon the
operation of the main imit of the Type lAC relay. It
transfers the current from the secondary of the
current transformer,into the trip coil and removes
the current from the trip coilwhen the breaker trips.
The tripping unit is mounted on the rear of the
frame opposite the tapped operating coil of the in
duction unit (see Fig,
The operation of this unit
is illustrated in Fig. 11. The secondary current
circulates through the induction unit current coil and
the main coil of the Type REA auxiliary tripping unit,
returning through the Type REA contacts to the cur
rent transformer. Norn^ly, most of the flux gener
ated by the main Type REA coil passes through the
upper limb of the magnetic structure and holds the
armature firmly against this limb. When the contacts
of the induction unit close, the shorting coil of the
Type REA unit is short-circuited and current flows
in this coil by transformer action, causing a redis
tribution of flux which actuates the armature and the
Type REA contacts.
The opening of the Type REA
contacts causes the secondary current to flow through
the trip coil which trips the breaker.
GEH-1788 Type lAC Time Overcurrent Relay
tSIPBUS
Device Function Numbers for Use with ALL
External Diagrams
50
-
Instantaneous Unit
51 - Overcurrent Relay, Type lAC
SIN - Ground Overcurrent Relay, Type lAC
52
-
Power Circuit Breaker
SI - Seal-in Unit, with Target
TO - Trip CoU
A - Auj^ary Contact, closedwhen
breaker closes.
I*.
S
>s
8
A
00
di
Fig. e
External Connections Of Three Type
IAC53A Relays Used For Phase-To-Phase And Ground
Overcurrent Protection Of A 3-Phase Circuit
<-C IM
CP
<0
<0
f2
3
iX
o»
IX
cn
Tf
X
n
A^ TRIFPIMG'
•UKIT, ~
SJfci
TOIFFieCX
I
-J
,V
J1=Z
Als]
o
-A-C THIP
UNIT
0
INDUCTICS
3
s
1
seal-in
UNIT
SCAL-IN
UNIT
seAL*m
o
c^a
CO
I
Fig. 14
10
Internal Connections For Type IAC53C
Relay (Front View)
Fig. 16
Internal Connections For Type lACSSk
Relay (Front View)
Type lA^C Time Overcurrent Relay
GEH-1788
IXOUCTIOM
V UtnT
SI. ^
I
V
SI
INOJCTION
INDUCTION
UN.T
SEAL-IN
UNIT
INSTANT.
UNIT
INDUCTION
UNfT
SEAL-IN
UNIT
INSTANT.
UNIT
•
= SHDST FINGER
•
Fis. 16
•CAUTION:
^
2
g
Fig. 17
Internal Connections for Type IAC54A
=
SHORT FINGER.
Internal Connections for Type IAC5HS
current circuits and other circuits with shorting
Every circuit in the drawout case has an
auxiliary brush. It is especially important on
bars that the auxiliary brush be bent high enou^
to engage the connecting plug or test plug before
the main brushes do. This will prevent CT secondary circuits from being opened.
O
s
CONNECTING PLUG
MAIN BRUSH
AUXILIARY
BRUSH
CONNECTING BLOCK
TERMINAL BLOCK
NOTE: AFTER ENGAGING AUXILIARY BRUSH, CONNECTING PLUG
TRAVELS 1/4 INCH BEFORE ENGAGING THE MAIN BRUSH ON
THE TERMINAL BLOCK.
*Fig. 18
Cutaway of Drawout Case Showing Position of Auxiliary Brush
* Denotes change since superseded issue.
GEH-1788
Type lAC Time Overcurrent Relay
ADJUSTMENTS
TARGET
AND
SEAL-IN
UNIT
For trip colls operating on currents ranging
from 0.2 to 2.0 amperes at the minimum control
voltage, set the target and seal-In tap screw In
the 0.2-ampere tap.
For trip colls operating on currents ranging
from 2 to 30 amperes at the minimum control
voltage place the tap screw In the 2-ampere tap.
contacts and therefore this setting gdves the max
imum time setting.
The primary adjustment for the time of oper
ation of the unit Is made by means of the time
dial. However, further adjustment Is obtained by
moving the permanent magnet along Its siqiporting
shelf; moving the magnet toward the mainshaft of
the unit decreases the time, while moving It away
Increases the time.
If selective action of two or more relays Is
The tap screw Is the screw holding the righthand stationary contact of the seal-In unit. To
change the tap setting, first remove the connecting
plug.
Then, take a screw from the left-hand
stationary contact and place it In the desired tap.
Next, remove the screw from the other tap and
place It In the left-hand contact. This procedure Is
necessary to prevent the right-hand stationary
contact from getting out of adjustment. Screws
should not be In both taps at the same time.
INDUCTION
UNIT
CURRENT SETTING
required, determine the maximum possible short-
circuit current of the line and then choose a time
value for each relay that differs sufficiently to
insure the proper sequence in the operation of the
several circuit breakers.
Allowance must be
made for the time Involved In opening each breaker
after the relay contacts close. For this reasom
unless the circuit time of operation Is known with
accuracy, there should be a dfifference of about 0.5
second (at the maximum current) between relays
whose operation Is to be selective.
EXAMPLE OF SETTING
The time and current settings of the over-
current unit can be made easily and quickly. Each
time value shown In Fig. 3 Indicates the time
The current at which the contacts operate may
required for the contacts to close with a particular
be ch^ged by changing the position of Uie tap plug time-dial
setting when the current Is a prescribed
In the tap block at the top of the relay. Screw the
tap plug firmly Into the tap marked for the desired
current (below which the unit Is not to operate).
When changing the current setting of the unit,
remove the connecting plug to short-circuit the
current-transformer secondary circuit.
Next,
screw the tap plug Into tap marked for the desired
•current and then replace the connecting plug.
The pickup of the unit for any current tap Is
adjusted by means of a spring-adjusting ring. The
ring may be turned by Inserting a tool In the notches
around the edge. By turning the ring, the operating
current of the unit may be brought Into agreement
with the tap setting employed. If for some reason,
this adjustment has been disturbed. This adjustment
also permits any desired setting Intermediate be
tween the various tap settings to be obtained. The
unit is adjusted at the factory to close its contacts
from any time-dial position at a minimum current
within five per cent of the tap plug setting. The
unit resets at 90 per cent of the minimum closing
v^ue.
number of times the current-tap setting. In order
to secure any of the particular time-current settings
shown in Fig. 3, Insert the removable plug in the
proper tsip receptacle and adjust the time-dial to
the proper position. The following example Il
lustrates the procedure In making a relay setting:
Assume a Type lAC relay is used In a circuit
where the circuit breaker should trip on a sustained
current of approximately 450 amperes; also, the
breaker should trip in 1.0 second on a short-circuit
current of 3750 amperes. Assume further that
current transformers of 60/1 ratio are used.
The current tap setting is found by dividing the
minimum primary tripping current by the current
transformer ratio.
In this case, 450 divided by 60
equals 7.5 amperes. Since there Is no 7.5 ampere
tap, the 8-ampere tap Is used. To find the proper
time-dial setting to ^ve 1.0-second time delay at
3750 amperes, divide 3750 by the transformer
ratio. This gives 62.5 amperes secondary current
•which is 7.8 times the 8-ampere setting.
By re
ferring to the time current curves (Fig. 3), it
will be seen that 7.8 times the minimum operating
TIME SETTING
The setting of the time dial determines the
length of time the unit requires to close its con
tacts when the current reaches the predetermined
value.
The contacts are just closed when the dial
is set on 0. When the dial is set on 10, the disk
must travel the maximum amount to close the
12
cxirrent gives 1.0-second time delay when the relay
is set on the No. 6 time-dial setting.
The above results should be checked by means
of an accurate timing device.
Slight readjustment
of the dial can be made until the desired time is
obtained.
Type lAC Time Overcurrent Relay
GEH-1788
Aid in making the proper selection of relay
settings may be obtained on application to the near-
I'^est Sales Office of the Gener^ Electric Company.
INSTANTANEOUS
VARIABLE RESISTANCE
OR LOAD SOX
UNIT
I 15 VOLTS
Select the current above which is desired to
RATED FREQUENCY
have the instantaneous unit operate and set the
adjustable pole piece so that the top of its hexagon
SYNCHRONOUS
TIMER
head is even with the desired calibration on the
scale. To raise or lower the pole piece, loosen the
locknut and turn it up or down and then tighten in
position.
The contacts should be adjusted to make at
.'^about the same time and to have approximately
1/8 inch wipe. This adjustment can be made by
loosening the screws holding the stationary contacts
and moving the contacts up or down as required.
Oi
O)
CO
(O
A-C TRIPPING
UNIT
The a-c tripping unit should not require any
attention other than occasional cleaning of the con-
^cts. However, if the adjustment should be lost,
it may be restored as follows:
FREQUENCY METER
(WHEN REQUIRED)
5'C
CONTACT ADJUSTMENT
SWITCH
With the unit de-energized, the movable contact
should lie against the stationary contact with enough
tension to always insure a good closed circuit. The
movable contact brush should be free of anv kinks.
Fig. 19 Test Connections for Type lAC Relays such as
Type IACS3A
Also this contact brush should not touch the com
pound bushing 8iq)ported from the top of the arma
ture. The brass backing strip should be adjusted
to allow a 1/16-tnch contact gap with the contacts
open.
The compound bushing support should be
adjusted to allow the back of the movable contact
to just touch the brass backing strip when the
armature operates to open the contacts. The outer
edge of the compound bushing should be approximate
ly 1/32 inch from the inner edge of the stationarycontact supporting post.
spaced clear of both armature and the vertical tip
of the bracket. With this setting, the armature should
be flush against the pole face of both cores, and
should put enough pressure on the armature to
always return it flush against the pole face of the
lower core after each operation of the unit. This
alignment is Important as a slight gap between
armature and pole face of the lower core after the
unit operates may cause contacts to open momen
tarily, dropping the relay target when the circuit
breaker is reclosed.
ARMATURE ADJUSTMENT
Under these conditions, the
momentary opening of the contacts is due to the
Loosen the two screws which hold the armature-
assembly bracket to the bottom of the frame. Slide
the bracket in or out, whichever is necessary, vuitil
the armature just touches the pole face of the upper
/rore. In this position, the armature should be
about 1/32 inch from the pole face of the lower
core. Next, slide the bracket in until the armature
leaf spring assumes a vertical position and is
shock of the armature being pulled in aga^t the
pole face when the lower coll is energized. Ex
cessive pressure on the armature, caused by the
bracket being pushed in too far, will result in too
high a pickup or chattering of uie movable contact
during operation of the unit. Tighten the bracket
screws securely after the proper adjustment has
been obtained.
OPERATION
The pick-up current should be checked on one
or more of the taps and the time should be checked
for one or more dial settings.
Before the relay is put into service it should be
given a check to determine that factory adjust
ments have not been disturbed.
The time dial
will be set at zero before the relay leaves the
Recommended test connections for the above
test are shown in Fig. 19.
factory.
It is necessary to change this setting in
order to open the relay contacts.
13
GEH-1788
Type IA.C Time Overcurrent Relay
MAINTENANCE
DISK AND BEARINGS
and thorou^y. The flexibility of the tool insures
the cleaning of the actual points of contact.
The lower jewel may be tested for cracks by
eiqiloring its suiiace with the point of a fine needle.
The jewel should be turned up until the disk is
centered in the air gaps, after which it should be
knives, files, or abrasive paper or cloth. Knives or
locked in this position
for this purpose.
the set screw provided
Fine silver contacts should not be cleaned with
files may leave scratches which increase arcing and
deterioration of the contacts. Abrasive paper or cloth
may leave minute particles of insulating abrasive
material in the contacts and thus prevent closing.
CONTACT CLEANING
For cleaning fine silver contacts, a flexible
burnishing tool should be used. This consists of a
flexible strip of metal with an etched roughened
surface, resembling in effect a superfine file. The
polishing action is so delicate that no scratches are
left, yet corroded material will be removed rapidly
The burnishing tool described is included in the
standard relay tool kit obtainable from the factory.
PERIODIC TESTING
An operation test and inspection of the relay at
least once every six months are recommended.
Test connections are shown in Fig. 19.
RENEWAL PARTS
It is recommended that sufficient quantities of
renewal parts be carried in stock to enable the
prompt replacement of any that are worn, broken,
or damaged.
When ordering renewal parts, address the
nearest Sales Office of the General Electric Com
pany, specify the quantity required and describing
the parts by catalogs numbers as shown inRenewal
mparts BuUetinNo. GEF-3883.
* Denotes change since siqierseded issue.
14
Type lAC Time Overcurrent Relay
GEH-1788
FttNEL LOCATION
SEMI-FLUSH
SURFACE
's;;;;;^TG.
6|
MTG^
TB-
(C
Of
lOffi
(D
o>
4-18 STUDS
n
I 3
5
o
—2
i
6-
NUMBERING OF STUDS
3
SURFACE
MT6.
(0
ooo
o
o
N.
'® FOR
t
10-32 SCREW
~-(0R STUD)
10-32*1 MTG. -H
®SCREW
(FRONT VIEW)
OUTLINE
o
-Z-H
•4-
27
I
32^
ZORILL
4 DRILL
® 2 HOLES
4 HOLES
4 DRILL
^ 5 HOLES
•T
1
CASE.
ff
PANEL
nK
M
. ^
i|-l8STUD
PANEL DRILLING FOR SEMI'FLUSH
MOUNTING (FRONT VEW)
PANEL DRILLING FOR SURFACE
MOUNTING (FRONT VIEW)
VIEW SHOWING ASSEMBLY OF
HARDWARE FOR SURFACE MTG.
ON STEEL PANELS
Fig. 20
Outline and Panel Drilling Dimensions for Relay Types IAC53A, IAC53B, IAC53C and IAC5>(A
15
GEH-1788
Type IA.C Time Overcurrent Relay
PANEL LOCATION
SEMI-FLUSH
SURfACE
t;;;^TG
MT^^
Xs
A-IB STUDS
/
FOR
SURFACE
MTG.
6hhhS
10-32 SCREW
OOOQO,
•^(OR STUD)
^2 4 6 8 \0^
®SCREW
(FRONT VEW)
O
CM
(O
10-32* ^ MTG
NUMBERING OF STUDS
CM
o>
I
OUTLINE
.
CM
91
ioRilf
U.22Z^227_
h-232
*-2^-^
•Idrill
®2HOLES
^4 HOLES
\
CASEy 11
f
-tr
ft
hi!/
ioRILL
I ^10 HOLES
I
, PANEL
j|-l8 STUD
u
PANEL DRILLING FOR SEMI-FLUSH
MOUNTING (FRONT VIEW)
VvA :
J
u
T
§13
-l-'li
iinnnni
I*
5t
H
PANEL DRILLING FOR SURFACE
MOUNTING (FRONT VIEW)
VIEW showing assembly OF
HARDWARE FOR SURFACE MTG.
ON STEEL PANELS
Fig. 21
rX
Outline and Panel Drilling Dimensions for Relay Types IAC53R and lACSHB
GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY, PHILADELPHIA, PA.
4-65
HANDBOOK REFEKCNCE 722S
SUrERBEDCS GEI'ISSYSA
GEH-2901
INSTRUCTIONS
THYRITE' MAGNE-VALVE INTERMEDIATE-CLASS
LIGHTNING ARRESTERS
MODEL 9LA2H-SERIES
the latest design of the Form 2H Thyrite intermedi
Where existing arresters of these earlier designs
are to be increasedin voltage rating by the addition
of arrester units, the new Form 2H units should be
assembled in one stack, and units from the existing
ate-class arrester.
arrester should be used for the additions to the other
DESCRIPTION
The unit furnished with these instructions Is of
stacks so that units of the same Form designation
The Thyrite lightning arrester consists of a stack
will be in series.
of one or more arrester units connected in series,
the number depending on the voltage and operating
conditions of the circuit. Terminals for line and
ground connections are furnished.
Three single-pole arresters are required for a
three-phase Installation.
The arresters are of
single-pole design. They are suitable for indoor
LOCATION
Install arresters electrically as close as possible
to the apparatus being protected. Line and ground
connections should be short and direct.
or outdoor service.
Each arrester unit consists essentially of a per
manently sealed porcelain housing equipped with
pressure relief and containing a number of Thyrite
valve-element disks and magnetic-gap elements in
series. Metal fittings cemented on the housing pro
GROUNDING
The arrester ground should be connected to the
apparatus grounds and the main station ground, uti
lizing a reliable common ground network of low re
sistance. The efficient operation of thelightning ar
vide means for bolting the arrester units into a
rester requires permanent low-resistance grounds.
stack.
Intermediate-class arresters should be provided
with a ground of a value not exceeding five ohms.
Each arrester unit is shipped assembled.
No
charging or testing operation is required before
placing them in service.
FOUNDATION FOR BASE MOUNTING
The footings of all piers or supports should ex
STORAGE
tend below the frost line and be elevated above the
ground line sufficiently to prevent splash on the units.
Units, if left in shipping containers, should be
The minimum elevation recommended is one foot;
however, this must be governed by climate and lo
stored indoors.
cality.
INSTALLATION
The top of the foundation must be level, or pro
vision made for leveling the base before assembly
Since the Form2H intermediate-class arresters
(Model No. 9LA2H series) incorporate Thyrite valve
of the arrester units.
elements of improved characteristics, these ar
rester units should NOT be connected in sbries with
unitsoftheearlierModels9LA2D, 9LA2F, or9LA2G
BRACKET-MOUNTED
arresters in the same stack.
When bracket-mounted arresters are bolted to a
supporting structure, the structure as well as the
• Registered Trade-mark of General Electric Co.
sive swaying of the arrester.
finished assembly should be rigid to prevent exces
rheie Mrycliom do nof pu^wl (o cover oil delailt orroriolioni in equipmerti noi lo provide lor every pouible conUngency lo bft >n«f in connection
wttfi inslallaUon. operation or maintenoiKe. Shovid lurther informotion bedeiired orihoi/Id porlicular problems arise which ore not covered suHicienllr
lor thepurcho»ef i purposes, the matter should be relerred to the General Clectric Company.
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
GEH-2901
Thyrite Magne-Valve Intermediate-Class Lightning Arresters, Model 9LA2H-Series
SUSPENSION MOUNTING
When arresters are modified, the angle-shaped
nameplates should always be changed for proper
If it isdesired tosuspend thearrester, a special
eyeboltcap,Cat.No.482B865Gl, Is required. Either
the top or bottom end may be operated at line poten
Identification.
THE MAXIMUM LINE-TO-GROUND RATING
tial. The nameplate end of the unit should always
MUST NEVER BE EXCEEDED.
be down so that the porcelain petticoats will shed
water.
CLEARANCES
Suspend arresters flexibly with a non-rigid type
of attachment, to minimize mechanical strains In
The clearances given on the assembly drawing
are the minimum recommended. The arrangement
the arrester stack.
of the foundation plan can be modified If desired.
The term "clearance" means the actual distance
between any part of the arrester or disconnecting
device at line potential, and any object at ground
NAMEPLATES
The unit nameplate on the bottom bolting lug of
potential or other phase potential.
each Individual unit applies to the arrester unit only
and should correspond to the model number given
In the memorandum of shipment and to the model
number comprising the complete arrester.
ASSEMBLY
The main arrester nameplate (angle-shaped)
bears Identification to correspond to the model num
ber and voltage rating of the completely assembled
rester do not seat evenly on the foundation, do not
distort them by tightening the foundation bolts, but
arrester.
sajry.
1. Set the arrester level.
If the feet of the ar
shim underneath and grout with concrete If neces-
DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCES
Approximate Dimen
Arrester
Rating
Kv
Model
20
9LA2H57
25
9LA2HS9
Fig.
Minimum
Minimum Space for
3-phase Installations
(In Inches)
Fig. 0 D
E
F
sions In Inches
A
B
24 11/16
21 1/4
26 11/16
23 1/4
11
74 32 21
16
Clearance*
(In Inches)
9 1/2
68 29
19 1/2 14 1/2
1
30
9LA2H61
32 1/16
28 5/8
13
82 36 23
18
37
9LA2H62
37 5/16
33 7/8
15 1/2
92 41 25 1/2
20 1/2
40
9LA2H81
45 15/16
42 1/2
17 1/2
SO
9LA2H64
49 15/16
46 1/2
19 1/2
5
100 45
27 1/2 22 1/2
108 49
29 1/2 24 1/2
6
60
9LA2H65
60 11/16
57 1/4
24
126 58 34
29
73
9LA2H66
71 3/16
67 3/4
28
142 66 38
33
97
9LA2H67
3
94 7/16
91
37
247 107 70
53 1/2
109
9LA2H68
3
104 15/16
41 1/2
265 116 74 1/2 58
121
SLASimfiO
4
46
283 125 79
101 1/2
62 1/2
* These clearances applying both llne-to-Uhe and llne-to-ground are for altitudes below 3300 feet (1000
meters). Add 3 percent to clearances In Inches for each additional 1000 feet altitude above 3300 feet.
n
Thyrife Magne-Valye Infermediate-Class Lightning Arresters, Model 9LA2H-Series
r\:
GEH-2901
LINE TERMINAL S/B'MAX DIA HOLE FOR HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL LEAD
V'
OF
HOR.TAKE
OFF
MINIMUM
FOR 3
SPACE REQUIRED
PHASE INSTALLATION
/
DETAIL OF LINE TERMINAL BRACKET
FOR ARRESTERS 73 KV AND BELOW
l-H
GROUND CLAMP 5/B" MAX^
OIA HOLE FOR
GNO LEAD
PLAN VIEW
OF BOTTOM UNIT FITTING
121 KV ARRESTER
3 Vis"
DETAIL OF LINE TERMINAL
BRACKET AND GRADING RING
{3)|"xfsL0TS
FOR ARRESTERS RATED 97,109
AND 121 KV
2ZZS
DETAIL OF ARRESTER BOTTOM FITTING
AND GROUND TERMINAL FOR ARRESTERS
20-109 KV
<=^ = >
p'rs-l
I H7l~i
MODEL
M-'
9LA2H0I6
DUTY
UNIT NAME-.
PLATE
— ARRESTER NAMEPLATE
Fig. 1
P
HEAVY
ARRESTER N.P.
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
ARRESTER N.P,
Fig. 4
GEH-2901
Thyrite Magne-Valve Intermediate-Class Lightning Arresters, Model 9LA2H-Series
A suggested method of leveling and equalizing the
bearing on the lugs of the arrester unit is to thread
a nut on each foundation bolt before putting the unit
in place. This will permit accurate leveling irre
spective of any slight unevenness in the foundation.
After the arrester is completely assembled, the
foundation may be grouted in with concrete.
2. Assemble the required number of units in a
stack in accordance with the instructions.
Base-mounted arresters, rated 121 kv, have an
extra, heavy-duty unit with cast fittings, which should
be used at the bottom of each single-pole stack.
doubt as to the application, consult the nearest sales
office of the General Electric Company.
ARRESTERS OPERATED AT
REDUCED VOLTAGES
Arresters supplied for temporary operation at a
lower voltage should be erected witt correct elec
trical clearances for the ultimate voltage but with
correct number of units for the temporary voltage.
When the time of temporary operation is to be short,
it is recommended that the ultimate arrester be in-
stalled and the units which temporarily are not re
quired be short-circuited.
3. Assemble the cap and/or grading ring in ac
Care should be taken that all short-circuiting
cordance with the instructions.
4. Connect the arrester to the line through a suit
connections are
removed
when the arrester is
changed to ultimate voltage.
able line connector or switch.
When connecting the arrester to an energized
line, it is imperative that a quick, positive, single
MAINTENANCE
connection be made to avoid possible damage to the
arrester. Information relative to a suitable device
can be obtained from the nearest General Electric
Before inspecting or handling the arrester, dis
connect it from the line, and, as a safety precaution,
Company sales office. Where a rigid connection is
made to the line side of the arrester, it should be
ofcorrect length so thatno excessive strain is placed
ground the line end.
on the top of the arrester stack.
except for routine cleaning of the outside of the por
celain housing in contaminated areas. Hence, the
Where installations requires long lead from line
to arrester, the "hairpin-loop"connection will pro
The Thyrite arrester requires no special care
porcelain housing should be kept clean and the line
and ground connections tight.
vide improved protection.
Energized arrester stacks may be hot-washed.
OPERATION
When replacing the arrester-in service, remove
the temporary ground from the line end, before con
NOTE: The arrester is alive unless disconnected
from the line.
necting the arrester to the line.
When guard rails or screens are
used, they should be grounded and suitable electrical
clearances maintained.
The arrester or units do not require any testing,
and NO TEST WHICH APPLIES POWER VOLTAGE
IN EXCESS OF THE ARRESTER VOLTAGE RAT
ING (STATED ON THE NAMEPLATE) SHOULD
ARRESTER VOLTAGE
BE MADE WITHOUT CONSULTING THE GENERAL
The Thyrite intermediate-class arrester is de-
ELECTRIC COMPANY.
There is no simple field
test whichwill indicate the operating characteristics
Signed to limit the surge voltages to a safe value by
discharging the surge current to ground, and to in
terrupt the small power-frequency follow current at
the first current zero. The arrester rating is a
definite limit of its ability to interrupt power-follow
current. It has no short-time overvoltage rating
and may be damaged if the power-frequency voltage
applied to the arrester exceeds its rating, even for
a few cycles after a surge sparks over the gaps. It
is important, therefore, to assure that the system
power-frequency voltage from line to ground under
any condition of switching, fault, or overvoltage,
Refer any questions relative to the condition of
the internal parts of these arresters to the nearest
never exceeds the arrester's rating.
In case of
sales office of the General Electric Company.
PROTECTIVE
EQUIPMENT
DISTRIBUTION
2-63
(SM)
or protective levels of the arrester.
SUPPLY UNITS
When ordering renewal units, reference should
be made to the model number found on the name-
plate on the bottom foot of each unit.
DEPARTMENT
generalSelectric
PITTSFIELD, MASS.
./
GEI-10951L
INSTRUCTIONS
Supersedes
GEI-I0951K
CURRENT-LIMITING FUSE UNITS
TYPES EJ-1 AND EJO-1
INTRODUCTION
A Type EJ-1 fuse unit—for indoor use— or a
Type EJO-1 fuse unit—for indoor or outdoor use-
consists of a Pyrex glass or melamine fibreglass
fuse tube having metal ferniles at each end and
containing current-responsive elements surrounded
by a quartz filler. When the fuse functions, the arc
resulting from the melting of the current-responsive
elements is cooled by the adjacent filler and ex
tinguished without any e^qiulsion of gases or material
from the tube.
The maximum current passing
through the fuse before the arc is extinguished is
limited to a value considerably lower than the max
imum short-circuit current usually available in the
quency. When rated for 60 cycles only, they may be
used on frequencies of either 50 or 60 cycles.
The "E" current rating must be equal to or
larger than the maximum load current in the circuit,
and at the same time, the current-responsive ele
ment must also be of sufficient size so as not to be
damaged Iqr magnetizing inrush current of associated
transformers.
For detailed application data, and
also for time-current and current-limiting curves,
refer to the nearest General Electric Sales Office.
circuit.
APPLICATION
Fuse unit. Types EJ-1 and EJO-1, with suffix
"E" on the current rating conform with the 1960
High Voltage Fuse Standards. They Will carry
current up to their "E" ampere rating continuously;
I
OPERATING
fuse units rated lOOE amperes and below will melt
at a current between 200% and 240% of the rating
in five minutes, and fuse units rated 125E amperes
and above will melt at a current between 220%
HINGE
nrtiNG
and 264% of their rating in ten minutes.
For a given application the recommended volt
age rating of the fuse tmit is that nearest to, but
greater than, the line-to-line circuit voltage, ut no
case should the line-to-line voltage be less than 70
per cent of the nominal voltage of the fuse unit nor
greater .than the maximum design voltage rating.
When the fuse units are rated 25/60 cycles, they
may be used on systems from 25 to 60 cycle fre
Size C
4800 Volts
Size D
2400 Volts
Fig. I
Type EJ-1 Fuse Units Assembled with
Fittings for Type EK-3C and EK-3D Fuse
Disconnecting Switches
These instfvcfiont do not purpdrt to cover all dotoilt or variafiotu in oqyipmont nor to provlda tor wary potnbia
eontinganey to ba mat in connecfion with InitoHotion, oparation or maintananea. Shoutd fiurfW inhrmatton ba dadred
or dtouldparticular problems arisa which ere not covatad suffieiantly for tha purehasar's purposes, the matter should
ba referred to dta General Baelrie Company.
DISTRIBUTION PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT DEPARTMENT
GENERAL^ELECTRIC
PITTSFIELD, MASS.
GEI-10951
Current-Limiting Fuse Units Types EJ-1 and EJO-1
TABLE 1
RATINGS
Fuse units are made in several different dia
meters of tube and ferrule assemblies. Each ferrule
diameter is designated by a "size" letter, with the
relation between size and letter being shown in
Table 1.
The tabulation also shows the voltage
Size
Ferrule
Diameter
"A
13/16"
B
1 9/16"
2750, 5500, 8250, 15,500, 25,800
38,000
ratings for which each size is manufactured.
*
Maximum Design Rating. Volts
600, 2750*
2750, 5500, 8250, 15,500
2750, 5500, 8250, 15,500, 25,800
2-3"in
Parallel
2-4" in
Parallel
May also be used on 4300 volt solidly-grounded
neutral circuits when mounted in porcelain housing
on G-E Type JE-2 or JE-32 potential transformers.
2750, 5500, 8250, 15,500, 25,800
38,000
15,000
INSTALLATION
A suitable fuse support is required to use the
fuse unit. With Type EK-3 and EKO-3 fuse discon
necting switches, fittings for the fuse unit are fur
nished to make it suitable for use as a disconnecting
target, for ease of viewing from below. The target
end of Size D, DD and some 0 fuse imlts has a con
cave appearance (see left side of Fig. 3 as distin
guished from the flat cap closing the other end^or
fuse unit, slide them on the ferrules of the fuse unit
ends in the case of Size DD) of the fuse tube, ^e
remaining C size fuses and the B size fuses have
and clamp in place in the position shown in Fig. 1.
button Indicators.
blade. To attach these fittings to a Size C or Size D
With a Size OD fuse unit, attach the hinge fitting to
the bottom ferrule of one tube and the operating eye
to the top ferrule of the other tube, as shown in
Unless special means are provided for dis
connecting the entire fuse support or switch from ail
Fig, 2.
In all cases, the hinge fitting should be
located at the end of the fuse containing the indicating
sources of power, the fuse unit should be removed
and inserted only with insulated fuse tongs.
OPERATION
When a fuse unit functions, it should be re
placed by a complete new unit. Always use a fuse
tongs for handling unless special means are pro
vided for disconnecting the fuse support from all
sources of power. If used in a fuse disconnecting
switch, the fittings should be removed from the
blown unit and transferred to a replacing unit. The
time required to replace a blown fuse unit in a dis
connecting switch may be considerably shortened if
a spare fuse unit with fittings in place is kept on
The indicating target provided at one end of the
larger sizes of fuse units, operates when the fuse
unit functions. Its operation is provided by a sep
arate mechanism within the fuse tube, and is not
due to any pressure developed by the main fuse
elements in functioning. The appearance of the tar
get for some size C and larger fuse units is shown,
before and after operation, in Fig. 3. Size B and the
remainder of the size C fuse units have an indicator
consisting of a small plunger which projects from
the end of the fuse unit after the fuse unit functions.
hand at each installation.
Q
Before Operation
Fig. 2
Size DD Fuse Unit Asseirbled with Fittings
for Type EX-3DD Fuse Disconnecting Switch
S-6e(2M)
Fig. 3
GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY,
After Operation
Indicating Targets of Size C Fuse Units
PITTSFIELD, MASS.
GEI-88760A
INSTRUCTIONS
SUPERSEDES
CAPACITOR TRIP DEVICE
SWITCHGEAR DEPARTMENT
6ENERAL0ELECTRIC
PHILADELPHIA.
PA.
GEI•88760
GEI-8b760
Capacitor Trip Device
S-U 31175
RES
Ti^iuep
STgrtHPe-p
c.cFrfe'S.
v/.-e.£
TWeeclbc i eecTiFiEK.
RscTJFtee
Ivoap
Fig, 1
TRlPP»M(i
c.\kco\T
CAP.
Eleoentexy macTasi
m
41
Pig. S
Capacitor Trip De^ce
CAPACITOR TRIP DEVICE
INTRODUCTION
The capacitor trip device is a device
designed for use in tripping the operating
mechanism of a circuit tveaker, its pur
pose being to provide sufficient electrical
energy to operate the trip coil of the mecha
nism.
energy closing mechanism with an a-c
electric
operated release coil or an a-c solenoid
operated closing mechanism. It may also be
used with circuit breakers employing other
relays.
means of closing.
breaker or other device be provided with
its individual capacitor trip device. Ex
ceptions to these recommendations are
particular combinations of circuitbreakers
and lockout relays which tests have indi
cated can be operated reliably from a
single tripping unit.
However it might be
necessary to observe certain iterating
procedures as outlined under "Gperation
and Checking".
The device is primarily for use wiOi
circuit brokers which require some form
of a-c power for their closing operation.
i.e. circuit breakers having either a stored
In addition to circuit breaker tripping,
the unit may be used to operate hand or
OPERATION AND
230
The unit Is connected directly to the
volt a-c source through the input
terminals 1 and 4, and the leads to the trip
circuit from terminals 3 and 4.
of the unit to trip the breaker and does not
indicate If the a-c source is available. A
constant visible check of the a-c line is
available by the indicating lamp on the
the top of the unit. This light is ener^ed
continuously and will glow if the voltage
across the capacitor is above the minimum
tripping voltage. This shows the readiness
NOTE:
devices
such
as lockout
It is recommended that each circuit
CHECKING
metal-clad door or panel.
The operation of the unit is completely
automatic and requires only an occasional
check to determine if it is functioning
normally. A neon light is supplied near
reset
The energy storage capacitor
usea in tnls unit is a special high grade,
low leakage, industrial type electrolytic
capacitor. One characteristic of electrolyttc capacitors is that they tend to unform
when left de-energized for extendedperiods.
Although these units have been completely
formed at the factory, they may have been
idle for a considerable period of time. It is
therefore recommended that immediately
prior to putting a unit into operation, it is
energized from the 230 volt a-c source for
a period of at least two (2) hours or more.
NOTE; During testing of the unit with
Its associated circuit breaker, do not have
the tripping circuit completed whenapplying
a-c voltege to'a discharged unit Also,
stqiervision of the trip coil in the usual
manner with the red indicating light should
be avoided.
MAINTENANCE
Voltage measurements should be made
^e unit should be energized
with a-c power for at least one hour before
any measurements are attempted.
2. The d-c output voltage should be
vacuum tube voltmeter to assure
accuracy,
measured at terminals 3 and 4,
1. The a-c input voltage can be mea
sured at terminals 1 and 4 and
should be from 190v to 250v a-c.
a
With the a-c line energized, the
output voltage should be from 260v
to 350v d-c.
RENEWAL PARTS
It is recommended that sufficient re
newal parts be carried In stock to enable
the prompt replacement of any worn, broken
or damaged parts.
SPECIFY THE QUANTITY, CATALOG
ETC., IS NOT LISTED IN THIS BULLE
NUMBER (IF LISTED), REFERENCE
NUMBER (IF LISTED), AND DESCRIP
TIN.
SUCH ITEMS SHOULD BE PUR
CHASED LOCALLY.
TION OF EACH PART ORDERED, AND
THIS BULLETIN NUMBER.
ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS
1. ALWATS SPECIFY THE COMPLETE
NAMEPLATE DATA.
STANDARD HARDWARK
SCREWS,
SUCH AS
BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS,
FOR PRICES, REFER TO THE NEAR
EST OFFICE OF THE GENERAL ELEC
TRIC COMPANY.
PART NUMBERS
(Ref. to Figures 1 and 2)
Ref. No.
9
10
11
16
23
24
Catalog No.
Description
0456A0864
P102
Capacitor
0456A0864
04S6A0864
045eA0864
0456A0864
Q456A0864
P128
P034
P106
P032
P109
Rectifier
Resistor
Thyrector
Terminal Board
Indicator Light
Ihete iiuftvelipnt do not purport to cover off details or variations in equ/pment nor to provide for ever/ possible
eontingeney to bo met incomwcffofl with installation, operation or maitHenanee. Should further information bo dedred
or diouidpartieular problems arise which are not coveredsufficiently for the pvrchocer'i purposes, the metier should
be referred to the General Beetrk Cofflpcny.
CEZ'ZSOOL
GENERAL ELECTRIC SALES OFFICES
Itwivira Ordttfatg IntttMUom
RfADV TO ASSIST YOU . . . Wh«n You Hovt Elxtrical frobltmt . . . Ntad SarllMr iRfocnallan
OKLAHOMA
lOUISIANA
SAIES OmCE CODE KEY
t
• Inrfatliiai Eqvipmtnt (Indttdjag Agnl
and Dblr&alar) Sain
t Elnbic Utility EgalgoMat Sain
i Maiinn and DtlMiM EqaipniMl Sain
.. 720 Murray SI.
*t
633 Oak Villa Blvd.
• t
Aitnandrla 71302
Baton Rouen 7031S
lokn Charm.
J Nnw Orlnoni 70112
t
1424 Ryan St.
837 Gravinr St.
Nnw Orlnant 70125
t Caatpoaonl Sain Opmtloa
4747 Eathart Blvd.
Shrnvnp^ 71101
t
AlABAMA
* 11
Birmlnghom 3520S.... .2151 Highland Ave.
Mobile 36602.
ARIZONA
—704 Government St.
* 11
Phoenix 85012
* 1
Tucaen 85711
. 3550 N. Central Ave.
...151 S. Tucaon Blvd.
ARKANSAS
*
t
North little Rock 72114.
-
—1900 E. Woahlngton
t
Pine BluH 71602
CAIIFORNIA
*
- O.
-Box 1033
P.
Frecno 93728
*t
S In An^ln 90054....
152 State St.
77 Central St.
Portland 97210
*
Redwood City 94063. ..
* t
Satramonlo 95816
2407 "J" St.
2560 Firat Ave.
* t : Son Diego 92103
* T t 5 Son Franciico 94106
Son Joie 95128
2155 So. Fln't St.
* t T 1 Denver 60201
2905.2921 Dixwell Ave.
764 Aaylum Ave.
* 11
Hortford 06105
DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA
.777-l4th St., N.W.
t Woihlngton 20005..
FLORIDA
i Cocoa Beach (Cape Conoverol Office}
t
t T
*
—
1325 N. Alionllc Ave.
Coral Oobin 33146
250 Bird Rood
Jockionville 32202
1901 Hill St.
Miami 33134.
... 4100 VFeet Flogler St.
Peniocolo 32503
...Flret Bonk BIdg.
Tampa 33609.. Henderaon Blvd. at Lola Ave.
Tampa 33609.
2106 S. Lala Ave.
Allonto 30309
Macon 31202
1860 Peachtrn Rd.. N.W.
682 Cherry St.
-IT
• t
t
Duluth 55802
.14 W. Superior St.
Fergua Folia 56537
106 E. Woahlngton St.
Mlnneopolla
" 55402
t
Gulfport 39502
t
Jockaon 39201
—
840 S. Conol SI.
...2008 N.E. Perry Ave.
Rockford 61105
4223 Eoat State St.
Springfield 63701
607
E. Adoma St.
Evonavllle 47714.
Fort Wayne 46807
Fort Wayne 46806
Indianapolla 46207
South Bend 46601
2709 Woahlngton Ave.
1635 Broadway
3606 S. Colhoun St.
3750 N. Meridian St.
430 N. Michigan St.
Cedar Roplda 52401
210 Second St., S.E.
Davenport 52805
1039 State St., Bettendorf, Iowa
Dea Molnea 50310
3839 Merle Hoy Rd.
Sioux City 51101
520 Pierce St.
Wichita 67211... ... 820 E. Indianapolla Ave.
Lexington 40503
Loulavlllo 40218
465 E. High St.
2300 Meadow Dr.
• t
P.O. Box 33
Joplin 64802
Konaoa City 64105
• 11
212V4 W. Fifth St.
106 W. Fourteenth St.
....1015 Lecuat St.
•
t
St. Louia 63101
MONTANA
*t
*t
Blllinga 59101
Suite 59701
303 N. Broadway
103 N. Wyoming St.
* t
Omoho 68102
409 S. Seventeenth St.
NEVADA
t
Loa Vegoa 89106_
1711 S. 8th St.
NEW HAMPSHIRE
t
Moncheater 03104
1662 Elm St.
NEW JERSEY
*t T
Eoat Orange 07017
26 Woahlngton St.
*t
{ Aibony 12203
. t
8 Colvin Ave.
Binghomlon 13902
* 11
• 1 J
*11
19 Chenongo St.
Buffalo 14202
— 625 Delaware Ave.
I New Yark 101^
1
570 Lexington Ave.
Rocheater 14604.
Syracuae 13206..
Urico 13501
89 Eoat Ave.
3532 Jamea St.
1001 Brood St.
Woverly 14892
P.O.
Box 308
NORTH CAROLINA
*1 T
Charlotte 28202
129 W. Trade St.
*
Greenaboro 27405
801 Summit Ave.
*1
Raleigh 27602
16 W. Marb'n St.
Johnitown 15902
* 11 ( Philadelphia 19102
3 Penn Center Plou
* 11 PIttaburgh 15233 The Oliver Bldg.,Mellea Sq.
I PIttaburgh 15338
*
1
t
*t
Canton 44701.....
* 11
Cincinnati 45206
*t
*t
Columbua 43215
t
Dayton 45402
* J
• t i Doyton 45402
Monafleld 44906.
Toledo 43606
*tl
Columbia 39201
1310 Lady St.
Greenville 39603.. ...108 W. Waahlngton St.
TENNESSEE
*111 Chattanooga 37402...
*
Klngtport 37662
* 1
Knoxville 37916.
*1
MemphSa 38104..
*
Murfreeaboro
Noahville 37203
832 Georgia Ave.
322 Commerce St.
1301 Hannah Ave., N.W.
1420 Union Ave.
P.O. Box 1040
1717 W. End BIdg.
353 Main SI., Eoat
t Oak Ridge
TEXAS
1
Abilene 79601
442 Cedar St.
* 1
Amorlllo 79101
* 1
Beaumont 77701.
1
* 11
403 Amarlllo Blvd.
1385 Colder Ave.
Corput Chrlari 78401
205 N. Chaparral
Dallaa 75207
8101 Stemmona Freeway
*1
El Paao 79901.
1
Fort Worth 76102
* 11 i Houaton 77027.
Lubbock 79408
Midland
*1
San Antonio 78304
215 N. Stanton St.
408 W. Seventh St.
...4219 Richmond Ave.
500 B. 50th St.
122 North N St.
...419 S. Main Ave.
UTAH
*1
! Salt Loke City 84110 ..
. 200 S. Main St.
VERMONT
1
Rullond
..38V2 Center St.
VIRGINIA
*
*1
*1
i Newport Newa 23601
P.O. Box 1038, 311 Moln St.
Richmond 23230
5001 W. Brood St.
Roanoke 24005,
920 S. Jefferaon St.
WASHINGTON
1
Poaco 99301
* 1 ! Seoltle 98104
*
824 W. Lewla St.
710 Second Ave.
S. 162 Poal St.
E. 1805 Trent St.
—
Spokono 99220 ....
Sprtano 99220
1
WISCONSIN
2621 Victory Pkwy.
-4966 Woodland Ave.
395 E. Brood St.
...937 Burrell Ave.
11 W. Monument Ave.
118 W. Firat St.
Columbua 43212
56 N. Horrisan St.
SOUTH CAROLINA
...515 Third St., N.W.
418 Rotter Ave.
' t J t Cleveland 44104 .
.733 Waahlngton M.
-
-.2858 W. Morket St.
Biamordi 58501
OHIO
Akron 44313
York 17403
WEST VIRGINIA
*
Charleston 25328... .306 MocCorkle Ave., S.E.
* 1
Fairmont 26555
310 Jacoba BIdg.
*
Wheeling
40 Fourteenth St.
NORTH DAKOTA
• 1
732 North 16th St.
1001 State St.
841 Oak St.
Erie 16501
Albuquerque 87108 120 Madeira Drive, N.E.
NEW YORK
107 E. Main Si.
2929 N.W. 29th Ave.
Allentown 18102....
' T
12 S. Sixth St.
210 S. Lomar St.
..1170 Pearl St.
-
PENNSYLVANIA
MISSISSIPPI
*t
KENTUCKY
• t
• t T
t
t
11
1524 Idaho St.
KANSAS
• t
MINNESOTA
*t
INDIANA
t
M
•IT
• T
IOWA
•t
MT
— 927 S. Ovrdick St.
Lenaing 48901 .. 501 Bank of Lanaing BIdg.
Soglnow 48607. Second National Bank BIdg.
5002 Poulaen St.
ILLINOIS
• 11 9 Chicago 60680
*t
Peorio 61603
t
Kolamatoo
t
NEW MEXICO
* t
Savonnoh 31405
IDAHO
•1
Boiae 83706.
*
210 W. Franklin St.
NEBRASKA
OEOROIA
* 11
*
Jockaon 49201
MISSOURI
Homden 06518
* t
1
.. 700 Antoinette St.
. 316W W. Court St.
Grand Replda 49508 2821 Modiaon Ave., S.E,
I
201 Univeriity Blvd.
CONNECTICUT
* t
288 Crave St.
. 235 Montgomery St.
' COLORADO
. 31 St. Jomet Ave.
Worceater 01605...
MICWOAN
Detroit 48202
tl
Flint 48503
212 N. VIgnet St.
409 Thirteenth St.
55 Velerana Blvd.
Eoat Franklin St.
120 Maple St.
t
OREGON
Eugene 97401
Atedford 97501
....1 North Chorin
.49
Columbia BMg.; 2651 E. 21tt St.
* 11
Springfield 01103
.3325 Wllahlre Blvd.
Ooklond 94612
• t
11
BalHmore 21201. t
Hogeratown
MASSACHUSETTS
tTI Beaton 02117
2000 Cloaaen Blvd.
74114
• t
*t
MARYUND
. ..1532 N. Weal Ave.
S i loc Angelet 90005
Augualo
bongor 04402
Tulao
400 Travli St.
MAINE
t
Oklohomo City 73106:
—
-564 Pork Ave., Weat
3125 Deugloa Rd.
Youngatown 44507...-.372 E. Indlonola Ave.
*t
t
S Appleten 54910.., — 510 W. College Ave.
Modiaon 53703
340 W. WoahlntHon Ave.
* 11
Milwaukee 53233..
CANADA;
Conodlon
940 W. St. Paul Ave.
General
Etectrlc Coinpony,
Ltd., Toronto
HAWAII;
American Faclore, Ltd., P.O. Box 3330,
Honolulu 96801
GENERAL ELECTRIC SERVICE SHOPS
performonce of your equipment. For full InformoHon about tbeae eervicee,
WHEN YOU NEED SBIVCE . . . Theao G>E aervlce ahopa will repair, recondl-
Hen, and rebuild your electric apparatue. The focilitiee ore available dor ond
night, eeven daye a week, for work In the ahepe or on your premlaea. loteat
conlacl your neoreat eervice abop or aolea oHIce.
factory methoda and genuine G-E renewal perta are uaed to maintain peak
KANSAS
ALABANUL
Birmingham 35211, P.O. Box 3687..
7,-ieth St., S.W.
ARIZONA
, . ,
.4911 Weat Colter St.
CAUFORNIA
loa Angelea 90001
6900 Stanford Ave.
*(Loa Angelea) Ontorlo
Ontario International Airport
Oakland 94608
Sacramento 95814
3400 Wood St.
—.99 North 17th St.
Son Fronclaco 94l03
1098 Horrlaon St.
COLORADO
Denver 80205
CONNECTICUT
3353 Larimer St.
Youngatown 44507
FLORIDA
Jockaonviiie
370 Atwoter St.
32203- —
Louiavilie 40209
LOUISIANA
New Orleana 70117
—
P.O. Box 2932, 2020 W. Beaver St.
Miami) Hioleah 33010
1062 E. 2Blh St.
Tampa 33601
P.O. Bax 1245
GEORGM
3900 Crittenden Drive
Porllond 97210.
1115 De Armaa St.
kitlmere 21230
(Beaten) Medford 02155..
-3960 Myatic Valley Parkway
TEXAS
. 2025~49th Ave., N.
MISSOURI
Konaoa City 64120 .
Albany 12205
BuHolo 14211.
-.3525 Gordner Ave.
-.1115 Eoat Rood
—
Midlond 79704
-10^ Central Ave.
.318 Urban St.
*(New York) Linden, N. J...
VIRGINIA
Richmond 23224
Roanoke 24007..
Chicago 60632
4360 W. 47lh St.
INDIANA
Ft. Wayne 46803
Indlaawpolia 46222
-
—6001
Tanmlle Ave.
—1731 Edaall Ave.
1740 W. Vermont SI.
IOWA
(Davenport) Bettendorf 52722.
1025 Stale St.
1 River "
NORTH CAROUNA
Charlotte 28308
OHIO
anclniwH 45202
*anclnnati 45232
Cleveland 44125
Seattle 98134
*Seattle 98108.
Sp^ne 99^-.
•
2328 Thrift Road
—1403 Ingrara Ave.
WASHINGTON
WECT VIRGINIA
Charbaton 25328WISCONSIN
444 W. Third St.
. 260 W. Mitdieil Ave.
4477 Boat 49lh St.
6ENESAL ELECTRIC COMPANY, PHILADELPHIA, PA
lt-64
704 S. Jehnaton St.
P.O. Box 1327, 115 Albermarle Ave., S.E.
Schnnectady (Inalrutnentallon Service) 12305
ILLINOIS
Corpua ChriaH 78401
115 Waco St.
DoMaa 75235
3202 Manor Way
Houaton 77030—5534 Harvey Wilaen Drive
Salt lake City 84104... -.301 S. 7th Weat Si.
(Hew Yo^) North Bergen, 1^ J. 07047
—.5035 Peachtree Induatrial Blvd.
841 Oak St.
UTAH
1611 W. Eliubeth Ave.
(Atlanto) Chamfalee 30005
668 E. Highland St.
Weat MIfflin, Pa. 15122
Yorit 17403
54 N. Harrlion St.
MICHIGAN
St. Uuia 63110
NEW YORK
Allentown 18103
Johnalown 15902
Philadelphia 19124
1040 E. Erie Ave.
(PittaburgliJ Komcttend 15120
4910 Buttermilk Itollaw Rd., RD #1,
MASSACHUSEnS
.5950 Third St.
2727 N.W. 29th Ave.
PENNSYLVANIA
—.920 E. Fort Ave.
Detroit 48302
MINNESOTA
.405 Deorborn Ave.
i n E. Indlonola Ave.
OREGON
MULRYLAND
Minneopolla 55430...
(Southinglon) Plontaville 06479
43223-
_ ..P.O. Box 6198, 2128 Eakin Rd.
Toledo 43605
KENTUCKY
(Ptioenix) Glendale 85301-
-
Calumbua
*{Strather) Arkanaoa City
G.E. Co., P.O. Box 797
3422 Firat Ave., S.
-220 Dawaon St.
-E. 4323 Miuion St.
.. 306 MacCorkle Ave.
Appleten 54910......Mldwmr Induatrial.Area
P.O. Box 83 County Trunk P
Milwaukee 53233
940 W. St. Paul Ave.
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Create Date : 2015:06:02 15:57:40-05:00 Creator : PFU ScanSnap Organizer 5.2.10 #iX500 Modify Date : 2015:06:03 09:22:02-05:00 Title : Has XFA : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.6-c015 81.157285, 2014/12/12-00:43:15 Metadata Date : 2015:06:03 09:22:02-05:00 Creator Tool : PFU ScanSnap Organizer 5.2.10 #iX500 Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:c1037356-614b-4c90-a762-4b16234ab946 Instance ID : uuid:5662a909-030b-444a-b95d-80a3eab55184 Producer : Adobe PDF Scan Library 3.2 Page Count : 271EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools